Exploring IBM Eserver Xseries and PCs

Exploring IBM 11 xSeries and PCs E L E V E N T H E D I T I O N “This book provides a valuable and insightful guide to ...

Author: Jim Hoskins | Bill Wilson

52 downloads 2317 Views 4MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Exploring IBM 11 xSeries and PCs

E L E V E N T H E D I T I O N

“This book provides a valuable and insightful guide to selecting IBM’s PC products.”

The Instant Insider’s Guide to IBM’s Intel-based Servers and Workstations

—Anne Gardner, Vice President IBM Commercial Desktop Systems

Jim Hoskins and Bill Wilson

Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs Eleventh Edition

Other Titles of Interest From Maximum Press Exploring IBM Technology, Products, & Services, Third Edition: edited by Hoskins, 1-885068-44-1 Building Intranets With Lotus Notes and Domino 5.0: Krantz, 1-885068-41-7 Exploring IBM RS/6000 Computers, Tenth Edition: Hoskins, Davies, 1-885068-42-5 Exploring IBM ~ iSeries and AS/400e Computers, Tenth Edition: Hoskins, Dimmick, 1-885068-43-3 Exploring IBM S/390 Computers, Sixth Edition: Hoskins, Coleman, 1-885068-28-X Marketing on the Internet, Fifth Edition: Zimmerman, 1-885068-49-2 Business-to-Business Internet Marketing, Third Edition: Silverstein, 1-885068-50-6 Marketing With E-Mail, Second Edition: Kinnard, 1-885068-51-4 101 Ways to Promote Your Web Site, Second Edition: Sweeney, 1-885068-45-X Internet Marketing for Less Than $500/Year: Yudkin, 1-885068-52-2 Internet Marketing for Your Tourism Business: Sweeney, 1-885068-47-6 Internet Marketing for Information Technology Companies: Silverstein, 1-885068-46-8 101 Internet Businesses You Can Start From Home: Sweeney, 1-885068-59-X For more information, visit our Web site at www.maxpress.com or e-mail us at [email protected]

Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs Eleventh Edition

Jim Hoskins Bill Wilson

MAXIMUM PRESS 605 Silverthorn Road Gulf Breeze, FL 32561 (850) 934-0819 www.maxpress.com

Publisher: Jim Hoskins Manager of Finance/Administration: Donna Tryon Production Manager: ReNae Grant Cover Designer: Lauren Smith Designs Compositor: PageCrafters Inc. Copyeditor: Andrew Potter Proofreader: Kim Stefansson Indexer: Susan Olason

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subject matter covered. It is sold with the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering professional services. If legal, accounting, medical, psychological, or any other expert assistance is required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought. ADAPTED FROM A DECLARATION OF PRINCIPLES OF A JOINT COMMITTEE OF THE AMERICAN BAR ASSOCIATION AND PUBLISHERS. Copyright 2001 by Maximum Press. All rights reserved. Published simultaneously in Canada. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act without the permission of the copyright owner is unlawful. Requests for permission or further information should be addressed to the Permissions Department, Maximum Press. Recognizing the importance of preserving what has been written, it is a policy of Maximum Press to have books of enduring value published in the United States printed on acid-free paper, and we exert our best efforts to that end.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Hoskins, Jim. Exploring IBM eserver Xseries and PCs: the instant insider’s guide to PC systems, software, and business strategies / Jim Hoskins and Bill Wilson.-- 11th ed. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 1-885068-76-x 1. IBM microcomputers. I. Wilson, Bill, 1951- II. Title. QA76.8.I1015 H668 2000 004.165--dc21 00-010858

Acknowledgements Many people took time from their busy schedules to aid us during the development of this book. Thanks to Bob Chelemer, Paul Eldridge, Rodger Dodson, Karen Galey, Piper Landrum, Bob Lenard, Dan Larson, Richard Menard, Mark Thomas, Sean Whalen, Tim Wilson, and Ed Thum. Thanks again to all for making this book possible.

Disclaimer The purchase of computer software or hardware is an important and costly business decision. While the author and publisher of this book have made reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy and timeliness of the information contained herein, the author and publisher assume no liability with respect to loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused by reliance on any information contained herein and disclaim any and all warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or reliability of said information. This book is not intended to replace the manufacturer’s product documentation or personnel in determining the specifications and capabilities of the products mentioned in this book. The manufacturer’s product documentation should always be consulted, as the specifications and capabilities of computer hardware and software products are subject to frequent modification. The reader is solely responsible for the choice of computer hardware and software. All configurations and applications of computer hardware and software should be reviewed with the manufacturer’s representatives prior to choosing or using any computer hardware and software.

Trademarks The words contained in this text which are believed to be trademarked, service marked, or otherwise to hold proprietary rights have been designated as such by use of initial capitalization. No attempt has been made to designate as trademarked or service marked any personal computer words or terms in which proprietary rights might exist. Inclusion, ex-

clusion, or definition of a word or term is not intended to affect, or to express judgment upon, the validity of legal status of any proprietary right which may be claimed for a specific word or term. Photographs throughout the book, and the charts in Appendices A–G are reproduced courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation. Unauthorized use not permitted.

Chapter Title

vii

Foreword

IBM’s new lineup of products, from its Personal Computer Divisions, continues to be recognized as the best in the industry. During 2000, we refreshed our entire line of IBM ThinkPad notebooks, IntelliStation workstations and Netfinity servers. We consolidated our desktop products into the new exciting NetVista desktop family, and began the transition of our Netfinity servers to the IBM ~ xSeries. We announced new IBM Options and Visual products to provide the strongest product line ever and, at the same time, we have delivered on our strategy to provide customer solutions and integrated offerings to the marketplace faster than ever before. Increasingly, we are trying to reach more customers where they choose to do business. Not only has ibm.com grown as a direct channel, but our strategy has evolved into one of creating e-business relationships to meet our customers’ needs both now and in the future. This new edition of Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs, 11th Edition, provides a comprehensive view of IBM’s portfolio of products. They deliver on IBM’s commitment to provide innovative, affordable e-business solutions, incorporating industry-leading technology along with award winning manageability features—for customers of all sizes.

Carla J. Davison VP, Marketing & Brand Management, IBM Personal Computer Division

vii

viii

Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs

Table of Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................... xiv What This Book Is ........................................................................ xiv What This Book Is Not ................................................................. xiv How to Use This Book .................................................................. xv Accessing the “Members Only” Web Site ..................................... xvi A Glance Backward at the Family Tree ........................................ xvii

Chapter 1: IBM Personal Computers

1

Meet IBM’s Desktop PC Families .................................................... 1 The Aptiva Family ........................................................................... 6 Aptiva E Series Specifics .......................................................... 7 Aptiva S Series Specifics ......................................................... 11 IBM NetVista and the IBM PC Families ........................................ 12 IBM PC 300 Series ................................................................ 18 IBM PC 300GL Series ........................................................... 19 IBM PC 300PL Series ............................................................ 20 The IBM NetVista Family .............................................................. 23 The IBM NetVista X Series (All-in-One) ............................... 24 The IBM NetVista S Series (Legacy-free) ............................... 26 The IBM NetVista Thin Client Series (Zero Footprint) ......... 28 The ThinkPad Family .................................................................... 29 ThinkPad A Series Specifics ................................................... 33 ThinkPad T Series Specifics ................................................... 35 ThinkPad i Series Specifics ..................................................... 38 ThinkPad 570E and 240X Series Specifics ............................ 41 WorkPad c3 Specifics ............................................................. 43 The IBM IntelliStation Family ....................................................... 45 A Closer Look ............................................................................... 48 Microprocessors and Memory ............................................... 49 Microprocessor Basics ................................................... 49 viii

Table of Contents

ix

Multiprocessing ............................................................. 50 RISC vs. CISC ................................................................ 51 Intel Microprocessors .................................................... 53 Mobile Pentium Processors ............................................ 56 Intel Chip Sets ................................................................ 57 More on SMP ................................................................ 58 Advanced System Management Processor ...................... 60 Memory ......................................................................... 61 Disk Storage .......................................................................... 64 Removable Disk Storage ................................................ 64 Fixed Disks .................................................................... 68 ISA/EISA/PCI/PCMCIA/AGP Expansion Slots ..................... 72 Graphics ................................................................................ 75 Flat Panel Monitor Technology ...................................... 81 Emerging Graphics/Video Memory ................................ 83 Ports ...................................................................................... 85 Keyboards .............................................................................. 88

Chapter 2: IBMs xSeries and Netfinity

90

Meet IBM’s xSeries and Netfinity .................................................. 90 Netfinity Mission-Critical Servers .......................................... 92 Netfinity Price/Performance Servers ...................................... 93 Netfinity Value Servers .......................................................... 93 Netfinity Rack-Optimized Servers ......................................... 94 IBM’s Netfinity Systems Management Strategy ............................. 95 IBM’s Netfinity Systems Management Hardware .................. 96 IBM’s Netfinity Installation and Systems Management Software ............................................................................. 98 IBM Netfinity X-Architecture ...................................................... 102 Core Logic—IBM’s Summit Technology .............................. 103 Enterprise Storage Solutions ................................................ 106 Interoperability ............................................................ 107 Manageability .............................................................. 107 Protection .................................................................... 108 RAID Extensions ......................................................... 108 FlashCopy .................................................................... 108 RAID 1–Enhanced (1E) ............................................... 108 RAID 5–Enhanced (5E) ............................................... 109

x


Storage Area Networks (SANs).................................... 109 Netfinity Web Server Accelerator ................................. 111 Availability and Reliability ........................................... 111 Software Rejuvenation ............................................. 111 Active Diagnostics ................................................... 112 IBM Netfinity Support ................................................. 112 Netfinity 8500R Specifics ............................................................ 114 Netfinity 7600 Specifics ............................................................... 115 Netfinity 5600 Specifics ............................................................... 118 Netfinity 7100 Specifics ............................................................... 119 Netfinity 6000R Specifics ............................................................ 123 Netfinity 5100 Specifics ............................................................... 125 Netfinity 5000 Specifics ............................................................... 127 Netfinity 4500R Specifics ............................................................ 129 Netfinity 4000R Specifics ............................................................ 130 Netfinity 3500 Specifics ............................................................... 132 Netfinity 3000 Specifics ............................................................... 134 xSeries 300 Specifics .................................................................... 136 xSeries 200 Specifics .................................................................... 138 xSeries 100 Specifics .................................................................... 140

Chapter 3: Personal Computer Options and Peripherals

143

Displays and Display Adapters .................................................... 144 E Series Color Monitors ...................................................... 145 G Series Monitors ................................................................ 147 P Series Color Monitors ....................................................... 149 Flat Panel Color Monitors ................................................... 150 Printers ........................................................................................ 152 IBM Network Printer 12 ..................................................... 154 IBM InfoPrint 21 ................................................................. 155 IBM InfoPrint 40 ................................................................. 156 IBM InfoPrint Color 8 Printer ............................................. 157 Memory Expansion Options ........................................................ 159 Fixed Disk Drives/SCSI Adapters ................................................. 159 Tape Drives .................................................................................. 160 Optical Disk Drives ..................................................................... 163 CD-ROM Drives ................................................................. 164 IDE CD-ROM Drives .................................................. 164 Communications Options ............................................................ 165

Table of Contents

xi

Async/Synchronous/Multiprotocol Adapters ........................ 166 Synchronous/Multiprotocol Adapters .................................. 167 Modems ............................................................................... 168 Ethernet Adapters ................................................................ 170 Token-Ring Network Adapters ............................................ 170 Emulation Adapters ............................................................. 173 Multimedia Options .................................................................... 173 UltraPort Camera ................................................................ 174 IBM PCI Audio Adapter...................................................... 175 PCMCIA 16-Bit Audio Adapter .......................................... 176 Processor Upgrade Options ................................................. 176 ThinkPad Options ....................................................................... 176 Keyboards ............................................................................ 176 ScrollPoint Mouse ................................................................ 178 IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000 ............................................. 180 Netfinity Options ........................................................................ 182 Netfinity Enterprise Rack and Expansion Cabinet .............. 182 Netfinity APC Smart-UPS 5000 .......................................... 184

Chapter 4: Using Your Personal Computer

185

Getting Your Feet Wet with a Personal Computer ....................... 185 Greetings from POST .......................................................... 186 What If POST Finds an Error? ............................................ 189 Using the Configuration/Setup Utility .................................. 194 Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility .............................. 194 Strolling Through the Main Menu ....................................... 195 Menu Option: System Summary .................................. 195 Menu Option: Product Data ........................................ 196 Menu Option: Devices and I/O Ports ........................... 196 Menu Option: Date and Time ...................................... 196 Menu Option: System Security ..................................... 196 Menu Option: Start Options ........................................ 197 Menu Option: Power Management .............................. 197 The Real Software—A Model ...................................................... 198 Application Programs .......................................................... 199 Operating Systems ............................................................... 200 BIOS .................................................................................... 201 How the Layers Work Together ........................................... 203 Setting Up Your Workspace ......................................................... 206

xii


Getting Comfortable ............................................................ 206 Lighting ............................................................................... 206 Software Compatibility—Will PC Programs Work? .................... 207 What Is Meant by “PC Compatibility”? .............................. 207 What Affects “Compatibility”? ........................................... 208 Which Programs Are or Are Not Compatible? .................... 211

Chapter 5: Application Programs

212

Application Program Alternatives ................................................ 212 Prewritten Application Programs ........................................ 213 Word Processing .......................................................... 214 Spreadsheets ................................................................. 215 Database Management ................................................ 215 Business Graphics and Multimedia .............................. 217 Communications .......................................................... 218 Variations on the Big Five ............................................ 219 Custom Application Programs ............................................. 221 Operating System Dependencies .................................................. 222

Chapter 6: Operating Systems

225

Introduction to Operating System Concepts ................................ 225 What Is Multi-Application? ................................................. 226 How Is Multi-Application Useful? ....................................... 227 What Is Multiuser? .............................................................. 230 How Is Multiuser Useful? .................................................... 230 What Is Real Mode? ............................................................ 232 What Is Protected Mode? .................................................... 233 What Is Virtual 8086 Mode? ............................................... 233 The Disk Operating System (DOS) .............................................. 234 Advanced Operating Systems....................................................... 241 DOS Extended with Windows............................................. 243 Windows 95 ......................................................................... 245 Windows 98 ......................................................................... 247 Windows 2000 ..................................................................... 248 OS/2 Warp Operating Systems ............................................ 249 Windows NT Workstation ................................................... 250

Table of Contents

xiii

Windows NT Server ............................................................ 254 JavaOS for Business............................................................. 254 Linux ................................................................................... 255 Which Operating System Is for You? ........................................... 256

Chapter 7: Personal Computer Communications and Networks

258

Computer Communications in Business—An Introduction .................................................. 258 Terminal Emulation ..................................................................... 259 Asynchronous Terminal Emulation ..................................... 261 5250 Workstation Emulation .............................................. 265 3270 Emulation ................................................................... 267 Local Area Networks and IBM Personal Computers ................... 267 Basic LAN Functions ........................................................... 268 Data Sharing ................................................................ 268 Program Sharing .......................................................... 270 Equipment Sharing ....................................................... 271 Electronic Messaging ................................................... 271 Ethernet LAN ...................................................................... 272 Token-Ring Networks ......................................................... 274 Token-Ring vs. Ethernet Networks ...................................... 278 FDDI Networks .................................................................. 279 Gateways ..................................................................................... 282 Switched Ethernet and Token Ring .............................................. 285 The ATM Solution ....................................................................... 287 Storage Area Networks ................................................................ 291 Appendix A: ............................................................................... 295 Appendix B: ................................................................................. 331 Appendix C: ................................................................................ 332 Appendix D: ................................................................................ 338 Appendix E: ................................................................................. 343 Appendix F: ................................................................................. 362 Appendix G: ................................................................................ 375 Appendix H: ................................................................................ 381

xiv


Introduction

What This Book Is This book is dedicated to IBM’s personal computer (PC) families, which include the NetVista, Netfinity and ~ xSeries, Aptiva, IBM PC, IntelliStation, and IBM ThinkPad computer families. First, it introduces IBM’s personal computer branding strategy along with a discussion of the importance of network computing and the Internet. Secondly, an overview of each model in a language understandable to the business user is provided. New architecture and hardware technologies are discussed in a fashion that helps you understand the most important computer features. Thirdly, the book guides you through a brief “hands-on” session. The different kinds of software necessary to do real work are also described, to help you with software buying decisions. Finally, this book discusses some ways to apply personal computers in a networked environment. It is impossible to select and use the personal computer products properly unless you understand how you can use these components to fill your business needs. Here you will find specific personal computer hardware and software for typical environments from a simple local area network to complex internet and storage area networks.

What This Book Is Not Many computer books try to be all things to all people. They start by explaining checkbook balancing and finish by covering the Space Shuttle’s redundant flight computer complex. This book is not a general overview of computers. It is specific to IBM’s personal computer families (a subject more than broad enough for a single book). It focuses on U.S. versions of the products, most of which have counterparts available outside the United States. This book is not a technical

xiv

Introduction

xv

reference manual (IBM will sell you that), nor is it intended to teach computer programming. It provides instead a good description of today’s personal computers and explains how to use them in the business environment. Finally, this book will not treat you like an engineer. Business people typically are short on time and patience as far as technical matters are concerned. Although some technical discussions are necessary, we have tried to keep these discussions as light and concise as possible while still conveying necessary and useful information.

How to Use This Book Chapter 1 first introduces the line of desktop and notebook computers. This includes IBM’s new line of NetVista, IBM PC, IntelliStation, and ThinkPad family of computers with an overview of specific models. The latter part of the chapter, “A Closer Look,” examines the elements (microprocessor, fixed disk drives, etc.) used to build personal computers. Chapter 2 takes you through each of IBM’s Netfinity and IBM ~ xSeries model groups and includes critical product-positioning discussions that help you choose the right server for your business. Chapter 3 surveys the many hardware options available for personal computers, including displays, printers, disk expansion, and communications. It is provided primarily as a reference to help you select the proper options for your personal computer. Chapter 4 guides you through a “hands-on” session with a personal computer system. The latter part of the chapter, “The Real Software—A Model,” describes the role of application programs, operating systems, and the BIOS—the three basic types of programs necessary to do productive work with personal computers. Chapter 5 continues the discussion on application programs, describing the primary types of application programs. It also addresses the question of prewritten versus custom application programs. Chapter 6 continues the discussion on operating systems. First, basic operating system products designed for personal computers are described (including DOS, Windows, and Linux) to help you determine which one best fits your needs.

xvi


Chapter 7 shows how specific options and software products are used to participate in the computer communications and networked environments commonly found in businesses. The glossary is included to provide you with an additional understanding of the major PC terminology. The “Members Only” Web site is an exclusive Web site only available to our readers that provides updated and expanded information about IBM’s fast moving personal computer strategies, technologies, and products. To help you better understand the topics covered in this book, key terms and phrases are defined and bold. These key terms are also listed in the index at the back of this book. If while reading you forget the definition of a key term or phrase, the index will quickly provide the page(s) on which the term was originally discussed.

Accessing the “Members Only” Web Site The personal computer world changes most every day. That’s why there is a companion Web site associated with this book. On this site you will find updates to this book and other PC-related resources of interest to anyone interested in personal computers, IBM, or related technology and products. To gain access to the companion Web site, go to the Maximum Press site located at www.maxpress.com and follow the links to the companion Web site for this book. When you try to enter the site, you will be asked for a user ID and password. Type in the following: •

For the user ID, enter: pc11e

•

For the password, enter: lucky

You will then be granted full access to the companion Web site. Visit the site often and enjoy the updates and resources with our complements—and thanks again for buying the book. We ask that you not share the user ID and password for this site with anyone else.

Introduction

xvii

A Glance Backward at the Family Tree IBM entered the small computer business on August 12, 1981, when an informal leg of IBM (called an Independent Business Unit) in Boca Raton, Florida, announced the IBM personal computer (IBM PC). The IBM PC was an experiment conducted by 12 developers under the leadership of Philip (Don) Estridge. The small computer system was designed in 12 months from “off-the-shelf” components. Designed primarily for small to medium-size businesses, the IBM PC had an 8088 microprocessor, 16K of standard memory, 160K diskette drives, a text-only monochrome display, and a cassette port. How undemanding we were back in 1981! Today, just a few short years later, a personal computer with such characteristics could hardly satisfy a preschooler playing video games, let alone any serious business needs. However, at that time it fit the needs of the users. Not even the 12 developers imagined that the seed they planted with the IBM PC would grow to become a cornerstone in businesses of all types. As time went on, IBM developed a family of personal computers and the Independent Business Unit became a full division, the Entry Systems Division (ESD). IBM published all of the PC’s technical information, inviting third-party manufacturers to develop and market their own hardware and software for the PC—which they did. This practice of publishing technical details about a product is known as adopting an “open architecture policy.” As more and more third-party hardware and software became available for the PC family of computers, their popularity grew, prompting even more third-party development activity. This self-fueling cycle was beneficial to IBM, third-party developers, and the end users. The success of the open architecture policy has prompted IBM to continue publishing technical details about all subsequent personal computer systems. The personal computer family included a wide range of products in terms of both function and price. Let’s quickly look at the two core PC family members: the Personal Computer XT, shown in Figure I.1, and the Personal Computer AT, shown in Figure I.2. The Personal Computer XT was based on the 8088 microprocessor used in the original PC. It was the first PC family member to support a fixed disk. The Personal Computer AT introduced the 80286

xviii Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs

Figure I.1. IBM personal computer XT.

Figure I.2. IBM personal computer AT.

Introduction

xix

microprocessor to the PC family. It offered enhancements in the areas of performance, disk storage, and memory size. Many of the other PC family members, such as the IBM 3270 PC, the IBM PC/370, and the IBM Portable PC, were developed directly from these core PC family members. All of these PC family members retained a high degree of software compatibility with preceding products. Then, on April 2, 1987, IBM announced a new generation of personal computers called Personal System/2 computers. The first four models of the IBM Personal System/2 (PS/2) family (Models 30, 50, 60, and 80) were announced on that day. Over the next few years, the PS/2 family grew to include many different models and configurations. The current PS/2 family is part of IBM’s enhanced desktop line and employs the best of IBM’s technology and design. It is intended for use by small, medium, and larger business. Not long after the PS/2 announcement, the Personal System/1 (PS/1) family of computers was introduced and targeted at individuals and small business users, being sold primarily through retail outlets. Then, in September 1992, IBM turned its Entry Systems Division into the IBM PC Company. This reorganization was designed to give the personal computer part of IBM more autonomy and flexibility. On the heels of this reorganization (October 1992) came the introduction of the ValuePoint and ThinkPad families of personal computers. The ValuePoint family—also intended for small, medium, and large business users—has been IBM’s low-cost, industry-standard line of personal computers. The ThinkPad family consists of battery-powered notebook and subnotebook computers for those needing to compute outside the office. By far the most sweeping change in the use of PCs in the last few years has been the rapid movement to get connected to the public network of networks called the Internet (and private networks based on the same technology called intranets). Whether we connect from home by modem or through a local area network at our business, the Internet is truly changing the way we communicate, share information, and do business. This book will introduce you to IBM’s PC solutions for the Internet, from connecting to the World Wide Web at home to building an Internet server for your business. As a result, the IBM Netfinity Server systems have taken on a unique functional and brand identity as well. Then in the fall of 1994, IBM announced a new branding strategy designed to help the customer understand and differentiate be-

xx Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs tween models, making it easier to shop for, buy, and own personal computers. The most obvious element of this new branding strategy was the naming scheme. The new brands were called Aptiva, IBM PC, IBM NetVista, IBM Netfinity Server, IBM IntelliStation, and IBM ThinkPad. Aptiva is the name for IBM’s consumer brand. The Aptiva line is intended for individuals, small businesses, and home users. The IBM PC name was a return to the original name used by IBM back in 1981. It represented a simplification of the various commercial desktop and server families that have been introduced over the years and the introduction of a product numbering scheme that more clearly indicates the features and functions contained in a particular system. The very successful ThinkPad name remained for the battery-powered notebook and subnotebook systems. IBM continued to expand and enhance these brand areas as they gradually phased out the older PS/1, ValuePoint, and PS/2 families. In 1996, IBM formed its Consumer Products Division, a separate unit from IBM’s PC Company that focused on the consumer marketplace and the Aptiva brand through retail stores. The rest of IBM’s personal computer brands—the IBM PC, IBM PC Server/Netfinity, and IBM IntelliStation (Professional Workstation)—are all considered commercial products. The IBM ThinkPad brand is mainly targeted for the commercial environment but is also popular in the consumer/retail market. In 1998 IBM merged its PC Company and Consumer Products Division into one organization called the IBM Personal Systems Group. IBM further distinguished the PC Server product line by branding all of its follow-on PC Servers with the Netfinity name. More recently, IBM has made it easy to buy an Aptiva as well as its other PC computers directly from IBM using IBM’s Internet Web site or calling IBM directly. In May of 2000 IBM introduced its new NetVista family of desktop computers annotating their new sleek designs and Net readiness. We expect IBM to expand, as time goes on, and incorporate most of today’s IBM PC family under this new brand name. In the fall of 2000, IBM introduced the new line of IBM ~ computers. This new branding of IBM servers is intended to emphasize IBM’s commitment to e-business as well as simplify the entire server line of products. As a result, the new IBM xSeries servers will replace the Netfinity family over time and represent IBM’s Intel-based servers that come from the concept of the IBM X-architecture.

IBM Personal Computers

1

1 IBM Personal Computers

T

his chapter first provides an overview of the IBM line of personal computers, which includes the IBM NetVista, IBM Aptiva, IBM personal computer, IBM Netfinity, IBM ~ xSeries, IBM ThinkPad, and IBM IntelliStation families of computers. The chapter then focuses more specifically on the members of each family (with the exception of the IBM Netfinity line of servers, which is presented in more detail in Chapter 2). Finally, we move in for a closer look at the design details of personal computers.

Meet IBM’s Desktop PC Families After starting out as a small-scale experiment back in 1981, the IBM personal computer has now grown into several complete families of personal computers. The families (also called brands) that make up IBM’s personal computer line are the IBM Aptiva, personal computer (PC), NetVista, Netfinity/xSeries, ThinkPad/WorkPad, and IntelliStation families, IBM’s Thin Client family of Network Stations, and finally the Options brand of products, which are specially designed to support IBM’s entire line of PC products. Each family is designed to suit the needs and buying habits of specific user communities (with some overlap between the families). 1

2 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs The Aptiva family is designed for use by individuals in very small businesses and at home. It currently consists of two series (the E and the S) of different models, all with standard multimedia capabilities. Figure 1.1 shows a member of the Aptiva S family. The focus is on affordability, convenience, and ease of use, yet they also offer the latest in speed and technology. Unlike most of IBM’s other PC families, Aptiva computers are offered only through a few select retailers and directly from IBM rather than through computer dealers or IBM marketing representatives. Because Aptivas are primarily for the individual and home market, they are not intended (or supported) for use in complex local area networks. PC families designed for use in complex networks undergo additional and extensive testing in various network environments, which adds costs consumers do not require. However, Aptivas do come with fax/modems and communications software that allow for everything from Internet access to telephone answering machine functions. Some models may also be supported in a small home network using approved network adapters. The new Aptivas, based on Intel’s Pentium III and AMD’s Athlon microprocessors, have the Windows 2000 operating system and several basic application programs pre-installed. IBM has introduced a new line of products, code-named EoN for “Edge of the Network.” This line of products is branded as IBM’s new NetVista family of computers, which now expand IBM’s PC evo-

Figure 1.1. Member of the IBM Aptiva S family.


3

lution and help bring more users to the edge of the network. IBM NetVista constitutes a new product line of desktops and mobile systems under a single brand. This line will be closely tied to IBM’s pervasive computing strategy. IBM may soon include a “Wearable PC” like the 13-ounce prototype that Olympus Optical Co. and IBM’s Japanese unit unveiled in November. The Wearable PC has a tiny screen that flips out from a headset to cover one eye, projecting the image of a much larger monitor. We expect the NetVista brand name to eventually encompass all of IBM’s line of commercial desktop and thin client systems in the future, similar to the transition we are seeing with IBM’s PC server line, now called the IBM ~ xSeries. The IBM personal computer (PC) brand is also known under the umbrella name of Client Systems, denoting systems that can attach to a server over a network. This also means that the systems are network certified and supported in a network environment. IBM’s commercial systems also provide many features that help businesses manage and protect their PC assets. The newer models in this family are identified by the IBM PC name and a product number such as PC 300GL and PC 300PL. The IBM personal computer family and NetVista family (Figure 1.2) covers a wide range of performance, features, and functions. There are IBM PC models based on the full range of Intel Pentium microprocessors and incorporating both ISA (Industry Standard Architecture) and PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) expansion buses. The latest PC 300GL and PC 300PL systems now include up to a 933 MHz Pentium III processors with integrated cache and high-performance AGP graphics adapters. IBM has also consolidated its entire line of server systems under the IBM ~ family brand. The latest Intel-based PC servers will now be identified as the IBM ~ xSeries replacing the current IBM Netfinity name as new models are introduced. The latest line of IBM Netfinity and xSeries (Figure 1.3) covers a wide range of performance, features, and functions. There are IBM Netfinity and xSeries server models based on a broad range of microprocessors extending from a single 600 MHz Pentium III processor to systems with as many as eight Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP) Pentium III Xeon processors sharing the same PC server. Industry Standard Architecture (ISA), Enhanced Industry Standard Architecture (EISA), and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) products are offered in the IBM PC server family. All of IBM’s PC servers come with an array of software including Lotus Domino server software, Netfinity Manager, and IBM server guide.

4 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs

Figure 1.2.

IBM PC and NetVista family.

Figure 1.3. IBM ~ xSeries and Netfinity family.


5

The IBM ThinkPad family (Figure 1.4) of computers is designed to be used both in and out of the office environment. Their key features are small size, light weight, and battery power. All ThinkPad computers have built-in color displays. Some models are capable of recognizing your handwriting; others are capable of recording and playing back speech and music. The power and flexibility of these systems combined with the available optional features allow a single system to satisfy all computing needs of a traveling professional. The IBM WorkPad series of pocket-sized and extremely small notebook computers provides mobile individuals with a powerful extension to their desktop or laptop computers. These PC companions are more than just a personal organizer. They provide instant portable access to address books, a calendar, a memo pad, to-do lists, and downloaded e-mail. The IBM IntelliStation, which is also called the Professional WorkStation (PWS) family of computers, is intended for business professionals who require very high-end workstation performance to run graphics- and computation-intensive 32-bit applications such as Computer-Aided Design (CAD) and statistical modeling. The IntelliStation bridges the gap between the traditional UNIX/RISC workstation and the PC by using high-end Intel-based processors running Microsoft’s Windows NT. The IBM Thin Client family is represented by IBM’s new Network Stations, which are meant to replace Non-Programmable Terminals (NPTs) that connect to servers and mainframes. The IBM Network Station with its PowerPC Microprocessor is marketed through the IBM PC Company dealer channel. It provides users with a lower-cost access to the network than traditional PCs, but with many popular

Figure 1.4.

IBM ThinkPad family.

6 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs PC features such as SVGA graphics and mouse support that are lacking in a non-programmable terminal. The IBM Network Station software (sold separately) includes 3270, 5250, VTXXX, ASCII, and X-server terminal emulation to give users access to their existing business applications on existing servers, including PC and UNIX servers, AS/400, RS/6000, and S/390. Before leaving this overview section, we should mention IBM’s industrial computer line, which is intended for nonoffice environments. These PC-compatible systems are designed and packaged so that they can withstand harsher environments (e.g., higher temperatures, particulates, power surges, shock, vibration, and longer power-on hours) than mainstream personal computers. Finally, the Options by IBM products are designed and tested to provide accessories, upgrades, and monitors for all IBM personal computer families. Options include memory, storage, modems, networking adapters, docking stations/port replicators, batteries, power adapters, security cards, monitors, printers, scanners, keyboards, and mice. So much for an overview of IBM’s personal computer families. Now let’s go back and take a closer look at each family. Because the PC world is a fast-changing one, be sure and check this book’s companion Web site (www.maxpress.com) frequently for news, and expanded information.

The Aptiva Family The IBM Aptiva PC family is IBM’s consumer product line of computers—entry-level home and small-business PCs. The intent of Aptiva is to include many features that allow it to be easily used in the home, much like a typical home appliance. To this end, all Aptiva models come equipped with multimedia hardware and supporting software, including a CD-ROM drive, audio card, and fax/modem. Select models also come with RingCentral software that gives the computer the ability to turn itself on either in response to an incoming phone call or at a prescheduled time. This allows the computers to be used as telephone answering machines without having to leave them on all day long. You can also schedule your faxes or electronic mail to be sent during off-peak hours—while you are asleep or are


7

away from home. These features are known as Wake Up on Ring and Scheduler. All Aptiva models also come with a standard feature called Rapid Resume. This feature significantly reduces system startup time and conserves power during periods of inactivity. The system enters Standby mode after an operator-specified period of inactivity, defined as no use of the keyboard, mouse, or fixed disk. In Standby mode, the display will blank, the fixed disk will stop spinning, and the microprocessor will be halted. If the keyboard or mouse is used, the system will immediately return to normal operation. The system enters Suspend/Resume mode either after a period of inactivity or when the power switch is turned off. In Suspend/Resume mode, the display will blank or turn off, the state of the system will be stored, and the system unit will be powered down. When the power switch is turned on, the system unit will be powered on and restored to its previous state. These features allow you to power up the system quickly and begin work (or play) right where you left off. To make things easier for the computer novice, Aptiva systems come preloaded with software, including Microsoft’s Windows operating system, Lotus SmartSuite productivity software, IBM Update Connector, Aptiva Installer, Norton AntiVirus utility, ConfigSafe software (which allows you to restore your PC to a previously working configuration easily and quickly), PC Doctor Diagnostics, Netscape Navigator, and Microsoft Internet Explorer (for accessing the Internet). Aptiva purchasers are also eligible to join IBM Owner Privileges, an exclusive membership program that offers member discounts, priority service, advice, and owner protection benefits. Finally, a set of unique software utilities called AptivaWare is provided to manage and control the hardware and software functions of the Aptiva systems as well as learn and organize the software that comes with the system. Trial subscriptions to access several online services such as America Online, CompuServe, The Microsoft Network, IBM Internet Connection, and AT&T WorldNet are provided.

Aptiva E Series Specifics The Aptiva E series, entry-level computers designed for consumers and small businesses, is shown in Figures 1.5 and 1.6. The E series

8 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs system design includes a system mini-tower, stereo audio system, mouse, keyboard, and choice of monitors. The minitower mechanical design provides four drive bays, one for the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, one for the diskette drive, one for the hard drive, and one empty bay for future expansion. Drive bays are physical areas that facilitate the installation of internal devices such as fixed disks, diskette drives, CD-ROM drives, and so on. The Aptiva E models, listed in Figure 1.6, come in a minitower package with a total of four drive bays, three or four adapter slots, one serial port, one parallel port, two USB ports, a K56 Flex fax/ modem, 64 to 128 MB of memory, a 128 or 256 KB cache, 2 or 4 MB of video memory, a 10.0 to 30.0 GB hard drive, a 24× to 48× max CD-ROM drive or DVD ROM, a 145-watt power supply, two to four PCI local bus slots, an IBM Rapid Access keyboard, and a mouse. The monitors are sold separately. The special 256/512 KB high-speed memory area called a cache speeds up overall system performance by collecting information likely to be needed and providing that information very quickly when it is needed. The Aptiva E models are built around Intel Pentium III processors that range in speed from 533 MHz to 733 MHz.

Figure 1.5. Member of IBM’s E Aptiva family.


9

IBM Aptiva E Series technical specifications Model

3x4 micro-tower (2198)

3x4 micro-tower (2194/2193)

Processor

Intel Pentium III 933, 866, 800, 733, 600 or 533MHz

Intel Pentium III 733, 667 or 600; Intel Celeron 667, 633, 600, 533 or 500MHz; AMD K6-2 550, 533 or 500MHz

Memory (std/max)

128 or 64MB/512MB SDRAM

128 or 64MB/256MB SDRAM

Graphics

SR9 2X AGP S3 Savage 4 or nVIDIA AGP 4X

Intel 810E6 or SiS UltraAGP integrated

Hard disk drives

45, 40, 30, 27, 20,15 or 14GB S.M.A.R.T.7 III Ultra ATA/66

20, 15, 10 or 5GB S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66

Communication

56K modem, HomePNA on select models

Embedded 10/100 Ethernet and/or 56K modem

CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD-ROM

48X8-20X CD-ROM, 12X DVD-ROM and/or 8x/4x/32x CD-RW

48X-20X or 40X-17X CD-ROM and/or 8X-3.5X DVD-ROM

Slots

4: (3) PCI, (1) AGP

3 half-length PCI

Bays

4: (1) 3.5” external, (1) 3.5” internal; (2) 5.25” external

4: (1) 3.5” external, (1) 3.5” internal; (2) 5.25” external

Ports

6: (1) serial, (1) parallel, (4) USB

4: (1) serial, (1) parallel, (2) USB or 6: (1) serial, (1) parallel, (4) USB

Business audio

Integrated Allegro 3D Sound or Creative SoundBlaster

Integrated AC 97 with hardware acceleration: Line-in, line-out, MIDI

Software

Microsoft® Windows® 98 Second Edition, Lotus SmartSuite Millenium, IBM Product Recovery CD and Diagnostics CD

Options

IBM Monitors: E54 15" (13.8" VIS) Color Monitor (6331A2N), E74 17" (15.9" VIS) Color Monitor (633201N); IBM Memory: 32MB/100MHz SDRAM (01K1136), 64MB/133MHz SDRAM (33L3071), 128MB/133MHz SDRAM (33L3073), 256MB/133MHz SDRAM (33L3075)

Standards supported

FCC Part 15, Class B (Class A when Ethernet in use); UL 1950 Third No.950; ISO 9241 capable; ANSI S12.10

Figure 1.6.

IBM Aptiva E series.

10 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs The Aptiva E models use a new type of memory technology for both graphics memory (SGRAM, or Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory) and general-purpose memory (SDRAM, or Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory). Aptiva’s SGRAM along with its new graphics accelerator (a graphics processor that speeds up the computer’s ability to do 3D rendering) work together to improve graphics performance. Meanwhile, the 64 to 128 MB of standard SDRAM provides a 20% performance improvement over more traditional memory technology (e.g., EDO, or Extended Data Out, RAM) and is a better memory match for the increasing speeds of today’s processors. Communications technology provided with the Aptiva E Series includes a 56 Kbps data/14.4 Kbps fax modem. These modems are designed to be capable of receiving data at up to 56 Kbps from a K56 Flex-compatible service provider and transmitting data at up to 33.6 Kbps. Public networks currently limit maximum download speeds to about 53 Kbps. Actual speeds depend on many factors and are often less than the maximum possible. The modem and preloaded software provide functions such as Video Phone (entry-level video conferencing) and RingCentral (a communications command center that provides a phone answering machine, fax system, and connectivity to the Internet). Select models of the IBM Aptiva come with an integrated DVD (Digital Video Disc) CD-ROM drive, which can play existing CD-ROM titles as well as DVD movies. DVD features MPEG-2 video technology with four times better resolution than existing video capabilities. The Aptiva also enables users to connect their home PCs to their TVs and stereos for DVD movie playback with its TV-Out feature, providing a complete home entertainment capability. One last feature we should mention on the latest E Series Aptivas is IBM’s 48× max, 20× min CD-ROM drives. CD-ROM technology has made huge leaps in the few years since the first 1× drives were introduced. The 1× drives were capable of transferring data at a rate of 150 KB/sec. In contrast, an Aptiva with a 48× drive is capable of transfer rates up to 48 times faster, or up to 7,200 KB/sec. The new drives take advantage of new, partial CAV (Constant Angular Velocity) technology. In constant linear velocity technology, the drive spins at variable speeds, whereas in CAV technology, the drive spins at a constant speed. Partial CAV drives do a little of both. CD-ROM drives


11

spin disks much like record players, except that, unlike record player needles, laser pickups begin reading on the inside track and move outward. The inside track of the disk is shorter than the outside track, of course, so a CLV (Constant Linear Velocity) drive has to spin the disk at different speeds to even out the flow of information it picks up in one rotation. In other words, the motor varies its speed to achieve a constant linear velocity. The speed slows as the pickup moves to the outside. For an 8× CLV drive, for example, the speed would range from approximately 4,240 rpm (rotations per minute) to approximately 1,600 rpm. Having to change speeds according to where a sector of data is located, of course, takes time. In contrast, CAV technology allows a given angle of the disk (a pie slice), measured in degrees, to pass under the pickup at a constant rate or a constant angular velocity. The new 48× max, 20× min drives feature partial CAV, which combines the best of both worlds.

Aptiva S Series Specifics The Aptiva S Series (Figure 1.7) is IBM’s most powerful consumer PC. Designed to meet the needs of the progressive, technology savvy buyer, the Aptiva S Series provides the latest in IBM’s high-end consumer product line. The Aptiva S Series is powered by either Intel’s new Pentium III 1,000 MHz (1 GHz) processor with integrated cache running at the processor speed and a 133 MHz front side bus, or an AMD Athlon 600 to 850 MHz processor in a sleek black design. The S Series is loaded with leading-edge multimedia technology and comes with a huge 20 to 40 GB hard disk drives and with either 128 MB of SDRAM or RAMBUS memory. Also featured is IBM’s new space-saving 15" IBM T55A Flat Panel Monitor (sold separately). The Aptiva S Series models include a DVD-ROM with software video playback, high-end graphics adapters with up to 32 MB of SGRAM video memory for stunning 3D graphics, and a 56K (V.90 compatible) voice/data/fax/modem. Complementing the sophisticated stealth black design, the Aptiva S Series now comes with blue, red, green, and black speaker covers for the Infinity Speakers that allow you to select a color that complements your decor. The S Series comes with IBM ScrollPoint mouse and the new IBM Rapid Access keyboard, which has customizable buttons for easy access to applica-


Figure 1.7. IBM Aptiva S series with IBM T55 flat panel monitor.

tions and DVD controls. Software provided includes Microsoft Windows, IBM’s ViaVoice voice dictation software (headset and microphone included), World Book, and Lotus SmartSuite Millennium edition. The Aptiva S series is expandable—with three available slots, three open drive bays, and up to three USB ports—and is ready to network using select optional network cards. Select models include the Intel AnyPoint Home Network. With the AnyPoint Home Network, all family members can access the Internet from their own PC— all at the same time, and with only one modem, one telephone line, and one Internet account. Finally, the Aptiva S series provides a great set of tools that includes PC-Doctor for system troubleshooting and diagnostics, Norton AntiVirus, Update Connector to help improve system performance with downloads of new drivers and selected system software, and IBM’s ConfigSafe software, which allows you to restore your PC to a previously working configuration easily and quickly.

IBM NetVista and the IBM PC Families The IBM personal computer and IBM NetVista families represent IBM’s newest line of desktop computer systems, intended for use in a


13

networked world. The IBM PC family incorporates IBM technology designed to simplify the management of desktops in the network to help reduce the “total cost of ownership” of PCs. The new IBM NetVista family of computers provide the ultimate connectivity in a stylish, space-saving designs for either home or office. IBM has introduced three design points of the NetVista product line, the all-in-one, legacy-free, and thin client. Each of these designs provides a wide range of function depending on the requirements of the users. We will discuss NetVista in more detail later on, but first, let’s take a look at the IBM PC family. The current line of IBM PCs covers a wide range of performance, features, and functions. There are IBM PC models based on a full range of microprocessors from the Intel 450 MHz Celeron processor to the 1.2 GHz Intel processors. Like the Aptiva family, the IBM PC family is available in various configurations. In fact, there are more than a hundred “standard” model configurations within the IBM PC family. In addition, you can order systems configured by an AAP (Authorized Assembler Program) dealer, who can build the model you require from several base models using a combination of the basic IBM PC family building blocks. These building blocks are the various PC options, such as memory and hard disk drives, that are combined to build up a custom PC model. There are now three categories or “subbrands” in the IBM PC Desktop family—each intended to meet different requirements in the areas of manageability, performance, compatibility, investment protection, security, standards, and affordability. IBM is continuing the IBM PC 300 name and two subbrand series, the IBM PC 300GL and the IBM PC 300PL. The new IBM PC 300 series (shown in Figure 1.8) is IBM’s lowprice entry-level PC line for general business needs. These computers are network ready with embedded Ethernet and include data protection software. The IBM PC 300GL series (shown in Figure 1.9) is an entry-level PC line for both small business and core/general business needs. The PC 300GL includes network manageability and security features. The IBM PC 300GL Small Business series includes office productivity software, as well as a choice of modem or Ethernet adapter for connecting to the network. The IBM PC 300PL series (shown in Figure 1.10) is optimized for network performance, with enhanced Universal Manageability network software and security. The PC 300PL series is a medium-


Figure 1.8. IBM PC 300 series family member.

Figure 1.9. IBM PC 300GL series family member.


15

price/performance PC line focused on mainstream business applications. All IBM PC family models come with a standard feature called Rapid Resume. This feature significantly reduces system startup time and conserves power during periods of inactivity. The system enters Standby mode after an operator-specified period of inactivity, defined as no use of the keyboard, mouse, or fixed disk. In Standby mode, the display will blank, the fixed disk will stop spinning, and the microprocessor will be halted. If the keyboard or mouse is used, the system will return to normal operation. The system enters Suspend/ Resume mode either after a period of inactivity or when the power switch is turned off. In Suspend/Resume mode, the display will blank or turn off, the state of the system will be stored, and the system unit will be powered down. When the power switch is turned on, the system unit will be powered on and restored to its previous state. These features allow you to power up the system quickly and begin working right where you left off.

Figure 1.10.

IBM PC 300PL series members.

16 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs The IBM PC family includes the security features that were originally introduced on the PS/2 products, including Vital Product Data (VPD), tamper-evident covers, lockable storage bays, power-on password, and administrator password. These IBM AssetCare features make it easier to secure and administer systems remotely in a Local Area Network (LAN) environment. IBM AssetCare includes an Enhanced Asset Information Area recorded with system and end-user information, as well as such features as registration of critical components with Retainagroup Ltd. The third-party registration makes it easier for law enforcement to find and track stolen computer assets. Also new is IBM’s Asset ID technology, which provides inventory control and protection of your systems with radio-frequency technology. Asset ID can eliminate many of the costly, time-consuming manual steps involved in today’s system deployment, inventory, and tracking processes. It enables you to read and write information to an EEPROM inside an IBM PC using a handheld remote unit even while the PC is still in the carton and allows you to take accurate physical inventories of systems and their components without searching for a label or opening the chassis. Simply pass the handheld unit near the box, and it can read system information such as model numbers, serial numbers, processor speed, and hard disk drive size and memory, as well as any end-user information you choose to record. When used in conjunction with a compatible radio-frequency security system, Asset ID can be used to assist security personnel in preventing unauthorized removal of PCs. You can think of Asset ID as the next generation of “bar code” technology, with considerably more convenience and functionality. An Asset ID scanner, for instance, does not need to be pointed at a label—it can read signals whenever it is in close proximity to a radio-frequency antenna, even if the PC is still in its carton—and Asset ID does more than just read data: It can also be used to write information to the system’s EEPROM chip. IBM is initially implementing Asset ID in select IBM PCs and IntelliStations. Handheld units must be purchased separately from Asset ID Partners, third-party companies who have worked closely with IBM to ensure the compatibility of this technology with industry standards. A new feature on select models of the PC family called Alert on LAN acts as its own security guard. When someone unplugs the sys-


17

tem from its power supply or network, an alert is instantly generated to a network administrator, to building security, or to whomever you designate. Alert on LAN sends either status or alert packets to your management server. Even after the system is powered off, Alert on LAN-enabled PCs draw a trickle charge that allows generation and transmission of packets via the integrated 10/100 Ethernet controller. Another feature on most models of the PC family called Wake on LAN provides the ability to remotely power on systems over a LAN when configured with the appropriate network adapter. This feature combined with IBM’s LAN Client Control Manager (LCCM) allows mass unattended system installation of operating systems, applications, device drivers, and BIOS updates, all of which can be done at a convenient time. With the enhanced Desktop Management Interface (DMI), more than 300 vital system attributes can be tracked as well as the new S.M.A.R.T (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology) for disk drives. IBM also includes its SMART Reaction II software, which can back up your critical hard drive data prior to a predictable failure. The incorporation of these technologies into IBM’s PC systems is intended to reduce the complexity of installation and maintenance and make it possible to remotely predict and identify potential system and system component failures. This monitoring allows the replacement of failing components before they actually fail. Preventative repair or replacement of these components (e.g., S.M.A.R.T. drives) during off-hours can save money in several ways. Technicians can combine repair actions to allow more efficient use of their time. Central monitoring also eliminates the need to individually inspect each system. End users can stay productive because their work is not interrupted, and, most important, vital data is not lost. Select models of IBM’s personal computers come with a Lotus SmartSuite (personal productivity software) license and media ordering brochure. If you already have a licensed copy of Lotus SmartSuite, the license entitles you to make an additional copy for use on your new computer. If not, you can order a CD-ROM version of the program at no charge. In addition, the PC family includes a set of software tools, designed to help manage your desktop computing asset. These tools include the following:

18 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs •

Norton AntiVirus protects your system from unwanted computer viruses and allows you to constantly monitor for viruses on diskettes that you insert on your computer.

Now let’s take a closer look at the systems that make up the IBM personal computer family.

IBM PC 300 Series The IBM PC 300 series computers (Figure 1.11) are the newest, and also the smallest, PC 300s intended for general business computing applications. The PC 300 series models are built with industrystandard hardware components for system upgradability and use the Microsoft Windows 2000/98/NT operating system. Members of this family are listed in Appendix B. Mechanical packaging for this series of PCs is provided in either three drive bays and two expansion slots in a slim desktop configuration or four drive bays and three expan-

Figure 1.11.

IBM PC 300 series family member.


19

sion slots in a minitower configuration. Expansion is provided by industry-standard PCI bus slots. The PC 300 models are all equipped with embedded 10/100 Ethernet adapters for quick attachment to the network and either Intel Celeron or Pentium III processors with 100/133 front side bus technology. These models come with 32, 64, or 128 MB of SDRAM memory as standard. The PC 300 models are configured for multimedia applications with built-in 16-bit audio and a 40× max CD-ROM drive on select models. The video and audio are embedded to leave your PCI slots open for expansion. Now let’s discuss the IBM’s PC 300GL series.

IBM PC 300GL Series The IBM 300GL series computers are intended for a wide range of business computing applications. Different models of the PC 300GL line are targeted for small-business, general-business, and large-enterprise computing environments. For a complete listing, see Appendix C. The PC 300GL series is built with industry-standard hardware components for system upgradability and comes with the Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows 98, or Windows NT operating system. Members of this family are shown in Figures 1.12 and 1.13. Mechanical packaging for this series includes a new four-slot, four-bay microtower design as well as the standard desktop design. Expansion is provided by industry-standard PCI adapter slots. The PC 300GL Pentium models are equipped with Pentium III 667, 733, and 800 MHz processors with a 100/133 MHz front side bus and an integrated 256 KB cache. Video graphics are provided by either an S3/Diamond AGP 4× with 8 MB of video memory or the NVidia AGP 4× with 32 MB of SGRAM video memory. There is support for up to 1 GB of system memory. The enhanced IDE Ultra-ATA 66 hard disk drives (HDDs) provide up to 30 GB storage capacity. Select models of the PC 300 GL series provide a 48× variablespeed CD-ROM drive (select models) or 4× CD-Read/Write (RW) optical storage. While standard 16-bit audio is integrated on most models there is a choice of Ethernet 10/100 adapter, ADSL, or PCI data/fax modem for your communication needs. The PC 300GL Celeron models are equipped with Intel Celeron 466, 500, and 533 MHz processors with a 66/100 MHz front side bus and an integrated 128 KB cache. The powerful integrated 3D


Figure 1.12. IBM PC 300GL series family member.

graphics with 4 MB display cache provides ample graphic support for the average user. The enhanced IDE Ultra-ATA 66 hard disk drives (HDDs) provide up to 30 GB storage capacity.

IBM PC 300PL Series The IBM PC 300PL series (Figure 1.14) is designed for network performance and manageability for mainstream business applications. The PC 300PL series is powered with Intel Pentium III processors with


Figure 1.13.

21

IBM PC 300GL series family member.

internal clock speeds of up to 800 MHz and the IBM AGP 4×/133 chip set with 133 MHz bus speed support. The PC 300PL supports up to 1 GB of high-speed 133 MHz SDRAM system memory and provides 10/ 100 Ethernet with Alert on LAN 2 as standard on all models. The latest members of the PC 300PL series provide the ultimate in security with IBM’s embedded security chip, a cryptographic microprocessor embedded in the system board of the IBM PC. The embedded security chip supports RSA 3 PKI operations such as encryption for privacy and digital signatures for authentication. The chip includes EEPROM memory where RSA key pairs are securely stored and communicates with the main processor of the computer through the System Management Bus (SMB). With the Embedded Security Subsystem (ESS) the standard CAPI/CSP and PKCS#11 cryptographic Application Program Interfaces (APIs) are implemented in hardware rather than software, making them more secure. Applications that leverage these standard cryptographic APIs


Figure 1.14.

IBM PC 300PL series family member.

are immediately made more secure. Examples of such applications are Netscape and Microsoft browsers and e-mail programs. The latest PC 300PL models, listed in Appendix D, include a radio-frequency ID tag (RFID) that makes it easier to deploy and inventory your systems. Asset ID technology is also used to monitor movement of your PCs to help prevent theft. This technology allows your computer to be “scanned” by a radio-frequency emitting device supplied by various independent companies. With Asset ID, PCs are deployed while they are still in their shipping container. Detailed physical inventory can be taken while the system is powered off, and PC movement is tracked. Asset ID can assist security personnel in preventing the unauthorized removal of PCs from your enterprise. Using a portable scanner, security personnel can scan both an employee’s badge and an Asset ID-enabled PC to log the system and its contents, and determine if movement is authorized. Asset ID enhances “electronic property pass” applications.


23

The PC 300PL models are also equipped with Universal Serial Bus ports, the latest advance for the quick and simple connection of peripherals to your computer. These systems also include Wake on LAN capability and IBM Alert on LAN 2, which notifies you when systems are removed from the network and provides automatic corrective action. IBM PC Networking Tools for network management include LANClient Control Manager (LCCM), which automates system deployment, BIOS updates, system function updates, virus scans, and maintenance procedures. Also included is IBM’s System Migration Assistant, which helps migrate system settings from any PC to an IBM PC; it includes personality settings, connectivity settings, printer settings, and data files. The PC 300PL series, shown in Figure 1.15, comes configured for multimedia applications with audio and a 48×–17× variable-speed CD-ROM drive on selected models. Also featured are models with integrated 10/100 Ethernet for LAN connectivity and a built-in manageability chip that monitors temperature and voltage to help protect the processor from heat damage. All models have Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0 Workstation preinstalled and a Lotus SmartSuite Millennium Edition License. Systems tools include Netscape Communicator, Lan Client Control Manager, Wake on LAN, ConfigSafe, Norton AntiVirus 2000, PC Doctor diagnostics, and CoSession.

The IBM NetVista Family The IBM NetVista Family of computers is designed for simplicity. See the charts in Appendix E for a complete listing. As we mentioned before, IBM has introduced three series of NetVista products, the NetVista all-in-one, the NetVista legacy-free, and the NetVista Thin Client. They are designed with fewer cables and smaller sizes, which makes them easier to carry and set up. New portable drives, keyboards, and “Access IBM” buttons make them easier to use. The NetVista Family also has new networking and security features to make doing e-business easier. These new computers allow users to easily transfer data between computers with an option called the IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000. This new option allows you to reduce the number of hard drives or CD-RW drives


Figure 1.15.

IBM PC 300PL series family member.

with a single, swappable drive that works in both IBM ThinkPad notebook computers and NetVista desktop computers. NetVista also features an embedded security chip, available on select models of the legacy-free NetVista S40, which provides 256-bit encryption for extremely secure network and Internet transactions. Let’s now take a closer look at each of the new series of NetVista computers.

The IBM NetVista X Series (All-in-One) IBM’s new sleek and stylish NetVista X series of all-in-one computers (Figure 1.16) feature an integrated 15-inch Thin-Film Transistor


25

(TFT) flat panel display. Weighting just over 20 lb, the NetVista X series fits easily in the tightest desk spaces. The all-in-one system design is simple, offering high-end desktop power, expandability with 2 slots and 3 bays, and an advanced space-saving design that is optimized for the Internet. The NetVista X series pedestal design features a drop-down media bay containing optical and diskette drives. When not in use, the USB keyboard fits neatly under the display. USB ports replace parallel and serial ports, making peripherals ready to use with no need to reboot after installing. A built-in handle provides for easy portability. Specially designed for the NetVista X series is an option called the NetVista Arm X Mount, which offers a range of heights and distances allowing individuals to create the ideal working experience. The new NetVista X40 models provide a 10/100 Ethernet Low Profile PCI adapter while the NetVista X40i models feature a 56K data/fax modem. The NetVista X40 and X40i models come with either an Intel Pentium III processor with 256 KB of integrated cache or an Intel Celeron processor with 128 KB of integrated cache, 10.1 GB or 20.4 GB Ultra-ATA 66 hard files, a 24× CD-ROM or 6× DVD drive on selected models, integrated stereo speakers, integrated video, and up to 128 MB of fast 133 MHz SDRAM system memory.

Figure 1.16.

IBM NetVista X series family member.

26 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs Software for the NetVista X series includes either Windows 2000 Professional or Windows 98 pre-installed on selected models, ConfigSafe, Norton AntiVirus (OEM Version), SMART Reaction II, Lotus SmartSuite Millennium Edition License, and Universal Management (UM) software, which enables critical systems management functions.

The IBM NetVista S Series (Legacy-free) IBM’s new NetVista S40 series (Figure 1.17) features a new innovative design with two slots and two drive bays in a dual-orientation mechanical package. The NetVista S40 series computers are legacy-free, meaning they do not have many of the older bulky external device ports such as the serial and parallel ports for connecting external devices. Instead, the NetVista S40 series of computers provide five USB ports for connecting printers and other external devices. Just in case you do not have a USB printer, IBM has an option called the NetVista USB-Parallel Printer Cable which has a Universal

Figure 1.17.

IBM NetVista S40 series family member.


27

Serial Bus (USB) connector on one end and a “Centronics” parallel printer connector on the other. It allows for bidirectional connectivity between a computer’s USB interface port and any standard IEEE-1284-compliant parallel printer. The NetVista USB cable option not only allows existing parallel printers to be used with new “legacy-free” systems but can free up a single parallel port for use by other external options, including scanners and external storage devices. It can also allow you to support multiple parallel printers without the need for switch boxes. Software drivers for Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 are included to create a seamless migration path for the traditional parallel printer to the new USB environment. Another option for the NetVista S series is the NetVista S Cradle (Figure 1.18), which lets you add drives to your new S series commercial desktop system and turn your desktop system into a minitower. The easy-to-attach NetVista S Cradle kit provides a safe way to set your system up vertically. The kit includes expansion bays for IBM’s Ultrabay and Microdrive bays as well as a cradle for the IBM WorkPad. The new NetVista S40 models come with either an Intel Pentium III processor with 256 KB of integrated cache or an Intel Celeron processor with 128 KB of integrated cache, 10.1 GB or 20.4 GB Ultra-ATA 66 hard files, a 40× CD-ROM drive on selected models,

Figure 1.18.

IBM NetVista S series family member (with S Cradle).

28 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs integrated audio, and up to 128 MB of 100 MHz SDRAM system memory. The NetVista S40 series models have an integrated graphics controller in the chip set that supports 2D and 3D applications. The NetVista S40 series has a 9-Pin D-shell analog video port.

The IBM NetVista Thin Client Series (Zero Footprint) IBM’s new NetVista Thin Client series (Figure 1.19) computers replace IBM’s line of Network Station computers. The Network Stations series 2200 and 2800 are now called NetVista N2200 and N2800. They are referred to as NetVista thin clients. Also, IBM has renamed its Network Station Manager V2 software to NetVista Thin Client Manager V2, which consists of code that runs on the NetVista thin client as well as code that runs in a supported server environment (Windows NT, OS/400, and AIX). The NetVista zero-footprint option provides special brackets to firmly attach any NetVista

Figure 1.19.

IBM NetVista family member.


29

N2200X-type thin client to the back of an IBM T55 or T54 Flat Panel monitor. This customer or reseller installed option reduces the amount of desktop “real estate” needed for thin-client computing.

The ThinkPad Family As a computer system becomes woven more deeply into the day-today activities of users, it becomes increasingly difficult to leave the computer behind while away from the office. This need to be connected is what has driven the development of small, lightweight, battery-powered computers. IBM’s current answer to this need is the ThinkPad family of notebook and subnotebook computers. These notebooks are small battery-powered computers designed to be easily carried and used almost anywhere. IBM’s ThinkPad family is now divided into three major series of notebook computers: 1. The ThinkPad A series consists of notebooks that are considered high-performance desktop and value desktop alternatives. 2. The ThinkPad T series consists of thin, light, high-performance notebooks that are an ideal balance of performance and portability for the traveler. 3. The ThinkPad i series consists of notebooks that are Internet optimized for individuals and tailored for personal productivity and small-business users. IBM has simplified its ThinkPad product lineup and changed the naming scheme to connote the experience of the product. An A in the model number indicates that the computer is an alternative to a desktop computer; a T indicates it is a “thin-and-light” notebook. The ThinkPad 390 models are transitioning to the new ThinkPad A20m. Likewise, the ThinkPad 770 models are transitioning to the highperformance ThinkPad A20p, and the ThinkPad 600 is transitioning to the new ThinkPad T20. In addition to these three series, we will also discuss the ThinkPad 240X ultralight notebook and ThinkPad 570E ultraportable notebook.

30 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs Consistent with IBM’s EoN (Edge-of-Network) strategy, to simplify the computing experience for end-users and IT managers, IBM’s ThinkPad continues to lead the way in delivering enhancements, innovations and solutions that have shaped and defined the mobile computing category. The latest innovative enhancements include •

Titanium composite covers, which provide increased strength for protection. Titanium has been used for aerospace, orthopedics, and sporting equipment because of its high strength and low density. Titanium has natural dampening effect on vibrations and shocks. The new ThinkPad A20p and T20 come with titanium composite material as part of a carbon fiber reinforced plastic cover, adding strength. Titanium composite carbon fiber-reinforced plastic has three times the strength of ABS plastic. The use of titanium composite has helped IBM create some of the industry’s thinnest and lightest systems with large displays (up to 15 inches).

•

The ThinkPad button, which lets users easily access information, services, and solutions. With a touch of the new ThinkPad Button, users can access instant help and support through the Access ThinkPad portal. Access ThinkPad includes an on-system tool with a quick search engine that provides users information on such things as optimizing battery life, or an animated tutorial on how to change a Mini PCI card. It also provides access to online information including the new ThinkPad Community Web page, an interactive information center where users can get help by asking an IBM expert or from each other in the user forum. Designed with flexibility, the Access ThinkPad portal can be customized by IT managers to configure the ThinkPad Button to link to their company’s intranet or help desk on the online side and the on-system ThinkPad Assistant tool can be customized by adding company information.

•

The Ultrabay 2000 lets users fast-swap a range of common devices without having to move the system. Users can share standard and optional Ultrabay 2000 devices between ThinkPad A series and T series notebooks. The Ultrabay 2000


31

was designed to enable the user to swap devices, without having to move the system. Devices for the new Ultrabay 2000 include a CD-Read/Write, DVD-ROM, SuperDisk (LS-120) drive, CD-ROM, second hard drive, or second battery. The new ThinkPad Dock also accepts Ultrabay 2000 devices. •

Common docking solutions are a new space-saving IBM design that simplifies dock and port replication for the entire line of ThinkPad A series and T series notebooks.

•

The UltraPort connector on the ThinkPad T20 and A20p enhances usability of features because its location on the top edge of the display. It is designed to be used with the optional UltraPort Camera to capture still images or add video to e-mail.

•

A communications bay provides versatile connectivity. Users can connect easily with built-in RJ-45 and RJ-11 ports and the versatile user-accessible communications bay, which accommodates industry-standard Mini PCI cards. Users can enable either the on-board RJ-11 or RJ-45 ports to use at home or in the office. Models are available with either an IBM 10/100 EtherJet Mini PCI adapter with a 56K modem or a 56K modem Mini PCI card.

•

Wireless communications provide simplified connectivity. The new ThinkPad A series and T series can work easily with the new optional 802.11b IBM High Rate Wireless LAN PC Card and Access Point, and future Bluetooth technology options.

•

New comfort features include the new ThinkLight. Located on the top edge of the display, this tiny LED or Light Emitting Diode shines down on the keyboard so users can keep working in low light conditions. Individual volume control is enabled with pushbutton controls for up, down, and mute. The IBM Keyboard features IBM’s renowned full-sized, full-stroke keys, ergonomically designed palm rest, and TrackPoint pointing device with Internet scroll bar and magnifying functions to help users breeze through spreadsheets and Web pages. The TrackPoint with enhanced features incorporates the

32 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs Press-to-Select and Release-to-Select functions. Finally, a new easy open cover has been re-designed so users can unlatch and open the notebook with one hand. •

SystemXtra offers service, support, and lease options to help qualified customers keep their PCs current with little or no money up front. SystemXtra brings together the best of IBM and its Business Partners to deliver a combination of offerings that provide comprehensive service and support, including installation and configuration, warranty service upgrades, a help desk, e-business services, software programs, extensive education and training to help build PC skills, and flexible financing with the technology exchange option for qualified customers.

Size, resolution, color depth, and display technology are the four dimensions that define the capabilities of a notebook screen. ThinkPad displays are available in sizes ranging from 12.1 inches to 15 inches. All but two models now feature top-of-the-line Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) or active-matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) technologies. Two of IBM’s I series ThinkPads come with a low-cost alternative called High-Performance Addressing (HPA) LCD displays. In the TFT LCD display, the image created is controlled by an array of thousands of tiny transistors (one controlling red, one controlling green, and one controlling blue) that blend together to create the image the user perceives. HPA displays offer richer colors, brighter contrast, and a wider (but still private) viewing angle than traditional DSTN screens while eliminating the “ghosting cursor” phenomenon. Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology displays bright, high-contrast images viewable from wide angles. It also delivers a high refresh rate, which improves the playback of motion video and animation, as well as easy navigation with the mouse pointer, which can “disappear” during movement on slower screens. Active matrix is the foundation for black-matrix screens. Black matrix is among the highest-quality display technologies in use today and is used by most TFT display ThinkPad systems. Black matrix combines active-matrix technology with a special coating that reduces light leakage from the backlight to enhance contrast, deepen blacks, and reduce glare in bright environments.


33

The ThinkPad computers listed in Appendix F are based on the same microprocessors and offer the same basic capabilities as those of their office-bound counterparts in the PC family. The IBM ThinkPads provide a powerful and convenient way to work almost anywhere in today’s interconnected world. Let’s take a look at IBM’s ThinkPad family members.

ThinkPad A Series Specifics Figure 1.20 shows a ThinkPad A series computer system. The ThinkPad A series is comprised of broad range of notebooks from the most affordable to ultimate high-performance models with exceptional graphics features.

Figure 1.20.

IBM ThinkPad A series family member.

34 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs With a travel weight starting at 5.9 lbs, the easy-to-use entry-level ThinkPad A20m offers a wide range of affordable models with a Mobile Intel Pentium III processor at 700 MHz or 500 MHz or a Mobile Intel Celeron processor at 500 MHz, 64 MB of RAM (upgradable to 512 MB), hard drive capacity of up to 12 GB, TFT display size of up to 15 inches and battery life of up to 3.7 hours. The high-end models include a powerful Intel Mobile Pentium III processor at 700 M 256 KB of on-board cache, and Intel SpeedStep technology, which extends battery life. Mobile Pentium III processors featuring Intel SpeedStep technology have two performance modes. The maximum performance mode for top speed is achieved while connected to AC external power using the AC power adapter. Battery-optimized performance mode is for balance between performance and battery life when operating on battery power. In this mode the MHz speed is reduced to approximately 80% of the maximum performance (MHz speed) with approximately 50% of the power consumption to conserve battery power. The A20m ThinkPad family includes a large 381-mm (15.0-inch) active-matrix display, a 358.1-mm (14.1-inch) active-matrix display, or a 307.3-mm (12.1-inch) active-matrix display, depending on the model selected. ThinkPad A20m models are compatible with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) IR data link specification with speeds up to 4 Mbps. Other features include enhanced parallel, external display, pointer-keyboard-keypad, serial, and Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports. An additional connector supports the optional Port Replicator. The ThinkPad A20m systems contain the BIOS, easy setup, and diagnostics in their flash ROM, a GUI to set up the system, and power management features for Windows users. The BIOS provides the hardware instructions and interfaces designed to support the standard features of the ThinkPad A20m systems and to maintain compatibility with many software programs currently operating under Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows 2000. The ThinkPad A20m has many features in common with the ThinkPad T20 and A20p series: Ultrabay 2000 devices such as DVDROM, CD-ROM, SuperDisk (LS-120), CD-RW, and Hard Disk Drives (HDDs), and batteries. The ThinkPad A20p is the ultimate high-performance desktop replacement in a thin all-in-one package. It offers desktop expansion


35

with a modular Ultrabay 2000, PC card slots, an optional ThinkPad Port Replicator, and the ThinkPad Dock. The ThinkPad A20p incorporates exceptional graphics performance, including the ATI Rage Mobility 128 video chip, 16 MB of VRAM, S-video in and out ports for video capture and playback, MGI VideoWave III video editing software, DVI support via docking, an Intel Mobile Pentium III processor at 700 MHz or 750 MHz featuring Intel SpeedStep technology, 128 MB of SDRAM (upgradable to 512 MB), an 18 GB or 20 GB hard disk drive, a Mini-PCI modem with 56K V.90 technology or a modem-Ethernet combination, depending on model, a 6××2× DVD-ROM drive, and a 15-inch SXGA Plus (1,400 × 1,050) display—all in a 1.5-inch profile. Its high-performance, multimedia-centered design includes these innovative features: video-in and video-out ports with real-time MPEG-2 video capture capability; UltraPort on top of the display to support new options such as digital cameras for still image capture and editing, video editing, and video e-mail; a large 15-inch active-matrix TFT display featuring 1,400 × 1,050 resolution; stereo audio with 3D sound and speaker technology; large memory and storage capacity for high-performance execution of large media files and multimedia applications; titanium composite material in the top cover to help protect the display and enhance strength; and the UltraPort connector for best performance of UltraPort connector solutions. The ThinkPad A20p shares many common options with the ThinkPad T20 series, including Ultrabay 2000 devices, the new ThinkPad Port Replicator and ThinkPad Dock, UltraPort connector solutions, 72-watt power adapter, system memory, Hard Disk Drives (HDDs), Mini-PCI communications options, and an external battery charger.

ThinkPad T Series Specifics The sleek, new ThinkPad T series (Figure 1.21) packs a lot of performance into a thin and light package. The Titanium Composite in the top and bottom covers of this 1.3-inch slim notebook increase its strength and make it the lightest notebook with a 14.1-inch TFT display.


Figure 1.21.

IBM ThinkPad T series family members.

With a travel weight of about 4.7 lbs. and up to 4 hours of battery life, the ThinkPad T20 is ideal to take on the road. It is powered by an Intel Mobile Pentium III processor at 750 MHz, 700 MHz, or 650 MHz featuring SpeedStep technology, with 128 MB of RAM (upgradable to 512 MB) and 8 MB of VRAM. The ThinkPad T20 is available with a 14.1-inch or 13.3-inch XGA display, 6 GB or 12 GB hard disk drive, and a DVD-ROM or CD-ROM standard. New models of the ThinkPad T20 notebook computer feature a 3Com Mini-PCI V.90 modem and 10/100 Ethernet combination card installed. All ThinkPad T20 models come with an UltraPort connector. This innovative port supports an optional digital camera and the power-management functions required by Bluetooth (wireless communications) options that IBM’s ThinkPad Options Group announced. The removable, upgradable hard drive is 20.0 GB standard in latest models. An optional SuperDisk (LS120) drive, or a second hard drive in the Ultrabay 2000, expands storage. The second hard drive option, requiring an adapter, can be used with all ThinkPad T20 models. The 1.44 MB diskette drive (FDD) can be plugged directly into the ThinkPad T20 Ultrabay 2000 or attached externally


37

for added flexibility by using an optional adapter and cable available from Options by IBM. The ThinkPad T20 systems contain the BIOS in their flash ROM and a GUI to set up the system and power management features. The BIOS provides the hardware instructions and interfaces designed to support the standard features of the ThinkPad T20 systems and to maintain compatibility with many software programs. The following operating systems support the ThinkPad T and A series computers: •

Caldera OpenLinux eDesktop 2.410

•

OS/2 Warp, Version 4 (with FixPack 11, or later)

•

Windows 98, Second Edition

•

Windows 98

•

Windows 95

•

Windows NT Workstation 4.010

•

Windows 2000

Previous versions of these operating systems are not supported: •

PC DOS 7.0

•

Windows 3.0

•

MS-DOS 6.0

•

OS/2 Version 3.0

•

Windows NT 3.51

Now that we have covered the ThinkPad T series, let’s move on to IBM’s Internet optimized notebooks, called the ThinkPad i Series.


ThinkPad i Series Specifics The latest ThinkPad i series notebooks (shown in Figure 1.22) were designed from the begining with the needs of individuals (thus, i series) in mind—particularly students, small-business users, and families. IBM provides several models in ThinkPad i series—for example, the ThinkPad i series 1500, 1400, 1300, and 1200. The IBM ThinkPad i series 1500 notebooks are designed as the ultimate small-business tool, featuring Microsoft Office 2000 Small Business Edition and Windows 2000 Professional, the ThinkLight (models 1592 and 1562 only), and color-coded easy launch buttons that give you one-button access to special small business Web sites co-designed by IBM and Lycos, as well as word processing and e-mail applications.

Figure 1.22.

IBM ThinkPad i series family member.


39

The new IBM ThinkPad i series 1400 notebook was developed to support the IBM’s initiative into the K–12 education market. ThinkPad at School is an integrated program of technology, support, and services to help schools through mobile computing. The ThinkPad i series 14E2—the affordable notebook tailored for K–12 education—is available for qualified K–12 accredited schools, students, and parents or legal guardians of a qualified student through IBM resellers who are current Microsoft Authorized Education Resellers. It includes the following features: a powerful Intel Mobile Celeron processor (500 MHz) with 128 KB of L2 cache; 64 MB SDRAM (expandable to 256 MB) standard; a large 6.0 GB Hard Disk Drive (HDD); an integrated 56K V.90 modem; a high-speed 24×–10× CD-ROM drive; Windows 98 and Microsoft Office 2000 (Academic Edition) standard; an SVGA High Performance Addressing (HPA) 13.0-inch display; an all-in-one, high-capacity 6.0 GB HDD, a diskette drive, and a 24×–10× CD-ROM drive; TrackPoint with an Internet scroll bar to help speed your way on the Web; easy launch buttons to take you to the Web; an audio CD that plays for hours with system off and cover closed; Altec Lansing SoundGuide stereo speakers for rich, full sound; an ergonomic wrist-rest keyboard and TrackPoint technology for ease of use; a Universal Serial Bus (USB) port; an S-video out port; a NiMH battery; and SystemXtra support services and financing. A powerful, yet affordable, newly designed model for the ThinkPad at school, the ThinkPad i series 1320 provides a smooth transition between school and home. It has the power to breeze through the latest educational applications, plus Internet connectivity for collaborative learning and better teacher-student interaction. Teachers can access common tools for writing reports and presentations, tabulating and analyzing data, or just communicating. It is Anytime/Anywhere Learning (AAL) with ThinkPad at school. The ThinkPad i series 1320 comes preloaded with Microsoft Office 2000 (Academic Edition) standard, including Word 2000, Excel 2000, Outlook 2000, and PowerPoint 2000. The model 1320 is available for sale through an Authorized Education Reseller to qualified K–12 accredited schools, students, and parents or legal guardians of a qualified student. In addition to the ThinkPad i series 1320 are the ThinkPad i series models 1310 and 1340, which are part of the ThinkPad at School and ThinkPad University programs. These models feature Lotus SmartSuite Millennium software, a 12.1-inch SVGA TFT active-matrix display,

40 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs and a 500 Mhz Intel Mobile Celeron processor with 128 KB of L2 cache. The new ThinkPad i series 1310 and 1340 with its two-spindle design weighs 2.7 kg (6 lb) and incorporates a 6.0 GB HDD along with a 24×–10× variable-speed CD-ROM drive. An optional 1.44 MB diskette drive can be attached via USB. The new IBM ThinkPad i series 1300 notebook is tailored for small business. It offers Microsoft Office 2000 Small Business with Windows 2000 Professional, integrated Ethernet, and multimedia features in a lightweight design. The ThinkPad i Series 1300 notebook computers feature an Intel Mobile Celeron processor at 550 MHz, or 500 MHz, both with 128 KB L2 cache at processor speed. The ThinkPad i series 1300 uses nonparity, 64-bit 100 MHz SDRAM memory. Standard memory is 64 MB, expandable to a maximum of 192 MB. A PCMCIA Type III slot can accommodate one Type I, Type II, or Type III PC card. A CardBus PC card or Zoomed Video Port PC card is supported. The ThinkPad i series 1300 with its two-spindle design weighs approximately 2.7 kg (6 lb) and incorporates a 12.0 GB or 6.0 GB HDD along with a 24×–10× variable-speed CD-ROM drive. An optional 1.44 MB diskette drive can be attached via USB. Depending on the model, a 13.3-inch XGA TFT or 12.1-inch SVGA TFT brilliantly clear display is available. These systems have a standard complement of ports (enhanced parallel, external display, and USB ports). The USB ports, which connect external drives, are available for Windows 2000. Other features include easy Internet access and connectivity with a 56K V.90 integrated modem. The new IBM ThinkPad i series 1200 notebook is tailored for personal productivity. It features Lotus SmartSuite Millennium with Windows 98, preloaded popular Internet browsers and plug-ins, great multimedia and connectivity, and a lightweight design. Depending on the model, a 13.3-inch XGA TFT or 12.1-inch SVGA TFT is provided. The 12.1-inch HPA model has LynxEM+ graphics with 2 MB of video memory; other models have LynxEM4+ graphics with 4 MB of video memory. They come with an Intel Mobile Celeron processor operating at 550 MHz or 500 MHz with 128 KB of L2 cache, depending on model; 64 or 32 MB SDRAM, expandable with optional 32, 64, and 128 MB memory up to 160 MB or 192 MB maximum 6.0 GB HDD; an integrated 56K V.90 modem, optional Ethernet support; and a high-speed 24×–10× CD-ROM drive.


41

The new ThinkPad i series 1200 systems are designed for the needs of students and those who work at home. Both sleek and functional, this new ThinkPad notebook computer helps increase productivity and offers convenient Internet access and great portability at an affordable price. In summary, the ThinkPad i series is designed for individuals for whom technology is important and price is a consideration. It is the most affordable ThinkPad offered and provides personal productivity for the home business and education users, particularly in an interconnected environment, either LAN or Internet. The ThinkPad i series also provides entry-level solutions for higher education and complements the full family of ThinkPad products.

ThinkPad 570E and 240X Series Specifics The ThinkPad 570E (Figure 1.23) establishes a new standard for no-compromise, ultraportable computers. New models come with Windows 98 Second Edition or Windows 2000 installed. Weighing

Figure 1.23.

IBM ThinkPad 570E.

42 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs approximately 1.80 kg (3.97 lb), including battery, and 27.94 mm (1.1 inch) thin, the ThinkPad 570E is a perfect computer for the mobile professional. The ThinkPad 570 UltraBase and its options transform the ultraportable machine into a great all-in-one notebook. The slim, lightweight ThinkPad 570E system features include mobile Pentium III processors running at 450 and 500 MHz, with 256 KB of cache memory at processor speed; an Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP); 64 MB of SDRAM standard, expandable to 320 MB; a high-capacity 6.0 or 12.0 GB HDD standard with password protection; modem, LAN, and infrared communications; enhanced TrackPoint with press-to-select and scroll bar; full parallel and serial ports for peripheral connections; built-in 16-bit stereo PCI audio, which supports Sound Blaster audio applications; Windows 98 or Windows 2000 Professional and selected applications; an optional UltraBase expansion unit with stereo speakers; an optional Port Replicator with the Advanced EtherJet feature; and a three-year limited warranty and HelpCenter support along with IBM’s SystemXtra support services and financing. The ThinkPad 570E systems are designed to be compatible with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) IR data link specification Version 1.1. They support IrDA 1.1 mode (from 115 Kbps to 4 Mbps). The new models of the ThinkPad 240X (Figure 1.24) pack the latest and greatest technology in an ultralight notebook. Measuring 260 × 202 × 26.6 mm (10.2 × 8 × 1.05 inches), the ThinkPad 240X is the ideal computer for any professional who wants a powerful system in a thin and light form factor. The ThinkPad 240X features a Mobile Intel Celeron at 450 MHz or Intel Pentium III processor at 500 MHz, depending on the model. Also featured is a storage capacity of 6.0 GB or 12.0 GB, an external diskette drive, and a bright 10.4-inch SVGA (800 × 600) TFT active-matrix display. The 240X comes standard with 64 MB of high-speed SDRAM memory, expandable up to 192 MB, and advanced communications with integrated 56K V.90 modem technology. In addition there is a fast IR (up to 4 Mbps) and USB, Video, Mouse, FDD, Microphone, and RJ-11 standard ports on-board. Thus, no port replicator is needed. The ThinkPad 240X is preloaded with Windows 98 SE or Windows 2000 Professional and selected applications. Windows 95 and Windows NT Workstation 4.0 are also supported. Also, IBM includes


Figure 1.24.

43

IBM ThinkPad 240X.

SystemXtra, which offers service, support, and lease options to help qualified customers keep their PCs current. Before moving on to IBM’s IntelliStation family, we will briefly discuss IBM’s PC companion, the WorkPad c3.

WorkPad c3 Specifics The IBM WorkPad c3 (shown in Figure 1.25) is a slim-profile, lightweight handheld device that features personal organizer functions and connectivity to IBM PC/NetVista, ThinkPad, or compatible computers. The WorkPad c3 PC companion is a powerful mobile productivity tool that helps keep you organized and in touch in this connected world. Using standard development tools, you can easily add custom applications to suit your information infrastructure and unique work environment.


Figure 1.25. IBM WorkPad.

Its new sleek design, small size of 4.7 × 3.1 × 0.45 inches, and light weight of 4.2 oz with rechargeable Li-Ion battery enable the IBM WorkPad c3 to fit into your pocket so you can carry it with you. The IBM WorkPad is compatible with products designated as PalmPilot compatible for the 3Com PalmPilot-connected organizer. This means you can upgrade the WorkPad c3 PC companion with standardized hardware and software options to enhance performance and add function.


45

Three data-entry options are provided with the WorkPad c3. First, you can easily transfer directly from a ThinkPad or PC using HotSync technology. Second, you can use the on-screen touch keyboard to input data or write with Graffiti Power Writing software that recognizes your hand writing. Other features include a 20 MHz processor, 8 MB of memory, built-in Infrared (IR) beaming, and HotSync technology to keep your WorkPad device and PC always in sync. To gain access to the Internet, you can connect directly with an optional modem or through a PC. In summary, the WorkPad c3 PC companion is a mobile productivity tool designed for use with an IBM, or compatible, PC or ThinkPad notebook by corporate individuals or groups of individuals who need a high-function personal information manager to stay organized and on top of their business.

The IBM IntelliStation Family The IBM IntelliStation family, listed in Appendix G, is IBM’s family of technical workstations. The IBM IntelliStation is not exactly a personal computer, nor is it a replacement for the very high-end technical workstation. It offers performance levels similar to those of entry to midrange technical (RISC-based) workstations. The point of the IBM IntelliStation is to provide an Intel microprocessor-based computer system that provides a competitive workstation alternative for those whose performance requirements reside between traditional PCs and full-blown technical workstations. IBM IntelliStations are certified with specific applications and graphics adapters for industry-specific solutions in engineering, software engineering, finance (trader applications), and so on. The latest IntelliStation Z Pro workstations (Figure 1.26) represent a new level of high-performance hardware. The IntelliStation Z Pro includes Intel Pentium Xeon 800, 866, and 933 MHz microprocessors with streaming SIMD extensions, the Intel 840 core chipset, and Rambus memory. Augmenting this core system design are higher-performance graphics. The architecture, design, and features can help customers achieve higher levels of graphical and computational productivity and creativ-


Figure 1.26. IBM IntelliStation Z Pro family member.

ity. With its dual-processor capability, you can easily upgrade a system to multiprocessor configuration based on your application needs. IntelliStation Z Pro models provide a migration path for users who need more computational performance than the typical Pentium III processor provides. The IntelliStation Z Pro is ideal for users who are moving from UNIX-based applications to Windows NT applications. The new IntelliStation Z Pro is well suited for graphics-intensive applications. It has robust 3D capability with the I3D 4110 graphics adapter or the I3D 4210 graphics adapter. For 3D applications, select a model with the I3D 4110 with 64 MB of frame and 64 MB of texture video memory or the I3D 4210 with 128 MB of frame and 128 MB of texture memory for exceptional responses and performance for demanding applications. For high-performance 2D applications you can select IntelliStation Z Pro models that use the high-resolution Matrox Millennium G400 with the high-performance 2D AGP graphics accelerator and 16 MB of video memory. All of the Z Pro models use one of the seven slots for an AGP graphics adapter. For expansion this leaves six PCI slots open, four


47

32-bit slots and two 64-bit slots. Models with the I3D 4110 graphics adapter have one less slot because of the width of the adapter. Models with the I3D 4210 graphics adapter have two fewer slots because of the width of the adapter. The latest IntelliStation M Pro (Figure 1.27) systems provide leadership technology, advanced industrial design, and IBM quality, service, and support. The architecture, design, and features include dual-processor capability, which allows you to easily upgrade a system to a multiprocessor configuration based on your application needs. Then IntelliStation M Pro is well suited for graphics-intensive applications. It has robust 3D capability with two graphics adapters: ELSA GLoria II and Intense3D Wildcat 4110. For 3D applications, you can select models that use the ELSA GLoria II graphics accelerator (AGP adapter) with 64 MB of unified texture video memory buffer, which offers instantaneous response for demanding tasks like animation and solid modeling. You can also select a model

Figure 1.27.

IBM IntelliStation M Pro family member.

48 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs with Intense3D Wildcat 4110 with 64 MB of frame and 64 MB of texture video memory for exceptional responses and performance for demanding applications. For high-performance 2D, select models that use the high-resolution Matrox Millennium G400 high-performance 2D AGP graphics accelerator with 16 MB of video memory. IBM’s IntelliStation E Pro models are a new line of single-processor value-based workstation systems. When used with Windows NT Workstation, they offer unprecedented capability and performance at a PC system price. New models of the IntelliStation E Pro provide processing muscle at 933 MHz with new dynamic media instructions and enhanced floating point performance offered by the Intel Pentium III processor and Rambus memory technology. From its sleek and elegant exterior design to its uncluttered interior, the IntelliStation E Pro is thoughtfully designed for easy upgrades and power. All models have one memory RIMM slot and three adapter slots available for upgrades (except SCSI models, which have one less slot available). The manageability features of the IntelliStation family benefit all users, not just those with hundreds of machines on their networks. Using Wake on LAN, LCCM, or Client Services for Netfinity, most administration and management of a network can be accomplished from a remote administration location. This reduces the number of on-site calls needed to administer a network. Before we take a closer look at IBM’s PC technology, we should mention that IBM is well under way in developing IntelliStation products that are optimized to take advantage of the Intel IA-64 architecture and Itanium 64-bit processors. Based on new technologies and performance enhancements, the Itanium 64-bit processor is designed to provide users with the most advanced visual computing workstation technologies available to date. We expect IBM to announce new workstations concurrent with Intel’s announcement of Itanium processor availability this year.

A Closer Look There are many elements that together provide the functions and performance of a computer. The remainder of this chapter provides a closer look at the following elements of IBM’s personal computers:


•

Microprocessors

•

Memory

•

Disk storage

•

Bus architecture and expansion slots

•

Graphics

•

Ports

•

Keyboards

49

Microprocessors and Memory Although there are many electronic circuits in personal computers, two key elements contribute the most to the system’s capabilities and performance. These are the microprocessor and the Random Access Memory (RAM), called simply the memory. The microprocessor and memory, along with other circuits, reside on a circuit board called the system board in most personal computers. In some, however, such as IBM’s Netfinity 7000 server, this circuitry is packaged on a processor card installed in a special slot on the system board. Microprocessor Basics The microprocessor is typically the most important item in a computer system because it executes the instructions that make up a computer program, acts as the control center for information flow inside the computer, and performs calculations on the data. It is a single computer chip containing many thousands or even millions of microscopic circuits that work together to execute computer programs. The microprocessor does the data manipulation or “thinking” necessary to perform tasks for the user. The microprocessor is the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the computer. It is the place where most of the control and computing functions occur. All operating system and application program in-

50 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs structions are executed here. Most information passes through it, whether that information is a keyboard stroke, data from a disk, or information from a communication network. The processor needs data and instructions for each processing operation that it performs. Data and instructions are loaded from memory into data-storage locations, known as registers, in the processor. Registers are also used to store the data that results from each processing operation until the data is transferred to memory. The microprocessor is packaged as an integrated circuit that contains one or more Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs, or execution units), a floating point unit, an on-board cache, and registers for holding instructions, data, and control circuitry. This circuitry is used to perform the binary mathematics electrically inside the microprocessor. A fundamental characteristic of all microprocessors is the rate at which they perform operations. This characteristic is called the clock rate and is measured in millions of cycles per second or megahertz (MHz). The maximum clock rate of a microprocessor is determined by how fast the internal logic of the chip can be switched. As silicon fabrication processes are improved, the integrated devices on the chip become smaller and can be switched faster. Thus, the clock speed can be increased. Multiprocessing The speed of the microprocessor has a significant effect on the performance of the computer. The internal structure or architecture of the microprocessor also determines the inherent capabilities of the personal computer in which it is used. Another way to increase the performance of the computer is through the use of multiple processors in a system, called multiprocessing. The two main types of multiprocessing are asymmetric and symmetric. In asymmetric (or loosely coupled) processing, the CPUs are dedicated to specific tasks, so a CPU can be idle if a specific task is not needed. Asymmetric processing is no longer commonly used in the PC environment. In symmetric (tightly coupled) processing, each CPU is available for any process task. An SMP, or Symmetric MultiProcessing, system enhances performance by allowing the computer’s whole workload to be distributed among all the CPUs. Additional CPUs act like all the others in processing tasks or threads of execution.


51

As there is overhead in managing additional processors, the system performance gain will be less than 100% for each processor. The performance gain depends on the operating system and type of application used. An operating system must support SMP. Applications also need to be designed for SMP (i.e., multithreaded) to realize the full potential of SMP. IBM’s new Netfinity servers and IntelliStation PCs have support for SMP. For example, the IntelliStation Z Pro and M Pro support dual Pentium III processors and the Netfinity 8600 server supports as many as eight of Intel’s new Pentium III Xeon processors. RISC vs. CISC There are two basic categories of microprocessors used in personal computers and workstations: CISC (Complex Instruction Set Computing) processors and RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing) processors. Although this book deals primarily with the IBM PCs, which use CISC technology, it is useful to understand the difference, as RISC-based computers are overlapping high-end PCs. IBM originally developed the first RISC processor in the mid1970s. The original concept of RISC was that by reducing the number of instructions that a CPU supports and thereby reducing the complexity of the chip, individual instructions could execute faster to achieve greater performance even though more instructions might be needed to complete a task. However, modern RISC processors usually support more instructions and more complex instructions than CISC processors (supporting more instructions means having a larger instruction set—commands in bit patterns that the CPU understands). The concept of reducing the number of instructions to make the remaining ones faster is not a key CISC vs. RISC differentiation. Most processors today average 1 clock cycle or less per instruction, no matter how complex their instruction sets. What really distinguishes RISC from CISC is deeply rooted in the chip architectures. CISC (Complex Instruction Set Computing) processors are micro code-based. Micro code is a collection of steps the processor must do to process an instruction. Micro code offers CISC designers great flexibility in creating instruction sets. The process of executing micro code to interpret an instruction, however, is slower than having the same instruction directly executed by the hardware as in RISC. The

52 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs existence of a micro code interpreter in the processor to execute these complex instructions introduces an overhead that slows down the execution of the more frequently occurring simple instructions. RISC instructions generally execute in fewer machine cycles than CISC instructions. IBM’s RISC processors use instructions that are consistently 32 bits long, whereas X86 CISC instructions can vary from 8 to 120 bits. These attributes make RISC systems inherently more efficient. RISC CPUs achieve their performance by processing instructions faster than CISC CPUs. The chips adhere to RISC-specific design principles, whose goal is to complete an instruction every CPU clock cycle. To do this, RISC chips employ a uniform instruction size, which expedites the fetching of instructions. RISC processors do not have to pause and retrieve additional words to complete a pending instruction, as CISC processors sometimes do. The key questions one should ask in comparing the two technologies are how fast the processor (CISC or RISC) can execute instructions, what software it runs, and how well it runs existing software. Applications and operating systems that run on Intel X86 systems will not run natively on RISC processors without being recompiled. To run them without recompilation, the applications would need to be translated or run under emulation (translation on the fly). If an application or operating system has to be translated or run under an emulator, it executes much more slowly than the native mode applications. Current operating systems that support RISC-based systems include UNIX, IBM’s AIX (Advanced Interactive eXecutive), IBM’s OS/2 Warp, and Microsoft’s Windows NT. IBM’s (CISC-based) personal computers run on operating systems that include DOS (Disk Operating System); OS/2 Warp; Microsoft’s Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT; and Novell’s Netware. Most of today’s RISC processor designs—PowerPC, Alpha AXP, Sun SPARC, MIPS R4000, and Intel i960—are used in the class of machines typically called workstations. Workstations are usually intended to meet the needs of high-end desktop engineering, design, and scientific users, whereas today’s CISC processor designs—Intel X86, Motorola 68XXX, Intel Pentium, Pentium Pro, and compatibles—are typically used in personal computers intended for applications in commercial environments that are more general purpose (e.g., general accounting, word processing, and business graphics). Personal computers are also well suited for education, communications,


53

and networking environments because of the large number of applications in these areas. Now let’s take a closer look at the different microprocessors that are used in IBM’s personal computers. Intel Microprocessors Since the beginning of the PC, IBM has continued to make computers based on Intel’s line of CISC microprocessors. Figure 1.28 shows a history of the generations of Intel’s processors. Although IBM manufactured some number of their own 386- and 486-compatible processors, the majority of IBM’s commercial PC models have used Intel processors. IBM’s consumer PC models use either Intel or AMD processors. IBM PCs have evolved from Intel’s 8088, 8086, 286, 386, and 486 to today’s Pentium III and Itanium microprocessor architectures. Let’s take look at this historical trek. In 1978 the Intel 8086–8088 Microprocessor was a pivotal sale to IBM’s new personal computer division, which made the 8088 the brains

Introduction Year

Internal Processor

Bus Width

1971 1972 1974 1978 1979 1982 1985 1989 1993 1995 1997 1997 1998 1999 2000 2000 2000

4004 8008 8080 8086 8088 80286 80386 DX 80486 DX Pentium Pentium Pro Pentium MMX Pentium II Celeron Pentium III Pent III Xeon Itanium I64 Pentium IIII

4 bits 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 64 bits 32 bits 64 bits 64 bits Dual 64b Dual 64b 128 bits 128 bits

Figure 1.28.

Clock

Number of Transistors

Addressable Memory

108KHz 108KHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 25 MHz 60 MHz 150 MHz 166 MHz 233 MHz 266MHz 450MHz 866MHz 800MHz 1.4GHz

2,300 3,500 6,000 29,000 29,000 134,000 275,000 1,200,000 3.2 million 5.5 million 4.5 million 7.5 million 7.5 million >10 million >10 million >10 million >10 million

640 bytes 16K 64K 1 MB 1 MB 16 MB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 4 GB 64 GB 64 GB 64 GB 64 GB > 64 GB 64 GB

History of Intel’s processors.

54 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs of IBM’s new hit product—the IBM PC. The 8088’s success propelled Intel into the ranks of the Fortune 500, and Fortune magazine named the company one of the “Business Triumphs of the Seventies.” By 1982, the 286 microprocessor, also known as the 80286, was the first Intel processor that could run all the software written for its predecessor. This software compatibility remains a hallmark of Intel’s family of microprocessors. Within 6 years of its release, there were an estimated 15 million 286-based personal computers installed around the world. In 1985 Intel introduced the 386 microprocessor, which featured 275,000 transistors. It was a 32-bit chip and was “multitasking,” meaning it could run multiple programs at the same time. In 1989 the Intel 486 microprocessor generation provided the power to go from a (DOS) command-level computer into point-and-click computing. The Intel 486 processor was the first to offer a built-in math co-processor, which speeds up computing because it offers complex math functions from the central processor. The Intel Pentium Processor was introduced in 1993 and allowed computers to more easily incorporate “real-world” data such as speech, sound, handwriting, and photographic images. The Intel Pentium Pro Processor, which boasted 5.5 million transistors, was released in the fall of 1995. The Pentium Pro processor was designed to fuel 32-bit server and workstation-level applications, enabling fast computer-aided design, mechanical engineering, and scientific computation. In 1997 Intel announced the 7.5-million-transistor Pentium II processor, which incorporated Intel MMX technology—designed specifically to process video, audio, and graphics data efficiently. In 1998, the Pentium II Xeon processor was introduced to meet the performance requirements of midrange and higher servers and workstations. It also featured technical innovations specifically designed for workstations and servers that utilize demanding business applications such as Internet services, corporate data warehousing, digital content creation, and electronic and mechanical design automation. Systems based on the processor can be configured to scale to four or eight processors and beyond. The Intel Celeron Processor, announced in 1999, provided a lower-cost strategy of developing processors for specific market segments. The Celeron is designed for the value PC market segment. It provides great performance at an exceptional value, and it delivers excellent performance for uses such as gaming and educational software. The Intel Celeron processor with clock speeds of up to 566


55

MHz for desktops and 500 MHz for mobile computers with 128 KB L2 cache is designed to meet the core needs and affordability requirements common to many new or entry PC users. Also in 1999 Intel introduced the Pentium III processor, which features 70 new instructions—Internet streaming SIMD extensions— that dramatically enhance the performance of advanced imaging, 3D, streaming audio, video, and speech recognition applications. It was designed to significantly enhance Internet experiences, allowing users to do such things as browse through realistic online museums and stores and download high-quality video. The processor incorporates 9.5 million transistors and was introduced using 0.25-micron technology. The latest high-end Pentium III processor features a new processor core technology with internal clock speeds of up to 933 MHz and a 133 MHz front side bus for enhanced application performance. In 1999, Intel also introduced the new Pentium III Xeon processor, which targets Intel’s offerings to the workstation and server market segments, providing additional performance for e-commerce applications and advanced business computing. These new processors incorporate the Pentium III processor’s 70 SIMD instructions, which enhance multimedia and streaming video applications. The Pentium III Xeon processor’s advance cache technology speeds information from the system bus to the processor, significantly boosting performance. With speeds up to 933 MHz, Intel Pentium III Xeon processors are specifically designed to meet the demanding scalability and reliability requirements of mainstream and high-end Netfinity servers and IntelliStation workstations with multiprocessor configurations. The features of the Pentium III Xeon processor eliminate the key roadblocks that previously limited performance on the most demanding IntelliStation workstation or Netfinity server. The processor core speed executes instructions quickly, while dynamic execution and smooth multiprocessing allow work to be performed in parallel. Intel’s full-speed L2 cache, large cache sizes, and 133 MHz system bus reduce memory latency, facilitating the movement of data through the processor and I/O devices. Intel’s latest line of line of IA-64 processors was announced this year and named the Intel Itanium processor. Previously known by the code name Merced, the Itanium processor employs a 64-bit architecture and enhanced instruction handling to greatly increase the performance of demanding e-business, visualization, computation, and multimedia op-

56 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs erations. IBM IntelliStation workstations and Netfinity servers, optimized to take advantage of the Intel IA-64 architecture and Itanium 64-bit processors, are currently in development. These new high-performance, 64-bit-based workstations and servers will benefit customers working with large models and/or data sets in fields such as engineering, scientific analysis, simulations, and digital creation. Mobile Pentium Processors Available on select ThinkPad notebooks, the Intel Mobile Pentium III processor has several new enhancements over the Mobile Pentium II processor. Like the Pentium III processor, the Mobile Pentium III processor offers higher speeds (up to 650 MHz), SIMD instructions, and Advanced Transfer Cache for an increase in performance. The Mobile Pentium II processor is available in clock speeds of up to 400 MHz with 256 KB of L2 cache at processor speed, in form factors designed to exploit the size and weight limitations of mobile systems while improving the power of the processors through a breakthrough manufacturing process. The Mobile Pentium II processor has DIB architecture, which offers simultaneous parallel access to data. Both the Mobile Pentium III processors and the Mobile Pentium II processors help high-performance notebooks take advantage of new and emerging technologies such as DVD, high-speed wireless communication, robust multimedia, cutting-edge manageability, and next-generation operating systems. Additionally, Mobile Pentium III processor- and Mobile Pentium II processor-based notebooks support Intel’s Wired for Management (WfM) initiative, focused on enhancing the control and support of mobile systems. WfM-compliant systems can take advantage of the latest Advanced System Management technologies. The Mobile Pentium III processor also features Intel SpeedStep technology, creating a new performance and usage paradigm with current speeds up to 650 MHz. This chip’s two performance modes allow near desktop processor speed with all the benefits of mobility. The maximum performance mode offers near desktop processor speed while connected to external power, and the battery optimized performance mode offers a balance between performance and battery life by providing a 40 to 50% reduction in Central Processing Unit (CPU) power consumption while maintaining 80% of the maximum performance mode.


57

Intel Chip Sets Intel also provides chip sets for most of the Intel microprocessors today. These chip sets provide the required hardware support for components like the systems memory bus, the processor’s advance cache technology, and the graphics bus. For example, the Intel 820 chip set, featured in select IBM PC 300PL models and select IntelliStation E Pro workstations, supports the latest Pentium III processors and features support for AGP 4×, Ultra-ATA 66, 133 MHz front side bus, and Rambus (RDRAM) memory. RDRAM, or Rambus DRAM, is a new, extremely high-bandwidth memory designed to work with a few of the latest, high-performance PC chip sets. Rambus technology uses a narrower but much faster (up to 800 data transfers per second) data channel to achieve memory transfer speeds of up to twice the speed of SDRAM. The addressing scheme employed for RDRAM allows multiple overlap of new memory addresses with previously requested data packets. The combination of the RDRAM memory, increased microprocessor speed, 133 MHz front side bus, Advanced Transfer Cache, AGP 4× graphics support, and Ultra-ATA 66 enhances the performance of Pentium III processor-based systems, allowing for greater performance, flexibility, and longevity for mainstream PCs. Additionally, IBM PCs are available with chip sets from other manufacturers, supporting the latest Pentium III processors, AGP 4×, Ultra-ATA 66, and 133 MHz front side bus, but maintaining existing SDRAM memory to provide the latest technology while keeping costs down. The latest release of the Pentium III processor can utilize Intel’s 840 chip set. The 840 platform supports the new 133 MHz front side bus and is designed to maximize the processor, which allows for increased advantages in dual processing. The 840 is the first Intel chip set to enable scalable bandwidth for AGP, I/O, and memory. The I/O is scalable through the use of Intel’s Accelerated Hub Architecture (AHA). The Intel 840 includes 8-bit and 16-bit hub interfaces to allow I/O bandwidth scaling from 266 to 800 MBps through the use of P64H. The common hub interfaces can be carried forward into the future to allow more scalable designs (same chip set, multiple platforms) and maximum design reuse. Multiple RDRAM channels allow memory bandwidth to scale up to 3.2 GBps, twice that of the desktop chip set with single RDRAM channel. The 840 also enables

58 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs next-generation architecture, security, Ultra-ATA 66, and system manageability. Before leaving our discussion on processors, we should take a closer look at system designs that increase performance by making use of more than one processor, multiprocessing, and clustering. More on SMP The current de facto software/hardware specification for Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP) is MultiProcessing Specification 1.x (MPS 1.x). The Integrated Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC), which is built into the P54C and following Pentium and Pentium Pro processors, allows MPS 1.x-enabled operating systems to run without any customization. MPS 1.x outlines a standard procedure for the BIOS and operating system to recognize and communicate with multiple processors and Intel’s APIC (Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller). The APIC is responsible for assigning tasks to each processor. Previously, vendors had to implement APIC capability external to the processor, creating a proprietary specification. The APIC scheduler dispatches interrupts to the processor executing the least important task. An additional performance increase is realized through the operating system scheduler. Because the operating system handles the CPU scheduling, the applications do not need to be aware of the number of processors available. MPS 1.x defines a software/hardware standard that recognizes if multiple processors are present and configures systems automatically. It allows systems to run compliant operating systems from their shrink-wrapped versions, thus avoiding different sets of drivers for each MP system. A cost-effective SMP design is implemented by the IBM PC server 320 and 520, in which a single L2 cache is shared among the processors. These dual-processor systems make use of the APIC in the Pentium for interprocessor communications. The Netfinity 7000 servers incorporate an SMP design with a dedicated L2 cache for each processor. This design allows more cache hits than a shared L2 cache, improving performance. Now let’s take the idea of using multiple processors a little further. By linking multiple SMP systems together with a dedicated high-speed bus, you can share system resources by clustering. A cluster is several whole computers (usually two to eight) that are used as


59

a single resource. The term “whole computer” means a complete, standalone computer with at least one processor (typically SMP), memory, I/O, operating system, power supply, cabinet, and so on. The term “single resource” means some software is used to make the cluster appear as a single entity. The cluster provides such functions as automatically running jobs on the currently least-loaded computer in the cluster, allowing the user to query its progress without having to know where it is. Clusters attempt to provide the affordability of an off-the-shelf approach to system design coupled with the scalability, security, and reliability of minicomputers and mainframes. Clusters are connected by direct intermachine connectors using industry-standard facilities such as Ethernet, IBM Token Ring, FDDI, ATM, Fibre Channel, SCSI, and so on. The computers in a cluster are called nodes. Nodes can be different types of systems, and each may or may not be an SMP system. The operating system and some administration tools serve to make clusters appear as a single system. Clusters are used to increase availability and/or performance. There are two phases of clustering. The first phase is fail-over, which emphasizes availability. Fail-over requires a second node to automatically take over the work if the first one goes down. The backup acquires control of the disks, readjusts its own LAN adapter to act as the failed machine so that clients do not have to know anything happened (IP address takeover), takes over WAN communications, and gets the application and/or subsystem running again. Although not necessary, the backup can implement hot-standby, which means it sits idle as it waits for the primary to fail. IBM demonstrated a clustering prototype for OS/2 Warp server, Version 4 for a fail-over configuration at PC Expo in June 1996. The two PC servers used a shared SCSI disk design. The second phase is when two or more nodes perform parallel processing. Parallel processing provides high availability by mutual takeover, in which nodes watch each other while all do useful work. If a node fails, the other node(s) take over the work. Unlike a fault-tolerant system, however, you may notice performance degradation when something fails because the cluster will balance the same load on fewer systems. Any application can run on some kind of cluster, even if it was not designed to do so. It would only run on one system in the cluster, and if that system crashed, all application data would be lost. An application must be written to the operating system clustering APIs

60 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs (Application Programming Interfaces) to take advantage of a cluster’s load balancing and fault tolerance. Such APIs give an application access to all system resources, including processors, memory, and disks. These APIs require lock management so that two users who try to access the same record in a database from two different systems in the cluster do not cause a conflict. A clustering scheduling program called a distributed lock manager works like a file-locking mechanism in a traditional database management system (DBMS). It is easier to lock files on a traditional DBMS because the program resides on one server. A similar type of locking is needed by an application distributed over several nodes in a cluster. In addition to having the required APIs for clustering, systems management tools become even more important. Netfinity Manager—IBM’s award-winning LAN management software—provides management capability for IBM’s PC servers and PC server clustering solutions. With Netfinity Manager, administrators of clustered systems can monitor the status of each server, perform workload balancing, and do performance tuning. In developing clustering solutions, IBM PC servers continue to support a wide variety of industry-standard protocols and the most popular network operating systems as well as leveraging IBM’s vast heritage of clustering technologies. IBM differentiates itself with its cross-platform designs. Advanced System Management Processor The IBM system management processor family is composed of two products—the Advanced System Management Adapter and the IBM Netfinity system management processor. The Advanced System Management Adapter is a full-length ISA adapter that provides remote system management function independent of the server status. This adapter is included as standard on selected mainstream and high-end servers, and is available as an option for entry-level servers. The IBM Netfinity system management processor is a PCI chip that is integrated on the planar of select Netfinity servers. These processors also provide the system administrator with extensive remote management of IBM Netfinity servers even when the system has been switched off or when it has failed. They are integrated subsystem solutions independent of the hardware and operating system, complementing the server hardware instrumentation by monitoring, logging events, reporting on many conditions, and providing full remote access independent of the server sta-


61

tus. Continuous power is supplied to the system management processor on the Netfinity and, on some other Netfinity models, to the IBM Advanced System Management Adapter through a system board connection to the system power supply, also referred to as continuous power. On models that do not support continuous power, an external power supply can be used to provide independent power to the IBM Advanced System Management Adapter. Independent power is required to allow you access to the server in the event that the system is powered off or is otherwise unavailable. Memory The memory is also a very important part of a computer. Memory is the set of electronic chips that provide a “workspace” for the microprocessor. The memory holds the information being used by the microprocessor. This memory is called Random Access Memory (RAM) because it can store and retrieve any piece of information independent of the sequential order in which it was originally stored. The smallest piece of information that can be stored in memory is called a bit. These bits are grouped into bytes (8 bits), words (16 bits), and double words (32 bits) to form the computer’s representation of numbers, letters of the alphabet, and instructions in a program. The RAM memory in a PC is usually one of four types: Extended Data Out (EDO), Fast Page Mode (FPM), Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), or Rambus (RDRAM). EDO memory was common in many entry-level systems, and SDRAM has become the de facto memory used in today’s commercial systems. However, Rambus technology (discussed earlier), which uses a narrower but much faster (up to 800 data transfers per second) data channel to achieve memory transfer speeds up to twice the speed of SDRAM, is becoming more common in high-end systems. The FPM memory design allows for repeated memory accesses within a range (usually 2 KB, called a page) with minimum wait states. EDO DRAM provides increased performance by loading data while it is switching to a new address rather than waiting between these operations as Fast Page Mode memory does. SDRAM provides enhanced performance over FPM and EDO memory. With FPM and EDO memory, signals are routed through a controller chip and the DRAM often must wait for the controller to catch up. However, SDRAM is tied to the speed of the system (local) bus, which elimi-

62 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs nates wait states. With the new Intel 100 MHz memory bus, systems can now be designed with much faster memory access. This makes the implementation of control interfaces easier, and it makes column (but not row) access time quicker. The clock for SDRAM is coordinated with the CPU clock, so the memory and microprocessor are synchronized, allowing the processor to perform other operations without waiting for the memory to locate the address and read or write the data. Effectively, synchronization reduces the time it takes to execute commands and transmit data. SDRAM is necessary as faster system bus speeds become common. For example, a Pentium 166/66 MHz has a 66 MHz system bus. However, new 100 MHz buses are expected to be more common in the future. Although SDRAM access time is usually 60 ns, a 100 MHz bus supports a 10-ns page cycle time once the pipeline has been filled. A 66 MHz bus will only support a 15-ns page cycle time. The amount of memory in IBM personal computers ranges from 64 MB (IBM ThinkPad) to 32 GB (Netfinity server). As the amount of memory increases, so do the chances of having a memory failure, which can cause the computer system to deliver erroneous information or abruptly halt the system altogether. To combat this problem, the IBM personal computers that can be configured with the largest memories, including the IBM PC server systems, employ schemes to detect and correct memory defects, thus protecting the integrity of the information stored in the computer system’s main memory. These schemes, called Error Checking and Correcting (ECC), can detect single- and double-bit errors and correct single-bit errors. The IBM PC server 704 incorporated one of the simplest ECC implementations, called Error Checking and Correcting-Parity (ECC-P). With ECC-P, a single bit (called a parity bit) is appended onto every byte (8 bits) in memory. The parity bit (either a 1 or a 0) is automatically generated by the ECC circuitry based on the value of the associated byte and then stored in memory alongside that word. A new parity bit is calculated and stored every time a byte is written to memory. Later, when that byte is read back from memory, the value stored in the corresponding parity bit is checked to make sure that the byte didn’t somehow get corrupted through some type of memory failure. The ECC-P approach used in server systems allows the server not only to detect but also to correct a single-bit memory error by recalculating the correct byte value and presenting the corrected byte. Thus, ECC-P allows a server system to continue normal operation in the


63

event of a single-bit memory failure, whereas a parity-based system would simply halt. Another advantage is that ECC-P can also detect double-bit errors and some three- and four-bit memory errors. These errors, though rare, may go undetected in a parity-based personal computer. However, the additional circuitry/calculations necessary to implement ECC-P can slow the memory subsystem down by 10 to 14% because the correcting actually takes place in the separate ECC memory controller (not in the memory itself). Another ECC technology is called ECC-On-SIMM (EOS). EOS provides ECC function to systems without an ECC memory controller by error checking and correcting on the memory SIMM itself. Thus, performance is not impacted as with ECC-P and standard ECC memory. The latest ECC memory technology used in IBM’s Netfinity servers incorporates even faster SDRAM ECC parity memory on a DIMM. At this point it is prudent to mention three other types of memory in personal computers: Read Only Memory (ROM), flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), and Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) memory. Each personal computer contains some amount of ROM, which permanently stores some special housekeeping programs used to manage the internal operation of the computer. The memory is called ROM because information it contains cannot be altered or written to, it can only be read. The information stored in ROM is preserved even when the computer is turned off. Programs stored in ROM are more closely examined in Chapter 3. In many of the newer personal computers, flash EPROM is used to store the same housekeeping programs that were traditionally stored in standard ROM. As the name implies, the flash EPROM is a read only memory that can be erased and reprogrammed using a special technique. Like standard ROM memory, the information is preserved even when the computer is turned off. However, because the flash EPROM can be altered, the information can be loaded into the EPROM from a diskette, using the utility software that comes with the system. This provides an easy way to correct for possible errors once you have already purchased the system or to add enhanced function to upgrade performance. CMOS memory gets its name from the transistor technology used to build the memory. The information in CMOS memory, unlike the information in ROM, can be altered at any time. The low power consumption inherent in CMOS technology allows the internal battery to preserve the information stored in CMOS memory even when the com-

64 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs puter is turned off. The CMOS memory is used to store system configuration and diagnostic information. The CMOS memory chip also has circuitry that automatically keeps track of the current time of day and date. This time and date information is available for use by an application program and is used by operating systems to track when disk files were created, when files were last modified, and so on.

Disk Storage Disk storage, commonly used in personal computers, provides a relatively inexpensive way to store computer data and programs. The information stored on disk can be easily modified or kept unchanged over long periods of time as an archive. The information remains intact whether the computer is turned on or off. Thus, disk storage is said to be nonvolatile. All personal computers (except for medialess workstations) utilize two types of disk storage: removable disks and fixed disks. It is also worth mentioning here that optical disk storage, covered in Chapter 3, is growing in importance as multimedia applications become more prevalent. For now, let’s look at the removable diskette and fixed disk storage commonly used with personal computers. Removable Disk Storage Diskettes are portable magnetic storage media that can be used to record and later retrieve computer information via a diskette drive. All IBM personal computers use 3.5-inch diskettes as opposed to the 5.25-inch diskettes used by earlier personal computers. These diskette types are compared in Figure 1.29. The outer case of the 5.25-inch diskettes is flexible and doesn’t completely cover the sensitive magnetic material actually containing the information. The 3.5-inch diskette has a rigid outer case that completely encloses the magnetic material. A sliding metal cover, which protects the magnetic material, is retracted only while the diskette is inside the diskette drive. For these reasons, the 3.5-inch diskettes are less susceptible to damage that may result during normal handling. Further, the 3.5-inch diskettes are small enough to fit conveniently into a shirt pocket or purse. The write protect switch (not visible) in the lower left corner on the back of the diskette allows you to prevent the acci-


65

133 mm (5.25") 90 mm (3.5") Access to magnetic surface Index hole

133 mm (5.25")

Write Actual protection magnetic tab disk

Flexible vinyl outer jacket (a) 5.25" diskette used by PCs (Fits in drawer)

Figure 1.29.

Access to magnetic surface (only when retracted) 94 mm (3.7")

Write Actual protect switch magnetic (underneath) disk

Retractable metal sheath

Hard plastic outer case

(b) 3.5" diskette used by most Personal Computers (Fits in shirt pocket or purse)

The 3.5-inch diskette compared to the 5.25-inch diskette.

dental overwriting of information. When the switch is positioned so that the square hole in the lower left corner is open, the diskette is write protected. When the switch is blocking the square hole, information can be written to the diskette. Some diskettes, such as the Reference Diskette, do not have this switch and are therefore permanently write protected. One of the primary functions of the diskette is to provide portable disk storage, allowing for the transfer of programs and data between computers. IBM personal computers can use several different types of 3.5-inch diskettes. The first type can hold up to 1.0 MB of information. However, for the diskette to be used, it must be formatted. Just as you must load a filing cabinet with folders before you can begin to store documents, the computer system must organize the diskette by writing some information on the diskette—that is, the computer system must format the diskette. This format information takes up some of the 1.0 MB of space on the diskette. The available space remaining after the diskette is formatted is called the diskette’s formatted capacity. The formatted capacity of the 1.0 MB diskette is 720 KB. These 720 KB diskettes can be read and written by any of the diskette drives used in IBM personal comput-

66 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs ers—which is why software companies sometimes distribute their software on 720 KB diskettes. The second type of 3.5-inch diskette used with personal computers can hold 2.0 MB of information. Again, this diskette must be formatted before it can be used. The formatted capacity of the 2.0 MB diskette is 1.44 MB. These 1.44 MB diskettes usually have the letters HD for High Density in the upper right corner. The 1.44 MB diskettes can be read or written by the 1.44 MB diskette drives and 2.88 MB diskette drives but not by the 720 KB diskette drives used in some older IBM personal computers. A third type of diskette used with personal computers holds 4.0 MB of information. As always, this diskette must be formatted before it can be used. The formatted capacity of the 4.0 MB diskette is 2.88 MB. The 2.88 MB diskettes usually have the letters ED in the upper right corner and can be read and written by a 2.88 MB diskette drive. Additional removable diskette technologies are available that can be added to your PC. These optional drives support from 100 MB to 2 GB of storage. “Super drives” and “Zip” drives are among many of the popular brand options that offer great alternatives to backing up and storing large amounts of data. It is important that the user format the different diskette types only as intended (e.g., 1.44 MB diskettes formatted to 1.44 MB, not 720 KB or 2.88 MB). Formatting a diskette to a capacity other than that which is intended may result in loss of information stored on the diskette. The 2.88 MB diskette drive, provided as standard equipment in larger personal computer models, has circuitry that detects which type of diskette has been inserted (called media sense) and automatically formats the diskette correctly. However, older 720 KB and 1.44 MB diskette drives have no such circuitry and will assume the diskette is a 720 KB or 1.44 MB diskette respectively unless you specify otherwise when formatting the diskette. A new type of removable disk storage called the IBM Microdrive (shown in Figure 1.30) was announced by IBM in 1999. The IBM 340 MB Microdrive’s compact, lightweight, breakthrough design makes it ideal for mobile users. The increasing number of devices that support the Microdrive, including select digital cameras and compact flash-compatible devices, ensures flexibility, expandability and uniformity across platforms.The Microdrive can be accessed via a PCMCIA Type II slot or by using an IBM CompactFlash USB Reader.


Figure 1.30.

67

IBM Microdrive.

The Microdrive is compatible with select IBM NetVista, IBM PC 300s, IntelliStations, and IBM ThinkPad notebooks. The Microdrive is a true hard drive. It is based on the IBM Giant MagnetoResistive (GMR) head technology and contains a single platter that spins at 4,500 rpm. The use of GMR technology means the drive combines a high level of performance and the ability to survive the rough handling associated with mobile use. The Microdrive measures 0.2 × 1.7 × 1.4 inches, weighs 0.56 oz. and draws less than 500 mA of power. This CompactFlash+ Type II rated device has a 15-ms average seek time, with a sustained data-transfer rate of 1.8 to 3.0 Mbps.

68 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs The IBM 340 MB Microdrive is so small (the size of a matchbook) you could easily carry several in one hand, but its miniature appearance belies the drive’s ample storage capacity, practicability, and ruggedness. Because the Microdrive is as simple to use as a disk drive, it is ideal for carrying important data and even digital images as you travel. We expect IBM to announce a 1 GB model of the Micodrive later this year. Fixed Disks Another kind of disk storage used with IBM personal computers is called a fixed disk (or simply a disk). Fixed disks are high-capacity magnetic storage devices commonly used in most personal computers as well as in the largest computer systems. They consist of a drive mechanism with permanently installed metallic disks coated with a magnetic material. An activity light is usually provided and is illuminated when a fixed disk is being accessed. The circuitry that controls these fixed disks is packaged with the fixed disk drive itself (called an integrated controller), on the system board, or on a separate feature card. Fixed disk subsystem performance is important to the overall performance of a computer in most applications. This is especially true in virtual storage and/or LAN server environments, where there is heavy transfer of information between fixed disk and memory. The performance of a fixed disk refers to the rate at which information can be located and transferred between the fixed disk and the memory. As with traditional record albums, information on a fixed disk is stored in concentric rings on the disk platter surface. Each ring is called a track. To read information from a fixed disk, the actuator must first move the read/write head to the proper track. The time it takes (on the average) for the actuator to move the read/write head over the proper track (or seek the track) is called the average seek time—usually expressed in milliseconds (1/1,000 second). Once the read/write head is located over the right track, it must wait until the disk rotation brings the right part of the track under the read/write head. The time it takes for this to happen (on the average) is called the average latency of the drive—also expressed in milliseconds. Finally, after the proper track and proper part of the track are positioned under the read/write head, the information is transferred between the disk controller circuitry and the disk one bit at a time in a continuous stream as the disk surface passes underneath the read/


69

write head. The speed at which this is done is called the data transfer rate and is expressed in millions of bytes per second (MB/sec)—the shorter the seek time and latency, the better; the higher the data transfer rate, the better. All of these factors (and more) determine how the disk subsystem will contribute to or hinder overall system performance. Figure 1.31 shows the average seek time, average latency, and data transfer rates for fixed disks used in IBM personal computers. The circuitry that controls the fixed disks is also important. In some personal computers, this circuitry is built into the fixed disk drive itself, which is then cabled to the system board inside the computer. Such fixed disk drives are called Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) drives. The primary advantages of IDE drives are compactness and relatively low cost. The original version of IDE could only support two fixed disks, but the newer Enhanced IDE (used in the Aptiva and IBM PC families) supports up to four devices including fixed disks and CD-ROM drives. In other personal computers (e.g., much of the Netfinity family), the fixed disk control circuitry implements the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI). SCSI is an industry-standard way of connecting devices (internal and external) to computer systems. The advantage of the SCSI interface is versatility, in that it can be used to control fixed disks as well as many other types of devices—including tape drives, CD-ROM drives, printers, drive arrays, and so on. In some personal computers, the SCSI circuitry is packaged on a feature card installed in an expansion slot; in others it resides on the system board. Figure 1.32 shows how devices are attached to the SCSI control circuitry over a group of wires called the SCSI bus. Each

Fixed Disk Size 16 GB 20 GB 37.5 GB 40 GB 60 GB 75 GB

Average Seek 9.0 8.5 9.0 8.5 8.5 8.5

ms ms ms ms ms ms

Time Speed Data 5400 7200 5400 7200 7200 7200

RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM

Transfer Rate Interface 12 40 20 40 40 37

MB/s IDE MB/s ATA MB/s ATA MB/s Ultra ATA/100 MB/s Ultra ATA/100 MB/s Ultra ATA/100

Figure 1.31. Performance characteristics of fixed disk units used in IBM personal computers.


System Unit

SCSI I/O Controller (SCSI Device #0) MicroProcessor

MicroProcessor

MicroProcessor Expansion Slot

Disk Drive

Disk Drive (SCSI Device # N)

Tape Drive

Disk Drive

Disk Drive Disk Drive (SCSI Device #2) (SCSI Device #1)

Figure 1.32. SCSI devices are cabled to a SCSI.

SCSI-compatible device is attached to the SCSI bus in a daisy-chained fashion. Up to seven SCSI devices can be controlled (i.e., independently addressed) by a single SCSI controller. These devices can be, for example, a single disk unit, a single tape unit, or a single controller with up to seven other devices attached. To improve system performance, however, it is best not to load a single SCSI controller to its maximum. That is, it is often better to use multiple SCSI controllers rather than one SCSI controller, even when there are only seven (or fewer) SCSI devices to be attached. When a personal computer has multiple SCSI controllers, thought should be given to which SCSI device goes on each SCSI bus. For example, tape backup operations can often be accomplished more quickly if the tape drive being used as the backup device and the fixed disk unit being backed up do not share the same SCSI controller. Here is how SCSI works. When a controlling device, called an initiator (e.g., the SCSI controller circuitry), wants to perform an information transfer with another device, called a target (e.g., a fixed disk unit), the initiator arbitrates for control of the SCSI bus. Once the initiator has control of the bus, it issues one of the commands


71

defined in the SCSI standard protocol. Although the target device processes the command, the SCSI bus is available for any other SCSI command traffic. When the target device is ready, it gains control of the bus and supplies the requested information along with a completion status to the original initiator. One of the primary differences between SCSI and earlier disk interfaces is that each SCSI device must have local processing capability to participate in the SCSI command protocol. That is, each SCSI device attached to the bus is responsible for doing much of its own processing (e.g., error checking, error correction, and retry of failing operations). Other fixed disk interface standards put the responsibility for managing the various devices in a centralized I/O controller rather than distributing the responsibility among the various connecting devices. In addition to the increased versatility mentioned earlier, this configuration gives SCSI an advantage because the work (e.g., error correction and error retries) is distributed over the processing capabilities of all SCSI devices, thereby off-loading the main computer system and putting the work where it can be done most efficiently. A disadvantage of SCSI is that each device must have local processing capability, which often implies higher cost. However, current technology usually makes this additional cost modest and future technology advances promise to further diminish the importance of this issue. There are many versions of SCSI used with personal computers: SCSI-1, SCSI-2, and UltraSCSI, also called SCSI-3. The maximum instantaneous transfer rates over the SCSI-1 bus can exceed 4 million bytes per second (4 MB/sec). With the SCSI-2, the maximum instantaneous transfer rate is over 20 million bytes per second (20 MB/sec). Other enhancements introduced with SCSI-2 include support for wider data paths between the disk drive and the SCSI controller (8, 16, or 32 bits with the SCSI-2 and only 8 bits for the SCSI-1) and the ability to send multiple commands to a device (called tag command queuing). Because the SCSI-2 is a superset of the SCSI-1, compatibility is preserved and a SCSI-1 device can be controlled by a SCSI-2 controller. UltraSCSI provides up to 40 MB/sec burst transfers across wide (16-bit) paths. The new Ultra160 SCSI interface capability enables up to 160 MB/sec instantaneous data transfers across wide (32-bit) paths. Some personal computers and/or some of the operating systems used with them come with a disk cache program designed to increase the performance of a computer’s fixed disk subsystem. A disk cache

72 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs program reserves an area of memory that it will use to temporarily store information retrieved off the disk. Later, if that information is needed (as it usually is), the delay associated with finding and transferring the information on the fixed disk is eliminated. That is, information you would normally read off the fixed disk is already in memory and ready for use. This is similar to the concept of the memory cache, discussed earlier. To enjoy the performance improvement afforded by the disk cache program, you must install it on your fixed disk and activate the program. Instructions for doing this are provided with the personal computer or operating system.

ISA/EISA/PCI/PCMCIA/AGP Expansion Slots Part of the reason for the popularity of the original IBM personal computers was their expansion slots, which allowed users to customize and add to their systems by installing optional feature cards. For the same reasons, today’s personal computers also provide expansion slots. There are several basic types of expansion slots used in IBM’s personal computers: Industry-Standard Architecture (ISA), Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA), PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect), and Micro Channel. Although technically not an expansion slot in the same way that ISA, EISA, and Micro Channel slots are, PCMCIA (personal computer Memory Card International Association) slots also allow users to customize and add additional function to their systems. This new expansion technology will also be covered in this section. In addition to the I/O expansion capabilities offered by ISA, EISA, Micro Channel, and PCMCIA, most of the newer IBM personal computers come with a feature called a local bus. A local bus differs from an I/O expansion bus because it is more directly attached to the microprocessor of the system. Although this direct attachment feature provides the opportunity to increase performance, it also introduces new limitations. Early uses of the local bus for expansion provided only a few slots, and they could only be used for a limited number of functions. The three primary local bus standards are VESA’s (Video Equipment Standards Association’s) VL bus, Intel’s PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect), and the AGP (Advanced Graphics Port) bus. The AGP interface is a platform bus specification that enables high-performance 3D graphics capabilities on PCs. AGP provides a high-bandwidth pipeline (bus) be-


73

tween the graphics controller and system memory. Three speeds of data transfer are supported by the AGP specification: 1× AGP operates at the traditional 66 MHz PCI bus speed; 2× AGP provides for two data transfers per 66 MHz clock cycle, for real data throughput of up to 500 MB per second, and 4× AGP enables four data transfers per cycle, providing real data throughput of up to 1 GB/s. PCI is the main general-purpose system I/O bus. The Accelerated Graphics Port interface has been designed specifically for dedicated use by graphics controllers and is not intended to replace PCI. PCI has evolved to a wider and faster version (64-bit, 66 MHz) as the bandwidth needs of PCI I/O functions exceed the capabilities of the 32-bit, 33 MHz version. The Accelerated Graphics Port is designed specifically for point-to-point graphics components. It is physically separated from the PCI bus and uses a separate connector. AGP support is specifically engineered to optimize the performance of computers based on the Pentium III processor with Dual Independent Bus (DIB) architecture. AGP is an extension of the DIB architecture. With DIB, there are two independent high-speed paths into the memory interface. The memory bandwidth to other devices in the system is significantly increased with AGP, particularly the graphics subsystem. DIB in conjunction with AGP improves system performance, particularly in graphics, in the following ways. First, AGP increases peak bandwidth up to eight times that of the PCI bus; higher sustained rates are possible via sideband addressing and split transactions. It also reduces contention with the CPU and I/O devices for bus and memory access. The PCI bus serves disk controllers, LAN chips, and video capture, if they are part of your system. AGP operates concurrently with, and independently from, most transactions on PCI. Further, CPU accesses to system RAM can proceed concurrently with the AGP RAM reads of the graphics chip because the chip set includes queuing hardware and supports out-of-order data arbitration. AGP provides an “extra port” to the graphics chip for memory access, so it can concurrently read textures from AGP memory while reading/writing Z-values and pixels from local memory. (Note: Zbuffer information can also be stored in AGP system memory; the implementation is up to the video vendor.) AGP also enables the CPU to write directly to shared system AGP memory when it needs to provide graphics data, such as commands or animated textures. Generally, the CPU can access main memory more quickly than it can

74 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs access graphics local memory via AGP, and certainly faster than via the PCI interface. Most PCI systems have only two available slots, which is not enough for PC servers. Servers require several adapter slots for disk controllers and LAN adapters. Usually only two slots are available because PCI allows ten loads. One load goes to each motherboard peripheral, the PCI bridge/controller, and an expansion bus bridge. Two loads go to each slot. One design (used in the PC server 325, 330, and 720) to increase PCI slots is a PCI-to-PCI bridge, which constructs a tree of buses using bridge chips. This is a cost-efficient design, but it has a slight degradation in performance caused by the latency built into the bridge. Less demanding add-in cards would go on the secondary PCI bus. Another design (used in the IBM PC server 704) to increase PCI slots is for two PCI buses to connect directly to the local bus via another bridge. The chip sets are more expensive, but they improve performance by removing the bridge latency problem and by doubling the bandwidth of available PCI-to-CPU transfers because they have two pipes instead of one. Figure 1.33 shows a bus architecture comparison. ISA, EISA, and PCI slots provide an effective way to upgrade and enhance the function of a desktop or server system, but what about expansion for portable systems such as notebooks and subnotebooks? The small size and low weight of these systems leave no room for the standard ISA or Micro Channel slots or the adapters that fit in them. The solution to this requirement is a relatively new standard called PCMCIA (personal computer Memory Card International Association). Technically speaking, PCMCIA is not really a computer bus architecture like ISA, EISA, and PCI, but rather more like a serial or

Data Path Width Data Bus Speed (MHz) Data Transfer Rates (MB/sec)

ISA

EISA

MC

VL-Bus

PCI

8/16 5.33/8.33

32 8.33

16/32/64 10

32/64 33/50

32/64 33/66

5.33/8.33

33

20/40/80/160

132/264

132/264

Figure 1.33. Bus architecture comparison.


75

parallel port. The fact that it is electrically more like a port than a bus is of little consequence because it still offers many of the upgrade features of the other buses while having some unique advantages of its own. The most important features are the small size, light weight, and low power consumption of the adapter cards, which are often called credit card adapters because they are about the size of a standard credit card. This makes PCMCIA an excellent method to upgrade and enhance the function of portable systems such as the ThinkPad family. In addition, PCMCIA slots are showing up on some desktop machines because they offer the same advantages. Another advantage that a PCMCIA adapter has over ISA or PCI adapters is that it can usually be installed into a system without removing the covers, even while the system is turned on! The PCMCIA standards encompass everything from card dimensions to system hardware and software in an attempt to provide compatibility across different hardware systems and operating systems. Unfortunately, as with some ISA and PCI adapters, compatibility problems do arise, so check to make sure that the PCMCIA adapters that you buy will work in your system. As long as both the system and the adapter cards fully meet the specified standards, there should be no problem. The PCMCIA standard was originally designed as a memory-card-only architecture, but now it includes I/O cards for modems, network communications, wireless communications, emulation adapters, and fixed disks. Three standards are currently contained within the overall PCMCIA standard. The Type I standard addresses memory cards, and the Type II and Type III standards address I/O cards. Although card thickness varies among the PCMCIA types, backward compatibility is ensured. A PCMCIA system that accepts Type II cards will also accept a Type I card, and a system that can accommodate a Type III card can accept two Type II or Type I cards, or one of each. As with ISA and PCI, it is common to see systems with multiple PCMCIA slots.

Graphics Images presented on a computer’s display are used to present information to the user. The quality of these images can directly affect the user’s productivity and enjoyment during a work session. Two hardware elements work together to generate computer images: the display and the

76 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs graphics circuitry. The display is the device that resembles a small television set and actually transforms the electronic signals from the computer system into light images discernible by the human eye. The images generated by the graphics circuitry and displayed on the screen are made up of patterns of many individual dots on the display, called picture elements (pels) or pixels, which blend together to form the desired image. The video memory (also called graphics memory or the frame buffer) portion of the graphics circuitry is used to hold the information, which is stored in a special format that will be directly converted into the images you see on the display screen. To change what you see on the display screen, the computer system simply changes the information stored in video memory. Two basic types of computer images can be generated through this pel pattern technique. The first type are called alphanumeric images. These are generated by selecting from predetermined libraries of characters called character sets. These character sets contain upper-and lowercase letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and many other symbols such as !, /, and @. The alphanumeric technique is depicted in Figure 1.34. Different character sets can be loaded by the software controlling the video circuitry, giving the characters a different appearance. The second type of image that personal computers can generate is called an All-Points-Addressable (APA) image. With APA images, there is no predetermined library of characters. Each individual pel on the display screen can be independently turned on or off by writ-

(One character)

A>

Figure 1.34. Mechanics of an alphanumeric image.


77

ing the appropriate bit patterns to the graphics memory. By changing this bit pattern, the color of any pel can also be changed. This technique is depicted in Figure 1.35. The APA technique can be used to generate complex “television-type” images. With APA images, the number of individual pels represented in video memory determines the number of pels that make up the image, or the resolution of the image, seen on the surface of the computer’s display—the more pels represented in the video memory, the higher the resolution of the image (assuming the display can also support that resolution). The number of bits associated with a single pel determines how many different colors or levels of brightness it can have. Through programming, the video circuitry can be instructed to organize video memory in different ways (called selecting a video mode), resulting in images with different resolutions and numbers of colors. The organization of video memory can be optimized for higher resolution with fewer colors or for lower resolution with more colors. The graphics circuitry in IBM personal computers provides support from 1 bit/pel (21 = bright or dark) to 24 bits/pel (224 = over 16.7 million different colors). That is, computer images generated by per-

Figure 1.35.

Mechanics of an APA image.

78 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs sonal computers can have from 2 (black and white) to 16.7 million different colors in them. With black-and-white displays, the graphics adapters translate the different colors that appear in a display into different brightness levels, also called shades of gray. Figures 1.36 and 1.37 compare the capabilities of different graphics circuitry used in personal computers in terms of maximum color video modes and maximum resolution video modes. The total number of colors that can be displayed at any one time is important for making information displayed on a computer screen as clear as possible, as well as making the image more pleasant. The resolution of a display refers to the level of detail that can be displayed on a computer screen. The higher the density of the pels, the higher the resolution, and the more detailed and clear an image will be. In other words, higher-resolution images make using a computer easier on the eyes. The graphics circuitry originally introduced with the PS/2 family was built around an IBM-designed chip called the Video Graphics Array (VGA) and 256 KB of video memory. The VGA, video memory, and associated circuitry were packaged on the system boards of the original PS/2s. Then Personal Systems started to use an enhanced version of the VGA known as the 16-bit Video Graphics Array (16-bit VGA). The 16-bit VGA was capable of exchanging information with the microprocessor twice as efficiently (16 bits at a time) as the original VGA (8 bits at a time). That is, there is a wider path (16-bit data bus) over which information is moved between the 16-bit VGA and the microprocessor as compared to that of VGA-based designs (8-bit

VGA 256 KB

16-bit VGA 256 KB 512 KB

386 SVGA 1 MB

Best APA modes: Maximum resolution mode

640 x 480 (16 colors)

640 x 480 640 x 480 (16 colors) (256 colors)

1024 x 768 (256 colors)

Maximum color mode

320 x 200 (256 colors)

320 x 200 640 x 480 (256 colors) (256 colors)

#640 x 480 (16,777,216 colors)

Best alphanumeric modes

720 x 400 (16 colors)

720 x 400 (16 colors)

Graphics memory size

720 x 400 (16 colors)

1056 x 400 (16 colors)

# Currently not supported by OS/2.

Figure 1.36. Capability comparisons of some IBM graphics circuitry.


SVGA Graphics memory size

XGA

XGA-2

1 MB

512 KB

1 MB

1 MB

Best APA modes Maximum resolution mode

1024 x 768 (256 colors)

*1024 x 768 (16 colors)

*1024 x 768 (256 colors)

1024 x 768 (256 colors)

Maximum color mode

1024 x 768 (256 colors)

Best alphanumeric modes

79

‡*1360 x 1024 (16 colors)

1056 x 400 (16 colors)

640 x 480 (256 colors)

*1056 x 400 (16 colors)

1024 x 768 (256 colors)

640 x 480 (65,536 colors)

†*640 x 480 (65,536 colors)

‡*800 x 600 (65,536 colors)

*1056 x 400 (16 colors)

1188 x 400 (16 colors)

* This is an interlaced mode (some images may have more flicker than those generated with non-interlaced modes). † This mode is not currently supported in OS/2 or DOS/Windows environments. ‡ Requires special multisync display that supports a resolution 1360 x 1024 and a pixel rate of up to 90 MHz.

Figure 1.37.

Capability comparisons of some IBM graphics circuitry.

data bus). This allowed 16-bit VGA systems to generate and manipulate images more quickly. The 16-bit VGA also had some other modes designed for use when the personal system is being used as a workstation attached to a larger IBM System/370 or System/390 computer. These other modes made the personal system’s display look more like the 327X family of terminals commonly used with System/370 and System/390 mainframe computers. Some personal systems that used the 16-bit VGA allowed the video memory to be expanded from 256 KB to 512 KB. This extra video memory held the additional information necessary to generate 640 × 480 images with up to 256 colors, as compared to the VGA, which could only support a resolution of 640 × 480 with 16 colors. Later on, IBM personal computer systems used an enhanced version of the VGA called the Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA). The SVGA implementations in the current systems have 1 MB of video memory—twice that of VGA and 16-bit VGA implementations. The SVGA graphics designs use the extra memory to create images of greater resolution and more colors (e.g., 1,024 × 768 with 256 col-

80 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs ors). Actually, several different SVGA chips, which have a variety of modes and extended resolutions and up to a maximum of 4 MB of video memory, are used in current IBM personal computers. The SVGA used in some systems has additional capability to generate a 640 × 480 image with over 16 million different colors (called a truecolor-image). Using this many colors in a single image makes them appear extremely realistic. Because SVGA provides for higher resolution and more colors than VGA, SVGA systems can display more information and are more pleasing to the eye in graphics applications such as computer-aided design, desktop publishing, multimedia imaging, and business graphics. However, to gain the benefits of the new SVGA modes, the program(s) being used must be written to take advantage of them. This means that application programs originally written for the VGA may not employ all of the SVGA functions. However, because the SVGA also maintains compatibility with the VGA, existing programs should function properly. The graphics circuitry provided with some Personal Systems is built around the eXtended Graphics Array (XGA) graphics chip. Like the SVGA, the XGA is a big brother to the VGA in that it can produce higher-resolution images with more colors than can the VGA while maintaining compatibility. Unlike the SVGA, however, the XGA provides improved graphics performance through its built-in graphics co-processor circuitry. By handling things like drawing rectangles, drawing lines, and filling in areas, this specialized circuitry improves the rate at which an image can be generated or modified. The engineers chose to implement these functions in dedicated circuitry because they are commonly needed graphics functions. With these commonly needed graphics functions implemented in dedicated high-speed circuitry, the graphics subsystem performance is improved. The graphics co-processor circuitry is optimized for windowing environments like that of OS/2 or DOS with Windows, in which the display screen is graphically subdivided into smaller rectangular areas. Other members of the PS/2 family were based on an improved version of the XGA called the eXtended Graphics Array-2 (XGA-2). The XGA-2 chip was designed to meet international standards (ISO 9241, “Ergonomic Requirements for Office Workstations with Video Display Terminals”) for high-quality images. These standards put limits on such things as image jitter (side-to-side shaking), linearity


81

(straightness of an image at its edges), fonts (alphanumeric character appearance), image flicker, and so on. To understand image flicker, you must first understand how an image is created on a display. Every display has many phosphor dots (or stripes) deposited on the rear surface of the display screen. These phosphors (which make up the pels) are excited by a sweeping electron beam emitted and controlled by circuitry in the rear of the display tube. The electron beam basically “paints” on a canvas of phosphor pels to create the image you see. However, the phosphor pels will only glow when they are actually being hit by the sweeping electron beam (plus a brief time after). As soon as the electron beam goes from that phosphor pel to the next, that phosphor pel’s glow begins to fade and so does the image presented to the user. Thus, the electron beam must be swept across each row of phosphor pels frequently enough to prevent the human eye from seeing the phosphor pels fading or the image will seem to flicker. The rate at which the electron beam sweeps across the entire surface of the display is called the refresh rate. The refresh rate, along with the display’s screen size, brightness level, and phosphor persistence (i.e., the rate at which the phosphor glow fades after the electron beam moves on to another phosphor pel) together determine how much an image will flicker. The XGA-2 chip and most IBM personal computer displays are designed to meet the ISO industry standards for a flicker-free image. One other item concerning flicker should be mentioned. To support higher-resolution images, the original XGA chip refreshes every other row of pels on each refresh pass. This is known as interlacing. In interlaced images, each phosphor pel is only being refreshed at half the refresh rate, which tends to increase the flicker of an image. To some this flicker is unnoticeable, but to others it may be annoying—largely depending on the particular image being generated. The XGA-2 chip eliminated this potential flicker problem by not using interlacing. Flat Panel Monitor Technology With the announcement of IBM’s flat panel monitors, screen flicker can be a thing of the past. These new monitors use the same technology that is used in IBM’s high-end ThinkPads. For the desktop user, the flat panel monitor saves space and lowers eye fatigue. If you spend long hours in front of a computer screen, you may want to consider

82 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs using flat panel monitor technology. IBM flat panel monitors consist of a TFT-LCD panel packaged together with the necessary drive and interface electronics and power to implement the total monitor function. Each LCD panel is an array of addressable picture elements or pixels (e.g., 1,024 pixels arranged in 768 rows) that supports the common XGA display format. Every pixel is made up of three subpixels, which can be turned on or off to varying amounts to control the amount of red, green, or blue light passing through them. The subpixels are so small that they appear as dots to the unaided eye, and the required image is made up of the combination of light from each of these colored subpixels or dots, which merge together when viewed at normal distances to form the complete effect. Each subpixel is driven by an individual thin-film transistor formed directly behind it on the panel. In the example of a 1,024 × 768 pixel array, there are 1,024 × 768 × 3 = 2,359,296 such transistors. TFT-LCD panels are also known as active-matrix panels because they use active semiconductor devices or transistors. The image data to be displayed is presented by the graphics subsystem, also in the form of pixels, and the best display is when the pixel format of the image data exactly matches that of the panel array so that there is a one-to-one pixel match. If the matching is not exact, then complex algorithms in the display “scale” the incoming pixels either up or down so that they fit the whole panel. In the case of the 1,024 × 768 panel displaying a 640 × 480 image, the scaling factor is 1,024:640 or 1.6:1; that is, each incoming pixel has to be “spread” over 1.6 pixels of the panel array both horizontally and vertically. Even the best algorithms available today are unable to perform this transformation for all images without some, usually minor, display artifacts or distortions appearing in a small number of cases, so it is strongly recommended that panels be driven at their native addressability for optimum performance. The image data in each pixel contains the brightness information of the three primary colors, red, green, and blue, that make up that pixel and so the job of the interface and drive electronics is to separate and route that information to all of the corresponding subpixels in the array. Each transistor controlling a subpixel can be turned from off to on in a discrete number of steps to vary the actual voltage across the liquid crystal cell that makes up the subpixel. CRT and TFT display technologies are very different, with different strengths and weaknesses. CRTs have been the predominant desk-


83

top display technology for a considerable time, but as TFT monitors close and start to exceed the performance gap they become the display choice for many users. TFT flat panel monitors have been significantly more expensive than the equivalent image size CRT monitor, but the price ratio has greatly reduced over the last few years and will continue to go down. Initially the majority of TFT monitor sales were to customers who required one or more of the unique attributes of a TFT monitor and hence could justify the higher initial cost. Even then, the savings on office space, utilities and air conditioning could offset this cost delta over CRT monitors, and now with further price improvements, increasing numbers of users will find the overall cost advantage has moved to TFT-LCD flat panel monitors. Emerging Graphics/Video Memory Many new kinds of graphics chips and memory are emerging that will lead to greater performance. In the past, graphics chip makers increased performance by doubling the number of bits that the graphics controller (or accelerator) could process at once by moving from a 32-bit to a 64-bit architecture. Today 128-bit architectures exist, providing even higher graphics throughput. One other key element in understanding graphics is that the amount of video memory determines the number of simultaneous colors for a particular addressability. More memory supports more colors and higher resolutions. A variety of graphics accelerators, boosting system graphics capabilities and performance, are available in IBM systems and workstations. IBM IntelliStation workstations are ideally positioned for a range of complex 2D and 3D design applications. From the Matrox Millennium G400 to the Intense3D Wildcat 4210, IntelliStation graphics accelerators deliver the kind of complex-graphics solutions needed to run today’s technically demanding applications with high-resolution results. The Matrox Millennium G400 video adapter is a high-performance, high-resolution 2D graphics accelerator that is tuned for use in Graphical User Interface (GUI) environments that make extensive use of 2D operations. The Matrox Millennium G400 video adapter is the successor to the Matrox Millennium G200 adapter. It has the same basic functions as the Millennium G200 adapter but offers higher level 2D and 3D performance. The Millennium G400 video adapter also supports a second monitor output (available as an option) on

84 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs the same video adapter. This allows the user to drive two displays at one time with one video adapter. The second monitor output can drive either a standard analog monitor or a Digital Visual Interface (DVI) monitor. The Matrox Millennium G400 adapter plugs into the AGP bus. The adapter features 16 MB of SGRAM, a 304 MHz 64-bit RAMDAC, and connectors for multimedia upgrades. The IBM Fire GL1 graphics accelerator card accelerates both 2D and 3D graphics. It can process up to 4 million 25-pixel polygons per second. The revolutionary 256-bit Fire GL1 video adapter is ideal for 3D environments that use the Open Graphics Language (OpenGL) interface. The IBM Fire GL1 graphics accelerator card contains an integrated graphics processor that accelerates 2D and 3D graphics. The card can process up to 4 million 25-pixel polygons per second. The IBM Fire GL1 graphics features include a 256-bit, 2-way interleaved 100 MHz SGRAM interface capable of delivering up to 6.4 GBps throughput; a geometry pipeline polygon setup engine; per-pixel double buffering for smooth animations; a 24-bit Z buffer for accurate depth rendering; stencil planes for drawing images in odd-shaped viewports; a gamma correction table for accurate color rendering; Gouraud shading for smooth lighting across an object’s surface; antialiasing to smooth out diagonal lines; trilinear, perspective-corrected texturing; multiprocessor optimization; 85 Hz refresh rates at up to 1,600 × 1,200 resolution; up to 1,920 × 1,200 resolution supported; monitor Plug and Play (DDC2B) support; and multimonitor support with additional PCI IBM Fire GL1 video adapters. The ELSA GLoria II graphics adapter delivers uncompromising 3D performance for high-end CAD, visualization, animation, and digital content creation applications. The GLoria II uses NVIDIA’s Quadro Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), an integrated geometry processing and rasterization chip. The Quadro can transform and light up to 17 million 3D vertices per second, with its single-chip architecture and optimized OpenGL drivers. The Intense3D Wildcat 4110 graphics solution delivers professional workstation-class 3D graphics features and performance, including trilinear MIP-mapped hardware texture processing and full-scene antialiasing. The IntelliStation M Pro and IntelliStation Z Pro both offer standard models that include the Wildcat 4110. The Intense3D Wildcat 4110 graphics solution is a single-board AGP Pro adapter that delivers professional workstation-class 3D graphics features and performance. The Intense3D high-end 3D graphics features


85

include the Trilinear MIP-mapped hardware texture processing. Hardware trilinear MIP mapping gives users photo-realistic images by wrapping 2D bitmaps around 3D models. For example, at 32-bit true color, adding wood grain to a table for added realism is easy. The Intense3D Wildcat 4210 graphics accelerator goes even further, setting a new standard for graphics performance with dual-pipeline architecture, a dedicated 128 MB frame buffer and 128 MB of texture memory, and a design optimized for AGP Pro 110 (2× and 4×). The Intense3D Wildcat 4210 graphics accelerator offers all the features of the Wildcat 4110 in a double-strength configuration. The Intense3D ParaScale architecture supports multiple geometry accelerator ASICs (Application-Specific Integrated Circuits) and rasterization engine ASICs working in parallel. The Intense3D Wildcat 4210 graphics accelerator is available only on the top-of-the-line IntelliStation Z Pro workstation. The Appian Gemini dual-head graphics board improves performance by utilizing the AGP bus. The Appian Gemini graphics adapter allows you to operate two monitors from the AGP slot, leaving additional slots open for other expansion capabilities—including more graphics adapters. In addition, Appian’s Hydravision software helps you manage and manipulate applications across multiple monitors with timesaving features. It is an ideal solution for financial traders, video editors, and digital content creators. The Gemini includes advanced multimonitor desktop management software from Appian and is compatible with the Gemini PCI version for expansion to four or more monitors. The Appian Gemini adapter uses the S3 Savage M7 graphics accelerator to produce high-speed 2D and 3D graphics, keeping cost and capability problems to a minimum by using a single GUI chip to support both monitors. PCI versions of the card will be available to easily expand the system to four or more monitors.

Ports There is almost always a need to connect personal computers to other devices (e.g., printers and modems). This connection is typically accomplished by attaching a cable between a port on the personal computer and a port on the device being attached. A port is a collection of electronic signals brought from the system-resident circuits to pins housed in a connector mounted in the system unit (usually in the

86 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs rear). It can be thought of as an “information doorway” that allows information to flow between the computer and external devices using a predetermined protocol to control the flow. Because the need for ports is very common, almost all personal computers come standard with several ports. Three older used ports are the serial port, the parallel port, and the SCSI port. Two emerging technologies called the USB (Universal Serial Bus) and the P1394 FixedWire are just now being commonly used in PCs to connect multiple I/O devices. The serial port transfers information one bit at a time using the asynchronous communications protocol at adjustable speeds. This port can be used to connect many devices—such as printers, plotters, external modems, and auxiliary terminals—to personal computers. This port can also be used to transfer information directly between adjacent computer systems under special circumstances. The serial port on most personal computers can move information at a rate of over 19,200 bits per second (19.2 Kbps). Those serial ports that support Direct Memory Access (DMA) techniques can move information more efficiently and take some of the workload off the microprocessor, freeing it to perform other work. The parallel port is accessible via the 25-pin D-shell connector. It is called a “parallel” port because it transfers information eight bits (one byte) at a time, or eight bits in “parallel.” This port is a functional extension of a widely used industry standard often used to communicate with a printer. Again, those personal computers that have DMA-capable parallel ports can move information over this port more efficiently. We have already discussed the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) port earlier in this chapter. This port is accessible through a connector on the rear of the system unit and can be used to attach external fixed disks, tape drives, and other SCSI-capable devices. The USB (Universal Serial Bus) allows adding a new device to a PC as easily as plugging it into the back of the machine or daisy-chaining it from another device on the bus. The device is immediately available for operation (elimination of device driver installation), and the PC does not need to be rebooted. IBM has announced USB ports in several of its PC 300 and Aptiva models. The basic data rate of USB is 12 Mbps with shielded twisted-pair cable, but USB also supports a low-speed subchannel of 1 Mbps. Devices on this subchannel can use unshielded cable that is not twisted.


87

All cables use four wires. The distance between two devices can be up to 5 meters. USB makes it easy to add peripherals externally and paves the way for everything from digital peripherals and telephony devices to multiuser games. In a nutshell, the USB standard means system units no longer have to offer a confusing array of dedicated ports. Instead, USB takes the “one size fits all” approach. Four-pin USB connectors will accept any USB peripheral, from mice to keyboards to printers to modems. What’s more, with USB, add-on peripherals don’t have to connect directly to the system unit. A USB hub can be connected to a USB port on the system unit. Each hub provides outlets for up to seven USB devices. You can even plug another hub into the hub that is connected to the system unit, giving you 13 outlets (the six remaining outlets on the first hub, plus seven more on the second hub). By plugging in more hubs, you can attach up to 127 different devices. USB is supported by current industry chip sets. Software device drivers are included in the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows 98 operating systems. This support allows USB to sense when peripherals are attached or detached. There’s no hunting for the “right” connection, and, even better, there’s no rebooting or reconfiguring every time a peripheral is added or removed. In fact, USB’s hot insertion and removal feature lets you install and detach peripherals while the PC stays up and running. With USB, you don’t even have to open the system unit. Fewer installation problems, reduced setup time… and you don’t need to call a high-tech guru for assistance every time you want to plug in a new peripheral. The full-speed USB bandwidth (up to 12 Mbps) can support a wide range of multimedia and telephony USB devices. The low-speed bandwidth (up to 1.5 Mbps) can support low-cost, low-end devices, such as USB keyboards and mice. What’s more, USB ports will support both full-speed and low-speed devices simultaneously. IEEE 1394 is a connection standard that promises high-speed data transfer rates of at least 400 Mbps. The consumer electronics industry is focusing on IEEE 1394 because it supports high-speed computer peripherals, such as external disk drives and digital video camera equipment. Because USB supports full-speed and low-speed devices and IEEE 1394 supports high-speed devices, there’s plenty of room for both standards.


Keyboards Most personal computer systems use one of the three keyboards shown in Figure 1.38. Most now come standard with the new IBM Enhanced 104-key Keyboard or a derivative thereof (e.g., the ThinkPad systems are a modified version of this keyboard). The layout of the Enhanced 104-key Keyboard (with Windows 95 support) is being used across many different IBM computer products, which means that once users become familiar with this layout, they will not have to adapt to different keyboard layouts when using other IBM computer equipment. This same keyboard is available in different languages to fill the needs of many different users around the world. Some personal computers allow the user to select the same IBM Enhanced Keyboard or to choose from other IBM keyboards. The 84-key Space Saving Keyboard is smaller to accommodate environments in which space is at a premium. With this keyboard, the user gives up the numeric keypad in order to save space. The IBM Space Saving Keyboard is a space-efficient version of IBM’s popular TrackPoint Keyboard. Only 14.5 inches wide, it is designed to use minimum desk space while offering maximum productivity. The integrated TrackPoint pointing stick is used for cursor control or to scroll through large documents or Web sites. This keyboard is perfect for rack-mounted servers, ThinkPad docking stations, port replicators, or other applications where space is at a premium. The 122-key Host Connected Keyboard has more function keys than the Enhanced Keyboard and is styled after the keyboard commonly used by those interacting with larger System/370 and System/ 390 computers via terminals. IBM calls this flexibility to choose from multiple keyboards Select-A-Keyboard. These keyboards plug into the keyboard port provided on the rear of the system unit.


Figure 1.38.

Examples of keyboards used with IBM PCs.

89


2 IBM’s xSeries and Netfinity

This chapter first provides an overview of IBM’s line of Netfinity and entry level e-servers along with a detailed discussion on IBM’s systems management components and the IBM X-architecture. The chapter then focuses more specifically on the members of each family.

Meet IBM’s xSeries and Netfinity The IBM Netfinity and IBM ~ xSeries family, some of which are shown in Figure 2.1, has embodied IBM’s top-of-the-line PC technology since the company introduced PC Servers in 1987. This line of computers was then branded in 1997 with the Netfinity name, which came from IBM’s commitment to the Netfinity Manageability software that was provided at that time with every IBM PC Server. The IBM Netfinity and IBM ~ family (listed in Appendix H) is optimized to provide resources (Web content, hardware, software, etc.) to other (client) computers over a network. The power of Intel processor-based servers is increasing to the point where companies of all shapes and sizes can run more business-critical applications with more confidence 24 hours a day, 7 days a week all year long. Consequently, these systems are taking on many of the tasks

90

IBM’s xSeries and Netfinity

91

Figure 2.1. Some members of the IBM Netfinity and ~ xSeries family.

once managed solely by larger, “enterprise-class” servers. This fundamental shift has taken the requirement for performance and availability to new levels. In response, IBM has harnessed the expertise and experience that went into building their enterprise systems. IBM applied that knowledge to industry-standard servers and enriched them with tools and

92 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs solutions to help you control your environment more precisely, with less effort. The new IBM ~ and Netfinity line of servers represent a new generation of PC Servers that are scalable. Scalability refers to the ease of upgrading your system to provide more power and system resources as your business requirements grow. IBM provides a wide array of clustering, rack, RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks), and Fibre Channel solutions designed to help your server system grow. Scalability is an even more important feature for the networked computing environment and e-business needs today. IBM’s Netfinity servers can be placed into three groups depending on your business needs: mission-critical servers, price/performance servers, and value servers.

Netfinity Mission-Critical Servers Netfinity mission-critical servers are for critical operations that rely absolutely on their networks. Netfinity mission-critical servers are loaded with features that help deliver maximum uptime. Innovative technology derived from IBM’s large server systems, advanced systems management, technology-enabled services and support, and the Netfinity 99.9% Availability Guarantee Program all help to ensure the extremely reliable server performance for this category of servers. These servers provide maximum performance, scalability, manageability, and protection, as they run the most critical commercial applications and store key databases. They have robust architectures including high-end SMP support (up to eight CPUs), high-performance memory subsystems, high-capacity and high-performance internal disk subsystems to support the high I/O demands of SMP applications, optimized system and I/O buses, advanced system management features, and greater fault-tolerance features (e.g., redundant power supplies, ECC memory, RAID, and fault-tolerant clusters). The new IBM Netfinity 8500R, 7600 and 5600 will be discussed later on in this chapter as representative of this category of servers. •

The Netfinity 8500R is a lean and mean 8-way SMP server that maximizes uptime.

•

The Netfinity 7600 provides for extreme computing power, reliability, and performance for business-critical serving.


•

93

The Netfinity 5600 minimizes downtime, producing maximum satisfaction for business-critical serving.

Netfinity Price/Performance Servers Netfinity price/performance servers are fast, powerful, and flexible, as well as being very cost-effective over their life cycle. These servers offer fast Intel processors, excellent scalability, and industry-leading price/ performance benchmarks—plus added value from integrated features and industry-leading software. Today’s enterprise environments require systems that offer advanced systems management functions in order to reduce operational costs and to maximize system availability, faulttolerance features such as RAID and ECC memory to avoid costly downtime, and performance features such as PCI buses, SCSI-2 Fast/ Wide and Wide UltraSCSI disk subsystems, and 4-way SMP. Later on, we will discuss in detail the following members of this category. •

The Netfinity 7100 provides price/performance leadership in a feature-rich 4-way server.

•

The Netfinity 6000R is trim and easy to configure, with great performance and maximum scalability.

•

The Netfinity 5100 is an easy-to-use, easy-to-manage server for hard-working businesses.

•

The Netfinity 5000 is an affordable blend of power and manageability.

•

The Netfinity 4500R is a 3-U server engineered for business-critical reliability and reliability. (Note that one U equals 44.45 mm, or 1.75 in.)

Netfinity Value Servers Netfinity value servers are basic, high-quality systems. If your budget is slim or you want a solid, no-frills server, Netfinity value servers are a confident choice. Value servers offer affordable off-the-shelf prices,

94 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs high-quality design and craftsmanship, and select supporting options and services. The Netfinity value servers are intended for stand-alone departmental or branch office LANs. These environments usually require systems that use industry-standard components and architectures, are easy to install and configure, and offer basic stand-alone systems management functions. In this category, we will be discussing the following models: •

The Netfinity 4000R is the small-but-powerful e-business engine.

•

The Netfinity 3500 M10 is the price/performance leader for growing businesses or departments.

•

The Netfinity 3000 is the entry-enterprise server applications and small-business environments.

•

The IBM ~ xSeries 300 is a new rack-optimized server which is one of the smallest servers available. It is packaged to help fit in even the most constrained data environments.

•

The IBM ~ xSeries 200 is the universal server for small businesses or workgroups. These fully rackable systems are ideal as free-standing floor models or deskside servers.

•

The IBM ~ xSeries 100 are point solutions servers that are optimized for rapid deployment.

Netfinity Rack-Optimized Servers The Netfinity rack-optimized servers are slim, elegant servers that are densely packed with the features. They still have ample room for expansion and options. For heavy-duty computing punch in minimal space, Netfinity rack-optimized servers can help server-intensive businesses such as Internet service providers, application service providers, or telecommunications firms—or any organization that needs to use its space more efficiently. IBM provides a wide selection of Netfinity server models from those using a single Intel Pentium III processor to high-end models


95

with many Intel processors, such as the Netfinity 8500R, which brings 8-way SMP processing power and scalability to handle advanced enterprise network server applications. IBM Netfinity servers are designed from the ground up for high availability and reliability, with details such as gold-plated connectors and rubber mounts on hard drive carriers. Hot-plug drive bays, redundant fans, and power supplies combined with leading-edge technology, such as IBM’s Light-Path Diagnostics and hot-plug Active PCI card slots, allow replacement of components and system upgrades without powering down the server. In case of potential trouble, built-in Netfinity Light-Path Diagnostics and Predictive Failure Analysis can alert you to problems, then help you diagnose, find, and fix problems without server downtime. Before we discuss the specific models, let’s take a look at the unique Netfinity systems management hardware and software provided across the Netfinity line to make it easier to manage, control, and grow your server system.

IBM’s Netfinity Systems Management Strategy IBM’s systems management strategy is based on the goal of providing a solution that will give users comprehensive control of their Netfinity servers in today’s complex server environment. IBM’s systems management strategy is threefold. First, IBM decided to provide manageability solutions based on industry standards for systems management. IBM’s Universal Manageability (UM) initiative has been designed and developed to help streamline and automate management and support tasks such as asset deployment and tracking through leading-edge, standards-based tools. Second, IBM chose to provide products with proven, reliable technology while helping reduce the total cost of ownership. This commitment to technology leadership is expressed in IBM’s X-architecture, which takes the best capabilities from larger IBM systems and adapts them into a framework that will integrate with a wide range of industry-standard, customer-chosen management and operating systems. Finally, IBM’s strategy is to provide smooth integration with leading enterprise and workgroup management tools for a comprehensive solution that fits with your existing assets and grows as your business grows. IBM’s Systems Management strategy sup-

96 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs ports a variety of management solutions that integrate smoothly with Tivoli Management Software, Computer Associates Unicenter TNG, Microsoft System Management Server (SMS), Intel LANDesk Management Suite, and others. The main building blocks of Netfinity manageability are the server hardware and its instrumentation, including the Advanced System Management Processor, server deployment with ServerGuide and LANClient Control Manager (LCCM), and systems management software with Netfinity Director and Netfinity Manager. These building blocks help you deploy and install your hardware, physically manage your operations and assets, and provide remote support and maintenance. IBM’s Netfinity servers, with advanced local and remote management capabilities, provide that management, no matter the size of your networked business. Some models provide benefits such as warning when the ECC memory error threshold is being reached, Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) for rapid identification of a failing component, automatic server restart, and IBM’s Light-Path Diagnostics technology, which directs you to the location of a failed component within your server.

IBM’s Netfinity Systems Management Hardware IBM Netfinity server hardware is the first building block of the Netfinity systems management solution. This special hardware provides excellent manageability, in part because of its balanced system design and instrumentation. Important elements are PFA (alerting you before component failure, environmental monitoring, and IBM’s Light-Path Diagnostics), which provides at-a-glance problem identification, and advanced system management, which can help reduce downtime, increase productivity, and reduce service and support costs directly affecting the bottom line. PFA for such vital components as power supplies, fans, hard disk drives, processors, and memory enables early detection of problems, allowing you to replace these components before they fail. Proactive environmental monitoring allows alerts and errors to be forwarded when environmental thresholds are outside the normal range, and in extreme circumstances even shuts the server down when they are exceeded and could potentially cause damage to the server or to data.


97

PFA and environmental monitoring are complemented by IBM’s Light-Path Diagnostics (available on select Netfinity servers), which also contribute to advanced hardware manageability. The equivalent to the light path inside a copier that locates a paper jam, Light-Path Diagnostics in conjunction with the component LEDs can help quickly and correctly identify a failed component, dramatically reducing service time. Service personnel can easily identify a failing component, potentially without even running diagnostics. IBM’s Netfinity mechanical design enables extremely easy access to the components via such features as a sliding planar and processor carriage, designs IBM calls human-centric. Many components, such as power supplies, fans, and hard disk drives, are redundant and hot-pluggable, so your system continues to operate normally while you replace the failing component. The IBM Netfinity Advanced System Management (ASM) Processors--the Advanced System Management Adapter, the integrated Advanced System Management Processor, and the Advanced System Management PCI Adapter—work with the hardware instrumentation and systems management software and are key to problem notification and resolution. They provide the system administrator with complete remote management of a system, independent of the server status. The processors are their own administrator and act as a sentry or guardian for the system. The Advanced System Management processor, sometimes referred to as the service processor, provides complete remote management of a Netfinity server—independent of the server status. Other capabilities include system monitoring of temperature, voltage, and other parameters. This processor can still do its job even when the system is switched off or the system has failed. Continuous power is supplied to the system management processor through the system’s power supply or, in the case of the adapter-based implementation, through an external power “brick.” This gives you the capability to dial into the Advanced System Management processor from a remote site to perform numerous tasks, even when the system is down. We should mention two additional IBM options that can extend the manageability of your Netfinity server—the IBM Netfinity Advanced Interconnect Cable Kit and the IBM Netfinity Advanced System Management Token-Ring Option. The Advanced System Management Interconnect option is for mainstream and high-end Netfinity servers. It extends remote management to allow you to connect multiple Advanced System Management Processors. The Ad-

98 Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs vanced System Management Interconnect Cable Kit makes it possible to interconnect up to 12 Advanced System Management Processors at a distance of up to 300 feet between the first and last processor, allowing them to share a common modem or LAN connection. Connecting processors in this way creates a systems management network to increase control, lowering cost and improving system reliability and availability. Each Advanced System Management processor attached to the interconnect can be accessed as if it were directly attached, can share resources such as LAN or modem connection, and can forward alerts out over the LAN or modem connection. For customers using token ring as their network infrastructure, IBM offers the ASM Token-Ring Option for ASM PCI-adapter-equipped systems. This option provides an increased level of flexibility to your management solution.

IBM’s Netfinity Installation and Systems Management Software The task of installing and configuring a server can be very difficult and time-consuming. In addition to installation of hardware, the installation of the operating system, device drivers, and applications makes the task more complex, especially if you are installing multiple servers. IBM provides two solutions, called IBM ServerGuide and LANClient Control Manager (LCCM), to help ease the complexity of installing and configuring your servers. ServerGuide is shipped with most Netfinity servers at no additional charge. It has been expanded and updated to help install Windows NT and other network operating systems much faster. ServerGuide addresses most configuration and on-site requirements during deployment, setup, and configuration. Its built-in intelligence recognizes machine types and models as well as firmware versions and other hardware criteria. ServerGuide also provides tools such as Diskette Factory, which provides a full library of device drivers tested and approved for your IBM Netfinity server. With a few clicks of a mouse, you can create diagnostic, device driver, and many other diskettes for Netfinity servers. ServerGuide also has the ability to check IBM Web sites for newer versions of diagnostics and device drivers. Included with ServerGuide is IBM’s TechConnect, which contains valuable documentation such as Netfinity server manuals and technical publications. TechConnect also provides a free link to the Internet


99

and the IBM Support Web site. In addition to these tools, ServerGuide also includes a variety of application programs such as Norton AntiVirus, ServeRAID Adapter Administration Monitoring Utility, and Netfinity Manager. LCCM is a key component of IBM’s Universal Management (UM) offering, which makes it easier to roll out multiple Netfinity and desktop systems. This is accomplished by allowing for remote and unattended client configuration, deployment, redeployment, lower-level management, and disposal. Since LCCM gains control of the client system before it boots the operating system, many lower-level tasks that previously required an on-site visit to each system can now be performed over a network. LCCM is also useful for performing preboot functions such as preformatting a hard disk or restoring an operating environment. IBM’s Systems management software provides the ability to manage the elements that make up a networked system and the system itself, from procurement through deployment, operations, support, and retirement or disposal. The ability to monitor and manage all clients and servers from a single point in a network can help improve ease of use, uptime, performance, asset management, and often security, with the result of reduced total cost of ownership. IBM designed Netfinity Director to deliver these capabilities. IBM Netfinity Director builds on the successes of IBM’s top-rated Netfinity Manager. IBM’s Netfinity Director with UM Services is a powerful, highly integrated, systems management software solution built upon industry standards and designed for ease of use. With an intuitive, Java-based Graphical User Interface (GUI), an administrator can easily manage individual or large groups of IBM as well as Wired for Management 2.0-compliant non-IBM PC–based servers, desktops, workstations, and notebooks on a variety of platforms, including Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, and 2000; Novell NetWare; IBM OS/2; and SCO UnixWare. Netfinity Director embraces systems management industry standards from the Distributed Management Task Force (DMTF), which include the CIM, Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM), and eXtensible Markup Language (XML). It also supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Netfinity Director includes key functions such as group management from a central location, system discovery, hardware and software inventory, monitoring and event alerting, and automated event responses. Netfinity Director can be integrated into with other enter-

100


prise and workgroup management systems from a number of vendors, including Tivoli, Computer Associates, Microsoft, and Intel. In addition to its own capabilities, Netfinity Director provides a foundation for a set of tools that extend the manageability of your IBM Netfinity servers. These tools help track resource utilization and provide recommendations to improve performance; enhance reliability by helping users discover, set up, and manage clustered servers from a single GUI; and let users configure, monitor, and manage your IBM RAID adapters and arrays without taking the RAID system offline to perform maintenance. Also included in Netfinity Director’s powerful suite of tools and utilities are •

Advanced System Management, which gives you control of remote systems, letting you monitor critical subsystems and restart and troubleshoot servers—even if the system is not powered on.

•

Capacity Manager, which monitors critical server resources such as processor utilization, disk capacity, memory usage, and network traffic. Using advanced artificial intelligence, it identifies bottlenecks and recommends actions to prevent diminished performance or downtime. Capacity Manager can even identify system bottlenecks and make preventive action recommendations.

•

Cluster Systems Management, which enhances reliability by conveniently helping you set up, control, and manage clustered servers from a single GUI. Systems administrators can be alerted to an event in a cluster (hardware, operating system and MicroSoft Cluster Service [MSCS]). These alerts help reduce downtime by immediately sending e-mail or pages, or running other programs. IBM developed Netfinity Availability Extensions for MSCS, which allow for the expansion of your cluster from two nodes to eight. IBM’s exclusive eight-node extensions enable you to achieve higher availability, performance, and reliability than two-node clusters can provide. Clustering software allows a server application or resource, such as a shared drive, to migrate smoothly from one server to another at the choosing of the system administrator or in the event of failure.


101

•

Netfinity SP Switch Administration, which monitors the operating status of various switch components, providing proactive alert notification in the unlikely event that a component should fail (the Netfinity SP Switch is resilient to failure due to redundant components and an integrated service processor).

•

RAID Manager, which lets you monitor, manage, and configure local and remote RAID subsystems without taking them offline, saving time and labor costs for managing and restoring disks and data and avoiding downtime.

•

Netfinity Fibre Channel RAID Manager, which provides ease of storage configuration, dynamic changes, performance monitoring, and overall management of Netfinity Fibre Channel subsystems. Errors are mapped to Netfinity Director events so that you can take actions to prevent downtime.

•

Software Rejuvenation, which is designed to minimize failures through planned resource allocation and planned reboot. With IBM’s exclusive Software Rejuvenation, you can automatically reset select Netfinity servers gracefully before failure, avoiding costly downtime. Furthermore, you can enable a clustered Netfinity server to gracefully fail over to another server in your cluster, so that users need never know that you are resetting a server. It increases system availability by using clustering technologies and reducing the time needed to diagnose software-related system failures.

•

UM Services, which is the software that runs on managed systems. UM Services provides valuable information to the Netfinity Director Management Server and other supported management applications. It provides point-to-point remote management of client systems through a Web browser, in addition to its native interface with the Netfinity Director Management Server. UM Services communicates with physical (BIOS, LAN adapters, storage devices) and logical devices (networks, operating systems, registry, or applications) to surface data and monitor status. A long list of general system information is available from UM Services, including data about the operating system and basic hardware, as well as devices, ports, memory and network adapters. In

102


addition, proactive systems management functions include power management, system shutdown (including Windows NT), Asset ID and Alert on LAN configuration, event logs, and system monitors. UM Services provides the capability to perform general system hardware and software inventory (hardware, network adapters, ports, memory, hard disk drives).

IBM Netfinity X-Architecture The Netfinity X-architecture is IBM’s design blueprint for Intel processor–based servers. Since IBM first introduced the Netfinity X-architecture in 1998, the requirements for a new generation of applications and operating systems have increased rapidly. IBM has accelerated the advancement of Netfinity servers to meet those demands as well as those of e-business. Businesses will become increasingly reliant on their systems and will place ever greater demands on them. At the same time, businesses will expect the same degree of performance, reliability, scalability, and security as that provided by traditional high-end systems, as well as systems management and control, cross-platform integration, and interoperability. The IBM Netfinity X-architecture is designed to address these trends and deliver the most reliable Intel processor–based server foundation for cost-effective operation of enterprises large and small. The Netfinity technology blueprint leverages proven IBM technologies to bring enterprise capabilities to the Intel processor–based server platform. This blueprint can be described in five categories: 1. Core logic to optimize system performance 2. Enterprise storage solutions for your increasing storage and network requirements 3. Reliability and availability driven by system and clustering technologies 4. Systems management technologies for comprehensive local and remote server management within heterogeneous environments (previously discussed).


103

5. Technology-enabled service and support that ties advanced system and management technologies directly to service and support infrastructures. It is important to understand these categories because they identify IBM’s technology achievements with Netfinity X-architecture and outline where IBM plans to take the Netfinity server capabilities in the future.

Core Logic—IBM’s Summit Technology Core logic is the heart of a server system. It determines the paths and operational capabilities between microprocessors, cache, memory, and I/O. Ultimately, core logic defines the system performance, scalability, and interoperability. Over the years, IT professionals have faced many issues regarding the Intel processor–based server environment, including the need for high availability, scalability, performance, and overall reliability. In many cases, the cost advantage of these servers has outweighed the inherent system or platform capabilities. Today, as server resource usage expands from providing only simple file-and-print services to truly dynamic resource allocation for e-business applications, the underlying core logic of servers must also expand. IBM intends to address these business needs through the development of the IBM Summit technology. In its simplest form, Summit technology is a chip set containing the core logic of how a system interacts with the microprocessor. Summit technology is the culmination of decades of experience with mainframe and midrange platform designs, packaged in a cost-effective, industry-standard design that provides tangible high-availability benefits. In the future Summit will allow investment protection through its flexible design and, most important, offer benefits for today’s IA-32 platform and leadership capabilities for the emerging IA-64 platform. One of the challenges of optimizing performance is to provide memory and I/O subsystems that allow new high-frequency processor architectures to more effectively realize their performance potential. Summit includes an advanced high-speed, shared-cache architecture, creating an enhanced 4-way SMP processing “node.” This high-performance node becomes the building block that allows efficient scalability beyond 4-way SMP.

104


Many applications and transaction processing systems today require more scalability than a 4-way or 8-way SMP can provide. Using a building-block approach with 4-way SMP nodes, Summit includes the flexibility to grow 4-way nodes into 8-way, 12-way, and 16-way SMP systems. Enabling this scalability is a high-performance system interconnection, called the scalability port. This high-speed transport provides 3.2 GBps throughput per connection, with each node having up to three connections. Each node in the system has a dedicated port to other nodes, maximizing throughput between nodes. The flexible architecture allows for either the large SMP approach (running a single operating-system instance) or partitioning the nodes with multiple operating-system instances. As 64-bit operating systems and applications mature, system implementations can be optimized accordingly. Additional implementations of Summit technology might include partitioning nodes in heterogeneous operating system environments. The more memory installed in a server, the higher the probability of a memory-related system error. To counter this effect, IBM developed a new, more advanced ECC capability for memory called Chipkill memory protection. Originally offered as a memory DIMM option for high-end Netfinity systems, recent advancements include implementing Chipkill on a memory card. In the future, Summit technology design will allow us to implement Chipkill capability within the memory controller itself. This will give Netfinity systems the proven high-availability protection of Chipkill, but at a fraction of the cost. As servers are given more processing capability, IBM’s balanced design methodology points out the need for increased I/O capacity. Even in today’s 8-way SMP systems, Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) can become a bottleneck for some applications. The PCI bus technology used by Intel processor–based servers is nearing its performance limits. PCI will continue for several years as a general-purpose bus interface, but PCI-X—a significant enhancement to PCI—will start to take its place in high-end servers. Summit technology design provides for rapid adoption of new I/O models, such as PCI-X and InfiniBand technologies and Remote I/O capabilities. IBM was a leader in the definition of the PCI-X specification. PCI-X provides an extra generation of capabilities for the PCI bus, including faster bus speeds and higher I/O throughput for server systems. PCI-X is an enhancement to the PCI standard that doubles the throughput capability and provides new adapter performance options while maintaining compatibility with PCI adapters. PCI-X allows all current 33 MHz and 66 MHz PCI adapters—either 32-bit or 64-bit—to operate


105

normally in the new PCI-X bus. New PCI-X adapters can also take advantage of the new 100 MHz and 133 MHz bus speeds, which allow a single 64-bit adapter to move as much as 1 GB of data per second. Additionally, PCI-X supports twice the number of 66 MHz, 64-bit adapters in a single bus compared to the maximum PCI can support. PCI bus architecture has served IBM well, but the market is moving toward more demanding industry-standard servers. For I/O architecture, buses do not offer enterprise-level error isolation, performance or scaling. IBM solved this problem in the days of the IBM System/360 and System/370 by inventing a channel architecture, which is used in the S/390 today. Channel architecture combined with switched fabric offers performance stability when scaling plus dependable error isolation. IBM is leading the development of a new industry-standard I/O architecture for Intel processor–based servers that leverages IBM’s mainframe heritage. This architecture, called InfiniBand, is currently being defined by the InfiniBand I/O Trade Association, which IBM cochairs with Intel. InfiniBand will offer up to 6 GB of bandwidth with the Internet protocol support. Both PCI-X and InfiniBand are critical to the future of the Intel processor–based server market, but businesses are currently facing issues with platform choice and platform investment. Summit technology provides the flexibility to deploy PCI-X today while smoothly adding InfiniBand capabilities in the near future. To further enhance I/O scalability and flexibility, Summit technology implements remote I/O. Today I/O scalability is limited by several factors, including throughput, distance, error recovery, and isolation. A PCI bus cannot extend further than 18 inches due to electrical limitations. That is why Intel processor–based servers have traditionally housed all I/O adapters inside the CPU chassis. Remote I/O allows input/output adapters to reside further from the server— up to 8 meters away—and thus lets you attach more I/O buses and adapters to the servers. Remote I/O connects I/O expansion drawers containing multiple individual PCI-X buses, which could support both storage and networking I/O adapters. This is accomplished through a 500 MHz link that can transfer data at up to 2 GBps. Also, as many as three remote I/O expansion drawers can be connected to each Summit-enabled system in addition to the I/O already contained in the base 4-way node. Remote I/O completes the balanced design for performance, allowing Netfinity servers the flexibility to scale for large and changing

106


application performance requirements. Remote I/O lets you scale your server as your business grows without having to purchase a new server, resulting in minimal interruption to your business, and Remote I/O can help you achieve near-limitless expansion capabilities with access to PCI-X and InfiniBand technologies.

Enterprise Storage Solutions Today, management and storage of data has become an increasingly complex and critical aspect of pervasive computing. The IBM Netfinity X-architecture addresses Enterprise Storage Solutions using the guiding principles of OnForever computing (goal of providing uninterrupted computing), cost containment, industry standards influence, Make IT Easy management tools, and the delivery of scalable, manageable, reliable, high-performance storage products. Enterprise Storage Solutions also support the Netfinity X-architecture technology agenda to leverage proven IBM technologies and bring enterprise capabilities to the Intel processor–based server platform. Enterprise Storage Solutions are designed to support the huge requirements on back-end systems by using a building-block approach that improves the management and implementation of complex networked storage subsystems. Enterprise Storage Solutions also recognize the need for infrastructure redesign and draw on 40 years of IBM experience in storage technologies, including hard disk drives and other storage technologies that have been designed and tested in the market on IBM’s S/390, RS/6000, NUMA-Q, and AS/400 servers. Enterprise Storage Solutions offer data availability, disaster recovery, scalability, high performance, increased bandwidth, substantial power, and investment protection. Netfinity Enterprise Storage Solutions are designed around the concept that each solution is simple: scalable and secure, easily integrated into existing infrastructures, and easily managed across heterogeneous servers and storage—giving you the ability to protect valuable data and allowing you to leverage e-business investments. •

Scalability. Netfinity Enterprise Storage Solutions can scale from entry-level storage solutions utilizing direct-attached SCSI storage to complete end-to-end Fibre Channel and are


107

expected to reach massive data-center storage capabilities in excess of 22 TB in 2001. •

Security. In the e-business model security is key to success. IBM has been making advances in security for the S/390 data center for many years. Now, with the Netfinity X-architecture, some of those technologies—such as Remote Access Control Facilities (RACF), DES Encryptions, cryptographic co-processors, and digital certificates—will be available on Intel processor–based servers. IBM has worked with Intel to develop the Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA) and will continue to drive this standard and maintain leadership in data storage security for industry-standard servers. In addition, IBM has been working with Intel, Microsoft, Compaq, and Hewlett-Packard in an open alliance called Trusted Computing Platform Alliance (TCPA). The goal of the alliance is to create a new computing platform that will provide for improved trust in personal computer systems.

Interoperability Integrating into your current IT environment or business practices with new hardware and software is key to Netfinity Enterprise Storage Solutions. IBM has invested millions of dollars developing the world’s most comprehensive interoperability test labs to help customers deploy storage solutions in mixed environments. These solutions are designed to work with the most popular Intel processor–based servers. They are based on industry-standard technologies and certified to run on industry-leading storage management and open systems software, including Tivoli, Legato, Veritas, and Computer Associates. Manageability IT managers routinely identify storage management as one of their primary challenges. In fact, it is estimated that the cost of manually managing direct-attached LAN storage can double every three years. Netfinity Director systems management software adds intelligence and combines leading-edge, proven capabilities that seamlessly inte-

108


grate into the enterprise. ServeRAID Storage Manager, Fibre Channel Storage Managers, and Tivoli Storage Manager help provide world-class server and storage management across your IT solution. All this is managed through a centralized infrastructure that can help businesses realize a reduction in management resource costs. Protection Data protection at all levels becomes second only to management as a challenge for the IT manager. Netfinity provides direct-attached and network-attached disk and tape data protection and disaster readiness storage solutions. Combined with remote mirroring clustering extensions, Netfinity X-architecture innovation technologies such as FlashCopy, Raid 5E, and RAID 1E are designed to help keep data available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. RAID Extensions Currently, the flagship of Netfinity SCSI controller offerings is the ServeRAID-4 family of Ultra160 SCSI controllers. These controllers provide extensive RAID functions for SCSI-based storage, and they are managed by ServeRAID Manager software, which allows you to manage your entire enterprise storage network from a single session. These controllers offer additional functions that previously were found only in the most sophisticated servers, including FlashCopy, RAID-1E, and RAID-5E. IBM plans to extend these offerings to Ultra320 in 2001. FlashCopy This is a high-availability tool that minimizes application downtime associated with performing data backups and increases performance by off-loading host resources. This tool takes a snapshot of the source drive and places it on the target drive, which then can be extracted and used in another server or placed on tape. Previously this type of technology was available only on high-end enterprise storage platforms. RAID 1–Enhanced (1E) RAID 1E enables data mirroring across any number of disk drives. Compared with RAID 1, which mirrors the data across an even num-


109

ber of disk drives, RAID 1E can be more cost-effective, because it allows you to increase array capacity one hard disk drive at a time. RAID 5–Enhanced (5E) RAID 5E makes use of the usually dormant “hot spare” drive as an active participant in the array. Data, parity, and the hot spare space are distributed across all the drives to improve performance and provide greater availability of your data. For typical arrays, RAID 5E can achieve faster throughput than a traditional RAID 5 array with more efficient use of the drives and better utilization of disk storage resulting in overall throughput performance. Storage Area Networks (SANs) The explosive growth of information as a result of e-business is forcing businesses to focus on the importance of information management and storage. Information is quickly becoming a key asset, and most businesses face the challenge of finding an affordable way to store information and manage it. Consequently, SANs are radically changing the way data is being accessed and managed, and they are altering the parameters with which IT managers buy and integrate their storage. IBM is working with other industry leaders to reduce complexity with SAN-ready solutions. SAN-attached storage allows storage devices to be networked to improve LAN performance and greatly improve control and management of valuable data. IBM’s SAN strategy provides a building-block approach that builds on current investments in hardware, software, and skills. The current Netfinity SAN building blocks are the Netfinity Fibre Array Storage Technology (FAStT) devices, which include host controllers, fibre switches and hubs, Fibre RAID controllers, and disk drives. The building-block approach allows you to efficiently and cost-effectively scale your storage environment. However, to protect your current investments, SAN implementations can be staged, and many legacy devices are supported. For example, existing SCSI devices, such as Netfinity EXP200 storage expansion enclosures, can be used in a SAN through SCSI-to-Fibre bridges. Overall, SANs provide greater bandwidth, speed, and distance (up to 10 km) with smaller cables and connectors. The redundant nature of SANs allows for better disaster management. Fibre-based

110


SAN solutions protect the increasing value of corporate data assets. Businesses face the need for greatly increased storage capacities generated by e-business, the need to back up large amounts of data, the ability to manage the data and make it accessible to all users, and high-availability data that is protected from unforeseen destruction such as viruses, user and administrator errors, and environmental disasters such as floods and fires. •

Storage capacities. Data assets are increasing in value, and they are increasing substantially in volume. SANs directly address the need for storage capacities previously believed to be unachievable. A SAN can be a single tape library attached through a SAN Data Gateway and Fibre Channel Hub to a single server and can scale to support massive data requirements. In theory, SANs can support up to 16 million hard disk drives through the building-block approach of an interconnected storage fabric.

•

Backup. While size and value are rising, the ability to protect data through backups is shrinking in time and ability. Backing up 20 TB of storage can be an unwieldy and time-consuming process. SANs offer the ability to move data backup and management off the LAN for improved LAN, system, and storage performance, giving administrators the flexibility to schedule and perform backups when needed without interrupting service to the end user. Larger amounts of data need to be protected to support e-business, and live backup, which SANs provide, prevents lost business in the event of a disaster.

High-availability and disaster-tolerant devices help reduce the risk of downtime. SANs facilitate a more cost-effective disaster recovery solution through remote capabilities. Improved performance provides faster data recovery. The expense of a SAN can be offset through the cost savings derived from reduced downtime and business productivity losses. Disaster recovery usually requires physically transporting media to an off-site data vault. Studies indicate that a majority of established enterprises do not have adequate protection against loss of their valuable data assets through accidental deletion, corruption, system crashes, viruses, or environmental disasters. SANs allow users to build a consistent, cost-effective disaster recovery plan for backed-up data.


111

Netfinity Web Server Accelerator While one way to achieve scalability is through hardware, IBM is also focused on scalability through software called the Netfinity Web Server Accelerator. Web hosting, whether done by an individual company for its customers, business partners, employees, and suppliers or by an Internet Service Provider (ISP) for several companies, is a complex, demanding undertaking. Many companies now recognize the benefits of hosting their own Web site, which allows for real-time updates to company information and controlled security. This can also help reduce or eliminate outsourcing fees for these services. Regardless of the size of your business, you need a Web-hosting solution that is simple to install and deploy, is cost-effective, and gives you the high performance that cannot be attained by a standard server. IBM Netfinity Web Server Accelerator (NWSA) V2.0 provides these benefits. NWSA V2.0 can also be integrated on Netfinity servers into potentially heterogeneous server farms. IBM NWSA V2.0 caches static file content on behalf of a Web server. Web-based files that are cached stay in sync with the file system, helping ensure that the latest Web content is available. If one of the Web site’s files is modified—by a database or editor, for example—Netfinity Web Server Accelerator immediately detects this change and updates the cache accordingly. Availability and Reliability Your need for server availability includes the ability to avoid expensive downtime and failures. Netfinity X-architecture designs include high-availability features for Netfinity Systems, features such as Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA), Software Rejuvenation, and Active Diagnostics. PFA for processors, Voltage Regulator Modules (VRMs), memory, fans, power supplies, and hard disk drive options can warn you before problems occur. PFA can even be configured to initiate an e-mail message or page you with alerts to possible trouble situations. Software Rejuvenation Designed to minimize failures through planned resource allocation and planned reboot, software rejuvenation increases system availability by using clustering technologies and reducing the time needed to diagnose software-related system failures. Future enhancements to Software Rejuvenation are planned to include adding predictive analy-

112


sis based on advanced research within IBM. The tool will be built on a model that determines the optimal interval for periodic, preemptive rollback of continuously running applications in order to prevent software failures. In addition, IBM plans to include features that isolate faulty software within the system. This will allow for continued operation of other applications while the failing application is being reset. Another future enhancement might be to include performance characteristics that allow Software Rejuvenation to help ensure that systems continue operating at optimal levels. Active Diagnostics Also known as the Common Diagnostic Model (CDM), Active Diagnostics is the result of a collaboration between four major industry players—IBM, Intel, Microsoft, and Dell—as a means of driving a new standard across the computer industry. It was submitted and accepted by the Distributed Management Task Force (DMTF). CDM allows for important advances in two areas: remote diagnostics and sporadic problems. Remote diagnostics have always been challenging, because normal diagnostics require that the system be initialized in diagnostic mode. This usually does not include network connectivity or modem capability, so the technician has to be in front of the system to perform maintenance. As systems are increasingly used to run more sophisticated applications, diagnosing sporadic problems is becoming more difficult. Tracking down some of these problems can be almost impossible when the system is reinitialized with the standalone diagnostic program. CDM is designed around the concept that if features and components can be hot-swapped, they can be extended to allow for suspend-and-resume. This would allow diagnostics to be run on a component that is in Suspend mode and afterward being resumed into Normal Production mode. IBM Netfinity Support Before we go on to discuss IBM’s Netfinity servers in detail, we should also mention IBM’s installation and ongoing technical support. Included with the purchase of any Netfinity server, IBM provides 90-day IBM Start Up Support. IBM’s Start Up Support is a


113

comprehensive program designed to speed installation of hardware and system software, as well as assist in resolving other technical challenges associated with the installation of new systems. To maximize the value of your investment and resolve issues during the first critical 90 days from installation, IBM provides installation, setup, and configuration support for IBM Netfinity servers and network operating systems—including Microsoft Windows NT, Novell NetWare, SCO OpenServer and UnixWare, NCD WinCenter and WinFrame, and IBM OS/2 Warp Server. Support is also provided for selected Network Interface Cards (NICs), such as those made by IBM, 3Com, Madge Networks, and Standard Microsystems Corporation (SMC). In addition, IBM provides easy-to-use electronic access to IBM experts. The IBM HelpCenter is available by phone, fax, bulletin board, commercial online services, and the Internet. IBM is also introducing interactive Web-based forums, monitored around the clock by IBM specialists, complementing its support on all the major Internet service providers. Electronic Solution Assurance Review (eSAR) is a breakthrough artificial intelligence tool that validates network operating systems supported on Netfinity servers. This Web-based tool lets you review a proposed solution and check for technical integrity, level of risk and ability of the solution to meet your requirements. When IBM Business Partners install a cluster solution at your location, they register that solution with the IBM HelpCenter, a process called cluster registration. IBM is committed to offering faster service by placing trained cluster technicians near customers, helping ensure minimal network downtime in the event a system fails. Cluster registration also lets IBM notify customers of important information relevant to your environment and proactively prevent outages. Finally, using the latest technology advances delivered by select models of the Netfinity product line, IBM offers a remote support feature called Remote Connect… “Call Home.” If a Netfinity server experiences a problem, it can immediately dial the user or IBM, contact the right level of support and dispatch on-site service, if necessary, to keep the Netfinity server up and running. Now let’s take a closer look at the IBM Netfinity line, beginning with the most powerful, mission-critical Netfinity servers.

114


Netfinity 8500R Specifics The IBM Netfinity 8500R system shown in Figure 2.2 is designed to maximize an 8-way SMP configuration for mission-critical businesses. The new Netfinity 8500R models are updated with 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processors with an integrated full-speed 1 or 2 MB ECC L2 cache and now support a 1 GB memory option that increases maximum system memory to 32 GB. These high-density, 8-way SMP-capable servers are optimized for advanced clustering and Storage Area Network (SAN) environments. Netfinity 8500R rack-drawer models are designed to be installed in a 28-inch deep, 19-inch rack cabinet such as the new Netfinity Enterprise Rack, or Netfinity Rack and Netfinity NetBAY22 with extension options installed. Netfinity 8500R rack models may be converted to tower models to support the Netfinity NetBAY3E. This feature provides an inexpensive, modular solution to support RAID data storage with a

Figure 2.2. IBM Netfinity 8500R server.


115

Netfinity EXP storage unit or to support network routers or a UPS (Universal Power Supply). Up to three Netfinity NetBAY3Es can be stacked under a Netfinity 8500R configured as a tower. The Netfinity 8500R servers are positioned at the top of the Netfinity product line. These extremely powerful, 8-way SMP platforms are designed with high-availability features required to run mission-critical enterprise applications. The new 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon 8-way processors, with up to 2 MB of L2 cache, yield performance levels never before possible with Intel processor–based servers. Just as important, the Netfinity 8500R incorporates 12 available 64-bit PCI slots that double the bandwidth data can travel from processor to adapter. This combination of powerful processors that support 100 MHz operations to memory and the PCI bus, plus the additional bandwidth of four PCI buses, boosts performance to new levels. The standard offerings provide external operations to memory and the I/O subsystem that are supported at 100 MHz. This architecture optimizes memory and bus performance using a 100 MHz, five-port crossbar core chip set. Up to eight Pentium III Xeon processors are supported on two 100 MHz P-6 CPU buses. The memory controller supports up to two memory expansion cards on separate 100 MHz buses. These cards contain a total of 32 high-speed, PC100 SDRAM DIMM slots. Cache-line interleaving is supported between the two memory cards. The P-6 I/O bus supports four independent 64-bit PCI buses. Two of these PCI buses drive eight 33 MHz slots, while the other two buses drive four 66 MHz slots. The Netfinity 8500R not only represents the next step in the evolution of high-performance, Intel processor–based servers, but also the next step in the evolution of advanced, high-end enterprise, high-availability Netfinity servers. With its numerous high-availability, manageability, and serviceability features, the Netfinity 8500R is a new class of server designed for cluster or SAN environments to handle mission-critical database, e-business, and advanced enterprise applications.

Netfinity 7600 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 7600 servers (Figure 2.3) are high-throughput, 4-way SMP-capable Pentium III Xeon–based network servers. They deliver excellent scalability for adding memory, adapter cards, or

116


Figure 2.3. IBM Netfinity 7600 and 5600 server.

multiple processors. They incorporate a powerful 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processor with 2 MB of full-speed ECC L2 cache integrated. Four connectors for Pentium Xeon processors are standard on the processor card to support installation of up to four processors. High-speed, 100 MHz SDRAM provides excellent processor-to-memory subsystem performance due to the synchronization of processor and memory clock speeds. The Netfinity 7600 uses the ServerWorks Enterprise ServerSet III HE (Reliance Champion 2.0 HE) chip sets designed to optimize memory and bus performance by synchronizing them with the 100 MHz external speed of the Pentium III Xeon processors. The Netfinity 7600 packs a lot of function and storage capacity into an 8-U mechanical package, yet it is amazingly easy to upgrade and service. Functions such as SVGA video, dual-channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI, full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, and the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor are integrated on the system board. Features include


117

•

Rack-drawer models designed for industry-standard rack enclosures such as the Netfinity Rack or NetBAY22

•

A horizontal orientation that fits rack-drawer or tower installations (using the Netfinity 8-U × 24-D (24 inches deep). Rack-to-Tower Kit option) with device bays in a convenient horizontal position

•

Three worldwide, voltage-sensing 250-watt hot-swap power supplies with auto restart, which supports up to 500-watt power requirements with redundancy or 750-watt power requirements by installing an additional Netfinity 250-watt hot-swap power supply

•

A redundant power supply

•

Five available 64-bit PCI full-length adapter card slots

•

Fourteen drive bays: ten 3.5-inch slim-high, hot-swap drive bays; three 5.25/3.5-inch half-high device bays; and one 3.5inch slim-high drive bay—all allowing access to removable media

•

Internal support for 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB slim-high, 7200 rpm hot-swap HDDs; high-performance 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB 10,000 rpm hot-swap HDDs; and high-capacity, slim-and half-high tape backup devices

•

A three-channel Netfinity ServeRAID-3HB Ultra2 SCSI Adapter and two-channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI controller supporting massive amounts of internal and external disk and tape storage

•

A 40×–17× IDE CD-ROM and a 1.44 MB diskette drive

•

An SVGA controller with 4 MB of video memory

In summary, the Netfinity 7600 servers are positioned between the Netfinity 7100 and the Netfinity 8500R. They are 4-way SMPcapable Pentium III Xeon–based platforms designed with advanced

118


high-availability features required to run mission-and business-critical applications. With its numerous high-availability, manageability, and serviceability features, the Netfinity 7600 is designed for advanced e-business and for business applications that in the past may have been thought too critical for an Intel-based server. For those who require an 8-way-capable server with additional PCI slots, the Netfinity 8500R is an excellent solution. For those who do not need the advanced levels of high-availability Chipkill memory capacity, Netfinity ServeRAID-3HB Ultra2 SCSI Adapter, and Active PCI slots of the Netfinity 7600, the Netfinity 7100 is an affordable solution.

Netfinity 5600 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 5600 (Figure 2.3) leads the way with higher levels of network server performance. You get the power of 2-way, SMP-capable, 933 M or 866 MHz Pentium III processors operating at 133 MHz to memory. Packaged in a compact 5-U mechanical and optimized for compute-intensive database, file, or print serving applications, the Netfinity 5600 contains a number of high-availability and X-architected features for business-critical applications. The powerful 933 MHz or 866 MHz Pentium III processors with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache have an advanced transfer cache that is the result of a new backside bus that is 256 bits wide. It is four times wider than the previous bus and can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. Two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. High-speed, 133 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The Netfinity 5600 uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (CNB3.0LE) chip set to maximize throughput from processors to memory and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. The Netfinity 5600 mechanical package is engineered to meet the compactness of a 5-U rack drawer. SVGA video, dual-channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI, full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, and the Netfinity Advanced System Management processor are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Standard 256 MB of system memory—expansion to 4 GB


119

•

Five full-length adapter card slots—three 64-bit active PCI slots and two 32-bit standard PCI slots

•

Ten drive bays: six 3.5-inch slim-high, hot-swap drive bays; three 5.25/3.5-inch half-high device bays; and one 3.5-inch slim-high drive bay

•

Internal support for high-performance 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB 10,000 rpm and 7,200 rpm Wide Ultra2 SCSI HDDs and a high-capacity tape backup device

•

Up to 218.4 GB of internal data storage using six 36.4 GB Ultra160 SCSI SL hot-swap HDDs with the new common carriers

The Netfinity 5600 is for customers who require up to 2-way 933/133 MHz Pentium III processing power and significant memory and data storage scalability. Its high-speed memory, 64-bit active/32bit standard PCI slots, six Wide Ultra2, hot-swap drive bays, and device bay for high-capacity tape drives make this server ideal for mainstream network computing. Equally important, it is for those customers who must have advanced levels of high-availability and fault-tolerant features for business-critical applications found in their corporate data center, branch office, or medium-sized business.

Netfinity 7100 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 7100 (Figure 2.4) brings affordable 4-way SMP processing power and scalability to handle advanced enterprise network server applications. The new models are updated with highperformance 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processors. They deliver excellent performance while providing the high-availability and remote systems management features needed to handle business-critical applications. Netfinity 7100 servers deliver excellent scalability for adding memory, adapter cards, or multiple processors. The powerful 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processors are integrated with a full-speed ECC L2 cache. Four connectors for Pentium Xeon processors are

120


Figure 2.4. IBM Netfinity 7100 server.

standard on the processor card to support installation of up to four processors. High-speed, 100 MHz SDRAM provides excellent processor to memory subsystem performance due to the synchronization of processor and memory clock speeds. The Netfinity 7100 uses the ServerWorks Enterprise ServerSet III HE (Reliance Champion 2.0 HE) chip sets designed to optimize memory and bus performance by synchronizing them with the 100 MHz external speed of the Pentium III Xeon processors. Many enterprise networking environments run around the clock, supporting the need for information around the globe. These environments require servers that are not only affordable, but are ruggedly dependable and designed with features that can tolerate a component failure without total shutdown. The Netfinity 7100 provides many fault-tolerant and high-availability features at a midrange server price. In addition, if a problem does occur, the chances are good that it can be diagnosed


121

and fixed quickly due to its excellent serviceability features. Features include •

Ten hot-swap HDD bays

•

ECC DIMMs combined with an integrated ECC memory controller correcting soft and hard single-bit memory errors and minimizing disruption of service to LAN clients

•

Memory hardware scrubbing, correcting soft memory errors automatically without software intervention

•

ECC L2 cache processors, ensuring data integrity while reducing downtime

•

PFA on HDD options, memory, processors, VRMs, power supply, and fans in conjunction with Netfinity Director, which alerts the system administrator of an imminent component failure

•

Two hot-swap redundant power supplies—standard redundancy for basic configurations

•

Support for two additional Netfinity 250-watt hot-swap redundant power supply options

•

Four hot-swap fans providing cooling and replacement without powering down the server

•

An integrated Netfinity Advanced System Management processor allowing diagnostic, reset, POST, and autorecovery functions from remote locations, and monitoring of temperature, voltage, and fan speed, with alerts generated when thresholds are exceeded

•

An information LED panel, diagnostics LED panel, and component LEDs, giving visual indications of system well-being

•

Light-Path Diagnostics, providing an LED map to a failing component, reducing downtime, and service costs

122


The Netfinity 7100 packs excellent function and storage capacity into an 8-U mechanical package, yet it is amazingly easy to upgrade and service. Functions such as SVGA video, dual-channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI, full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, and the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Rack-drawer models designed for industry-standard rack enclosures such as the Netfinity Rack or NetBAY22

•

Tower models that support stacking of up to three Netfinity NetBAY3 enclosures to house 3-U devices such as Netfinity EXP storage units, routers, or UPSes

•

A horizontal orientation, which fits rack-drawer or tower installations with device bays in a convenient horizontal position

•

Two worldwide, voltage-sensing 250-watt hot-swap power supplies with auto restart, which support up to 750-watt power requirements with redundancy by installing two additional Netfinity 250-watt hot-swap redundant power supply options

•

Six 64-bit PCI full-length adapter card slots

•

Fourteen total drive bays: ten 3.5-inch slim-high, hot-swap drive bays, three 5.25/3.5-inch half-high device bays, and one 3.5-inch slim-high drive bay—all allowing access to removable media

•

Internal support for 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB slim-high, 7,200 rpm hot-swap HDDs and high-performance 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB 10,000 rpm hot-swap HDDs

•

Support for high-capacity, slim-and half-high tape backup devices

The Netfinity 7100 is for customers who need 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processors with 4-way SMP capability, support for large amounts of memory for compute-intensive applications, and ten hot-


123

swap disk drives to support massive internal data storage requirements. These servers are the perfect fit where high-availability and serviceability features are necessary for business-critical applications found in corporate data centers, branch offices, or medium-sized businesses. These systems are positioned to replace the Netfinity 5500 M20.

Netfinity 6000R Specifics The IBM Netfinity 6000R servers (Figure 2.5) are high-throughput, 4-way SMP-capable Pentium III Xeon–based network servers. They deliver excellent scalability for adding memory, adapter cards, or multiple processors. They incorporate powerful 700 MHz Pentium III Xeon processors with 1 MB or 2 MB integrated full-speed ECC L2 caches. Four connectors for Pentium Xeon processors are standard on the processor card to support installation of up to four processors. High-speed, 100 MHz SDRAM provides excellent processor to memory subsystem performance due to the synchronization of processor and memory clock speeds. The Netfinity 6000R uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III HE chip set designed to optimize memory and bus performance by synchronizing them with the 100 MHz external speed of the Pentium III Xeon processors.The 6000R packs lots of function and storage capacity into a 4-U 19-inch rack-drawer package, yet it is amazingly easy to upgrade and service. Functions such as SVGA

Figure 2.5.

IBM Netfinity 6000R server.

124


video, dual-channel Ultra160 SCSI, and full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Rack drawer models that are designed for 19-inch wide by 28-inch deep rack enclosures such as the Netfinity Enterprise Rack

•

Room for three worldwide, voltage-sensing 270-watt hotswap power supplies with auto restart, which supports up to 540-watt power requirements with redundancy by installing two additional Netfinity 270-watt hot-swap redundant power supply options

•

Six available PCI full-length adapter card slots: two 64-bit slots to support 66 MHz operations, three 64-bit slots to support 33 MHz operations, and one 32-bit slot to support 33 MHz operations

•

Three slim-high, hot-swap HDD bays, and the optional Netfinity 3-Pack Ultra160 Hot-Swap Expansion Kit, which provides three additional bays

•

Support for up to 218.4 GB of internal data storage (using six 36.4 GB Ultra160 Hot-Swap HDDs)

•

A 40×–17– IDE CD-ROM and a 1.44 MB diskette drive

•


The Netfinity 6000R models expand the line of rack-optimized servers offered by the Netfinity brand. They are positioned between the Netfinity 4500R and the Netfinity 8500R. The Netfinity 8500R is designed for extremely complex, compute-intensive applications. This line provides the highest levels of processing power and scalability of the Netfinity line. The Netfinity 6000R provides solid 4-way processing capability that is tailored with the right amount of functions to fit the majority of enterprise applications that do not need the 8-way processing capability and I/O expansion provided by the Netfinity 8500R.


125

Netfinity 5100 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 5100 servers (Figure 2.6) are high-throughput, 2-way, SMP-capable network servers with excellent scalability when adding memory and a second processor. They incorporate a powerful 933/866/800 MHz Pentium III processor with a 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a new back side bus that is 256 bits wide. Four times wider than the previous bus, the quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. Two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. High-speed, 133 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The Netfinity 5100 uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (CNB3.0LE)

Figure 2.6. IBM Netfinity 5100 servers.

126


chip set to maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. The Netfinity 5100 mechanical package is engineered to meet the compactness of a 5-U rack drawer. SVGA video, dual-channel Ultra160 SCSI, full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, and the Netfinity Advanced System Management processor are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Standard 128 MB of system memory with expansion to 4 GB

•

Five full-length adapter card slots—three 64-bit and two 32-bit PCI slots

•

Ten drive bays: Six 3.5-inch slim-high, hot-swap drive bays; three 5.25/3.5-inch half-high device bays; and one 3.5-inch slim-high drive bay

•

Internal support for high-performance 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB 10,000 rpm and 7,200 rpm Ultra160 SCSI HDDs and a high-capacity tape backup device

•

Up to 218.4 GB of internal data storage using six 36.4 GB Ultra160 SCSI Hot-Swap SL HDDs

•


•

An SVGA controller (S3 Savage4 chip set) with 8 MB of video memory

The Netfinity 5100 servers are positioned between the Netfinity 5000 and the Netfinity 5600. They are compact, 5-U, 2-way, SMP-capable Pentium III processor–based platforms designed with moderate high-availability features designed for mainstream network server applications. For those who require the high-availability features of hot-swap power and fans, and active PCI slots, the Netfinity 5600 makes an excellent solution. For those with applications that do not quite need the power of 133 MHz FSB processors, 64-bit PCI bus, or storage and memory expandability of a Netfinity 5100, the Netfinity 5000 is an affordable alternative.


127

Netfinity 5000 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 5000 (Figure 2.7) servers are high-throughput, 2-way SMP-capable Pentium III network servers with excellent scalability when adding memory and a second processor. They incorporate a powerful 700 MHz or 650 MHz Pentium III processor with 256 KB of L2 cache. Two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. High-speed, 100 MHz SDRAM provides excellent processor-tomemory subsystem performance due to the synchronization of processor and memory clock speeds. The Netfinity 5000 uses the Reliance Champ LE chip set to optimize performance from processors to memory and the two PCI buses.

Figure 2.7. IBM Netfinity Rack with 8 Netfinity 5000s.

128


The Netfinity 5000 mechanical package is engineered to meet the compactness of a 5-U rack drawer. SVGA video, dual-channel Ultra SCSI, full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, and the Netfinity Advanced System Management processor are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Five full-length adapter card slots—three PCI slots and two PCI/ISA slots

•

Eight drive bays: Five 3.5-inch slim-high, hot-swap drive bays; two 5.25/3.5-inch half-high device bays; and one 3.5-inch slim-high drive bay

•

Internal support for high-performance 9.1 GB, 18.2 GB, and 36.4 GB 10K Wide UltraSCSI HDDs and a high-capacity tape backup device

•

Up to 91 GB of internal data storage—five 18.2 GB UltraSCSI SL Hot-Swap HDDs

•


•


The Netfinity 5000 servers are positioned between the Netfinity 3500 M10 and the Netfinity 5500. They are affordable, 2-way SMP-capable platforms using high-performance Pentium III processors. These servers are designed for general business networking applications and provide a good measure of cost-effective, high-availability features for handling application server, e-business, and print or file serving environments. The Netfinity 5000 is for customers interested in higher memory and disk capacity, rack-drawer capability, and high-availability functions than that of the Netfinity 3500 M10. Customers requiring a higher level of availability and greater disk storage capacity will still want the Netfinity 5500. The Netfinity 5000 is for customers who want a very affordable general-purpose server that has excellent performance capability, manageability, and serviceability, and moderate amounts of high-availability features.


129

Netfinity 4500R Specifics The IBM Netfinity 4500R (Figure 2.8) squeezes huge amounts of power and functionality into a thin, 3-U rack-drawer footprint. This rack-optimized platform features two-way SMP-capable power, advanced high availability, scalability, and a surprisingly large internal data storage capacity. It is ideal for compute-intensive Web-based or enterprise network applications where space is a primary consideration. The Netfinity 4500R is a high-throughput, 2-way SMP-capable network server with excellent scalability when adding memory and a second processor. It incorporates a powerful 933 MHz Pentium III processor with a 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a new back side bus that is 256 bits wide. Four times wider than the previous bus, the quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. Two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. High-speed 133 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The Netfinity 4500R uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (CNB3.0LE) chip set to maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. The Netfinity 4500R packs a lot of function and storage capacity into a 3-U 19-inch rack-drawer package, yet it is amazingly easy to


130


upgrade and service. Functions such as SVGA video, dual-channel Ultra160 SCSI, and full-duplex 10/100 Mbps Ethernet are integrated on the system board. Features include •

Rack drawer models designed for 19-inch-wide by 26-inchdeep industry-standard rack enclosures such as the Netfinity Rack and NetBAY22

•

Five available full-length PCI adapter card slots: three slim-high, hot-swap HDD bays and two 5.25/3.5-inch, half-high media bays to support DLT tape or an optional Netfinity 3-Pack Ultra160 Hot-Swap Expansion Kit for additional hot-swap HDD storage

•

Support for up to 218.4 GB of internal data storage (using six 36.4 GB Ultra160 Hot-Swap HDDs)

•


•


The Netfinity 4500R is positioned between the Netfinity 4000R and the Netfinity 6000R. These high-density 2-way Pentium III–based servers are designed for customer installation of features to handle future expansion to meet changing needs. At the same time they can handle emerging applications requiring maximum computing power and function in the least amount of rack space.

Netfinity 4000R Specifics The IBM Netfinity 4000R models (Figure 2.9) are high-throughput, 2-way SMP-capable, Pentium III–based network servers. Standard models with 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, or 2 GB of 100 MHz SDRAM provide outstanding memory subsystem performance. An integrated ECC memory controller (Intel 440GX chip set) is used for host bridge/ memory controller function to support up to 100 MHz processor speeds to memory. Combined with the 100 MHz front side bus speed of stan-


131


dard Pentium III processors, this subsystem provides excellent system throughput for memory-hungry Web applications. The Netfinity 4000R models take advantage of single or dual high-performance 750 MHz and 650 MHz Pentium III processors with advanced transfer (full-speed) L2 caches. These ultrathin, rack-mounted servers are designed specifically for high-density, Web server environments. Configured from the factory, they pack a tremendous amount of power and function into a single, space-saving, 1-U-high rack drawer. The Netfinity 4000R is housed in an ultraslim mechanical package, designed for installation into a 1-U-high, 19-inch rack cabinet. For its extremely small footprint, this rack-dense server has remarkable function and expansion capability. Expansion and standard features include •

A 150-watt voltage-sensing power supply

•

Six or seven cooling fans (model dependent)

•

A motherboard containing four DIMM connectors supporting up to 2 GB of system memory, two slot–one processor connectors supporting two-way SMP Pentium III 750 or 650 MHz Pentium III processors, and two 32-bit, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PCI controllers

•

An SVGA video controller with 2 MB of video memory

132


•

One available half-length, 32-bit PCI expansion slot

•

Three drive bays supporting up to 36.4 GB of internal HDD storage

•

One or two 9.1 GB or two 18.2 GB Wide UltraSCSI HDDs (model dependent)

•

Wide UltraSCSI Adapter (Adaptec 2940 UW) supporting up to two internal SCSI devices through the 16-bit internal connector

•

One external SCSI device through the 16-bit external connector

The Netfinity 4000R is positioned as the most dense rack server in the Netfinity product line. These ultrathin servers are designed specifically for emerging applications requiring maximum computing power and function in the least amount of rack space.

Netfinity 3500 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 3500 servers (Figure 2.10) are high-throughput, 2-way SMP-capable Pentium III network servers with excellent scalability when adding memory and a second processor. They incorporate powerful 800 MHz, 733 MHz, or 667 MHz Pentium III processors with a 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a back side bus that is 256 bits wide. This new bus is four times wider than the previous bus and is called a quad-wide cache line. The quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. Two Intel Pentium III sockets are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. High-speed, 133 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The Netfinity 3500 M20 uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE chip set to maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. The Netfinity 3500 M20 is housed in a minitower mechanical package designed to economically handle expansion. These models feature


133

Figure 2.10. IBM Netfinity 3500 server.

•

A 330-watt worldwide voltage-sensing power supply with auto restart

•

Three fans plus one in the power supply for cooling the power supply, drive bays, microprocessor, and I/O

•

Standard 128 MB of ECC memory—four DIMM sockets support up to 2 GB

•

Five full-length adapter card slots—three 64-bit and two 32-bit PCI slots

•

Seven drive bays supporting up to 145.6 GB of internal hard disk storage

134


•

A 64-bit Adaptec AIC-7892 Ultra160 controller supporting up to five internal SCSI devices through the 16-bit internal connector

•

Five-drop LVD SCSI cabling with active termination for installing 16-bit internal devices

•

A 40×–17× IDE CD-ROM and a 1.44 MB diskette drive standard

•

An S3 Savage-4 video controller with 8 MB of video memory providing optimum setup and systems management capability

These 2-way SMP-capable servers are positioned between the Netfinity 3000 and the Netfinity 5100. They are designed to deliver new levels of value and scalability for entry servers running entry and work group applications. For customers interested in Web enabling their business, Domino Application Server R5 licenses with 5 Notes client and 5 access licenses are included at no additional charge.

Netfinity 3000 Specifics The IBM Netfinity 3000 models (Figure 2.11) are high-throughput Pentium III processor–based network servers. Standard 100 MHz synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) provides outstanding memory subsystem performance. An integrated ECC memory controller, using the Intel 440BX chip set for host bridge/ memory controller function, supports up to 100 MHz processor speeds to memory. Features include models with 700/100 MHz or 650 MHz Pentium III microprocessor with internal operations at 700 MHz and 650 MHz clock speed respectively—external operations at 100 MHz. There is also 256 KB of ECC advanced transfer (full-speed) L2 cache with 64 MB or 128 MB of high-speed, 100 MHz synchronous, 72-bit ECC system memory standard—upgradable to 768 MB. The Netfinity 3000 models are housed in a minitower mechanical package designed to economically handle expansion. These models feature


Figure 2.11.

135

IBM Netfinity 3000 server.

•

A 330-watt worldwide voltage-sensing power supply with auto restart, which supports maximum configurations and minimizes operator intervention after a temporary power outage

•

Three cooling fans for the power supply, drive bays, and microprocessor

•

A motherboard containing three DIMM connectors supporting 32 MB, 64 MB, and 128 MB SDRAM ECC DIMM options in any combination to achieve configurations up to 384 MB, with a maximum system memory of 768 MB by installing three 256 MB RDIMMs

136


•

Six expansion slots: three 32-bit PCI slots (one used by the SCSI adapter) and three ISA slots

•

Plug and Play system BIOS support for easy installation of PCI adapters designed to this standard

•

Six drive bays supporting up to 72.8 GB of internal HDD storage

•

An IBM PCI Wide Ultra2 SCSI Adapter supporting up to four internal SCSI devices through the 16-bit internal connector or 15 external SCSI devices through the 16-bit external connector

•

A 40×–17× IDE CD-ROM and a 1.44 MB diskette drive standard

•

An AGP video controller with 4 MB of 100 MHz synchronous graphics RAM (SGRAM), providing optimum setup and systems management capability

The Netfinity 3000 is positioned for entry-enterprise server applications and small-business environments. The Netfinity 3000 combines leading-edge, industry-standard technologies, a large internal data storage capacity, ease of installation and system management, and solid performance through a 700/100 MHz or 650/ 100 MHz Pentium III processor with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 caches. These uniprocessor servers provide a cost-effective, highperformance platform for a range of entry-enterprise networking applications.

xSeries 300 Specifics The IBM ~ xSeries 340 (Figure 2.12) is a high-throughput, two-way, SMP-capable network server that provides scalability when adding memory and a second processor. It incorporates a powerful 1 GHz Pentium III processor with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a new “backside bus” that is 256 bits wide. Four times wider than the


137

Figure 2.12. IBM xSeries 340 server member.

previous bus, the quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. The IBM xSeries 330 (Figure 2.13) servers pack an amazing amount of power and functionality into an ultra-thin, 1 U rack-drawer footprint. This new rack-optimized platform features two-way, SMP-capable power, high-availability, scalability, and a surprisingly large internal data storage capacity. It is ideal for computer-intensive Web-based or enterprise network applications where space is of primary importance. They incorporate powerful 1 GHz, 933 MHz, 866 MHz, or 800 MHz Pentium III processors with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The xSeries 330 also has an advanced transfer cache with a new “backside bus” that is 256 bits wide. The xSeries 330 and 340 have two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. The 133 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The xSeries 330 and 340 uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (CNB3.0LE) chipset to

138



maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. The xSeries 340, previously known as the Netfinity 4500R, has been updated with a powerful 1 GHz Pentium III processor. All other features remain unchanged. The xSeries 340 is a member of the xSeries Rack-optimized Server line. The 1 GHz xSeries 340 is positioned between the xSeries 330 and the xSeries 350, whereas, the xSeries 330 is a completely new ultra-thin, rack platform. It is positioned as the highest functioned 1 U server of the xSeries rack-optimized offerings. These high-density, two-way, Pentium III-based servers are designed for customer installation of features to handle future expansion to meet changing needs. At the same time they can handle emerging applications requiring maximum computing power and function in the least amount of rack space.

xSeries 200 Specifics The IBM ~ xSeries 200 (Figure 2.14) is positioned as the flexible, value-oriented, small business server platform of the xSeries Universal Server line. These servers are designed and packaged with features intended specifically for cost-conscious small businesses. The xSeries 200 combines leading industry-standard technologies, excellent internal data storage capacity, ease-of-use, and basic systems management and control features, into an attractively priced entry


139


server. These uni-processor servers provide solid performance to support general purpose network or Web serving applications. They are configured with choices that span a broad price range. Models of the xSeries 200 give you a choice from economical Celeron processor and EIDE or SCSI data storage, or from several Pentium III processors with EIDE or SCSI storage. The xSeries 220 are high-throughput, two-way SMP-capable Pentium III network servers with excellent scalability when adding memory and a second processor. They incorporate powerful 933 MHz, 866 MHz, or 800 MHz Pentium III processors with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a “backside bus” that is 256-bits wide. Four times wider than the previous bus, the quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. Two Intel Pentium III sockets are standard on the system board to support installation of a second processor. The 33 MHz SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. The xSeries 220 uses the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (NB6635 North Bridge 3.0LE)

140


chipset to maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to the 64-bit and 32-bit PCI buses. These xSeries Universal Servers are flexible tower or rack-mountable servers positioned between the xSeries 200 and the xSeries 230. They are designed to deliver new levels of value and flexibility for entry servers running entry and work group applications. This new xSeries 230 platform, previously known as the Netfinity 5100, has been updated with a powerful 1 GHz Pentium III processor. All other features remain unchanged. The xSeries 230 is a part of the new set of xSeries Universal Servers that consists of flexible tower or rack-mountable models. The xSeries 230 servers are positioned between the xSeries 220 and the xSeries 240. They are compact 5 U, SMP-capable Pentium III processor-based platforms designed with moderate high-availability features designed for mainstream network server applications. For customers who require the high-availability features of hot-swap power and fans, and Active PCI slots, the xSeries 240 makes an excellent solution. For those with applications that do not quite need the power of 133 MHz FSB processors, 64-bit PCI bus, or storage and memory expandability of a xSeries 230, the xSeries 220 is an affordable alternative. The new xSeries 240 is an update to the Netfinity 5600. This new xSeries Universal Server platform has been updated with a powerful 1 GHz Pentium III processor, all other features remain unchanged. The xSeries 240 servers are positioned between the xSeries 230 and the Netfinity 7100. They are compact 5 U, two-way, SMP-capable Pentium III processor-based platforms designed with high-availability features required to run business-critical applications. For customers who require the additional processor power of four-way Pentium III Xeon processors, the Netfinity 7100 makes an excellent solution. For those with applications that do not quite need the fault-tolerance and performance of 64-bit, hot-swap PCI slots, or storage and memory expandability of a xSeries 240, the xSeries 230 is an affordable alternative.

xSeries 100 Specifics The IBM ~ xSeries 130 and 135 (Figure 2.15) are Web-server appliances that are preloaded and tuned with Web-serving software


Figure 2.15.

141

IBM xSeries 130 and 135 server members.

that have the power, control, and ease of installation you need to handle Web-server applications. They feature powerful SMP-capable 800 MHz Pentium III processors with 256 KB advanced transfer L2 cache. The advanced transfer cache is the result of a new “backside bus” that is 256 bits wide. Four times wider than the previous bus, this quad-wide cache line can transfer four 64-bit cache line segments at one time to deliver full-speed capability. The xSeries 130 is preloaded with Windows Powered OS and a software stack designed specifically to support front-end Web-serving environments. Preloaded software includes: • Windows Powered OS — optimized for supporting front-end Web-serving applications •

Netfinity Director 2.12 UM Server Extensions — provides system management support based on industry standards

142


•

Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.0 — a Web-serving application integrated into Windows Powered OS

•

Netfinity Web Server Accelerator V2 — dramatically improves performance of Web-hosting applications and allows more Web content to be hosted by fewer xSeries appliance servers

•

Advanced appliance configuration utility — manage all of your xSeries appliances from a single client with this Web-based application set

Two Intel Pentium III connectors are standard on the system board. High-speed, 133 SDRAM is optimized for 133 MHz processor-to-memory subsystem performance. They use the ServerWorks ServerSet III LE (CNB3.0LE) chipset to maximize throughput from processors to memory, and to primary 32-bit and secondary 64-bit PCI buses. The two expansion slots are supported through the secondary 64-bit bus. The xSeries 340, previously known as the Netfinity 4500R, has been updated with a powerful 1 GHz Pentium III processor. All other features remain unchanged. The xSeries 340 is a member of the xSeries Rack-optimized Server line. The 1 GHz xSeries 340 is positioned between the xSeries 330 and the xSeries 350. A high-density, two-way Pentium II-based server, it is designed for customer installation of features to handle future expansion to meet changing needs. At the same time, it can handle emerging applications requiring maximum computing power and function in the least amount of rack space. These applications include: •

Application hosting

•

Web hosting

•

File and print

•

Messaging and collaboration

This powerful server also meets traditional enterprise network server requirements, but with an added benefit of requiring less space.

Personal Computer Options and Peripherals

143

3 Personal Computer Options and Peripherals

Personal computers are likely to be found in many diverse environments, ranging from a corporate president’s desk to a physics laboratory bench. The activities performed by people in these environments vary widely, and so do their computing needs. IBM personal computers (PCs) can be customized to many environments by selecting the appropriate optional equipment, which includes feature cards and peripherals. Feature cards are circuit boards containing electronics that provide additional functions to personal computers. They can be installed in one of the expansion slots provided on most personal computers. As we discussed in Chapter 1, a variety of expansion slots—including ISA, EISA, PCMCIA, and PCI slots—are available in IBM personal computers. Feature cards for all of these slots are discussed in this chapter. Peripherals are external devices that attach to personal computers, usually via a cable, and perform functions under the computer’s control. There are also other options such as hard disk drives and processor upgrades that add function/capacity or improve system performance, as well as options that can be attached to a computer’s external ports such as the USB port. This chapter covers

143

144


•

Displays and display adapters

•

Printers

•

Memory expansion options

•

Diskette drives

•

Fixed disk drives/SCSI adapters

•

Tape drives

•

Optical disk drives

•

Communications options

•

Multimedia options

•

ThinkPad options

•

Netfinity server options

This chapter does not provide comprehensive coverage of all optional equipment that can be used with IBM’s personal computers. Coverage of all feature cards and peripherals offered by IBM and the many other companies in this business would fill a separate book, and it would be obsolete before it could be published. The purpose of this chapter is to describe the types of optional equipment commonly used with personal computers in the business environment and to give examples of some products.

Displays and Display Adapters A computer’s display or monitor is the TV-like device that converts the computer’s electrical signals into light images that convey information to the user. The electrical signals that drive the display are generated by the graphics circuitry housed within the personal computer.


145

Some type of display device is required to allow the user to interact with personal computers. Some personal computers come standard with a display (e.g., the ThinkPad family). Most personal computers, however, require the user to choose a display for use with the system. This section will look at the following displays and adapters: •

E Series color monitors

•

G Series color monitors

•

P Series color monitors

•

Flat Panel color monitor

In general, all of the IBM displays automatically select the necessary operating mode being used by the graphics circuitry in most of the IBM personal computers. However, the reader should verify that the display of interest works with (i.e., supports the mode used by) the specific personal computer of interest, because there are exceptions. Now let’s take a look at these displays. E Series Color Monitors The IBM E Series Color Monitors are designed for use as low-cost entry-level monitors for personal computers as well as across the entire IBM product line. These CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) displays may be packaged and priced together with systems or sold separately. The E series monitors are value-priced displays that have a simple industry standard design, whereas IBM’s G and P series monitors are developed with more robust features and a stylish IBM design. As with all displays, images on the E Series monitors are generated by selectively illuminating the appropriate areas of the phosphor deposited on the glass screen. The more closely these phosphor deposits are spaced, the more finely detailed the image. This spacing, called the phosphor pitch, is one way color displays are compared. A second important feature of displays is their resolution. The resolution of the display is the number of pels or picture elements that the screen is able to display. The higher the resolution is, the greater the

146


detail that can be displayed in an image. Some graphics adapters may not be able to use these displays in their maximum resolution modes, so be sure to check the capabilities of your system before investing in a high-resolution monitor. All of IBM’s monitors shown in Figure 3.1 have antireflective screen treatments that reduce glare for the user. These displays also incorporate power management features that allow them to meet the EPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) guidelines for the En-

Figure 3.1.

Members of IBM’s monitor family.


147

ergy Star program when attached to a system with the appropriate power management capabilities. This feature allows the displays to reduce their power consumption to below 30 watts when not in use instead of the 100 watts or more required when the display is active. These monitors also comply with the more stringent Swedish NUTEK requirements of 8 watts when idle. The appropriate hardware and software is required on the system unit to activate these features. The E Series monitors also comply with the SWEDAC (Swedish Board for Technical Accreditation) MRP-II guidelines for electric, magnetic, and electrostatic emissions, and meet the requirements of the ISO (International Organization for Standardization) Standard 9241 Part 3, which provides for flicker-free displays that help to relieve user eyestrain and fatigue. All of IBM’s CRT Color Monitors support the DDC protocol to level 1/2B. This means that basic configuration information can be passed to a system unit from its attached monitor. Often referred to as Plug and Play, the protocol allows a DDC-enabled system unit to automatically configure the video adapter to drive the attached monitor at its optimum display mode without end-user intervention. For effective optimization, the attaching system unit must also be hardware- and software-enabled for DDC operation. The capabilities of the monitor are held in nonvolatile monitor memory in an encoded format. The data is received from the monitor by the system unit during boot-up and system configuration. They also automatically select the appropriate display mode when the system is turned on. The E74M multimedia color monitor offers high-quality video and built-in sound. This monitor, including speakers, is value- priced for home office, small business, and education/training use. The E and G Series monitors use the Flatter, Squarer Tube (FST) technology, which reduces image distortion. They differ from one another in screen size, antireflective screen treatments, and maximum screen resolutions. G Series Monitors The G series (general-purpose) monitors are designed for standard office word processing, spreadsheet, database, project management, and business graphics software with traditional windowing environments. Members of this monitor family are shown in Figure 3.2. These

148


Figure 3.2.

Members of IBM’s G series monitor family.

monitors can be used across the IBM personal computer family as well as with many non-IBM personal computers. They come in 14-, 15-, 17-, and 19-inch models, and to satisfy a sense of style, the latest G series monitors offer a new design and a choice of pearl white or stealth gray models to match your desktop system. All of the G series monitors use the Flatter, Squarer Tube technology (FST) to minimize image distortion caused by the curvature of the tube. They each have a phosphor dot pitch of 0.25 mm. The new G96 offers advanced on-screen controls and a maximum resolution of 1600 × 1200 with a short-neck design that saves on desktop space. In addition to the standard G76 and G96, enhanced versions of each model that offer touch capability are available through MicroTouch Systems, Inc. Touch-enabled monitors are identical to the standard G series monitor they are based on except that they come with a factory-installed touch-screen feature. The touch-screen feature provides the user with another way (other than a mouse or keyboard) to interact with the computer system. The color display can detect when a user touches the display screen. The monitor senses the user’s touch and automatically determines the precise position at which the pressure is applied and also the precise amount of pressure applied. This information is then sent to the serial port provided on IBM personal computers, where it is interpreted by supplied software drivers. This input is then sent to the personal computer and looks like mouse input to programs. Touch-screen input is most useful in environments in which the systems are likely to be used by


149

those who can’t type or are completely unfamiliar with computer systems. Touch-screen input is particularly useful when combined with multimedia capabilities and deployed in merchandising, point-of-sale, and information kiosk applications. P Series Color Monitors The P series monitors are referred to as the professional series (see Figure 3.3). The P76, P96, and P260 monitors feature FD Trinitron CRTs for bright, sharp images on a virtually flat screen. They come with high-contrast CRTs with quarter-wave antireflective coating for high-definition images and two video inputs with selection by a front-mounted switch Display Data Channel (DDC) 1/2B for error-free setup. The lockable digital controls with on-screen displays are provided in nine languages. The P series monitors operate at 85 Hz with flicker-free images at up to 1600 × 1200 addressability. They are ISO 9241, Part 3–capable for improved image quality, and Energy Star and NUTEK–compliant for low power consumption. The pearl-white models of the P96 color monitors meet the Swedish Confederation of Professional Employees (TCO) TCO-99 Environmental Label standards. The stealth-gray models meet TCO-95. TCO-99 is a set of requirements developed by the TCO that addresses some of the following areas •

Environmentally conscious manufacture: Certain chemicals are banned from both the product and/or its manufacturing process. Large plastic parts must be made of only one poly-

Figure 3.3.

Members of IBM’s P series monitor family.

150


mer and marked to aid recycling. No plastic parts must be given a metallized coating. The manufacturer must be certified to ISO 14001 and have a company environmental policy. •

Ergonomics: Products must meet tighter character size uniformity, linearity, and luminance requirements than the corresponding ISO 9241-3 values. Products must also meet requirements on front bezel reflectance and gloss, smaller color temperature variation, and better color uniformity.

•

Electromagnetic field emissions: Products must meet emission limits. Not only are these generally lower than the corresponding MPR-II limits, but measurements must also be taken closer to the product.

•

Energy consumption: Products must meet Swedish National Board for Industrial and Technical Development (NUTEK) power consumption requirements as defined in specification 803299 and electrical and fire safety. Products must meet standard EN60950.

Finally, the P series monitors come with a three-year limited warranty. Flat Panel Color Monitors Flat panel color monitors are extremely compact and energy efficient. This makes them an attractive alternative to conventional CRT monitors in a number of environments. IBM flat panel color monitors take the active-matrix TFT LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) technology found on our popular ThinkPad notebooks and apply it to standalone monitors for desktop and system use. The IBM T86 TFT Color Monitor is a slim, lightweight, active-matrix Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology LCD monitor that can achieve flicker-free operation and provide the fast response times required for full-motion video. The T86 Color Monitor is shown in Figure 3.4. The 18-inch viewable image uses a 0.28-mm dot pitch. The T86’s extremely compact dimensions and energy-efficient features make it a preferred alternative to conventional CRT monitors in space- or energy-conscious environments.


Figure 3.4.

151

IBM T86 Flat Panel monitors (second monitor rotated).

The IBM T86 Color Monitor offers addressability of 1,280 × 1,024 and displays up to 16.7 million colors. It has a very wide field of view: 80 degrees up, 80 degrees down, and 80 degrees right and left. The T86 comes with a nonreflective surface and produces images with a high contrast ratio (300 to 1). The IBM T86 is Energy Star and NUTEK compliant to 5 watts, which means it doesn’t use a lot of energy. Because of its TFT technology, the T86 produces virtually no electromagnetic emissions and gives off only one third as much heat as many monitors with traditional CRTs. It complies with the ISO 9241-3 international standard covering front-of-screen ergonomics and flicker-free viewing. The T86 is compatible with the IBM NetVista, IBM PC, IntelliStation, RS/6000, and compatible workstations with models supporting either an analog or digital video source. This choice enables you to attach the connection that best matches the capabilities of your PC and graphics card. An external 20-volt DC power supply is included. The IBM T74 color monitor features a 17-inch TFT—a bright, flicker-free 1,280 × 1,024 screen with exceptionally wide viewing angle and low reflectivity. The T74 provides a choice of analog video

152


input from either 15-Pin D-Sub or 13W3, which is selectable by the On-Screen Display (OSD) controls. The T54 and T56 TFT Color Monitors are lower-cost 15-inch flat panels with a 1,024 × 768 maximum resolution. The T56 provides a pivot feature to accommodate both landscape and portrait screen positions. Pivot software is included. Unlike CRTs, flat panel monitors are best when viewed in their maximum addressable resolution. When choosing a flat panel monitor, you should make sure your graphics adapter can support these maximum resolutions. Also, you will want to make sure your applications are supported by these resolutions. The T54H (Hybrid) Flat Panel Monitor is IBM’s latest TFT flat panel monitor offering. The T54H offers customers for the first time a choice of connecting to either analog or digital interfaces to the PC system. Like the other IBM flat panel monitors, the T54H offers several advantages over CRTs. The new unit consumes less space and about one third the power while generating significantly less heat. The T54H is a 15-inch flat panel with a 1,024 × 768 optimum resolution.

Printers Printers are electromechanical devices that print a computer’s electronically encoded information onto paper. So many printers work with IBM personal computers that exhaustive coverage of printers is beyond the scope of this book. We limit our discussion here to some representative printers that fit the needs of many business environments: •

IBM Network Printer 12

•

IBM InfoPrint 21

•

IBM InfoPrint 40

•

IBM InfoPrint Color 8 Printer

Figure 3.5 summarizes the differences among these printers. Because the IBM personal computers’ serial and parallel ports are com-

0MB

0MB

0MB

0MB

0MB

600 35K 1x80, 1x250

600 200K 1x50, 2x500

1x80, 1x250, 1x500

1x250

1x2, 500, 1x50, 2x500 1x500

1x2, 500, 1x50, 2x500 1x500

1x250

600 150K 1x50, 2x500

1x80, 1x250, 1x500

u tp

1x150, 2x500, 1x2000 1x500

1x80, 1x250

Ou

1x150, 1x500

600 75K

600 35K

2

Summary of IBM Network Printers.

DPI = Dots Per Inch

c pa

1x80, 1x250

Op

a er

Yes, Opt.

Novell Netware 4.x

IBM LAN Server 3.0 and above


Yes, Opt.

em st Sy


Novell Netware 4.x

k or tw Ne

g ti n

Yes, Opt.

Yes, Opt. 1x200, 1x300, 1x2, 000

1x2, 000, 1x200, 1x300

1x750

Yes, Opt.

p

g

ty ci

in lex

a ap .c

Du

ax

ity

m t: pu

ca

t Ou

. td

1x80, 1x250

s t:

When referring to memory or hard drive capacity, MB equals one million bytes. Accessible capacity may vary.

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance

Figure 3.5.

3

2

1

Key to Footnotes

68

Network Printer 12 4312001 33 12 4

40

Infoprint 40 4332004 66

64

64

8

32

96

68

16

8

20

InfoPrint 20 4320001 50 Infoprint 32 4332001 66

Network Printer 12 4312001 33 12 4

)

1

s) ge 3 pa ) ( I ) . P e ity ty td (D cl B) MB d ci ac (M x. ( r y: s std. y Cy ee pa ap . p r ) a c t d a o : . .c be rS m PM : s t : m Du on ax m td so y y (P Me luti hly :s :m d Nu or or es ut ut ee em em lash eso ont rt oc p p p r a R F P S M M In M P In Hz (M


153

154


patible with those commonly found in the PC community, many other printers not listed will also work with IBM personal computers. IBM Network Printer 12 The IBM Network Printer 12 shown in Figure 3.6 is a tabletop letter-quality laser printer. A laser printer produces a whole page of print at a time. It prints on individual sheets of paper or cut sheets, not continuous forms. Laser printers use the laser/electrophotographic (EP) process to print an entire page at a time. This technique uses the laser to produce a charged image on a drum inside the printer. Ink (toner) is attracted to the charged portions of the drum and then transferred to the paper as with a copy machine. The print cartridge containing the toner can typically print about 20,000 pages before it needs to be replaced. This EP printing technique makes for high-quality printing.

Figure 3.6.

IBM Network Printer 12.


155

The IBM Network Printer 12 delivers up to 35,000 pages monthly at speeds of up to 12 pages per minute. The 600 dpi resolution images produced are enhanced by TrueRes edge-smoothing technology. A special feature called TonerMiser provides a toner-saving print mode that reduces toner consumption by up to 50% without sacrificing quality. TonerMiser is unique in that it applies a lighter density of toner while leaving all pixels intact. The IBM Network Printer 12 supports up to three simultaneously active interfaces with data stream sensing and automatic data switching among IEEE1284 parallel and RS-232/422 serial plus any one of the following: twinax, coax, Ethernet (10BaseT or 10Base2), or token-ring (4 MB or 16 MB). The Network Printer 12 supports up to three physical interfaces with data stream sensing and emulation switching for PCL5e and, optionally, PostScript Level 2 and IBM traditional AFP/IPDS and SCS. The IBM Network Printer 12 comes standard with two media input trays (expandable to three) and a maximum input capacity of 830 sheets plus 50 envelopes. IBM InfoPrint 21 The IBM Infoprint 21 (Figure 3.7) is a 21-page-per-minute (ppm) laser printer designed for small to medium-sized workgroups. The Infoprint 21 uses the IBM high-performance controller with a 100 MHz PowerPC 603e processor, an IBM printer co-processor and internal 64-bit data bus, and a 32-bit address bus running at 66 MHz. It has a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus for a Network Interface Card (NIC) and a hard drive. The Infoprint 21 is intended to replace the IBM Network Printer 17 in the IBM Workgroup Printer product line. Its primary use is for the distributed mission-critical market, general office, and reprographics environments. Its secondary use is for creating books and marketing and direct mail materials. The Infoprint 21 is designed to meet the printing needs of a variety of networks including Novell NetWare, IBM LAN Server, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and TCP/IP networks such as IBM AIX (this requires optional Token-Ring or Ethernet/Fast Ethernet network cards). It can also be used with the AS/400 as a twinax-attached printer (requires optional twinax interface) or with mainframe systems as a coax-attached printer (requires optional coax interface).

156


Figure 3.7.

IBM InfoPrint 21.

IBM InfoPrint 40 The IBM InfoPrint 40 (Figure 3.8) is a high-speed, up to 40 pages per minute (ppm), printing solution designed for large workgroups. It is a faster version of the InfoPrint 32 with the same features. The InfoPrint 32 will still be available, but there is no conversion kit to convert InfoPrint 32s to InfoPrint 40s. With flexible paper-handling capabilities, the InfoPrint 40 can be configured as a desktop workgroup printer or a departmental floor-standing printer with high input and output paper capacities. This printing solution has copier-like capability for printing multiple copies of presentations, manuals, or newsletters. The InfoPrint 40 is a flexible and robust printing solution that will support most end-user host system environments: S/390s and


Figure 3.8.

157

IBM InfoPrint 40.

AS/400s to PCs to Macintoshes. With up to three host system attachments, the InfoPrint 40 comes standard with HP PCL5e emulation and Adobe PostScript 3 data streams. In addition, IBM’s AFP/IPDS data stream support is available as an option. The InfoPrint 40 is a workgroup or departmental printer with a peak print rate of 200,000 pages per month (simplex) and a maximum average monthly usage of 40,000 pages (simplex). It supports high-performance printing with an Intel 66 MHz RISC processor. IBM InfoPrint Color 8 Printer The IBM InfoPrint Color 8 Printer shown in Figure 3.9 is a full-color printer designed for general business, graphic arts, and quick print

158


Figure 3.9.

IBM InfoPrint Color 8 Printer.

users. The Infoprint Color 8 is a fast, color presentation printer designed for small and medium workgroups. The InfoPrint Color 8 features 8-page-per-minute (ppm) color and monochrome printing with single-pass color engine design with minimum paper and mechanical movement. It handles paper sizes up to 8.5 × 14 inches (216 × 356 mm) and supports labels, transparencies, and card stock media. The InfoPrint Color 8 printer comes with 32 MB of RAM and prints a true 600 × 600 dots per inch (dpi) full-color output. It also provides PCL 5-color emulation (PCL 5c) and Adobe PostScript 3 with a 500- sheet-capacity input tray. The InfoPrint Color 8 is designed for an Average Monthly Print Volume (AMPV) of 2,750 pages with a peak printing rate of 25,000 pages per month. (Although this peak rate is sustainable on a short-term basis, IBM does not recommend printing to this maximum rate on a continuous basis.)


159

Memory Expansion Options Nothing seems to grow faster than the computer user’s appetite for memory. Many different options allow the user to expand the memory in IBM personal computers beyond the standard configuration. In most cases, memory can be expanded on the system board itself up to the maximum supported by the system, allowing the expansion slots to be used for other purposes. In other cases, it is necessary to install memory expansion feature cards in the expansion slots to expand memory to the limit. Keep in mind, however, that because of different memory configurations and speeds, memory expansion options that work in one personal computer model may not work in another. The “specifics” sections of Chapter 1 showed the maximum amount of memory supported by each personal computer model. Figure 3.10 lists some examples of memory expansion options that can be used with the various personal computers. Care must be taken to verify that a specific memory option works with the specific personal computer type and model being upgraded. In addition to system memory, the video memory and Level 2 (L2) cache memory can be upgraded on many personal computer models. Adding more memory to the video adapter can increase both performance and resolution of the graphics subsystem. Increasing the size of the second-level cache can increase overall system performance by increasing the “hit ratio” of the cache. The more frequently the microprocessor can find the data it needs in the high-speed cache area, the faster it can process the information.

Fixed Disk Drives/SCSI Adapters There are many optional fixed disk drives that can be used to expand the fixed disk storage of IBM personal computers. As we saw in Chapter 1, most personal computers come standard with some fixed disk storage used to hold programs and data in a way immediately accessible to the personal computer. Fixed disk storage is nonvolatile in that it retains the stored information even when the power is turned off. Figure 3.11 lists fixed disk options used with personal computers. There are optional fixed disk drives that attach to the EIDE (En-

160


hanced Integrated Drive Electronics) interface as well as to the SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) interface. IBM has refreshed its line of EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) upgrade options for IBM PCs, IntelliStation workstations, and entry-level Netfinity servers with new 15 GB, 20.4 GB, and 30 GB ATA/100 HDDs. These HDDs have Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.), which warns of predictable impending hard drive failure. Drives predicting failure within the limited warranty period are eligible for replacement, before failure, at IBM’s expense. S.M.A.R.T. is compatible with IBM S.M.A.R.T. Reaction software, which can perform unattended backup of customer data from the drive before failure. The figure also lists SCSI adapters, which provide the circuitry necessary to attach SCSI fixed disk drives (and other options as well) to personal computers. For applications that require a very large amount of fixed disk storage, there are external expansion enclosures that can hold additional fixed disks and high-performance disk subsystems.

Tape Drives The fixed disks in personal computers can contain vast amounts of information. Much of this information has significant value to the user (otherwise why keep it in the first place?). To ensure that a fixed

Not all models or products are available in all countries. Visit our Web site at ibm.com/options for the most up-to-date compatibility information. Part number

B S/ PW SB B W 79 31 6 5 P W 51 S 71 P / 68 8 2 9 22 7 0 / 7) SB 6 5 2 6 6 3 B ) 8 6x S )6 79 )6 ) 6 ) 62 x 4 ) ( x7 )6 21 x3 x4 4 43 4 x2 (6 x4 0 /p (2 (4 (4 x 0i ( (2 0i 66 0i 4 (4 /p /p 0 0p X4 40 4 0 A 2 0 a A4 a A4 40 ta A PW a X4 S4 A A t A t s 1 is a ta ta st ta ta is t a t Vi 6 8 4 is is tV is is Vis t t Vi is tV tV tV tV Ne 40 / tV Ne t tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne N e Ne 68 / 44

5/

6

S/

B

/ 48

66

49

IBM PC options Memory SDRAM DIMM Non-parity 64MB 133MHz

33L3071

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

128MB 133MHz

33L3073

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

256MB 133MHz

33L3075

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

512 MB 133MHz

33L3077

Figure 3.10.

IBM memory expansion options. (continued on next page)


Part number

161

78 5 6 4 /6 2 4 /6 4 7 6 68 59 45 6 2 3 /6 5 68 / 3 /6 8 2/ 6 65 584 4/ 89 28 656 5 4 6 6 6 6 L L 6 3 GL L L 0G 0P 0 0 0P 00P 30 30 30 30 30 3 PC PC PC PC PC PC

Memory SDRAM DIMM Non-parity l

32MB 100MHz

01K1136

64MB 100MHz

01K1137

l

128MB 100MHz

01K1138

l

l

256MB 100MHz

01K1139

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

33L3075

l

l

33L3077

l

l

64MB 133MHz

33L3071

l

128MB 133MHz

33L3073

l

256MB 133MHz 512MB 133MHz

l

ECC 64MB 66MHz

04K0074

128MB 66MHz

04K0075

32MB 100MHz

01K1133

l

64MB 100MHz

01K1130

l

128MB 100MHz

01K1131

l

64MB 133 MHz

33L3079

l

128 MB 133MHz

33L3081

l

l

256MB 133MHz

33L3083

l

l

l

RDRAM RIMM Non-parity 64MB 700MHz 4D

33L3099

l

128MB 700MHz 8D

33L3101

l

256MB 700MHz 16D

33L3103

l

64MB 800MHz 4D

20L0270

l

128MB 800MHz 8D

20L0271

l

256MB 800MHz 16D

20L0273

l

64MB 700MHz 4D

33L3105

l

128MB 700MHz 8D

33L3107

l

256 MB 700MHz 16D

33L3109

l

ECC

64MB 800 MHz 4D

20L0274

l

128MB 800MHz 8D

20L0275

l

256MB 800MHz 16D

20L0277

l

Figure 3.10. page)

IBM memory expansion options. (continued from previous

162


B S/ PW SB 79 1 SB PW W 65 83 71 8 / 9 P 2 51 /6 7 5 22 6 ) 2 30 x 7) B 6 6 2 9 6 ) 8 S 7 ) (6 3) ) 6 x4 4) x7 )6 21 43 x2 (6 2x 4x 4 x 4 i (4 x 4 0 /p (2 0i 66 p( p( ( 0i 0 4 (4 0 0p 0/ 0/ 20 X4 A4 A4 4 0 t a A PW a X4 S4 A4 A4 a A ta A t 1 s st a a a i i a a t s t t t is t ta tV 684 is is tV Vi is is is is tV tV tV tV Ne 40/ t V et V Net Ne tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne N Ne 68 4 64

SB

Par t number

/5

/6

S/

B

8 64

/6

64

9

Hard disk drives 10.1GB 5400rpm ATA/66 EIDE

00N8202

l

15GB 5400rpm

19K4463

l

10.1 GB 7200rpm ATA/66 EIDE

33L4958

15GB 7200rpm ATA/100 EIDE

19K4460

l

l

l

l

l

20.4GB 7200rpm ATA/100 EIDE

19K4461

l

l

l

l

l


00N8203

l

l

l

l

l

9.1 GB 7200rpm Ultra160 SCSI

00N8204

l

l

l

l


00N8205

l

l

l

l

5.25 to 3.5 DASD Bay Conversion Kit

70G8165

l

l

l

l

l

l

Par t number

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

64 78 /62 /65 4 62 68 6574 5 2 59 4 68 6 / 4/6 892/ 5 /63 288/ 563 8 6 4 5 5 4 L6 L6 6 ® 63 L 6 L 6 PL G G 0 0 30 0 3 0 0 30 0P 30 0 P 30 0 3 PC PC PC PC PC PC

Hard disk drives 10.1GB 5400rpm EIDE

00N8202

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l l


19K4463

10.1GB 7200rpm EIDE

33L4958

l

l

l

l

13.5GB 7200rpm EIDE

33L5043

l

l

l

l

l


19K4460

l

l

l

l

l

20.4GB 7200rpm ATA/100 EIDE

19K4461

l

l

l

l

l

20.4GB 7200rpm EIDE

33L5044

l

l

l

l

l


00N8203

l

l

l

l

l

9.1GB Wide Ultra2 SCSI (7200)

20L0553

l

l

l

l

l

18.2GB Wide Ultra2 SCSI (7200)

20L0554

l

l

l

l

l


00N8204

l

l

l

l

l

18.2GB 7200rpm Ultra160 SCSI

00N8205

l

l

l

l

l

5.25'' to 3.5'' DASD Bay Conversion

70G8165

l

l

l

l

l

Kit

Figure 3.11.

l

l

IBM fixed disk drive options.


163

disk failure or human error of some kind does not cause all information to be lost, some sort of regular backup strategy is recommended. There are several tape drives for IBM personal computers that can be used for this purpose. Figure 3.12 lists some of the IBM tape drives for personal computers.

Optical Disk Drives Another type of auxiliary storage used with personal computers is called an optical disk drive. Unlike the diskettes, fixed disks, and tape drives that exclusively utilize magnetic technology to record information, optical disks use laser light (sometimes in combination with magnetics) to write and read information on a reflective disk. There are two types of optical disk drives used with IBM personal computers: compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM) drives and rewritable optical disk drives. We have already discussed IBM’s rewritable CD-ROM in Chapter 1, so let’s take a closer look at the other CD-ROM drives.

B S/ PW SB 9 1 SB PW 57 W 83 /6 P 51 71 8 /6 9 57 2 6 ) 2 2 22 30 x 7) B 6 6 6 9 ) 8 S 7 ) (6 3) 4) ) 6 x4 x7 )6 21 43 x2 (6 2x 4x 4 x 4 i (4 x 4 0 /p (2 0i 66 p( p( ( 0 0i 4 (4 0 0p 0/ X4 0/ 20 A4 A4 4 0 t a A PW a X4 S4 A4 A4 A ta a A s 1 t st a a a i i a a t t s t is t ta tV 684 is is tV Vi is ist is is tV tV tV tV Ne 40/ t V et V Net Ne tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne N Ne 68 4 64

SB

Par t number

/5

/6

S/

B

8 64

/6

64

9

Tape drives 10/20 GB TR5 Internal EIDE

20L0549

10/20 GB NS Internal SCSI

09N4042

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Tape drives 10/20GB NS Internal SCSI

09N4042

l

l

10/20GB TR5 Internal EIDE

20L0549

l

l

Figure 3.12.

List of IBM tape drive options.

l

l

l

l

l

l

164


CD-ROM Drives CD-ROM drives use the same technique to store information as audio compact disks. Rather than using magnetics, CD-ROM systems use optical techniques to achieve their much higher density. A single disk used in CD-ROM drives can hold about 600 MB of information. That’s enough storage to hold over 300,000 sheets of computer output, or a stack over 90 feet high. CD-ROM drives are read only; that is, personal computer users can view the information but they can’t change it. The information is prerecorded on the disk using specialized equipment and then distributed to personal computer users for their use. The primary use of CD-ROM storage is to distribute large amounts of information in a convenient package. Potential uses for CD-ROM include distribution of program libraries, financial reports, operations manuals, phone directories, or any large (and relatively stable) database. The extremely high storage capacity of CD-ROMs can be attributed to the technique used to store the information. When the CD-ROM is first recorded, a laser beam is used to burn tiny patterns on the reflective surface of an optical disk according to industry standards. Later, by bouncing the low-power laser beam in the CD-ROM drive off the optical disk’s surface, a series of mirrors and sensors can read back the information burned into the disk. Although this optical technology lends itself quite well to the information distribution applications mentioned earlier, their limited speed (as compared to fixed disks) and inability to record information preclude using CD-ROM disks as normal fixed disk storage. IDE CD-ROM Drives The internal 32×–14× IDE CD-ROM drive (Figure 3.13) is designed to be installed in the media bay of a computer system. It connects directly to the internal IDE controller in the system unit. As a result, no separate card is required for installation as long as sufficient port capacity is available. It has a maximum throughput of 3,200 KB per second with a minimum of 14×. The actual playback speed will vary and is often less than the maximum possible. An audio output jack is provided on the bezel of some CD-ROM drives. If one does not exist, do not worry, an internal audio cable is most likely connected to an audio card providing consolidation of your


Figure 3.13.

165

IBM Internal IDE and USB Portable CD-ROM drives.

system’s audio output as well as giving you an audio mixing capability. Systems supporting the IBM 32×–14× IDE CD-ROM drive include the IntelliStation M Pro (6888, 6898), IntelliStation Z Pro, PC 300XL, PC 300PL, PC 300PL Pentium II models, PC 300GL, PC 300GL Celeron models, and PC 300GL Pentium II models.

Communications Options Today’s businesses are placing an increasing emphasis on computer communications. This section provides an overview of some communications feature cards available for IBM personal computers. Chapter 7 is devoted to showing how to use these communications feature cards to allow personal computers to participate in various communication configurations. If your interest is in communications environments rather than the feature adapters themselves, skip to Chapter 7. This section examines the following communications options: •

Async adapters

•

Synchronous/multiprotocol adapters

•

Modems

•

Ethernet adapters

166


•

Token-ring network adapters

•

Emulation adapters

Async/Synchronous/Multiprotocol Adapters As the name implies, async adapters add asynchronous communication ports (also called serial ports) to personal computers. Typically, the async adapters provide ports functionally identical to the async ports that come standard with most personal computers. The additional ports allow personal computers to attach to additional external devices. Figure 3.14 lists some async options used with IBM personal computers. The async port is one of the most commonly used ports. Many kinds of peripheral equipment (both IBM and non-IBM) can be attached to personal computers via these ports (e.g., printers, plotters, external modems, dumb terminals, another computer, etc.). The speed with which information is sent over the async port is measured in bits per second (bps). The term “asynchronous” refers to the communications method or protocol used by these ports to move information. Individual bytes of information are transmitted one bit at a time with no fixed relationship between bytes. Figure 3.15 shows one way a byte might be packaged before it is sent over the async port. The start bit tells the receiving async port that information is coming down the line. The user’s data follows the start bit. The parity bit is used by the receiving B S/ B PW SB S/ 49 79 1 6 SB PW 66 W 5/ 65 83 8/ 4/ 71 8 / 9 P 2 51 /6 ) 4 2 4 7 0 6 2 6 6 5 62 6 4 ) 2 66 8 3 6 x7 SB 79 7) ( 3) 4) ) x 2) )6 21 43 6x 2x 2x 4x 4 x4 i ( 4 x4 0 /p i( 0i 66 p( p( p( ( 4 (4 40 0/ X4 0/ 2 0 A4 0 0 a A PW 40 40 A 4 4 4 a X S A A A ta a A is t 41 t st a a a i a a t t s s a t t i i t is is tV 68 tV is is Vis t t V is tV tV tV tV Ne 40 / Ne tV t tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne N e Ne 68 SB

Part number

Adapters PCI MultiProtocol Adapter

12J2981

•

•

•

•

3270 Emulation PCI Adapter

05J4401

•

•

•

•

5250 PCI Express Adapter

82H4708

•

•

•

•

IEEE 1394 PCI Card (Low Profile Enabled)

19K5790

•

•

•

•

Figure 3.14.

•

•

•

Asynchronous, synchronous, and multiprotical options.


167

end to check for transmission errors in the user’s data. Finally, the stop bit signifies the end of the byte. This is just one example of how information might be transmitted over the async port. The user can select other organizations such as eight user data bits and no parity bit, two stop bits, and so on. These different organizations exist primarily because of the many types of equipment that have used this protocol over the years. The specific organization one uses must be established at both ends of the communications link before communications can begin. Async adapters provide an interface based on the widely used EIA RS-232C electrical standard, which defines things such as voltage levels and signal definitions. Some adapters provide full-size male D-shell connectors; others use smaller 9-pin connectors. Make sure your cable matches the connector types used on the async ports on the personal computer and the peripheral equipment. Synchronous/Multiprotocol Adapters As the popularity of personal computers continues to grow among business users, so does the need to transfer information between these personal computers and the larger computer systems commonly found in the business environment. These larger computers are often called host computers because they provide computing resources to numerous users. There are many different ways to communicate between a personal computer and a host computer, as we will see in Chapter 7. The IBM ISA 19.2 SDLC/ASYNC Adapter can be used by personal computers to communicate with host computers using one of four communications protocols: asynchronous (discussed earlier in this

ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA ORGANIZATION 7 bits of user data (e.g., ASCII code)

Start bit

Figure 3.15.

Parity bit

Stop bit

Sample organization of information sent via async port.

168


chapter), BSC (Binary Synchronous Communications), SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control), or HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control). Some of the listed adapters are designed for a particular type of communications protocol; others can support any of these four protocols depending on their programming. When programmed for asynchronous communications, these adapters provide the same function as the async ports provided on most personal computers. As a BSC port, these multiprotocol adapters can communicate with a host via the Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) protocol. The “synchronous” in BSC means that special characters preceding the information synchronize the receiver with the incoming information. This synchronization allows many bytes of information to be sent as a single block—in contrast to the asynchronous protocol, in which a single byte is sent at a time. The ability to send blocks of characters makes BSC more efficient than the asynchronous protocol. BSC is an older communications protocol used by terminals and other equipment to exchange information with large host computers such as IBM’s System 360/370 mainframes. As a result of its past popularity, many of today’s host computer systems still use this protocol. The last two protocols are the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) and the High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC). Synchronous Data Link Control capability enables the adapter to connect PCs and workstations to systems such as IBM AS/400s or for use in host/terminal emulation scenarios. These two protocols differ only in the detailed bit patterns used to control the link. Which one you use will depend on the particulars of your host computer system. As with BSC, SDLC and HDLC are synchronous communication protocols, as their names imply. SDLC and HDLC, however, are newer and generally more flexible protocols that are used in IBM’s Systems Network Architecture (SNA), discussed further in Chapter 6. Modems Modems provide a means for personal computers to send and receive information over public telephone lines and thereby communicate with distant computers. (Chapter 7 covers certain uses for modem communications, including access to the many information services that can provide everything from stock market quotes to electronic


169

mail.) Figure 3.16 lists some modems used with IBM personal computers. Why do computers need a modem for this type of communications? Telephone lines were originally designed to carry electronically encoded voice messages from one point to another. A device (the telephone) is therefore necessary to convert the speaker’s voice into electronic signals suitable for phone-line transmission. Although the information in a computer is already electronically encoded, it is not in a form that can be transmitted over the phone lines. For this reason, a device is needed to convert the electronically encoded computer information into electronic signals suitable for telephone-line transmission. A modem can be thought of as a telephone for a computer. Just as both parties need their own telephone to hold a conversation, both computers must have their own modem to transfer information over the phone lines. Some modems allow personal computers to communicate over switched telephone lines like those used to carry normal residential or business telephone calls. The line is called “switched” because it can make a connection between any two locations by dialing the proper phone number, just as when you make a normal telephone call. Other modems allow personal computers to send and receive information over leased telephone lines. With a leased line, the communications link is always established, so there is no need to dial a telephone number to establish a connection as there is with switched telephone lines. Further, the more expensive leased lines typically facilitate using more efficient communications protocols at higher speeds than with switched telephone lines. Although leased-line modems are

B S/ PW SB 9 SB PW 57 W 31 /6 1 1 P 68 8 27 7 9 225 0/ 7) 6 5 2 6 6 3 B 6 6 6 ) 8 x S ) 62 x 4 ) 79 ) x7 2) ) 6 p (6 21 x3 43 x4 4) 4 (6 / 2x x4 (2 (4 (4 x 0 i ( 0i 66 p( 0i (4 A 4 0 /p /p 0 X4 40 40 40 A20 a A4 a A4 40 t a a PW X4 S A t A A t i s 41 is ta ta a ta t a st a Vist is is is tV s t e t V /6 8 is is i t tV tV tV Vi tV N 40 Ne t V et V Ne Ne et Ne Ne Ne Ne N 68 / 44

SB

Par t number

5/

6

S/

B

/ 48

66

49

Communication Modems V.90 PCI Data/Fax Modem

33L4618

V.90 Low Profile PCI Modem

19K4162

Figure 3.16.

l

IBM modem options.

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

170


designed primarily for use with leased telephone lines, a Switched Network Backup Utility (SNBU) function of the modem can automatically revert to using public switched telephone lines to keep communications going (at slower speeds) in the event of a leased-line failure. Leased-line modems can also be used to communicate from one computer to another (point to point) and as the controlling or subordinate modem on a single communications line with multiple modems attached (multipoint). This multipoint capability allows multiple devices to share a single communications line. Ethernet Adapters An Ethernet adapter allows Personal Systems to participate in an Ethernet Version 2 or an IEEE 802.3 local area network. Figure 3.17 lists some Ethernet adapters used with IBM personal computers. IBM is on the leading edge of Ethernet technology with its 10/100 PCI Ethernet, WOL (Wake On LAN), and PC Card adapters. Whether mobile, desktop, or server connectivity is required, IBM EtherJet products deliver superior speed, reliability, and manageability, providing high performance and preservation of existing networking investments. Ethernet networks transfer information at a rate of over 10 million bits per second (10 Mb/sec) using the CSMA/CD protocol. The newer 10/100 Ethernet adapters can transfer data at a rate up to 100 million bits per second. The Wake on LAN function used on some of IBM’s Ethernet adapters allows you to start up enabled PCs on your LAN even if they have been switched off. IBM also provides 32-bit busmaster Ethernet adapters designed for use in high-performance servers and workstations. Three different types of cable are used in Ethernet networks: thick cable, which is 50-ohm coaxial cable (10Base-5); thin cable, which is RG-58A/U coaxial cable (10Base2); and twisted-pair cable (10BaseT). Users must provide the external transceiver appropriate for their particular Ethernet cable type. Token-Ring Network Adapters A token-ring network is one type of Local Area Network (LAN) in which IBM personal computers can participate. LANs allow a


171

B S/ B PW SB 9 S/ 9 1 64 /6 SB PW 57 W 83 /6 /5 /6 1 1 P /6 ) 48 27 44 78 69 2 2 5 0 6 5 2 6 ) 83 6x 7 SB )6 79 ) 6 ) 62 x 4 ) )6 ( x7 )6 21 x3 4 x4 4 43 x2 (6 x 4 0 /p (2 (4 ( 4x 0 i ( (2 0i 66 0i 4 (4 /p /p 0 0p 4 X4 0 a A PW A4 40 40 A2 0 a A 4 a X4 S4 A t A t A i s 41 t ta a is a a ta ta s s a t i t i t V t s V s i i t t is is Vis t V 68 is tV tV tV tV Ne 40/ tV Ne t tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne 68 SB

Part number

Ethernet Adapters 10/100 EtherJet PCI Management Adapter (Alert-on-LAN)

34L1201

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

10/100 EtherJet with Alert-on-LAN 2 34L1101

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

10/100 EtherJet Secure Management Adapter (3DES) (Alert-on-LAN2)

34L4401

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

10/100 Etherlink PCI Management Adapter by 3COM

09N3601

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

10/100 Ethernet Adapter (Low Profile Enabled)

19K4301

l

l

l

Par t number

IBM 10/100 EtherJet PCI Management Adapter (Alert on LAN)

34L1201

IBM EtherJet 10/100 PCI Adapter with Alert on LAN 2

64 78 6 2 4 /6 5 8/ 2 7 6 94 5 5 86 2 /6 /6 65 /6 34 5 4/ /6 92 88 563 6 8 4 8 2 5 5 4 6 6 6 6 6 L L L 63 PL PL 0P 0 0G 00G 00 300 3 30 30 30 3 C C P P PC PC PC PC

l

l

l

l

l

34L1101

l

l

l

l

l

IBM 10/100 EtherJet Secure Mgmt Adapter (Alert on LAN 2)

34L4401

l

l

l

l

l

10/100 EtherLink PCI Management Adapter by 3Com

09N3601

Figure 3.17.

l

l

l

IBM Ethernet options.

group of computers in close proximity to one another (e.g., in the same building or campus) to easily share information, programs, and computer hardware. A token-ring network adapter is necessary to allow personal computers to participate in the token-ring network; a high-function, baseband LAN. This network allows for the attachment of both small and large computers for the purpose of sharing information and equipment. Figure 3.18 lists some token-ring network adapters used with IBM personal computers. All adapters use an on-board microprocessor to control communications activities. They attach to the token-ring network cable

172


B S/ B PW SB 9 S/ 9 64 /6 SB PW 57 W 31 /6 /5 /6 1 1 P 68 48 27 44 78 69 2 2 5 0/ ) 6 5 6 6 6 9 6 2 4) )2 83 6x 7 SB 6 ) 7 ) ) 7 6 ( 3 4 ) x x ) 21 43 x2 (6 /p 2x 4 x 4x 4 i (4 x4 (2 0i 66 p( p( ( 0 0i (4 A 40 0 0p 0/ X4 0/ 0 A4 0 W A4 X4 S4 A4 A 4 A2 t a ta A 4 i st a 41 P ta a is a a ta ta s s a t i t i t V t s V s 8 i i t t is is Vis t V 6 is tV tV tV tV Ne 40/ Ne tV t tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne 68 SB

Part number

Token-Ring Adapters 16/4 Token-Ring PCI Adapter

34L0601

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

16/4 Token-Ring PCI Adapter with Wake-on-LAN

34L0701

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

16/4 Token-Ring PCI Management Adapter

34L5001

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

16/4 Token Ring Low Profile PCI Management Adapter

07P2701

Hi-Speed 100/16/4 Token Ring PCI Adapter (Wake-on-LAN)

34L0501

Hi-speed Token-Ring PCI Management Adapter (Wake-on-LAN)

34L5201

Eth

t Ad

•

•

• •

•

•

•

t

64 78 6 2 4 /6 5 8/ 4 7 62 6 5 59 68 6 2 3 /6 /6 2/ 8/ 63 5 4 / 6 9 8 6 8 44 68 62 L 6 5 65 65 L L 63 L L 0P 0G 00G 0 0P 00P 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 PC PC PC PC PC PC 45

Par t number

Token-Ring Adapters Turbo 16/4 Token-Ring ISA Adapter

72H3482

l

l

l

l

l

16/4 Token-Ring PCI Adapter

34L0601

l

l

l

l

l

16/4 Token-Ring PCI Adapter w/Wake 34L0701 on LAN ® (Alert on LAN)

l

l

l

l

l

16/4 Token-Ring PCI Mgmt Adapter

34L5001

l

l

l

l

l

High-Speed 100/16/4 T-R PCI Adapter

34L0501

l

l

l

l

l

High-Speed 100/16/4 Token-Ring PCI 34L5201 Management Adapter

l

l

l

l

l

16/4 Token-Ring Low Profile PCI Management Adapter

Figure 3.18.

07P2701

l

IBM token-ring options.

via a 9-pin connector. The new High-Speed 100/16/4 Token-Ring PCI Management Adapter has been developed and tested to work in IBM and non-IBM desktop and server PC systems. It conforms to the PCI 2.2 bus standard, IEEE 802.5 token-ring standard, and supports the latest versions of all major operating environments,


173

including Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98/95, Novell NetWare, and OS/2. This adapter has received the Microsoft PC99 logo, has been Novell NetWare certified and currently complies with the Wired for Management 2.0 specifications. For more information on the token-ring network and the protocol it uses, see Chapter 7. Emulation Adapters Emulation adapters, along with the necessary software, allow IBM personal computers to emulate or act like the terminals and printers commonly used to interact with host computers. When a personal computer emulates a host terminal or printer, the host computer and its programming can communicate with the personal computer without the need to modify the host computer hardware or software configuration. Thus, emulation adapters provide the simplest form of interaction between personal computers and host computers. Figure 3.19 lists some emulation adapters used with IBM personal computers. The 3270 Emulation Adapters allow personal computers to emulate the IBM 3278/79 Display Terminal or the 3287 Printer. These devices are commonly used to interact with many larger IBM computer systems (e.g., System/370 and ES/9000 systems). The adapters allow the personal computer to be attached via coaxial cable to these larger host computers. The System/3X or 5250 Emulation Adapters allow personal computers to emulate an IBM 5250 Information Display System—a family of workstations used for interaction with the AS/400, System/36, and System/38 midsize computer systems.

Multimedia Options “Multimedia” is the term commonly applied to a computer system that is able to capture and manipulate text, graphics, high-quality images, video, and sound. The result is a powerful presentation/interactive session that can dazzle an audience of one or many. The flexibility and interaction afforded by the computer system allows multimedia to be used for many things including education, execu-

174


4 8 2 7 /6 5 6 /6 4 74 68 5 2 59 6 6 /6 3/ 8/ 63 4 5 6 / 8 8 6 44 68 62 L 6 5 65 65 L 63 L L PL 0G 00G 0 0P 00P 00 0 3 3 30 30 3 3 PC PC PC PC PC PC 45

Par t number

Emulation adapters 3270 Emulation PCI Adapter

05J4401

l l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

88H0250

l

l

5250 ISA Express Adapter and Cable 82H4725 Kit

l

l

5250 Express Convenience Kit

l

l

5250 PCI Express Adapter

82H4708

5250 PCI Express Adapter and Cable 82H4719 Kit 5250 ISA Express Adapter

Figure 3.19.

88H0200

IBM emulation adapters.

tive presentations, point-of-sale terminals, and information kiosks. Chapter 5 discusses multimedia further. Figure 3.20 lists some multimedia options used with personal computers. Now let’s take a closer look at some of IBM’s multimedia options. UltraPort Camera The IBM UltraPort Camera is a new, integrated camera designed to work with IBM’s latest ThinkPads. It can be connected via the UltraPort on select ThinkPads or via a USB port by using the provided USB converter and cable. A tripod is also included to rest the camera on your desktop. The UltraPort Camera comes with the following software: •

Video Phone for video conferencing

•

HiScale Photo for taking a still image, editing it, and managing it in its album

•

VideoMail for sending video e-mail


175

4 8 2 7 /6 5 6 /6 74 62 68 94 5 2 6 68 6 65 3 3/ 2/ 8/ 4/ 5 /6 6 9 8 8 6 5 4 8 4 6 62 L 6 65 65 L L 63 PL PL 0P 0G 00G 0 00 300 3 30 30 30 3 PC PC PC PC PC PC 45

Par t number

Multimedia SR9 AGP 4X Adapter with 53 Savage 4 eXtreme

33L5140

l

l

MPEG-2 Video Decoder Card

33L5009

l

l

l

l

16-Bit PCI Audio Adapter

33L5134

l

l

l

l

Compact Stereo Speakers (3W)

72H3260

Figure 3.20.

l

l

IBM multimedia options.

•

VideoEdit for editing AVI files

•

Watchdog for monitoring your workspace when unattended

The UltraPort Camera can capture still images up to 640 × 480 resolution and full-motion video at up to 30 frames per second at 320 × 240 (depending on application). The camera swivels 180 degrees to capture video/images in front of the ThinkPad and can also be connected via USB cable. IBM PCI Audio Adapter The IBM PCI Audio Adapter enables your PC to record, compress, and play back voice, sound, and music. Features include •

Sixteen-bit stereo ADC and DAC

•

Programmable independent sample rates from 6 KHz up to 48 KHz for record and playback

•

Full-duplex operation for simultaneous record and playback

•

Two-wire hardware volume control for up, down, and mute

176


PCMCIA 16-Bit Audio Adapter It is possible to add the same high-quality 16-bit audio capabilities that you have on your desktop multimedia computer to your ThinkPad mobile system by adding the PCMCIA 16-bit Audio Adapter. This card is a PCMCIA Type II adapter that provides 16-bit CD quality audio. It includes a detachable audio interface module, which has a built-in microphone, stereo headphone/line-out jack, and external stereo microphone/stereo line-input jack. Processor Upgrade Options The microprocessor and associated circuitry in some personal computers is packaged such that the microprocessor and support circuitry can be upgraded. Such systems allow the user to add performance/ function to the computer system as new microprocessors are developed or as the user’s performance needs grow.

ThinkPad Options Before leaving this chapter, we will cover a few other options for IBM personal computers and ThinkPads. Keyboards In addition to the standard 104-key keyboards now offered with most IBM personal computers, additional keyboards are available as options. The Rapid Access keyboard features special buttons for your convenience. The buttons provide shortcuts on the keyboard to start a program, open a file, or perform a specific function. With these keys, you can go directly to a file, program, or Internet address by pressing a button instead of having to click an icon, search for the program in the Start menu, or type an Internet address in your browser. Some of the Rapid Access buttons are preset to support important multimedia functions on your computer (mute, volume, and CD-ROM or DVD-ROM controls); these cannot be changed. There


177

are eight color-coded Rapid Access buttons positioned across the top of the keyboard. Some of these buttons are permanently set to start certain programs on your computer. The preset functions are printed on the label above the buttons. Three of the buttons—EMail, Access IBM Web, and Standby—are permanently programmed. Depending on the preloaded operating system loaded in your computer, three of the remaining five buttons might be preset. You can customize the other buttons to start any program or file you want. For example, if you enjoy playing Solitaire, you can customize a Rapid Access button to open the Solitaire program. The Enhanced Keyboard with Trackpoint II adds the Trackpoint pointing device to the center of the standard 101-key keyboard. This provides a pointing device like that used in ThinkPad notebook and subnotebook computers. Finally, the standard 104-key keyboard shown in Figure 3.21 has three special keys for use with Windows 95/98. Two are used to launch Windows 95 and one to start application programs within it. Both the 104-key and Trackpoint II keyboards come in a choice of either pearl white or black to match the system color. B S/ B PW SB S/ 49 79 1 6 SB PW 66 W 5/ 65 83 8/ 4/ 71 8 / 9 P 2 51 /6 ) 4 2 4 7 0 2 66 6 5 62 6 4 ) 2 66 8 3 6 x7 SB 79 7) ( 3) 4) ) x 2) )6 21 43 6x 2x 4x 4 x4 i ( 4 2x x4 0 /p i( 0i 66 p( p( ( p( 4 (4 40 0/ X4 0/ 2 0 A4 0 0 a A PW 40 40 A 4 4 4 a X S A A A ta a A is t 41 t st a a a i a a t t s s a t t i i t is is tV 68 tV is is Vis t t V is tV tV tV tV Ne 40 / tV Ne t tV Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne N e Ne 68 SB

Part number

Keyboards Preferred Keyboard Pearl white

28L3584

Stealth black

28L3621

•

•

•

• •

• •

Preferred USB Keyboard with 2 Port USB Hub •

Pearl white

10K3830

Stealth black

10K3849

•

•

•

Pearl white

33L3154

•

•

•

Stealth black

33L3174

•

•

•

•

•

• •

• •

Rapid Access II Keyboard •

•

•

• •

• •

Space Saver II Keyboard Stealth black

28L3644

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Trrack Point II Keyboard Stealth black

01K1260

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

USB Numeric Keypad

33L3225

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Figure 3.21.

•

•

•

IBM keyboard options. (continued on next page)

178


64 78 6 2 4 /6 5 2 8/ 7 6 94 5 86 2 45 /6 65 /6 /6 63 4/ 5 92 88 563 8 6 4/ 8 2 5 5 4 6 6 6 6 6 L L L 63 L L 0P 0G 00G 0 0P 00P 3 30 30 30 3 30 C C C C P P P P PC PC

Par t number

Keyboards 28L3644

l

l

l

l

l

l

01K1260

l

l

l

l

l

l

Pearl white

28L3584

l

l

l

l

l

l

Stealth black

28L3621

l

l

l

l

l

l

Space Saver II Keyboard TrackPoint ® Keyboard Stealth black Preferred Keyboard

Rapid Access II Keyboard Pearl white

33L3154

l

l

l

l

Stealth black

33L3174

l

l

l

l

USB Numeric Keypad

33L3225

l

l

l

l

Figure 3.21.

l

l

IBM keyboard options. (continued from previous page)

ScrollPoint Mouse The New IBM ScrollPoint Mouse shown in Figure 3.22 is a full-function mouse that includes a unique ScrollPoint ministick navigator that lets you scroll in any direction without using scroll bars. The ScrollPoint Mouse, with 360-degree fingertip scrolling, eliminates the hassles of scroll bars. You can scroll Web pages, long documents, and spreadsheets without any wasted motion. The ScrollPoint Mouse works with a multitude of Windows 95/98 and Windows 2000 applications, including Netscape, America Online, and Microsoft Internet Explorer. In applications compatible with Microsoft Office, the ScrollPoint Mouse can be used to perform advanced functions such as Zoom and AutoScroll. You can choose either pearl white or black to match the system color. Advanced functions of the ScrollPoint Mouse include these: •

AutoScroll. AutoScroll allows you to scroll a document automatically without having to engage the ScrollPoint stick continuously.


Figure 3.22.

179

IBM ScrollPoint Mouse.

•

Zoom. Zoom either magnifies or demagnifies the view of a document page.

•

DataZoom. Use this feature to zoom in on specific data on a document page. Data zooming lets you expand or collapse outlines within word processing documents by using a simple keystroke and mouse combination.

•

HyperJump and CyberJump. These features enable a popup palette of time-saving tools and shortcuts, allowing the user to navigate applications more quickly.

IBM also provides a new ThinkPad USB Mobile Mouse, which is a compact, lightweight, two-button mouse, designed for ThinkPad customers who prefer a traditional mouse. Its small size and cable wrap make it ideal for the mobile professional. As a USB device, the mobile mouse can be connected to any enabled USB port.

180


IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000 The IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000 (Figure 3.23) offers excellent flexibility, usability, and connectivity. With convenient USB and fast PCMCIA connectivity, this drive bay can be connected to either desktops or laptops. It can also be connected to the IBM Multi-Port USB Hub. The Portable Drive Bay 2000 has a stand for space-saving vertical mounting of the Ultrabay 2000 CD-ROM, DVD, CD-RW, and HDD drives. However, the SuperDisk (LS-120) Ultrabay 2000 Drive is supported inside the Portable Drive Bay 2000 only when mounted

Figure 3.23.

IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000.


181

in the horizontal position. Using the appropriate IDE storage device, this drive bay offers portable and convenient support for •

Plug and Play and hot-swapping of Ultrabay 2000 storage devices

•

CD-ROM software installation

•

Multimedia CD-ROM audio playback

•

DVD movie playback and access to huge databases

•

Storage and backup of large files and multimedia using Hard Disk Drives (HDDs), SuperDisk (LS-120), or CD-RW

•

Connection of Ultrabay 2000 IDE storage devices to other supported laptops (such as the ultraportable ThinkPad 240) and desktops, offering investment protection and commonality of storage options

•

Simultaneous operation of another Ultrabay 2000 device (besides the one in the bay) for copying CD-ROM data onto CD-RW or CD-R media

An optional second Hard Disk Drive (HDD) adapter for the Ultrabay 2000 gives you maximum storage flexibility with your ThinkPad A Series or T Series. This adapter lets you add a second HDD to the Ultrabay 2000 of your A Series or T Series, ThinkPad Dock, or IBM Portable Drive Bay 2000. With a second HDD in your Ultrabay 2000, you have the fastest way to backup key applications and critical data. New hard drive upgrades are available in 6 GB, 12 GB, and 18 GB capacities. These drives utilize advanced power management technology. The ThinkPad Zip 250 MB Ultrabay 2000 Drive lets you store up to 250 MB of data on a removable 250 MB Zip data cartridge. This drive is also backward read/write compatible to the industry standard Zip 100 MB media. You can backup, transport, consolidate, organize, and off-load valuable data from the Internet, your network, or ThinkPad hard disk drive (HDD). The ThinkPad Zip

182


250 MB Ultrabay 2000 Drive is supported on all models of the ThinkPad A Series (2628, 2629, 2633) and T Series (2647, 2648).

Netfinity Options Before leaving this chapter, we will cover a few additional options for IBM Netfinity Servers. Netfinity Enterprise Rack and Expansion Cabinet The Netfinity Enterprise Rack and Netfinity Enterprise Expansion Cabinet (Figure 3.24) are heavy-duty rack cabinets specifically designed for enterprise environments. They feature a stylish, tempered glass front door and raven-black cabinetry. These 42-U, 19-inch rack cabinets support Netfinity servers and componentry. Note that one U equals 44.45 mm (1.75 inches). The Netfinity Enterprise Rack and Netfinity Enterprise Expansion Cabinet are positioned as the high-end Netfinity rack cabinet offerings available for Netfinity servers, including the extended depth requirements of the new 8-way Netfinity 8500R servers. These rack solutions provide a higher level of ruggedness in structure to support relocating full rack configurations within the enterprise location. Rack cabinets are designed to contain rack models of Netfinity servers. They also support many data storage devices, tape backup units, and communication devices associated with these servers. Multiple Netfinity Enterprise Rack and Netfinity Enterprise Expansion Cabinets can be installed side by side to support your expanding business requirements. These units bolt together to form multirack suites to efficiently handle clustering or server consolidation requirements. IBM also provides a Netfinity Flat Panel Monitor Rack Mount Kit which provides an innovative solution for mounting a selected flat panel monitor, console switch, and Space Saver Keyboard on a Netfinity Rack Keyboard Tray. These devices would typically take up to 11 U of rack space. (Note that one U equals 44.45 mm, or 1.75 in.) With the flat panel kit, these components can be combined to form a full-function, rack-mounted server console using only 3 U of rack space.


Figure 3.24.

183

Netfinity Enterprise Expansion Cabinet.

For smaller installations the Netfinity NetBAY22 rack cabinet is the perfect alternative for office environments where a traditional 42-U rack cabinet is just too large. With its 22-U spatial dimension, you have the flexibility to configure scalable, cost-effective rack solutions for mainstream and high-end Netfinity servers. You have room to add disk-storage units, communication devices, tape backup, and a UPS. In addition, multiple NetBAY22 rack cabinets can be placed side by side to handle future growth capacity. The Netfinity Rack Extension Kit and Netfinity NetBAY22 Rack Extension Kit provide new solutions where extending current Netfinity Rack or Netfinity NetBAY22 cabinets is necessary to handle servers or components requiring 28-inch depths or to provide more room for

184


cable management. These products add the necessary depth without compromising the security or structural integrity of the base unit. Netfinity APC Smart-UPS 5000 In the event of a power outage, the APC Smart-UPS 5000 gives you more backup power to support enterprise-class Netfinity servers in high-availability and business-critical applications. This 5-U, rack-mounted, Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) by American Power Conversion (APC) is designed to handle demanding power requirements until normal power can be restored or to facilitate an orderly shutdown. Sixteen 12-V, 7-AH (Amp Hour) sealed maintenance-free, lead acid batteries provide up to 5,000 volt-amps to support Netfinity systems until power is either restored, or an orderly shutdown can be implemented. With APC PowerChute Plus, APC PowerXtend, and Netfinity Manager, multiple server systems can be effectively managed. The 5,000-volt-amp and 3,750-watt load capacity provide power to support up to 3 Netfinity 8500R servers or up to 12 Netfinity EXP Storage Expansion Units. For smaller server installations, IBM also markets the APC Smart-UPS 1400 and 3000, providing 1,400 and 3,000 volt amps.

Using Your Personal Computer

185

4 Using Your Personal Computer

T

he previous chapters closely examined the system units and optional equipment used with personal computers. This chapter begins our look at how that hardware is put to work, namely, by all the important software. “Software” is a general term for the many programs that execute in computers. It is software that harnesses the personal computer’s computational power and allows you to perform so many diverse and useful tasks. The chapter begins by taking you step by step through the programs provided with personal computers. This serves as a good introduction and allows you to actually use a personal computer even if you never have before. Later in the chapter, you are introduced to the kinds of software employed to perform useful work with all personal computers. We discuss the three general categories of software along with the job each performs. Finally, we discuss the subject of software compatibility.

Getting Your Feet Wet with a Personal Computer Personal computers come with certain special-purpose programs. Some of these programs are permanently stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM) chips resident on the system board. Other programs

185

186


reside on the hard disk that comes preloaded with the system or a CD-ROM that is Ready To Configure (RTC). One easy way to learn more about the programs provided is to run them. The steps that follow will help you learn by doing just that. If you haven’t yet unpacked and set up the hardware components of your personal computer, this would be a good time to do so. Follow the unpacking and installation instructions provided with your system. This should take only a few minutes. The computer elements referred to in the procedures that follow are labeled in Figure 4.1. The procedures provided in this chapter are based on the behavior of a NetVista desktop system. Most other PC systems will also behave as shown in the procedures. However, due to differences in hardware and software configurations, your PC system may respond differently from the one shown in our procedures. If you do find that your system diverges from the following procedures, follow the instructions that appear on your system’s display screen and you should eventually find yourself back in line with our procedures. If you think there is a problem with your computer system, refer to the “Solving Problems” section of the “Using Your Personal Computer” manual for assistance. If it’s not convenient to use a personal computer right now, you can simply read along, and you will get a feel for what it is like to use a PC.

Greetings from POST The first program we explore is one that, whether you know it or not, is automatically started every time you turn on your computer. It is called the Power-On Self-Test (POST) program and is permanently stored in your computer. The first thing POST does is test the health of your computer system. It exercises the microprocessor and support chips, the diskette drive, the graphics circuitry, the ports, the memory, and so on. It’s like having a resident service technician who tests your computer every day. The only indication you get of all this activity is during the memory test portion of POST, which takes the most time to perform. The more memory in the system, the longer this system checkout takes, since every memory location is tested. During this test, POST keeps a count in the upper left corner of your display. To see this memory count, perform the following steps:


Display power switch (1=on, 0=off)

Contrast and brightness adjustment Diskette activity light

Power switch (up=on, down=off) "A" diskette drive

"B" diskette drive

187

Power switch (up=on, down=off)

"A" diskette drive

Diskette activity light

"B" diskette drive

Metal shield first Label side up Diskette orientation for insertion into diskette drive

Metal shield first Label side up Diskette orientation for insertion into diskette drive

"F1" function key ESC

F1

1

"Q" key

F6

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

.

Q

.

➝

"Ctrl"

*System Reset key sequence: "Ctrl"- "Alt"-"Delete"

B

"Alt"

Enter ("↵")

➝

.

➝

"Esc" key

➝

"Del"

Figure 4.1. Reference diagram for procedures provided in this chapter.

•

Turn on the display.

•

If your computer is off, turn the computer system on (the switch is located on the front of the system unit).

188


•

If your computer is already on, exit any application programs that are active. Then simply turn the computer off, pause five seconds, and turn it back on. (Caution: If your system is a server in a local area network or being shared by other users in a multiuser configuration, check with the system administrator before turning the system off.)

Figure 4.2 shows where the memory count appears on your display screen. First, you see the IBM logo. After a short delay, the memory count messages appear. After POST finishes checking the health of the system, it sets the system configuration of the computer based on the information stored in the CMOS memory. The system configuration is the basic settings and arrangement of the internal computer elements. If POST successfully completes these chores, you will hear a single beep, signaling that everything is okay and ready to go. Then POST will check to see if the power-on password feature is enabled. If it is, a small key-shaped image will be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 4.3. This indicates that the user-defined password must be entered before operation can continue. If password security is not enabled or if the user enters the correct password, POST will terminate and pass control to some other program. This other program can be on your fixed disk (e.g., the operating system) or on a diskette in drive A. If you don’t have any

XXXXX KB OK

Figure 4.2. Location of memory count kept by POST during memory test.


189

Figure 4.3. Password prompt. When you are presented with this keyshaped emblem, you must type in the user-defined password before the operation can continue.

programs on either the fixed disk or a diskette in drive A, the PC system will present the user with the screen shown in Figure 4.4. This screen is asking you to insert a diskette into drive A and press the F1 function key to resume.

What If POST Finds an Error? The preceding scenario assumes that POST finds no problems with the computer system, which normally will be the case. But what happens if POST does find a problem? Indeed, unless someone has previously set up your computer, a POST error will notify you that the system has not yet been configured and that the time/date has not been set. To see how you can handle POST errors of any kind, let’s intentionally cause a harmless problem and see how we can resolve it. The following steps simulate a stuck key on the keyboard: •

Turn the system unit’s power switch off. (Caution: If your system is a server in a local area network or being shared by other users in a multiuser configuration, check with the system administrator before turning the system off.)

190


()

()

()

F1 F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

Figure 4.4. Screen presented when no programs are on the fixed disk and no diskette is in drive “A.” This screen is asking you to put a diskette in drive “A” and press the “F1” function key.

•

If a diskette is inserted in a drive, remove it.

•

Press and hold down the Q key on the keyboard.

•

Turn on the computer (continue to hold the Q key until you hear a beep, then release the Q key).

POST again begins checking out the computer. The “memory test” portion of POST displays the memory count as before. When POST gets around to checking out the keyboard, however, it detects that the Q key is stuck. The POST program responds by displaying a 301 error code (Figure 4.5), sounding two beeps, and referring you to the


191

POST error code resulting from holding down "Q" key

4096 KB OK 000 30100

IBM

Figure 4.5. Error code presented by POST when a key is stuck down.

manuals. Two beeps indicate that POST has found a problem. If your system has not yet been set up, you may also get other error codes. To continue, press the F1 key to access the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Perhaps you can correct the error by changing a setting in the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program, which is on the Reference Diskette used by older PC systems for configuration and setup. You can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to change the setup of your computer, regardless of which operating system you are using. However, the settings you select in your operating system override any similar settings in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. The Configuration/Setup Utility program includes settings for device and I/O ports, date and time, system security, start op-

192


tions, advanced setup, ISA (Industry Standard Architecture) resources, and power management. •

Press Enter (press Enter Key).

Any POST error codes are now passed to the POST Error Processor program. The POST Error Processor program looks at the errors detected by POST and displays the appropriate error messages, each in turn. These messages explain the nature of the problem and recommend the appropriate action. Figure 4.6 shows an error message resulting from the 301 error we caused by holding down the Q key. This message tells you that POST has detected the stuck ekey. It also recommends that you check for anything resting on the keyboard. Since you have already resolved the problem (you took your finger off the Q key), we will continue.

Keyboard Error - 00301 Be sure that nothing is resting on the keyboard and holding a key down. If it is not plugged in, power off the computer and plug in. If you cannot continue or this error remains, have the keyboard serviced.

Enter

Figure 4.6. Error message presented by the POST Error Processor program resulting from the stuck key detected by POST.


•

193

Press Enter (press Enter key).

If additional error codes were generated during POST, the POST Error Processor program would now display each error message in turn. If you follow the instructions that appear on your screen, you should be able to handle any POST error that arises. After you resolve any additional errors, you will find yourself at the Configuration/Setup Utility Program Main Menu shown in Figure 4.7. IBM provides additional diagnostic programs for diagnosing software and hardware problems with the system preload. OAPlus/WIN for Windows and QAPlus/PRO for DOS are included with the preinstalled software. OAPlus/WIN may also be run from systems with IBM’s OS/2 operating system by opening the Easy Tools for OS/2 from the OS/2 desktop. QAPlus/WIN and QAPlus/DOS diagnostics will gather a large amount of information about your system, including device drivers, configuration information, and hardware prob-

Configuration/Setup Utility Select Option: * * * * * * * * *

System Summary Product Data Devices and I/O Ports Date and Time System Security Start Options Advanced Setup ISA Legacy Resources Advanced Power Management Save Settings Restore Settings Load Default Settings Exit Setup

Help <Esc> Exit Select

Move <Enter>

Figure 4.7. Configuration/Setup Utility Program Main Menu on an IBM PC 300GL.

194


lem isolation. Finally, if you still cannot resolve a problem, IBM provides a program called CoSession with most of the desktop and Aptiva systems. CoSession is like having your own computer system expert on-site. CoSession allows you to connect to the IBM HelpCenter and have a support person use that program to diagnose your system from a remote location.

Using the Configuration/Setup Utility The Configuration/Setup Utility program is stored in the Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) of your computer. You can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view and change the configuration settings of your computer, regardless of which operating system you are using. However, the settings you select in your operating system might override any similar settings in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. The Configuration/Setup Utility provides specialized programs that can help you set up and manage your personal pomputer. A very simple and effective way to explore the programs provided on this utility is to run them. The following steps will help you explore the Configuration/Setup Utility on your PC. If you followed the POST procedure just given, the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu (shown in Figure 4.7) is currently on your screen, and you can skip to the next section if you wish.

Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on when you start this procedure, you must shut down the operating system, turn off the computer, wait a few seconds until all in-use lights go off, and restart the computer. (Pressing F1 after Ctrl+Alt+Del will not activate the Configuration/Setup Utility program.) When the Configuration/Setup Utility prompt displays in the lower-left corner of the screen during startup, press F1. (This prompt is displayed for only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have not set a password, the Configuration/Setup Utility program menu is displayed. If you have set a password, the Configuration/Setup Utility program menu is not displayed until you type your


195

password at the prompt and press Enter. The Configuration/Setup Utility program might start automatically when POST detects that hardware has been removed or new hardware has been installed in your computer.

Strolling Through the Main Menu As shown in Figure 4.7, several choices are provided on the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu. The menu choices are selected by moving the highlight bar to the selection by using the up and down arrow keys and then pressing Enter. When a menu item is selected, either the desired action will be performed or you will be presented with instructions or a submenu that provides more detailed items from which to choose. For simplicity, the following step-by-step procedures will ask you to select the menu item. If at any point in these procedures you get lost, repeatedly press the Esc key until you see the Main Menu in Figure 4.7 and start that section of the procedure over again. At most points during Reference Diskette interaction, you can get contextual help messages by pressing the F1 function key. These messages will provide further explanation or instructions related to the particular place you are at in the Configuration/Setup Utility. If no help is available at a given point in the program, pressing F1 will result in a single beep. At any point during the following procedures, feel free to press F1 to review any help information available. Simply press the Esc key to get rid of the help message, and you will be right where you started. With the information given in these contextual help messages, you can take self-guided tours through any of the programs in the Configuration/Setup Utility. The following sections will introduce you to each item in the Configuration/Setup Utility Main Menu to help get you started. Menu Option: System Summary This menu item allows you to review the main components of your system. The processor type and speed are given, along with information about the amount of installed memory, cache size, memory type, and installed disk/diskette drives. This screen is an information-only screen, and no other actions are available. Pressing the Esc key will return you to the Main Menu.

196


Menu Option: Product Data This menu item provides specific information about your PC machine/type and model number, flash EEPROM revision level, system serial number, and BIOS date. The Product Data option is also used in a network environment with systems management products for asset control and tracking. Menu Option: Devices and I/O Ports This menu item allows you to update or change the IRQ level and address range for the serial and parallel ports. Use the up or down arrow keys to select an item on this menu. “Video Setup” may be selected to define and select the horizontal frequency range appropriate for your display. You should refer to the manual that comes with your video display unit for specific changes. The IDE drive setup should be used when adding additional IDE hard drives or a CD-ROM drive. Menu Option: Date and Time This menu item allows you set your computer’s internal clock. You can set the date and time in several ways. After selecting the Date and Time option from the Configuration/Setup Main Menu, just enter in the new date and time. You may also set the date and time from your operating system. If you are running IBM’s OS/2, go to System Setup and select “System Clock.” In Windows: First Steps or Program Manager, select “Set Date and Time.” Menu Option: System Security This menu item allows you to set your power-on password. Once a power-on password is set, you will be prompted for this password every time the system is turned on before you can use it. An administrator password is also provided to give system administrators access to the Setup Utility. Once the administrator password is set, you will be prompted for this password before you are given access to the Setup Utility. This level of protection is great for environments such as schools, where you would want only the classroom administrator to have the ability to change system configurations. You may also


197

secure hard disk and diskette drives by disabling them. This feature may be used in environments where there may be sensitive data on a server and you would want to control the ability of a user to upload or download from diskettes. One more security feature, called POST/ BIOS Update, when enabled, allows the POST/BIOS Update Utility to be run from a remote system without requiring entry of your administrative password. This feature may only be available when you have a network card installed in your system. What if you forget your power-on password? If you have forgotten your power-on password, you can reset it from the system board by removing the computer cover, provided you have the cover lock key (on most commercial IBM PCs). Just follow the instructions in the guide to operations for your computer. Menu Option: Start Options This menu option allows you to set the keyboard NumLock state and keyboard speed. Also, you can select your startup device sequence. In most cases you will want to have your startup device first look for a diskette in drive A. If none is present, the system will then go to the hard disk drive. If no hard disk is present, the system will look for a CD-ROM drive. In addition to setting the device boot sequence, you may also set the level of POST testing to be done at power-on time and enable or disable virus detection. You will most likely want to enable virus detection. You will get a virus warning notice the first time you access the hard file boot sector. This is expected, so just press the Enter key and your system will continue. Menu Option: Power Management Selection of this menu option brings up a submenu that allows you to configure power management, standby time, monitor mode, and hard disk spin down. Power management is a set of features that reduces the power consumption by your computer. When you enable the Standby feature, it puts the display, microprocessor, and hard disk drive into a reduced-power, or standby, state after a specified period of inactivity. You can change the default setting minimum of 20 minutes to up to 90 minutes in increments of 5 minutes. In Standby mode, the display is blanked and the hard disk drive spins down, entering a

198


reduced-power state. Any use of the keyboard or mouse will cause the computer to exit from the standby state and return to full-power operation. The Scheduler feature works with your operating system, allowing you to wake up the computer from a standby state at a predetermined time to start a program or display a message. Wake Up on Ring is another feature that allows you to select settings from your operating system so that if your modem receives a call while your computer is in a standby state, the computer begins to wake up on the first ring. The Wake Up on Ring feature helps you turn your computer into telephone answering machine. This concludes our tour of the Configuration/Setup Utility. Feel free to go back and review any area of the Configuration/Setup. Use the help messages (the F1 key) to get further information on any topic.

The Real Software—A Model The term “software” is analogous to the term “publication.” Newspapers are a category of publication. Annual reports, novels, and Who’s Who directories are some other categories of publications. These different categories fill very different needs. The same situation exists with software. The different categories of software are diverse in function and purpose. We have just explored some special-purpose programs provided with personal computers. These programs do not allow you to perform useful work, however. The basic categories of real software used with all personal computers to perform useful work can be understood through the simple software model shown in Figure 4.8. There are three basic categories or software layers commonly used with personal computers: the application program layer, the operating system layer, and the Basic Input/ Output System (BIOS) layer. Although each software layer performs a completely different job, all three work closely together to perform useful work for the user. Some special-purpose programs don’t fit neatly into any of the three categories, but the majority of the software commonly used to perform business tasks does. Later chapters focus on the application and operating system layers. For now, let’s briefly look at each of the three layers in our software model.


199

User's view of Personal Computer

Application Program Memory Operating System BIOS

Hardware

System Board

Figure 4.8. Conceptual software model of the basic software structure of personal computers. The three layers of the software model work together to perform useful work for the user.

Application Programs The top software layer in the software model is the application program layer, highlighted in Figure 4.9. The programs in this layer apply personal computers to specific tasks such as word processing and communications. Thus, they are called application programs. They actually perform the task the user purchased the computer for, while the other two layers play important support roles. The User’s View arrows in Figure 4.9 indicate that the user usually interacts with the application program layer and less frequently with the operating system. By working closely with the other software layers, the application program processes the various keystrokes made by the user and responds by displaying information on the computer’s display or some other output device. As we see later in the chapter, newer personal computers can execute most of the application programs written for the original IBM PC. This allows personal computer users to capitalize on the thousands of application programs originally developed for IBM PCs and

200




Hardware

System Board

Figure 4.9. The application program software layer of the software model. It is the application program that defines the particular task the computer is performing for the user.

compatibles. There is an application program that can help the user with just about anything he or she wishes to do. Do you want a program that computes the number of eggs needed to completely fill a swimming pool? Look around. It may be hard to find, but it probably exists. Some more common functions that application programs perform in the business environment are accounting, financial modeling, word processing, database management, communications, and computer graphics. Application programs are discussed in Chapter 5.

Operating Systems The next layer in our software model, called the operating system, is highlighted in Figure 4.10. The operating system must manage the hardware resources of the computer system and perform tasks under the control of application programs and keyboard/mouse/touch-screen input from the user. The application program can rely on the operating system to perform many of the detailed housekeeping tasks associated with the internal workings of the computer. Thus, the operating


201



Hardware

System Board

Figure 4.10. The operating system software layer of the software model. The operating system provides the environment in which the application program(s) run.

system is said to provide the environment in which application programs execute. Operating systems also accept input directly from the user to perform such tasks as formatting diskettes and clearing the screen. Personal computer users have a choice of operating systems, as we will see in Chapter 6.

BIOS The third and final layer of software in our software model is called the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) layer, highlighted in Figure 4.11. BIOS is a set of specialized programs that, unlike application programs or operating systems, are used only by other programs. BIOS never interacts directly with the user and exists only to help application programs and operating systems perform tasks. In fact, the user never even knows it’s there. BIOS assists the operating system and application programs in performing tasks directly involving details of the computer hardware. BIOS also shields a computer program from the hardware specifics of computers, allowing these spe-

202




Hardware

System Board

Figure 4.11. The BIOS software layer of the software model. BIOS directly controls the hardware elements of personal computers and shields application programs and operating systems from the hardware details.

cifics to evolve as new computers are designed without causing software compatibility problems. We further discuss the role of BIOS later in the chapter. Unlike operating systems or application programs that must be loaded into memory from disk, BIOS is permanently stored in the Read Only Memory (ROM) chips within the personal computer along with the POST program discussed earlier in the chapter. Many of the newer personal computer models store a large portion of the BIOS in flash memory, which can be easily updated using special information provided on the reference diskette. Most personal computers have both a compatibility BIOS and an advanced BIOS. The compatibility BIOS is provided to preserve software compatibility with PCs. This same type of BIOS was supplied with all earlier PC computers. The advanced BIOS is a completely independent set of programs, also stored in the personal computer’s ROM (or flash memory). Advanced BIOS provides a more advanced set of programming tools used by operating system programmers and provides specific support for the multiapplication environment discussed in Chapter 5.


203

How the Layers Work Together To get a feel for how these three software layers work together to perform tasks for the user, let’s quickly trace a typical series of events that might occur when you strike a key during a computer session. In our example depicted in Figure 4.12, a salesperson is using a word processing program to type a memo to a prospective customer. Here is what the various software layers are doing: The word processing application program has just finished processing the latest letter typed, an “a” in our example, and has instructed the operating system

Pat Morgan Way Side Tackle Box 1234 Kelli Road Pensacola, FL 33432

Nancy Hoskins Acme Fishing Tackle 1232 Kimberli Road Anytown, FL 33445

Dear Ms. Morgan: Please find enclosed the catalog you requested. We carry a wide variety of fishing tackle for both fresh and saltwater fishing. Please let me know if I can be of further assista_

Press F1 for help

The user has just completed typing the letter "a."

Figure 4.12. Salesperson typing a letter using a word processing application program. The salesperson is about to strike the “n” key on the keyboard, which is the next letter in “assistance.”

204


to provide the next keystroke when it is available and also to send the keystroke to the display. In compliance with the request, the operating system asks BIOS to provide the next keystroke when available. Now that the stage is set, let’s see what happens when the salesperson types the next letter, “n,” in the word “assistance.” The series of events is depicted in Figure 4.13. Depressing the N key causes the keyboard to send a scan code, corresponding to the depressed key, over the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the system board within the personal computer. The keyboard port signals BIOS that a scan code has been received. The keyboard BIOS routine accepts the scan code, sends an acknowledgment back to the keyboard, and trans-

APPLICATION PROGRAM

➅ Application Program accepts keystroke and instructs the Operating System to look for the next keystroke

OPERATING SYSTEM Video BIOS sends ''n'' to graphics ➄ circuitry ''n'' appears on the display ➆

➃ Operating System passes keystroke to Application Program and sends the ''n'' to the video BIOS

BIOS

Video circuitry Keyboard cable ➀ User strikes ''n'' on keyboard

Keyboard port hardware

Keyboard BIOS routine ➂ accepts code, translates into ''n'' and passes it to the Operating System HARDWARE

➁ Code corresponding to depressed key sent over cable to keyboard port on the System Board

Figure 4.13. Flow of a typical keystroke through the software layers in our software model.


205

lates the scan code into the intended meaning. Since BIOS can tell that the shift key is not depressed, the scan code is interpreted as the lowercase “n” and is sent to the operating system. The operating system accepts the translated keystroke from BIOS, passes the character to the word processing program, and then sends the character to the user’s display (Figure 4.14). The word processing program then tells the operating system to monitor for the next keystroke, and the process starts all over again. For simplicity, we have glossed over many of the detailed steps that the computer must perform simply to interpret and display a single keystroke. As complicated as this process may be, computers

Pat Morgan Way Side Tackle Box 1234 Kelli Road Pensacola, FL 33432

Nancy Hoskins Acme Fishing Tackle 1232 Kimberli Road Anytown, FL 33445

Dear Ms. Morgan: Please find enclosed the catalog you requested. We carry a wide variety of fishing tackle for both fresh and saltwater fishing. Please let me know if I can be of further assistan_

Press F1 for help

"n" appears on the user's screen

Figure 4.14. Salesperson’s computer screen after typing the “n.”

206


easily perform these steps in small fractions of a second. You can begin to get a feel for the speed at which computers operate. Similar but more complicated cooperation among the three software layers occurs for most functions performed by the computer, such as reading or writing a file on a disk, communicating over the serial port, and so forth.

Setting Up Your Workspace To get the most from your computer, arrange both the equipment you use and your work area to suit your needs and the kind of work you do. Your comfort is of foremost importance, but light sources, air circulation, and the location of electrical outlets can also affect the way you arrange your workspace.

Getting Comfortable Choose a good chair to reduce the frequency of fatigue from sitting in the same position for a long time. The backrest and seat should adjust independently and provide good support. The seat should have a curved front to relieve pressure on the thighs. Adjust the seat so that your thighs are parallel to the floor and your feet are either flat on the floor or on a footrest. When using the keyboard, keep your forearms parallel to the floor and your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position.

Lighting Position the monitor and adjust the tilt to minimize glare and reflections from overhead lights, windows, and other light sources. Place it at right angles to windows and other light sources whenever possible. Reduce overhead lighting, if necessary, by turning off lights or using lower-wattage bulbs. If you install the monitor near a window, use curtains or blinds to block the sunlight. You might have to adjust the Brightness and Contrast controls on the monitor as the room lighting changes throughout the day.


207

Where it is impossible to avoid reflections or to adjust the lighting, place an antiglare filter over the screen. However, these filters might affect the clarity of the image on the screen; try them only after you have exhausted other methods of reducing glare.

Software Compatibility—Will PC Programs Work? The popularity enjoyed by PCs is largely a result of the wide variety of programs that have been developed for these computers. The flexibility afforded by virtue of this large and diverse software base allows PCs to fill many different needs. Of course, the sea of PC software did not exist when the original IBM PC was first announced. It took the independent efforts of a great many people over several years’ time to develop the large software base that exists today for PCs. To capitalize on that software base, compatibility was a primary objective in the design of all personal computers. That is, most programs written for the original IBM PC will run on all personal computers. Although many things are changed in them as improvements in technology and design are made, personal computers still possess a high degree of software compatibility with the original IBM PCs.

What Is Meant by “PC Compatibility”? Computers that can execute most programs originally written for PCs are said to be PC compatible. Notice, the definition says most programs. The changes in hardware components, speed, or architectures necessary to evolve computers to new levels of performance may introduce some level of incompatibility. It is important to understand that of the three software layers in our software model, compatibility with programs in the application programs layer is the most important. Why? First of all, application programs typically represent the lion’s share of a user’s software investment. Further, being forced to abandon an application program due to incompatibilities may make the user throw away whatever data and training or experience has accumulated with the application program—both of which can be substantial. Some users have developed custom application programs at considerable cost in de-

208


velopment time and money. Incompatibility at the application program level would render these programs useless. Last, and perhaps most important, application-layer compatibility allows personal computer users to select from the thousands of application programs that have appeared for PCs. What about the operating system and BIOS layers? Maintaining compatibility with earlier versions of operating system software is not as important for several reasons. Operating systems typically represent only a small fraction of the user’s software investment. Further, it is usually necessary to purchase a new version of a given operating system when migrating to a new computer in order to fully enjoy the new hardware features. For example, Windows 2000 is a new version of the Microsoft Windows operating system—enhanced to provide more function and support the growing number of devices, among other things. Of course, the user is automatically supplied with a new BIOS layer in the personal computer’s ROM that fully supports the new hardware while maintaining the important software compatibility layer.

What Affects “Compatibility”? Given the importance of PC compatibility at the application program level, what was required to maintain this compatibility in personal computers? Basically, the application must be presented with the same view of the computer system as in earlier PCs. That is, the Application Program Interface (API) presented by personal computers must be the same as that of the earlier PCs. This API consists of multiple components, as shown in Figure 4.15. It consists of all elements that interact with the application program. From the figure, we can see that the application program interacts with both the operating system and the BIOS layers. These comprise the major parts of the API that must be preserved to maintain software compatibility with application programs. Operating systems used with personal computers maintain a high degree of compatibility with earlier DOS releases. We examine compatibility issues of the operating systems more closely in Chapter 6. The personal computer’s BIOS also maintains compatibility with earlier versions of BIOS. Through examining our software model, it seems that maintaining the operating system and BIOS compatibility is all that is neces-


209

Application Program Application Program Application Program Application Program

Application Program Application Program Application Program

Application Program

Operating System = Application Program Interface

Memory

BIOS

Hardware

System Board

Figure 4.15. The operating system and BIOS are the major elements of the Application Program Interface.

sary to maintain compatibility at the application program level. In reality, however, application programs don’t always follow the conventional interaction illustrated in our software model. Instead, these application programs bypass the other software layers and interact directly with the hardware elements of the computer. This interaction is depicted in Figure 4.16. When an application program interacts directly with the hardware, the hardware becomes part of the

210


Application Program

Application Program

Application Program Application Program Application Program Application Program Application Program

Application Program

= Application Program Interface

Operating System BIOS

Memory

System Board

Hardware Hardware becomes part of the API

Figure 4.16. When an application program interacts directly with the hardware elements, the hardware also becomes part of the API.

API and therefore must be precisely preserved to maintain compatibility with that application program. Why do application programmers choose to manipulate the hardware elements directly? Often, direct interaction with hardware elements can enhance speed or help implement copy protection. To maintain compatibility with application programs that directly manipulate the hardware, personal computers have preserved critical hardware interfaces as they existed in


211

PCs. These include graphics circuitry registers, serial port registers, and many other hardware details.

Which Programs Are or Are Not Compatible? A general discussion of compatibility is good for understanding the issues, but business users want to know exactly which programs are or are not compatible with their personal computer. The best way to determine your personal computer’s compatibility with a given application program is through exhaustively executing the program under a variety of conditions. This is exactly what the software publishers do to test their software on various computer systems. Contact the software publisher of the application of interest and ask. You can also choose to simply run the program and see what happens. Beware, however: Subtle incompatibilities may cause problems not readily observable by the user in a casual check.

212


5 Application Programs

In Chapter 4 we saw that there are three basic software layers in personal computers that cooperate to perform useful work for the user. This chapter concentrates on the top layer of the model—the application programs. Application programs actually apply the personal computer’s computational power to a particular business task. This chapter discusses the difference between prewritten and custom application programs. It then covers the five major functions provided by business application programs. Finally, the all-important relationship between the application program and the operating system is discussed. This chapter is by no means a consumers’ guide to application programs. Comprehensive coverage of the thousands of business application program products available today would fill many books and would quickly become obsolete. Instead, this chapter provides a general discussion of topics to consider when planning your application program strategy.

Application Program Alternatives There are two basic alternatives when acquiring application programs to fill your business needs:

212

Application Programs

•

Prewritten application programs

•

Custom application programs

213

Prewritten application programs are offered as complete offthe-shelf products by various software publishers. Custom application programs are not off-the-shelf products; rather, they are specially developed to the exact specifications defined by a particular customer. Let’s examine each of these alternatives more closely.

Prewritten Application Programs Today’s prewritten application programs range from simple programs that concentrate on a very specific task to powerful and very complex groups of programs designed to work together. They perform a myriad of functions as diverse as the environments in which you find computers today. Despite this diversity, most of the application programs commonly found in business are an implementation or combination of five basic functions, which we call the Big Five: 1. Word processing 2. Spreadsheets 3. Database management 4. Business graphics/multimedia 5. Communications Many prewritten application programs are direct and general implementations of these Big Five functions, resulting in tools that are more flexible than a pencil and paper. Other prewritten applications combine specialized implementations of the Big Five functions, which results in programs more tailored to the specific needs of a business or industry such as accounting (database), project scheduling (database and graphics), and so forth. Two early problems users had with the Big Five were with inconsistences in the user interfaces between programs and lack of ability

214


to easily move data between them (e.g., moving spreadsheet information or graphics into a word processing document). This problem was solved with the advent of integrated suites using a common interface that can easily work with each application program. IBM now includes Lotus SmartSuite with every Aptiva and PC desktop. We will examine integrated applications more later, but first let’s examine the basic functions of the Big Five. Word Processing Word processing application programs allow personal computers to generate virtually any kind of document. The user types in documents on the keyboard in much the same way as with a typewriter. Since the document is temporarily stored in memory, it can easily be modified. Basic capabilities found in even the simplest word processing program include changing, inserting, moving, and deleting text. Today’s word processing programs offer other important features such as spell checking, grammar checking, and automatic generation of tables of contents, page numbers, and indexes. Still more advanced word processing programs provide for desktop publishing, which allows you to combine text and graphics in documents and print “camera ready” results on a high-quality printer. The advantages of word processing over manual methods combined with the common need to create documents, have made word processing one of the most popular applications in the business environment. A personal computer along with a good word processing application program will quickly spoil anyone used to a typewriter and will rival the conventional word processing systems. First of all, the graphics circuitry provided with every personal computer generates superior alphanumeric characters that are easier to read than those of earlier PCs. The graphics circuitry and popular software also allow for custom type styles or custom character sets, providing more flexibility. The antiglare screen on personal computer displays is also easier on the eyes during the long hours often associated with word processing. The Enhanced Keyboard is designed for maximum typing ease and efficiency. After you finish with a document, you can store it on the standard fixed disk or on a diskette. For example, the 2.88 MB diskettes used by several personal computers can hold over 1,500 double-spaced


215

pages of text and fit in your shirt pocket or purse, providing for easy transport of long documents. The various letter-quality printers supported by personal computers generate clear, crisp documents. Spreadsheets Computers were originally developed to do numerical calculations. An extremely popular way of working with numbers on personal computers is through spreadsheet application programs. These are programs that allow you to enter numbers and equations in a free-form manner. Virtually any calculations you can do on a sheet of paper can be done automatically through the use of a spreadsheet program. Common applications of spreadsheet models include financial analysis, sales monitoring, and forecasting. Through these mathematical models, “what if” questions are quickly answered by changing the parameters (cells) in the model and watching the effects of the change ripple through the entire spreadsheet. Spreadsheets were quick to catch on in the PC marketplace because the blackboard format employed by these programs is very familiar and immediately useful to even novice users. The large memory capabilities available on personal computers and their operating systems allow for the construction of extremely complex and powerful spreadsheet models. The performance range available in the IBM personal computer line allows users to select computing power appropriate for their particular task. Most spreadsheet application programs can take advantage of the personal computer’s graphics capability to generate high-quality graphs. Database Management To deal with large amounts of information efficiently, it is necessary to organize the information in a uniform manner. For example, the information in a telephone book is organized into an alphabetical list of names, addresses, and telephone numbers. If you have ever lifted a Manhattan telephone book, you know that phone books can contain a fair amount of information. Computers also require information to be organized in some fashion. Database management application programs are the major tool for organizing large amounts of information through computers. Database managers typically organize information into files, records,

216


and fields. Don’t be intimidated by the words. This is exactly how the information in a phone book is structured. Figure 5.1 shows a sample telephone book listing and the corresponding computer database structure. The phone book itself is analogous to a file or set of information, also called a database. The information about one person in the phone book is analogous to a record. The records contain the information for a given entry, and each record contains the same type of information about its respective entry. In this case, a record would contain the name, address, and phone number of a person. Each of these three items would be analogous to a field within a record. For example, the address part of a phone book entry would be called the “address field.” Manually looking up information in a phone book quickly becomes fatiguing. The same is true for manually manipulating any large body of information. Once the information is entered into a database application program, however, it can be retrieved quickly and easily. Databases can contain information about a store’s inventory, a library’s books, personnel records, medical records, or virtually any other collection of data. Organizations such as banks, airlines, and insurance companies commonly use extremely large databases shared by many users. Office workers and executives may use database application programs to maintain personal telephone books and appointment calendars. Many database application programs also provide a complete programming language that allows users to customize their database environments.

(Name)

(a) Information organized in a telephone book

(b) Information organized by a database application program

Telephone book

Computer database file

(Address)

(Phone #)

Packar J.C.1012 SE 45 St----654-8499 Packer O.R. 244 W 13th S t----878-2443 Pagano B.R. 667 NW 83rd St---655-0097

Record #1 Record #2 Record #3

Name field

Address field

Packar J.C. Packer O.R. Pagano B.R.

1012 SE 45 S 244 W 13th S 667 NW 83rd S

Phone No field 654-8499 878-2443 655-0097

Figure 5.1. (a) The information structure used in a telephone book. (b) The same information organized into a data structure. In order to manipulate large amounts of information efficiently, it is necessary first to organize the information into a consistent format. The organization used by database application programs is not unlike that used in a telephone book.


217

The fixed disks used with personal computers provide enough storage for the construction of large databases. For comparison, a 360 MB microdrive can hold a name/address database of about 4 million names and a 1 GB MB fixed disk can hold over 14 million names and addresses. With 4 GB of fixed storage, you can store over 60 million names and addresses. Again, the range of performance available in today’s IBM personal computer line allows users to select the level of performance necessary. Business Graphics and Multimedia Since Neanderthal times, people have drawn images to present and interpret information. Images are native to humans and thus are enjoyable and powerful communication devices. The greater the amount of information to be conveyed, the greater the need for graphic representations. It is no surprise, then, that business relies heavily on images to convey information to customers, employees, management, and so on. With the increased use of computers, it is also no surprise that computer-generated images, or computer graphics, are common in today’s business environment. Business graphics application programs provide the user with a tool to construct a computer image. These programs vary widely in price and function. Some products accept numerical information from the user and create representative line graphs, bar charts, and pie charts. Others provide the user with a free-form drawing tool, limited only by the user’s imagination. Some programs have predefined libraries of images such as animals, airplanes, ships, symbols, and state and country outlines. Once an image is defined, it can be saved on disk, printed, or photographed to make full-color slide presentations. Some programs can sequence through a series of images and provide automated presentations right on the computer screen. In Chapter 3, we covered some optional adapters that allow personal computers to capture, edit, and replay video and audio from standard video and audio input devices. This rapidly growing area is called multimedia. With multimedia-capable personal computer configurations, single images or full-motion video sequences from standard video cameras, television broadcasts, cable TV, or videodisk players can be displayed on a standard personal computer display or captured and stored in digital form on a personal computer fixed disk. Similarly, audio signals such as music or sound effects can be

218


played back or captured and stored in fixed disk storage on a personal computer. The multimedia application software then allows you to edit the images, video, and audio as necessary, and to create striking presentations played back over the personal computer and associated hardware. These presentations can be automatically sequenced, or they can be made interactive so that users can tailor the course of the presentation to suit their particular needs (by interacting with a keyboard, mouse, or touch screen, for example). In the retail industry, a multimedia program can be used to present customers with a computerbased clothing catalog, which allows the customer to select an item and then shows full-motion video of models wearing the clothing. In another retail application, a record store could allow customers to select from a list of record albums. When the customer makes a selection, the multimedia personal computer could play segments of the songs on the album and show the album jacket. In education environments, students could learn about hurricanes by reading text and watching full-motion video of a hurricane’s destructive force. The applications of multimedia are limited only by the imagination. As multimedia technology continues to drop in cost and improve in sophistication, multimedia capabilities promise to become as commonplace as graphical user interfaces are today. Multimedia is a growing application area that promises to change the face of personal computing as we know it today. IBM personal computers can be configured for use in high-quality graphics or multimedia applications. Several desktop models are specially designed for multimedia applications. Communications Simply stated, it is the job of the communications application program to move information from one computer to another. You can think of communications as the element that ties the other four of the Big Five together. For example, communications allows documents generated by word processing application programs or images created by graphics application programs to be electronically sent anywhere in the world in just minutes. Since communications application programs often work so closely with the other types of application programs, they are often combined with the others into a single product. For example, a spreadsheet or database application program may


219

be capable of communicating directly with a larger host computer in order to access the large computer’s database. In this case, the user need not be bothered with the details of communication and may not even know it is occurring. IBM personal computers have a family of communications feature cards and application programs that provide the performance and function required to perform almost any communication task. Chapter 7 is devoted to discussing the communication configurations that allow personal computers to participate in many communications environments. Variations on the Big Five Many general-purpose application programs have been developed by employing combinations and variations of the Big Five functions to perform various tasks. The first and simplest variation of the Big Five application programs is combining several of the Big Five functions into a single all-in-one application program product. Just like all-in-one food processors and all-in-one pocket knives, all-in-one application programs, also called integrated application programs, enjoy widespread popularity and can be very useful in almost any business environment. There are application programs that combine, for example, the spreadsheet, database, and graphics programs into a single product. Another approach is to provide a series of programs designed to work together. The series approach maintains many of the advantages of integrated programs while allowing users to purchase only the functions they need. Series and integrated application programs have some advantages over an equivalent collection of independent application programs. First of all, because all the functions are designed by the same person, users see a consistent user interface across the different functions. The user doesn’t have to remember the different conventions presented by two independent application programs. Another advantage of series and integrated application programs is that they allow users to easily move information between the different functions within the package. For example, data generated by the spreadsheet part of the integrated program can be transferred to the graphics part to produce graphs of the information. The data transfer between independent application programs may not be so simple. A disadvantage of integrated applications, however, is that you don’t select the indi-

220


vidual applications, they are chosen for you by the developer of the integrated application program. For example, if you don’t like the word processing part of the integrated package, you can’t replace it. With Lotus SmartSuite (included with many of IBM’s Aptivas and desktops), you get five applications that are designed to work together. For spreadsheet operations there is Lotus 1-2-3, which also integrates charting and business graphics. Lotus Approach is a high-powered database that integrates reporting, forms, mailings, and analyses. Lotus Word Pro is a word processor for creating documents. Lotus Freelance Graphics provides the ability to create presentations from customizable SmartMasters or templates. You also get Lotus Organizer, which provides a calendar, “to do” list, planner, address book, call manager, and notepad. Aside from integrated application programs that are direct combinations of the Big Five, programmers have developed other types of application programs by combining more specialized versions of the Big Five. These combinations of the Big Five applications are designed to perform more specific tasks such as appointment calendaring (database and graphics) and telephone management (database and communications). A common requirement in today’s environment is the need to share and work on information by people across a group. This has led to a new combination of the Big Five called groupware. Groupware (such as Lotus Notes) helps groups of people work together more effectively by sharing documents, data, and messages across a network. Lotus Notes provides a new way for teams to collaborate and coordinate strategic business processes. The simplest implementation of Lotus Notes would be at a departmental level sharing a Lotus Notes database on a LAN (Local Area Network). Extending beyond departmental and organizational barriers across the World Wide Web, the newest version of Lotus Notes, called Lotus Domino, combines messaging, groupware, and the Internet to provide a collaborative computing environment. The prewritten application programs discussed up to this point are of a highly general nature and are able to fill the needs of diverse business environments. They were designed to be as general as possible to cover the largest market possible—an “all things to all people” approach. For example, the same database application program might be used to fill the needs of a tackle shop and a restaurant. Sometimes these general-purpose programs cannot meet the needs of a specific


221

business or professional environment. In such cases, another type of prewritten application program, called a vertical market application program, may be more desirable. “Vertical market” refers to a subset of computer users with common and very specific application program needs. For example, a real estate office has different application program needs than a dental practice does. Each would benefit by an appropriate prewritten, yet highly specialized, vertical market application program. Many software publishers have put a great deal of effort into developing vertical market programs for PCs. As a result, many highly specific business and professional environments are addressed by vertical market application programs. There are vertical market applications designed for insurance companies, law practices, churches, auto leasing companies, manufacturing companies, and more. The vertical market program approach may initially be more expensive than the general application program approach, but if the former results in more efficient operation of your business, it will save money in the long run.

Custom Application Programs Prewritten application programs fit many needs the way a mitten fits a hand. They are relatively inexpensive, flexible, and convenient tools. In some cases, however, the user may find that the fit of the application program must be that of a tight glove. This is especially true in environments where a personal computer is needed to perform unusual and specific tasks or where there is a need to conform to existing company procedures. In these cases, it is often better to develop custom application programs written to your exact specifications. Custom applications also consist of the Big Five functions described earlier, especially the database, graphics, and communications functions, but are tailored to your particular hardware and software environment and conform to your existing company policies and procedures. Custom application programs usually are written either by a programmer within the company or by an outside consulting firm. In either case, the basic development steps are first to define a software specification that describes what the program will do and then to write a preliminary version of the program, demonstrating the func-

222


tion that eventually will be in the final program. This preliminary version is evaluated by the user and the specification altered to reflect any needed changes. Finally, the actual program is written and then installed at the user’s location. Typically, training will be provided by the developer and any problems ironed out. Once the user accepts the program, additional support is usually on a fee basis. Custom application program development is initially more expensive and time-consuming than the prewritten application program approach. In many environments, however, this additional expense and time can be recovered by the increased productivity that can result from custom applications that precisely fit the needs of the environment. An additional benefit of custom application programs is their ability to change as your company changes. Getting modifications to prewritten application programs may be more difficult or impossible in some cases.

Operating System Dependencies As you may remember from Chapter 4, there is a great deal of interaction between the application program and the operating system layer. This interaction occurs through the Application Program Interface (API), or boundary between the application program and operating system layers, as shown in Figure 5.2. Due to this interaction, application programs depend on the API provided by a particular operating system and cannot be executed under a dissimilar operating system without change. In terms of operating system dependency, four types of application programs are of primary interest: DOS application programs, Windows application programs, Operating System/2 native application programs, and AIX application programs. DOS application programs are those designed to run under the popular Disk Operating System (DOS) environment supported since the original IBM PC. Historically, the API provided by DOS has defined the standard for PC compatibility, and the majority of today’s PC application programs depend on the classic DOS interface. The DOS API has consistently been maintained as new releases of DOS were introduced so that existing DOS applications will run. Today, DOS is still a popular operating system for personal computers. The main limi-


223

User's view of IBM Personal Computer Portion of Application Program Interface presented by operating system


Hardware

System Board

Figure 5.2. The Application Program Interface (API). Application programs typically depend on the specific API presented by an operating system.

tation of DOS application programs is that they must usually run in a maximum memory size of 640 KB. This memory limit is inherent in the design of the original PC and still exists in older PCs running a DOS environment. Further, DOS applications are primarily designed to allow the user to run only one application program at a time. Although there are ways both to break the 640 KB memory limit and to run multiple programs in the DOS world, as we will see in the next chapter, they are not general solutions to these limitations. Windows application programs are those specially designed to work in the popular Windows products (Windows, Windows 95/98, Windows 2000, and Windows NT) developed by Microsoft. Windows provides an environment that overcomes the 640 KB limitation, which is a carryover from the architecture of the original IBM PC. Windows also allows the user to subdivide the display into several smaller areas and work with multiple DOS or Windows application programs at the same time. This ability is called multi-application and fits quite naturally into the business environment, as we will see in Chapter 6. The graphical user interface provided by Windows and Windows application programs typically makes the personal computer easier to use.

224


OS/2 native application programs are specifically written to run under Operating System/2 (OS/2) and cannot be run under DOS or DOS/Windows. OS/2, originally introduced with the PS/2 family, was redesigned from the ground up to provide a graphical user interface and a sophisticated multi-application environment in which the user can run DOS, Windows, and OS/2 native application programs simultaneously. AIX application programs are those specifically designed to work with the Advanced Interactive Executive (AIX) Operating system. This is a multi-application, multiuser operating system for personal computers. The next chapter looks more closely at today’s operating systems.


225

6 Operating Systems

Few topics in the personal computer area create more confusion and apprehension than the operating system. Never before has the user had more operating system alternatives. This chapter is designed to help remove some of the mystery associated with operating systems used on IBM personal computers. It is designed to familiarize you with operating system topics, such as multi-application and Extended Memory, and how these concepts apply to the business environment. It also discusses specific operating system products for IBM personal computers.

Introduction to Operating System Concepts The operating system provides the interface that allows the user and application programs to interact with the personal computer. Among other things, the user can interact directly with the operating system’s user interface to manage files on a disk, prepare a new diskette for use, and initiate application programs. The operating system also performs tasks directly under the control of the application program without any user assistance. The application program initiates tasks

225

226


by interacting directly with the operating system through the operating system’s Application Program Interface (API). The API simplifies the job of the application programmer because he or she need not get involved with the details of hardware interaction. Further, when an application uses the API, it is shielded from changes in the computer hardware as new computers are developed. That is, the operating system can be changed to support new computer hardware while preserving the API, allowing application programs to run on the new computer. To understand the differences among the various operating systems used with IBM personal computers, it is necessary to understand a few basic concepts: •

Multi-application

•

Multiuser

•

Real mode

•

Protected mode

•

Virtual 8086 mode

What Is Multi-Application? Multi-application, also called multitasking, is the ability of some operating systems to simultaneously run two or more independent application programs. The opposite of multi-application is single application, which means that the computer user must finish using one program before another can be started. Although this is how most early PCs were used, the development of multi-application operating systems is opening new possibilities. We will examine several operating systems for personal computers that allow various degrees of multi-application. Many people confuse multi-application with the term “multiuser,” which refers to the ability to share a single computer system between two or more users simultaneously. Although a multiuser capability usually implies a multi-application capability, the converse is not true.


227

How Is Multi-Application Useful? A multi-application environment offers the user two distinct advantages over a single-application environment: •

Program switching

•

Background processing

Program switching allows the user to load and start several application programs and instantly move from one to the other with a few keystrokes. The user can also return to the original application program exactly where he or she left off. To change applications in a single-application environment, the user must save all work, terminate the current application program, load and start the new application program, and call up the desired file. Background processing allows the user to initiate a program (e.g., file transfer over a communications link, printing a document, etc.) and then switch to another program and start other work while the original program is still performing its tasks unattended. The original program is said to be in the background. It will continue to work as long as no user input is required. Let’s look at a typical business environment example to illustrate how multi-application naturally fits in. Meet our typical businessman, Gerald. Gerald is a salesperson for a hardware distributor. He has a PC, which he uses for word processing, spreadsheets, database management, and electronic mail. Gerald’s operating system supports multi-application of these four programs. Gerald comes into work and turns on his PC. The system has previously been configured to automatically load and start all four application programs. A menu appears on the screen listing the four application programs that have been started, as shown in Figure 6.1. With today’s graphical user interfaces, small graphical images (i.e., icons) would be used to represent each of the four application programs, but for our purposes, we will keep it simple. Let’s say Gerald decides to compile last month’s sales figures using his spreadsheet program. He would select the “Spreadsheet” menu option, immediately bringing the spreadsheet program from the background to the foreground.

228


PROGRAM SELECTOR

word processing spreadsheet communications data base

Figure 6.1. Sample Program Selector used to start, stop, and switch between application programs.

When a program is moved into the foreground, the user can interact with it through the keyboard or mouse and display in the normal fashion. All of the other application programs are in the background, and the user cannot interact with them. Gerald then loads his sales report file and begins compiling this month’s figures. A few minutes later, his boss comes in and asks for a preliminary copy of the new sales campaign Gerald had mentioned earlier. Gerald hits a key that places the spreadsheet program into the background and recalls the Application menu. Gerald then selects “Word Processing,” bringing his word processing program into the foreground. He prints a copy of the sales campaign report for the boss, and after some discussion the boss leaves, just as the phone begins to ring.


229

It is the purchasing department, and they want to verify the part number for some bolts Gerald had ordered earlier. Gerald again hits a key, placing the word processing program in the background and recalling the Application menu. This time Gerald selects “Database,” which calls his database manager program to the foreground. He then queries his database for information on the particular kind of bolt he ordered. After all questions have been answered, Gerald hangs up and hits a key that places the database program in the background and calls up the Application menu. He selects “Spreadsheet” and is immediately returned to his sales spreadsheet, right where he left off. The point of this example is to illustrate that the office environment is one in which workers are often interrupted in the middle of one task to perform another. The program-swapping capability of multi-application fits naturally into this interruption-driven environment by allowing the user to easily switch back and forth between many application programs as the interruptions occur. Let’s extend the example a little further to examine how the background processing ability of multi-application can be useful. After Gerald is done with the sales figures, he creates some graphical charts, then saves the spreadsheet file. Gerald must now send the updated spreadsheet file over a modem link to the district office. Gerald hits a key calling up the Application menu. This time, he selects “Communications,” calling his communications program into the foreground. He then establishes the communications link and initiates the transmission of the sales figures to the home office. Because the spreadsheet containing the figures with graphical charts is quite large (4 MB), the transmission will take over 30 minutes at 14 Kbps. If Gerald didn’t have multi-application capability, his computer would now be tied up for the duration of this transmission, preventing him from using it for other tasks. However, because Gerald does have multi-application capability, he can place the communications program into the background by hitting a key. The communications program will continue unattended until the transmission is complete. While this communications program is still running in the background, Gerald selects “Word Processing” and continues to work on his proposed sales campaign. This simple example could be expanded to having additional programs running in the background doing things such as recalculating a large spreadsheet, printing a document, and downloading a file from a host computer. The program swapping

230


and background processing capabilities available in a multi-application environment fit quite naturally in the business workplace. Note that because your computer system is running multiple application programs at once, the performance of each individual program will be reduced as compared to a single-application environment. However, program switching and background processing will work to improve the overall productivity of the user.

What Is Multiuser? A system is said to be a multiuser system when a single system unit is running the programs of two or more independent users. With a multiuser system, users have their own displays and keyboards, and feel as if they are the only users of the computer. The multiuser computer system, unknown to the users, acts as moderator and ensures that each user gets a fair share of work done. It does this by keeping each user’s work separate and by quickly switching back and forth between users, performing increments of work for each. The result of this time slicing is that all the users’ programs seem to be running simultaneously.

How Is Multiuser Useful? The multiuser computing environment is nothing new to business users of computers. Most of today’s businesses own or have access to a multiuser computer system of some type. The most obvious advantage of a multiuser computer system is that one computer can be simultaneously shared by more than one person. This eliminates the line that tends to form in businesses that have only a single-user computer. Typically, however, it takes a more powerful (and thus more expensive) computer system to handle multiple users than it would to handle just one—so why not just buy multiple single-user computers? In some cases this decision will make sense. The trouble comes when the users, as is inevitable, discover a need to share equipment and, more important, information. With various independent computers, it is difficult for users to share computer programs and data. Let’s consider a simple example to illustrate this point. Say a group of clerks are responsible for doing a


231

monthly analysis of accounts receivable (A/R) for a hospital. They perform an aged A/R analysis, generate a report, and save their analysis for consolidation into an annual A/R report at the end of the year. In an environment in which everyone is using his or her own single-user computer system, the clerks would go to the accountant (using his or her independent computer) and get a set of diskettes with the current month’s A/R information, bring these back to their stations, and copy the A/R information to their fixed disks. Although procedures are in place to ensure that each clerk gets the diskettes containing the correct and most up-to-date A/R information, some clerks may unknowingly wind up with wrong or outdated information for their analysis. After the clerks complete their analyses, they print their reports on their private printers and keep a copy of their analyses on their individual fixed disks. At the end of the year, each clerk gets a diskette, copies the analysis information for the year from his or her fixed disk to the diskette, and delivers the diskettes to the accountant for year-end consolidation. There are a hundred ways to manage this kind of diskette-based information sharing in a single-user computer environment manually, but the point is that the information sharing is inefficient. It is an afterthought that must be managed. As more tasks and more users require information sharing, diskettes begin to look like Frisbees, flying all over the office. This situation can lead to inefficient and often unreliable results. With one multiuser computer system rather than a slew of single-user computer systems, things would be different at the hospital. First of all, one copy of all accounting information would reside in a centralized database. Because all people access the same single copy of the information, there is no need to scurry around the office trying to find the latest version of the information. Without leaving their seats, all the workers can access the same up-to-the-minute data. In the same way, users can share a single multiuser version of the programs used to do the analysis. This eliminates the need to purchase, track, and maintain multiple copies of the necessary operating systems and application programs. Furthermore, there would no longer be a reason to buy each user a printer. A single printer attached to the multiuser computer would be equally available to all users, thus greatly reducing the company’s equipment costs. Finally, from a security and system management standpoint, using centralized information and programs makes it easier to back up the system.

232


Gone is the need to back up the data on the fixed disks in each separate computer (not to mention the diskettes floating around). Now only the fixed disk in the multiuser system needs to be backed up to ensure that no information is lost in the event of a user error or system failure, and because there is one point of control for all information, the centralized approach also improves security. At this point we should point out that businesses can gain similar benefits by using a Local Area Network (LAN) to attach groups of single-user systems. In this way, they can share programs, data, and equipment, as we will see in Chapter 7. Whether it’s better to opt for a multiuser computer or for a LAN approach is still very much a point of contention; you will find advocates on each side. Depending on the number of users, either approach may turn out to be less expensive. Although traditional multiuser computer systems have a larger base of proven multiuser application programs, there are advantages to having the local intelligence associated with a LAN. There is no right answer to this question for all situations—each must be decided individually—but for most businesses, the most important issue to consider is the application program. It usually makes sense to first pick a proven, well-fitting application program and then buy the computer system(s) on which it runs. IBM personal computers are primarily designed for single users or as LAN Clients or Servers. IBM’s midsized RISC System/6000 and AS/400 computer families are examples of systems designed for multiuser environments. However, with the use of the AIX or other industry-standard UNIX operating systems, personal computers can perform as full-fledged, multiuser/multi-application computer systems. We examine IBM personal computer’s multiuser computer capabilities later in this chapter.

What Is Real Mode? Real mode refers to the environment provided by the 8088 microprocessor used in the original PC. It is called Real mode because of the characteristics of the 8088 architecture such as straightforward addressing and no interprocess protection. Real mode is the definitive IBM PC-compatible environment preserved by every PC since the original, including the current personal computer lineup. All DOS application programs operate in the Real mode environment. The


233

main limitations of Real mode are a maximum memory size of 1 MB (640 KB in the original personal computer implementation) and a single-application environment emphasis. This means the user typically operates only one application program at a time.

What Is Protected Mode? Protected mode refers to the extended architecture environment provided by the 80286 and higher microprocessors used in current personal computers. It is called Protected mode because of its ability to prevent one program from interfering with another when more than one program is running simultaneously. Protected mode also allows a computer to support a very large memory (e.g., up to 4 GB for the 486). Some operating systems used with personal computers take advantage of the protection mechanism and large memory support offered by Protected mode to provide a powerful multi-application environment. Multi-application provides the capability to execute more than one application program at a time. DOS application programs originally written for the PC will not run directly in Protected mode. However, some operating systems used with personal computers switch back and forth between Real mode and Protected mode to accommodate DOS application programs in a multi-application environment.

What Is Virtual 8086 Mode? Virtual 8086 mode is a third operating mode offered by the 80386 SX and higher microprocessors. To understand this advanced mode of operation, we must look back at a little history. The 8086 is an older Intel microprocessor that is a close and compatible cousin to the 8088 microprocessor used in the original IBM PC family. It was the 808X family of microprocessors (along with BIOS and the DOS operating system) that defined what “IBM PC compatible” means today. All microprocessors that evolved from the 8086, including the 386 SX and above, maintain that “PC compatibility” by providing either Real mode or this Virtual 8086 mode. When a microprocessor is switched (by an advanced operating system) into Virtual 8086 mode, that single microprocessor behaves

234


as if it were many individual 8086 microprocessors—each operating independently. For example, a single 486 in a personal computer can act as if it were actually five 8086 microprocessors, each with up to 640 KB of memory. Because 8086 microprocessors are IBM PC compatible, each of those five virtual 8086 microprocessors can run an IBM PC-compatible application program—hence a multi-application environment. As in Protected mode, each of the application programs running in a virtual 8086 microprocessor has a level of protection from the others and the 640 KB total memory barrier is alleviated. However, unlike Protected mode, Virtual 8086 Mode maintains compatibility with application programs written for the original IBM PC. With a basic understanding of these concepts, let’s now look at the specific operating systems.

The Disk Operating System (DOS) The PC Disk Operating System, commonly called DOS, was the operating system originally offered for the IBM personal computer. It was primarily designed to provide a single-application, single-user environment—though today’s extensions to DOS (such as Windows, which is covered later in the chapter) can make it a multi-application environment. Since its introduction in 1981, DOS has become widely accepted. As PCs evolved, DOS was revised to support the enhancements in the computer hardware. Although each new version of DOS provided additional functions, compatibility with earlier application programs was maintained. Each version of DOS was numbered to distinguish the different levels. The original DOS was called DOS 1.0. The most recent version of DOS is DOS 7.0, which is currently the entry-level operating system for IBM personal computers. DOS provides an IBM PC-compatible, single-application environment. It consists of a set of programs designed to perform many diverse hardware housekeeping tasks under the control of either the user or an application program. As the name DOS implies, many of these housekeeping tasks deal with the fixed disks in personal computers. Other tasks performed by DOS include starting application programs, setting the computer’s date and time, sending information to a printer, and managing files.


235

DOS operates personal computers primarily in Real mode. In this mode, the microprocessor appears to have the same basic architectural structure as that of the 8088 microprocessor used in the original IBM PC. The architectural similarities afforded by Real mode allow current IBM personal computers to execute software written for the original IBM PC. There are several ways to initiate DOS tasks. First, the user can simply type in commands at the DOS command prompt (shown in Figure 6.2). The C> indicates that DOS is ready to accept a command from the user. For example, typing DIR and pressing Enter will cause a list of the files contained on the default drive to be displayed on the computer screen, as shown in Figure 6.3. This is called the directory of the disk. After all files have been displayed, DOS again presents the C> command prompt, signifying its readiness to accept the next command. The DOS manual provides comprehensive coverage of all DOS commands available to the user. Another way to interact with DOS 7.0 is through the DOS Shell, which provides an interface that is easier to use than the DOS command prompt interface. The DOS Shell conforms to IBM’s Systems Application Architecture (SAA), providing an interaction style consistent with the SAA-compliant environments of other IBM computer families (e.g., AS/400 and ES/9000). The default screen you see when the DOS Shell is started is shown in Figure 6.4. Menu items can be selected using the keyboard or a mouse. The menu bar across the top of the DOS Shell

C>

Figure 6.2. The user can enter operating system commands at the DOS “command prompt.”

236


File name

Date and Time file was created or last modified

File size

C>DIR

PKEGMAST 4_0 4_0 INTRO RENECHAR 4_0 RENEOPTN 4_0 4_0 SWOVE 4_0 APPLICAT OSYSTEMS 4_0 4_0 COMM PLANNING 4_0 APPENDIX 4_0 10 File(s)

1389 9566 95943 104543 145856 31965 66909 63705 74213 122232

3-14-87 3-14-87 3-14-87 3-14-87 3-14-87 3-14-87 3-14-87 3-12-87 3-12-87 3-14-87 937984

12:47a 1:02a 1:56a 3:21a 3:44a 4:05a 4:22a 5:44a 5:55a 2:38a bytes free

C>

Figure 6.3. The DIR Command. The Directory (DIR) Command is used to examine the contents of a fixed disk or diskette. The names, sizes, and dates of all files contained on the disk are displayed on the screen.

(showing File Options View Tree Help) guides the user through various DOS tasks. The Directory Tree section of the screen shows the organization of the files on the fixed disk drive (or diskettes). The bottom third of the screen is the Program-List Area and allows the user to start various programs by selecting from a list. An optional feature of the DOS Shell allows a user to start more than one application program (using disk swapping to defeat the 640 KB barrier) and switch between them. By selecting “Command prompt” or by holding the Shift key and pressing


237

Figure 6.4. The DOS shell presented by PC DOS 7.0.

the F9 key, the user can get back to the traditional C> DOS command line shown in Figure 6.2 if need be. In addition to performing tasks under the direct control of the user, DOS can perform tasks under the direct control of an application program. Just as a user issues DOS commands through keyboard entries or mouse input, application programs issue DOS commands through the DOS Application Program Interface (API). This is a defined protocol for passing information directly between the application program and DOS with no user interaction. Often, DOS will subsequently call on the routines of BIOS to affect the desired action. (We discussed this interaction between the different software layers in Chapter 3.) The approach to memory management is a large part of the differences between the operating systems that we discuss. Figure 6.5 shows how DOS 7.0 manages the memory in personal computers.

238


Memory beyond the first 1 MB Memory Address

High Memory

1.375 MB

Area (HMA)

Memory used only for XMS applications and EMS paging

360 KB block of Extended Memory

1.06 MB 64 KB 1.0 MB Reserved Area

360 KB + 640 KB = 1st MB of system memory

640 KB Data space

Application program(s)

640 KB block of Conventional Memory

*16 to 58 KB Upper Memory Blocks 0 KB

= Memory consumed by DOS itself *Amount of memory below 640 KB used by DOS 6.3 depends on the microprocessor being used and the DOS configuration chosen by the user.

Figure 6.5. The organization of the memory in personal computers and how it is managed by DOS.


239

Each byte of memory in a personal computer resides at a unique memory address that distinguishes that byte from all others. The approximate memory address is shown on the scale to the left of the figure. As you can see in the figure, the first 1 MB of memory provided on IBM personal computers is divided into two memory regions. The first region of memory resides in the 0 to 640 KB address range and is called Conventional Memory. The address range from 640 KB to 1 MB is called the Reserved Area and is not directly usable for memory (thus application programs), so the remaining 360 KB of memory starts at the 1 MB address called Extended Memory. Together, these two regions of memory (with the Reserved Area sitting between them) comprise the first 1 MB of memory provided with IBM personal computers (640 KB + 360 KB = 1 MB). DOS itself initially gets loaded into Conventional Memory (0 to 640 KB). After DOS is loaded, an application program can be started, which causes at least part of that application to be loaded into some available Conventional Memory. The amount of memory consumed by the application program varies widely. The remaining memory above the application program and below the 640 KB memory address is available for the data to be used by the application program. For example, a memo being generated by a word processing program or a spreadsheet file being manipulated by a spreadsheet program would reside in this area, labeled Data Space. Any additional applications that are started must also be at least partially loaded into any remaining memory along with their data. Because all application programs and their associated data must reside in Conventional Memory, the less DOS takes up the better. One of the features of DOS 7.0 is the ability to have most of DOS itself loaded outside the crowded Conventional Memory region. By exploiting the Protected mode capabilities of IBM personal computers based on the 286 microprocessor or higher, DOS can load itself into the 64 KB block of Extended Memory (called the High Memory Area) located just above the 1.0 MB address. This capability, when enabled, provides more space for application programs and data in the Conventional Memory area from 0 to 640 KB. In personal computers based on the 386 SX microprocessor or higher, DOS will load still other things (e.g., device drivers and TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs that normally consume valuable Conventional

240


Memory space) into address ranges in the Reserved Area—making still more room for application programs and data. Other schemes are implemented in DOS 7.0 and in DOS memory managers developed by various companies that allow some application programs and their data to reside above the 640 KB barrier while the microprocessor executes primarily in Real mode. In fact, DOS itself uses one of these schemes (called the eXtended Memory Specification or XMS) to load part of itself above the 1 MB address. Another such technique supported in DOS is called the Expanded Memory Specification (EMS). EMS is a memory management technique that provides another way to overcome the 640 KB maximum memory size inherent in all DOS versions. It allows for the generalpurpose use of 16 KB blocks of memory in the Upper Memory Area (640 KB to 1 MB), called Upper Memory Blocks, that are usually unavailable—effectively extending the 640 KB maximum. EMS also allows specially written application programs to dynamically swap blocks of information in and out of these 16 KB Upper Memory Blocks, allowing dormant portions of programs and data to reside above the active 1 MB memory area. This allows an application program to control memory above the 640 KB limit. However, application programs not specially written to the XMS or EMS standards cannot make use of these schemes. The RAMDrive program provided with DOS is written to the XMS standard and can thus use memory above 1 MB. RAMDrive allows you to use that memory as if it were a fixed disk or a RAM drive. A RAM drive is a section of memory that can temporarily store information as if it were a fixed disk. The advantage of a RAM drive over a real fixed disk is that information can be moved between the RAM drive and memory much faster than it can be moved between a real fixed disk and memory. The disadvantage is that you must be sure to save all information onto a real disk before you turn off the computer, or all information on the RAM drive will be lost. DOS 7.0 is functionally compatible with earlier DOS versions. Other enhancements in DOS 7.0 include a set of new utilities, support for additional hardware devices, and improved performance. The new utilities include RAMBoost, enhanced disk compression, updated antivirus protection, a full-screen backup utility, a full-featured editor, and a program scheduler. RAMBoost is a utility that helps users configure their systems utilizing memory management


241

programs to give the best system performance to run your DOS programs. The disk compression utility allows you to nearly double the capacity of your fixed disk by storing information in a compressed format. DOS 7.0 uses an enhanced compression utility called Stacker Compression that also automatically decompresses the information when you load it into memory. The antivirus utility can scan fixed disks for viruses, remove them if found, and give warnings if an infected program is being run. The program scheduler enables you to schedule any DOS program—such as backup or antivirus scan—to execute at a specified date and time. The new devices now supported by DOS 7.0 include Docking Stations used in notebook computers. Docking is the process of connecting a mobile computer to a docking station and subsequently accessing docking station resources such as CD-ROM or hard disk drives.

Advanced Operating Systems The full capabilities of IBM personal computers are not unleashed unless the operating system more fully exploits the advanced features offered by the advanced microprocessors (386 and above). The Protected mode of the advanced microprocessors provides an effective and fully architected path to overcoming the 640 KB memory limitation of the original PC design. In addition, there are other advantages offered by advanced operating systems. For example, the Virtual 8086 mode of the 386/486 family of microprocessors allows personal computers to behave as if several independent computers were cooperating to perform work for one user. There are several different operating system environments that more fully exploit the advanced capabilities of the microprocessors used in IBM personal computers. First, DOS extended with the Windows program developed by the Microsoft Corporation unleashed many advanced capabilities for DOS users. DOS extended with Windows became a very popular operating system environment, which led to Windows 95 and Windows NT versions. Another environment that offers advanced capabilities is the Operating System/2 (OS/2) environment developed by IBM. The cur-

242


rent version of OS/2 is called OS/2 Warp, Version 4. It exploits both the Protected and Virtual 8086 modes of the advanced microprocessors and offers advanced function and compatibility with DOS and Windows application programs. OS/2 Warp 4 combined with OS/2 Warp Server provides a full range of functions for the enterprise, small and medium businesses, and connected users. OS/2 Warp Server provides an application server foundation with integrated file and printer sharing, backup and recovery, connections, and systems management, advanced printing, and Internet access. OS/2 has also integrated one of the best TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) stacks available. The function of OS/2 Warp, Version 4 can be extended by installing various optional add-on products. Two such products are Database 2 OS/2 and LAN Server. Database 2 OS/2 adds database management capabilities to OS/2 Warp, and the LAN Server program adds the capability to offer its resources to other personal computers over a local area network. The latest versions of OS/2 for the server environment are called IBM OS/2 Warp Server, Version 4 and IBM OS/2 Warp Server Advanced, Version 4 (which includes SMP enhancements). OS/2 is the only operating system for personal computers that participates in IBM’s Systems Application Architecture (discussed in Chapter 3). The Systems Application Architecture is an overall strategy that defines standards in the areas of user interfaces, application program interfaces, and communications methods. It is intended to provide consistency and compatibility across IBM’s major product families: System/390, AS/400, and personal computers. OS/2 provides a platform for a new generation of application programs consistent with the Systems Application Architecture that exploits large memory and full multi-application. A third environment that offers advanced capabilities is the Windows NT environment developed by the Microsoft Corporation. Windows NT is a complete operating system like OS/2, not an extension to DOS like the standard Windows program. Windows NT incorporates several of the significant features of OS/2 while maintaining the traditional Windows interface. Like OS/2, the function of Windows NT can be extended for use in a networked environment by adding software or selecting LAN Server versions of the software. Now let’s take a closer look at the advanced operating system alternatives.


243

DOS Extended with Windows The Windows program, developed by Microsoft, can be used to extend the basic DOS functions in the area of multi-application and maximum memory size. Windows Version 3.0 introduced some major enhancements to the Windows product. The 3.11 version of Windows includes additional enhancements in the areas of performance, file management, font capability, reliability, and network integration. Because Windows is built on the DOS base, you cannot run OS/2 application programs under Windows. For DOS or Windows application programs, Windows helps overcome the 640 KB memory limitation of the original IBM PC, which is still with us in today’s DOS environment for the sake of compatibility. It is important to somehow overcome this 640 KB limit, because as you begin to load multiple application programs into memory, you quickly run out of space in the 640 KB area. Depending on the mode in which you operate Windows, the 640 KB limitation is overcome in different ways (more on that shortly). In the area of multi-application, Windows allows the user to start up and run more than one application program at a time (i.e., multi-application support). To manage these applications, Windows subdivides the display screen into multiple rectangular areas called windows. Each application program then resides in its own window to facilitate quick and convenient switching from one application to another (i.e., program switching). A mouse is used to interact with Windows for things like selecting which window is-the active window, starting programs, resizing windows, moving windows around on the screen, and so on. Small images called icons are drawn on the display to indicate that application programs are loaded but not currently shown in a window. This type of user interface based on icons, windows, and so on, is called a Graphic User Interface (GUI). Some application programs can remain active (in the background) while you are interacting with another (in the foreground). However, because Windows works in conjunction with DOS (a non-multi-application operating system), there are limitations to the multi-application environment provided by the DOS/Windows environment. These limitations depend on the Windows mode being used. With Windows, there are three different modes of operation: Real mode, Standard mode, and Enhanced mode. (Note: Version 3.11

244


dropped Real mode.) Chances are, you would run Windows in Real mode only if you had to. You would have to if you use Windows in a computer based on the 8088 or 8086 microprocessors (e.g., a very old system by today’s standards). In Real mode, Windows gets around the 640 KB memory limit through the Expanded Memory Specification (EMS) for applications written for Windows (Windows applications) and for regular DOS applications (non-Windows applications) if the application program supports this standard. EMS (originally developed by Lotus, Intel, and Microsoft) is a bank-switching technique that tricks the application program into thinking there is more memory than 640 KB. Like PC DOS 7.0, Windows in Real mode can use another trick to make the memory seem larger than 640 KB for non-Windows applications that do not support EMS—namely, swapping DOS applications to the fixed disk and recalling them when needed. The application program(s) need not be specially written to support this swapping. However, the extra work of swapping from memory to fixed disk and back to memory can make the computer system respond sluggishly. If you have a more current personal computer based on one of the more advanced microprocessors (286 or greater), you can use Windows in its Standard mode. In Standard mode, Windows gets around the 640 KB memory limitation by exploiting the Protected mode functions designed into these more advanced microprocessors. A special part of Windows called a DOS extender switches back and forth between the microprocessor’s Real mode (where the 640 KB limit is in force) and Protected mode (where the limit is 16 MB). This allows multiple Windows application programs to reside in a memory space larger than 640 KB and facilitates program switching. However, all non-Windows application programs must still coexist within the 640 KB limit, along with DOS and a portion of the Windows program. For this reason, Standard mode users of non-Windows applications will often find that the system reverts back to the disk swapping discussed in “What Is Real Mode?” earlier in this chapter. Further, non-Windows application programs will usually not remain active when in the background. For personal computers based on the 386 SX microprocessor or higher, the full power of Windows Enhanced mode is available. In Enhanced mode, Windows utilizes the Virtual 8086 mode of these more advanced microprocessors to overcome the 640 KB limit and provide for program switching and multitasking of non-Windows


245

application programs. The Virtual 8086 mode of these more advanced microprocessors allows a personal computer to behave as if it had multiple 8086 microprocessors, with one 8086 dedicated to each nonWindows application program. The performance of 486 and Pentium microprocessors also makes for a more productive computing environment than that provided by older 8088-, 8086-, or 286-based computer systems.

Windows 95 The Windows 95 version of Microsoft’s Windows program is a 32bit operating system that can also run 16-bit Windows 3.1 programs. The graphical user interface has a different look and feel from Windows 3.1. Navigating the system is now easier with this new interface. First, Windows 95 features a new Start button and taskbar at the bottom of the screen as shown in Figure 6.6. The Start button is located at the far left with a Windows logo as part of the button. You

Figure 6.6. Windowing environment presented by Microsoft Windows 95.

246


can click your mouse on the Start button to open programs, find documents, and use system tools. Another way to open the Start menu is by using a Windows 95 keyboard. A Windows 95 keyboard has an additional Windows 95 key that you can press to open the Start menu without using a mouse. The Windows 95 taskbar, at the bottom of the screen, makes it easy to switch between programs. Every time you start a program or open a window, a button appears in this area representing that window. To switch between windows, all you need to do is click the button for the window you want. To the right side of the taskbar is a Notification Area that can be used by programs as an indicator of program activity such as printing. The system clock is displayed on the far right side of the taskbar. To change the clock settings, all you need to do is double-click your mouse on the clock. Second, Windows 95 now supports longer filenames (up to 250 characters). The use of longer filenames can make it easier to organize and locate programs and documents on your computer. For example, you can now have a spreadsheet file called Bobjohnsons_ 1997income_tax rather than BJOHN97. Files are stored in folders in Windows 95. A folder is like a directory in Windows 3.1 and may also contain other folders. Windows 95 uses a folder icon to represent directories. Another significant advancement is with DOS compatibility. Windows 95 does not require DOS to run but includes an MS-DOS kernel for compatibility as part of the Windows 95 operating system. MS-DOS can be started from the Applications menu in Windows 95. Windows 95 lets you use many programs at once through 32-bit preemptive multitasking. However, multitasking and performance improvements require applications to be written for 32-bit operations. (This means you will need to update your applications to a 32-bit Windows 95 version to get the most improvement.) Windows 95 has a large number of accessories including a built-in Internet browser, system backup, hard disk scanning, and data compression. Windows 95 also includes an icon for signup and access to the Microsoft Network, an online service that allows you gain access to the Internet. The Microsoft Network is a growing Internet service provider and provides its own set of information, news groups, bulletin boards, electronic mail, and download software.


247

Also, there are interactive online help guides called wizards that walk you through many of the tasks in Windows 95. One last key feature, called Plug and Play, makes installing new hardware options easier by automatically detecting the new option. You should be aware that new hardware options must be Plug and Play compatible to take advantage of this feature.

Windows 98 Microsoft’s Windows 98 operating system was the successor to the Windows 95 operating system. Through the integration of Microsoft’s key Internet Explorer technologies to unify and simplify the desktop, Windows 98 makes it easier for users to find and navigate to information. Help features have been simplified with the addition of 15 new troubleshooting wizards and Web-based help features. Windows 98 provides support for new hardware devices including native support for Universal Serial Bus (USB), DVD, and television broadcast capabilities, as well as support for the latest graphics, sound, and multimedia technologies. Windows 98 also features an improved version of the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system called FAT32. FAT32 helps give you more hard drive space by more efficiently using space on large disks. A graphical conversion utility lets you quickly and safely convert a hard drive to FAT32. Windows 98 also shuts down and launches applications faster than Windows 95. If you have a system with the new Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) fast-boot BIOS support, Windows 98 will enable you to boot your system faster. A new System File Checker is provided to help you keep track of critical files that make your computer run. If these files are moved or changed, the System File Checker provides an easy way to restore these files. Once file changes are detected, it offers you several courses of action. Windows 98 adds support for up to 9 multiple monitors and/or multiple graphics adapters on a single PC. Multiple displays can let you spread out and interact more easily between documents and applications. Finally, we should mention that Microsoft Windows 98 includes a suite of tools for Internet Communication, which include Outlook Express, an e-mail and news reading client; Microsoft NetMeeting, for Internet conferencing; Personal Web Server (for pub-

248


lishing Web pages); Microsoft FrontPad HTML editor; and Microsoft NetShow multimedia services.

Windows 2000 The Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system which became available early in 2000 is the successor to the Windows 98 and Windows NT operating systems. The Windows 2000 family is a complete product line of operating systems, spanning a full range of computing needs, from the desktop to high-end clustered servers. For the desktop and mobile computer user Windows 2000 Professional replaces Windows 98, and for the server environment Windows 2000 Server operating systems replace Windows NT 4.0 Server. Windows 2000 Professional for the client provides improved support for the next generation of hardware and streamlines the familiar Windows 98 interface by reducing desktop clutter and simplifying the Start menu. In addition to removing unnecessary desktop items, Windows 2000 Professional introduces personalized menus, with a new “smart” feature that adapts the Start menu to the way you work by showing you the applications you typically use most often. Windows 2000 Professional also builds on the reliability strengths of Windows NT. For example, the operating system detects, identifies, and prevents memory leaks that can develop over time and can cause your system to be unstable. The Windows 2000 Server operating systems are the next generation of the Windows NT Server series of operating systems. Windows 2000 Server series provide for a comprehensive Internet and user applications platform that builds on the strengths of the Windows NT Server 4.0 by providing increased reliability, availability, and scalability with enhanced end-to-end management features. At the core of Windows 2000 Server is a complete set of infrastructure services based on the Active Directory, Microsoft’s directory service. The Active Directory simplifies management and provides a centralized way to manage users, groups, security services, and network resources. In addition, the Active Directory has a number of standard interfaces, making it easy to operate with a variety of applications and devices. The Windows 2000 Server family consists of three editions: Standard, Advanced, and Datacenter. The Standard edition, with a com-


249

prehensive set of Web and Internet services that allow organizations to take advantage of the latest Web technologies, is expected to be the most popular version for small to medium-sized businesses. Windows 2000 Server Standard edition also supports uniprocessor systems and 4-way Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP) systems with up to 4 gigabytes (GB) of physical memory. The Advanced and Datacenter editions are designed to meet the needs of more advanced mission critical deployments in medium, large, and Internet Service Provider (ISP) organizations. For example, the Windows 2000 Datacenter Server is a specialized high-end version of Windows 2000 Server that supports up to 32-way SMP and up to 64 GB of physical memory. Like Windows 2000 Advanced Server, it provides support for both clustering of multiple SMP servers and load balancing services as standard features.

OS/2 Warp Operating Systems The IBM OS/2 Warp operating system allows a personal computer to offer its resources (fixed disk storage, printers, etc.) to other personal computers in a LAN. It provides an application server foundation with integrated file and print sharing, backup and recovery, systems management, advanced printing, and Internet access. When a personal computer offers resources to others in a network, that computer is called a server. The computer system accessing those resources is called a requester or a client. The server would have OS/2 and the OS/2 Warp Server installed. The client can have DOS, Windows, or OS/2 Warp Client installed. OS/2 Warp 4 is designed to be the universal client. It sets the stage for network computing enhancements with two firsts for PC operating system solutions: (1) OS/2 Warp 4 offers integrated runtime support for Java applications. This means these applications will run on your desktop without a Web browser. (2) OS/2 Warp 4 includes integrated IBM VoiceType technology, which takes the user interface to the next level and makes it easier to surf the Web through the use of voice commands. OS/2 Warp Server allows you to implement networked applications such as e-mail, Lotus Notes, and relational database systems. Or you can start with traditional file and print services and add more function when you need it. As well as providing TCP/IP function,

250


Warp Server can also be used as a Web server. The IBM Warp Server for e-business supports large, multiserver network environments with hundreds of users and small installations with only a few users. Providing enhanced reliability, performance, capacity, and functionality, it supports many mission-critical applications simultaneously running on one server. While OS/2 Warp Server SMP has been optimized for four-CPU systems, it has support for up to 64-CPU systems (64-way SMP.) Also, OS/2 Warp Server SMP includes improved high memory support that allows it to use larger amounts of virtual RAM. If you have an existing NetWare LAN, you can run OS/2 Warp Server concurrently and add such essential capabilities as Internet access, application services, and remote access.

Windows NT Workstation Windows NT (NT stands for New Technology) is Microsoft’s flagship operating system for high-end personal computers and high-performance workstations. With the introduction of operating systems like Windows NT (and OS/2, which is covered next), performance and capabilities that a few years ago were only available on much larger, more expensive workstation and mainframe computers are now available on relatively inexpensive personal computers. These operating systems are designed to provide the robust software platform required to exploit the price and performance advantages of personal computing and apply them to enterprise-wide mission-critical applications. Windows NT 3.5 offers a user interface that is nearly identical to that of Windows 3.11, and the Windows NT 4.0 user interface is like Windows 95. Due to the widespread use of Windows and the comprehensive availability of personal productivity applications for the Windows environment, Windows users should be able to easily upgrade to Windows NT with a minimum of training. Although the OS/2 Warp Workplace Shell is more object oriented and has several additional advanced features, it may take more time and effort for a Windows user to adapt to the OS/2 environment and take advantage of its functions. Even though the user interface of NT looks like Windows 3.11, it is much more like OS/2 from an internal design standpoint and in terms of the functions that it offers. Early in the development of Windows NT, while Microsoft and IBM were jointly


251

developing earlier versions of OS/2, Windows NT was named OS/2 3.0. Although starting from the same base, Microsoft’s and IBM’s operating system strategies have diverged considerably. The result is two very powerful 32-bit, multitasking operating systems alternatives focused on solving the same fundamental problems and limitations of DOS, but executed and optimized in slightly different ways. Windows NT overcomes the limits of DOS by implementing huge memory addressing for each application. It has an architectural limit of 4 GB of memory addressability, like OS/2. NT reserves 2 GB for its own use and allows up to 2 GB for applications. In practice, however, the amount of memory that NT can actually supply to applications is typically limited by the sum of the amount of physical memory and the amount of free fixed disk space. As with OS/2, the use of fixed disk space as virtual memory can make each application believe it has more memory than it really does. This can be a problem if you are running applications that need a great deal of memory. Do not underestimate the performance improvements possible by installing only a couple of extra megabytes of memory if you find that the operating system is extensively swapping data and programs to and from the fixed disk. Like OS/2, Windows NT is capable of running applications developed for several other operating environments. An NT system can simultaneously run most DOS and Windows 3.11 applications, as well as many character-based (nongraphical) OS/2-and POSIX-compliant applications. NT is not compatible with every application, and its performance may suffer in comparison to computers running only DOS-based Windows, OS/2, or UNIX. Windows NT, however, offers a good blend of compatibility and performance for multiple-operating-system networks and applications. Windows NT runs DOS programs within a Virtual DOS Machine (VDM). One VDM process is created for each DOS program running under NT. The VDM supports well-behaved DOS applications—that is, DOS applications that use system calls for all I/O. Applications that attempt to bypass DOS to directly access fixed disks or other mass storage devices typically do not run. Standard DOS I/O requests are intercepted by the VDM and executed by either the Windows API or the NT executive. Therefore, DOS I/O does not violate NT’s system integrity features and multiple DOS processes can share devices. You can run 16-bit Windows applications under Windows NT. Launching the first 16-bit Windows program starts a new VDM. The

252


VDM, in turn, loads an environment called Windows On Win32 (WOW). The WOW VDM is based on the DOS VDM. It includes a “simulated” version of Windows 3.11, with multitasking removed, in addition to the 16-bit Windows application and DOS. The result is that some existing 16-bit Windows programs that bypass the API and go directly into the Windows window manager for better graphics display performance will not run under WOW. Windows NT offers compatibility with some OS/2 applications. Because OS/2 applications are designed to run in a multitasking, 32-bit environment, there is no need to have a virtual machine environment to safeguard Windows NT’s system integrity. Instead, OS/2 applications are clients to the OS/2 API-protected environment. This API supports only character-mode applications, so Presentation Manager– based OS/2 applications are not compatible with NT. Windows NT also offers limited compatibility with POSIX-compliant applications. POSIX is a standardized UNIX variant designed to ensure software source code portability and facilitate program maintenance. Instead of having a unique program for every UNIX variant, only one version of the program’s source code is required for any POSIX system. Like the OS/2 API, the POSIX API in Windows NT supports only character-mode applications. OS/2 Warp either incorporates or adds to Windows 3.11 code to provide application compatibility. In many cases, even somewhat ill-behaved applications will run in the OS/2 Warp environment, offering even more complete DOS application compatibility than Windows NT. OS/2 Warp obviously provides increased compatibility for OS/2 applications, both character based and Presentation Manager based. OS/2 does not currently offer any support for POSIX-compliant applications. Like OS/2, Windows NT implements a Protected mode environment for all running applications. If one DOS application does something it should not, Windows NT detects the error and prevents the fault from causing any side effects on the operating system or on any other application that may be executing at the same time. On Intel processors, Windows NT uses the hardware protection features built into the processors to provide this function. On non-Intel processors, these features are provided by software emulation via the Virtual DOS Machine (VDM). Because Windows NT offers many of the same features as OS/2 Warp, either operating system is able to form the software base of a


253

robust client/server environment. OS/2 offers the advantages of the object-oriented Workplace Shell, slightly better connectivity support, and the reliability inherent in being at its fifth major release level. What advantages does Windows NT have in its current release that differentiate it from OS/2 Warp? A few important areas in which NT currently differs from OS/2 are portability, extensibility, and the NT file system. IBM has already announced plans to add most of these features to OS/2 or to its future line of operating system products called Workplace OS. Being able to move an operating system from one style of computer to another is a feature called portability. For an operating system to be moved, this feature must be built in. Portability for operating systems is of great interest to system software developers because it enables them to move their products at a reasonable cost into multiple marketplaces on multiple hardware platforms. Windows NT has a Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) that isolates function calls to hardware. To port Windows NT to other systems, all that is needed is a new HAL for that computer. Microsoft has already committed to support Windows NT on both the DEC Alpha and Silicon Graphics MIPS (Millions of Instructions Per Second) processors. The advantage that portability offers to users is the ability to select from a broader base of hardware while maintaining a common software base. Also, the wider base of available hardware encourages increased software development for the Windows NT platform, providing more options for the user and access to applications that might not be available otherwise. Extensibility, like portability, is a way for end users and application developers to protect their current investments in software. The architecture of Windows NT allows new subsystems to be added to NT to support other types of applications, such as OS/2 Presentation Manager applications. With an extensible operating system such as Windows NT, end users will have the opportunity to adopt popular applications from a variety of current and future operating systems without abandoning NT as a whole. Both Windows NT and OS/2 support File Allocation Table (FAT) and High Performance File System (HPFS) file systems. The FAT file system was originally introduced with DOS and is required to maintain compatibility with DOS file names and DOS applications. The HPFS file system offers higher performance when accessing data on very large fixed disks as well as adding other features such as support for long file names and extended attributes. In addition to these file

254


systems, Windows NT offers a third option called the NT File System (NTFS). The NT File System includes all of the features of the HPFS and adds greater security, greater data reliability and recoverability, and support for fault-tolerant features. It also supports larger file volumes and even longer file names.

Windows NT Server Whereas Windows NT Workstation incorporates peer-to-peer networking as an integral part of the operating system, Windows NT Server, a separate product, offers significantly enhanced functions to implement advanced domain-administered networks. The capabilities of NT Server can be grouped into four basic categories: network management and administration, security and log-on control, reliability, and client support. NT Server adds the concept of domains to the Windows environment. A domain is essentially a group of servers that can be managed as a group from a single system. This centralization allows user profiles and information to be stored in a single location, simplifying the management of large networks. Windows NT Server 4.0 is the latest version of NT Server and includes SMP support for multiprocessing and expanded Internet, intranet, and communications services. NT Server also incorporates support for RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks), which increases performance and reliability by spreading data across any array of disks and protects that data with a parity check. In addition, NT Server makes it easier to configure clients via directory replication. This feature lets a server automatically load files from a particular server directory into designated clients. Remote users are also supported through Remote Access Services (RAS).

JavaOS for Business The JavaOS for Business operating system is a new operating system developed jointly by Sun Microsystems and IBM. It was designed from the ground up to run Java applications in a centrally managed network computing environment. With JavaOS for Business, servers can be connected to network computers and other thin clients such


255

as kiosks, ticket machines, and remote terminals. The JavaOS for Business operating system was specifically designed to help simplify the management and remote administration of servers that host Java technology–based business applications for remote users, such as bank tellers, insurance claim processors, and travel agents. Networks running JavaOS for Business software can provide various tools and applications for end users performing specialized tasks. Bank tellers, for example, need only a few applications to perform their jobs. JavaOS for Business software efficiently delivers these applications from the server to network computers, which often don’t require devices such as hard disks or CD-ROMs. By providing only the operating system facilities necessary to support the Java platform, this new operating system eliminates the overhead required by other operating systems that support a variety of applications, hardware devices, and environments. In addition, the software also uses a layered architecture, which provides flexibility and ease of use because each layer can be updated independently. JavaOS for Business software is designed to give companies greater flexibility in implementing server-managed solutions because it is an open system based on industry standards. As a result, businesses can greatly reduce system administration costs while implementing the advantages of low-cost network computer systems.

Linux The Linux Operating System is a UNIX-like operating system that is an outgrowth of the Open Source community. Linux is fast becoming the operating system of choice for many new Net companies and Web sites because it is essentially free and works dependably. The big difference between Linux and a proprietary network operating systems is that Linux is open-source, so it can be seen, used, modified, or augmented by anyone. You can download the code in pieces free from the Internet or buy a package of the operating system, tools, shells, and utilities such as the Java 1.1.8 IBM Developer Kit for Linux. The IBM Developer Kit for Linux, Java Technology Edition, Version 1.1.8 is a development environment for companies who want to build and deploy robust, high-performance, Web-based, server applications on Intel architecture that conform to the Java 1.1 Core API. The

256


Developer Kit for Linux contains IBM’s Just-In-Time (JIT) compiling technology ported to the Linux environment and is compliant with Sun’s Version 1.1.8 Java compatibility test. Linux is an operating system well suited for a thin-client architecture running Java applications. While this UNIX spin-off is emerging as a viable operating system at the server level, its suitability for business desktops is still a matter of debate. IBM recently became the first vendor to offer Red Hat’s Linux operating system as a certified operating system for a notebook computer, offering it on its ThinkPad.

Which Operating System Is for You? Never before has the user had so many operating systems from which to choose. Determining which one is right for your environment is not always easy, and there is no “right answer” for all situations. However, the driving force behind any operating system choice (and the computer system choice for that matter) should be the application program. In other words, find the application program that best fits your needs and then buy the operating system needed to run it. Beyond that, here are some things to consider. The Windows 98 and 2000 operating systems will give you maximum reach into the existing base of PC application programs, which is still a large base of personal computer application programs. OS/2 Warp, Version 4 provides compatibility with older versions of DOS, Windows, and OS/2 application programs. AIX and Linux also provide some compatibility with DOS application programs, but because Linux is really headed off in a non-DOS direction, it will not support many of the older DOS applications. Windows NT Workstation 4.0 offers an additional option for those of you who require multi-application and multithreading capabilities. It too was built from the ground up to offer these functions while maintaining the same user interface as Windows 95. Windows NT Workstation 4.0 and Windows 95/98 share a common user interface and programming interface, which makes managing a mixed environment easier for customers. Windows NT Workstation 4.0 differs from Windows 95/98, providing multithreading capabilities and greater security and portability than Windows 95. Optimized for the 32-bit environment, Windows NT Workstation may not be as com-


257

patible with as many legacy applications and device drivers as Windows 95. Windows 95/98 is more compatible with the great majority of MS-DOS-and Windows 3.1–based applications, as well as the bulk of hardware devices. Finally, the AIX and Linux operating systems will allow you to enter the highly standardized open systems arena and use many applications originally developed for the ever-popular UNIX operating system. This, along with the fact that AIX provides a multiuser environment, gives it distinct advantages. However, because AIX is its own family and will grow along with many industry standards, AIX will have its own coherent and orderly growth path.

258


7 Personal Computer Communications and Networks

The standard features of personal computers, together with the many communications options and supporting software, provide users with flexibility when configuring their personal computers for various communications environments. However, this flexibility can also cause confusion when trying to determine which options and programs are needed for a particular environment. This chapter helps guide you through the different types of business communications available through personal computers. It examines the most popular types of communications environments and provides a sample configuration for each.

Computer Communications in Business—An Introduction Just as a woodworker cherishes a solid block of mahogany, business people cherish accurate, timely, and manageable information. If there is one activity that is crucial to any size business, it is the act of communicating information to the proper decision maker. Based on the

258

Personal Computer Communications and Networks

259

information available to the decision maker, important choices are made that can have far-reaching effects on the success of the business. Improve communications in a business and you are likely to improve productivity and profitability. Ironically, as a business grows, it becomes more important and more difficult to maintain efficient and accurate communications—the very thing that facilitates business growth in the first place. Communications difficulties grow geometrically with the size of the business. Today’s businesses are quickly finding in computers a communications tool unequaled in significance since Bell invented the telephone. Computers are already commonplace in the business environment, and now there is an increasing emphasis on computer communications. This communication can occur exclusively between two computers or among a group of computers in a communications network. In addition to the direct benefit of improved business information flow, the growth in computer communications has been fueled further by the equipment-sharing possibilities provided through computer communications. For example, a high-speed printer can easily be shared among several computer users joined in a communications network. This sharing provides for more efficient usage of the printer and reduces the required investment in printer hardware. Personal computers represent a powerful communications tool. They support a large family of high-performance communications adapters and communications software. Understanding how to apply these adapters and their software in useful communications configurations can be confusing. This chapter provides sample configurations of these adapters and supporting software that allow personal computers to participate in terminal emulation and various local area networks. The communications options used in these sample configurations were covered in Chapter 3. You are encouraged to refer to that chapter for further information on the adapters as necessary.

Terminal Emulation Mainframe and minicomputers can offer substantial computing resources above and beyond those of personal computers in terms of

260


processing speed, storage capacity, communications networks, and peripherals. personal computers, on the other hand, are less expensive, are easier to use, and sometimes provide for higher productivity than larger computer systems do. Clearly, both personal computers and larger computers have their place in the business environment. Further, many businesses have found that they can best enjoy the convenience and economy of personal computers along with the resources of larger computers by linking the two together. One of the methods used to effect this communication link is to have the personal computer “act like” or emulate the classical terminals commonly used to interact with the larger computers. This allows the personal computer to exchange information with the host computer. The personal computer is said to be performing terminal emulation. Because a personal computer has more capabilities than a terminal, it is often called an intelligent workstation. The reasons behind the advent of terminal emulation are easy to trace. Before PCs, terminals existed for the sole purpose of interacting with mainframe and minicomputers, called conducting a host computer session. Then PCs penetrated the business environment and grew to be important tools in their own right. Thus, many computer users needed both a terminal attached to a host and a standalone PC to do their job. The computing capability of a PC made it possible to develop hardware adapters and software to allow a PC to emulate and thus replace the classic terminals. Although other ways of linking larger computers and PCs exist, terminal emulation is commonplace in the business environment. When your personal computer becomes your terminal, three things happen. First, you no longer need a dedicated terminal to interact with the larger computers. The personal computer can now fill this role in addition to performing its normal personal computer functions. Second, the host computer and its peripheral equipment become an extension of your personal computer. For example, the fixed disk space provided by the host can be used as an extension of your personal computer’s local disk storage. You can also print personal computer documents on the host’s printers. The third thing that happens is that your personal computer becomes an extension of the host computer. This means you (or your application programs) can transfer information from the host computer to your personal computer, capture the information on a local disk, and then modify, print, or otherwise manipulate that information with personal computer


261

application programs unassisted by the host. Manipulating host-resident information on your personal computer allows you to use your favorite personal computer application program and enjoy the instant response time associated with a single-user computer system. Once the data has been manipulated locally, it can be sent back to the host for storage or other processing. There are many different types of host computers, each with different types of terminals. Adapter cards and software available for personal computers support the emulation of many different terminals. Configuring a personal computer for terminal emulation for a given host computer environment requires detailed knowledge of the host computer’s configuration. The specific device that must be emulated depends on the host computer type, available host interface equipment, host software, and wiring installed in the building. These factors, along with performance and cost requirements, typically go into selecting the particular terminal to be emulated. We cover three commonly used host terminals that personal computers can emulate: •

Asynchronous terminals are widely used to interact with computers of all sizes

•

IBM 5250 workstations are used for IBM AS/400, System/36, and System/38 interaction

•

IBM 3270 workstations are used with the larger IBM System/390 and System/370 computers

Asynchronous Terminal Emulation Asynchronous terminals are relatively simple, low-cost devices consisting of a display and a keyboard. They are used to interact with a wide variety of computers in use today and are called “asynchronous” after the asynchronous communications method they use to exchange information with the host computer. When a key on the terminal is depressed, an ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) code representing the key pressed is sent to the host computer. Each ASCII code, which is one byte in length, is sent across the communications link individually and asynchronously, or with no fixed time relationship between successive codes. This

262


one-at-a-time communication method is one of the reasons that asynchronous terminals often transfer information at a rate that is slower overall than the other terminals we cover. Two personal computer configurations for asynchronous terminal emulation are shown in Figure 7.1. In Figure 7.1(a), the personal

Remote host computer

Application(s) SOFTWARE OS/2 Protocol converter

BIOS Telephone lines HARDWARE

Modem Adapter

M O D E M

Personal System (a) Internal Modem Configuration with OS/2

Remote host computer

PROCOMM SOFTWARE DOS Protocol converter

BIOS

HARDWARE

Async Cable Serial port

M O D E M

Telephone lines M O D E M

Personal System (b) External Modem Configuration with DOS and PROCOMM

Figure 7.1. Asynchronous terminal emulation configurations. (a) Configuration with 2400 baud internal modem. (b) Configuration requires no feature cards and an external modem. These configurations are useful for interacting with many different types of computer systems, including other personal computers.


263

computer has been equipped with an internal modem. This modem is attached directly to the telephone-line jack and converts the information inside the personal computer into a form suitable for telephone-line transmission. The computer at the other end of the line must have a compatible modem that will convert the transmitted information into its original form. Often, the host will also need a protocol converter to change the information from the asynchronous format used by the personal computer to its “native tongue.” Another alternative is shown in Figure 7.1(b). In this implementation, the personal computer requires no adapter card options but does require an external modem. The standard serial port provided on all IBM personal computers is cabled to an external modem via an external cable. If the standard serial port is used for, say, a printer, an async adapter or the multiprotocol adapter could be used for this communications link. OS/2 Warp, provides the programming necessary to make a personal computer appear to be an asynchronous terminal. For DOS users, a popular DOS communications program such as PROCOMM can provide this function. In either case, one of several different types of asynchronous terminals may be emulated. The various asynchronous terminals differ primarily in how they respond to different “commands” sent from the host computer. For example, a host computer can send a special command to an IBM 3101 Asynchronous Terminal that will cause the terminal to display information in reverse video. When OS/2 or PROCOMM is emulating the 3101, it must respond similarly to the same command when received from the host. Although our sample configurations show a personal computer communicating with a larger host computer, personal computers can also communicate with other small computers (including other IBM personal computers) through asynchronous terminal emulation. Smallcomputer-to-small-computer configurations can be used as a smallscale document delivery system for transferring computer files between distant personal computers. Files can contain, for example, a memo, the daily cash register receipts of a retail store, or the orders taken by outbound salespeople. The PCs emulating asynchronous terminals are also widely supported by many service companies that offer access to their host computers for the purpose of information retrieval and electronic mail. Information retrieval services offer access to an overwhelming amount of information. These services provide general information such as UPI

264


news stories and stock market quotes as well as highly specialized information. For example, if you are a lawyer, there are services available that allow you to look up information quickly on any and every legal decision in recent times faster than you can say “habeas corpus.” Further, you can do patent and trademark searches in a fraction of the normal time. For doctors, there are services that provide information on virtually every subject of biomedicine from over 3000 international journals and publications. Virtually any topic you wish to research is covered extensively by one service company or another. Electronic mail services are also available to personal computers emulating asynchronous terminals. These services allow you to send computer-generated documents electronically, resulting in very fast delivery. Here is basically how they work: Your personal computer dials the host computer belonging to the service company over the modem link to establish the communications link. You are then prompted by the host to enter your ID and password. Once you have complied with these requests, you can send electronic mail to any other subscriber of the service. Later, when the addressee dials up the company’s computer, he or she will be informed that there is mail in the electronic mailbox. What if you wish to send mail to someone who doesn’t own a computer or doesn’t subscribe to that particular service? In that case, you would still send your letter via your modem to the service company’s host. The host would then send your letter to one of the branch offices located near the addressee, print the letter, and hand deliver it. Personal computers can also access the Internet via an asynchronous port. The Internet is a vast, worldwide network of computers and communications links that allows you to access a nearly limitless and ever-changing set of information. As with many other important innovations, the Internet was originally developed in the academic environment. Universities wanted to be able to easily and quickly share information. What has developed over the past decades is an extensive electronic network of computers and millions of users that have access to the Internet. Now, much of the mail and information transferred between businesses is done electronically, over the Internet. Access to the Internet allows you to search for specific information wherever it may exist or simply browse through the contents of a remote library to see what you might find interesting. Online information services are beginning to provide access to some of the Internet


265

functions for simpler tasks such as electronic mail and some information services. However, to get the full power of the Internet, you need to be connected directly into the World Wide Web of computers.

5250 Workstation Emulation The IBM AS/400 and System/3X are families of midrange computers commonly used as primary processors in small businesses or as departmental processors in larger companies. The 5250 workstations (terminals and printers) are used to interact with AS/400 and System/3X computers. The personal computer depicted in Figure 7.2 is equipped to act as an intelligent workstation for an AS/400 host computer. The 5250 emulation makes the physical connection to the twinax cable used with AS/400 computers. The AS/400 PC Support program product includes programming for both the AS/400 and the personal computer (using DOS). It allows the personal computer to act like either a terminal or a printer. As a terminal, AS/400 PC Support gives the user access to the application programs on the AS/400 system as if he or she were at a

AS/400 host computer

Application (optional) SOFTWARE

AS/400 PC Support DOS BIOS

HARDWARE

5250 Emulation Adapter

Twinax cable

Personal System

Figure 7.2. Configuration used for 5250 terminal/printer emulation. This set of hardware and software allows personal computers to communicate with an AS/400 computer.

266


standard terminal. It also provides access to any personal computer application programs and allows for the exchange of information between AS/400 and personal computer application programs. As a printer, the program allows the user to print the output of AS/400 application programs on a printer attached to the personal computer. Further, a single personal computer can appear to be up to five different devices (or sessions) to the AS/400. For example, the personal computer user could define the personal computer as an AS/400 terminal (session 1) and the personal computer printer as an AS/400 printer (session 2), and still have three sessions left over. Some of these other sessions might be used to sign on to another AS/400 system as a separate terminal or define a second personal computer printer to be an AS/400 printer. Another function of PC Support allows the user to assign some of the AS/400’s disk space to be used as if it were personal computer disk space. In essence, AS/400 PC Support makes the AS/400 system become an extension of the personal computer and vice versa. Figure 7.2 shows a locally attached personal computer. The same link could also be established over a great distance through the 5394 Remote Control Unit. For the DOS user wishing to communicate with the earlier System/36 or System/38 computer systems, the IBM Workstation Emulation program fits the bill. The Emulation program allows the personal computer to emulate either a 5250 Workstation Display (e.g., 5292 Model 2) or a 5250 Printer (e.g., 5219). As a workstation display, the Workstation Emulation program gives the user access to the application programs on the AS/400 or System/3X as if he or she were at a 5250 Workstation. As a printer, the program allows the user to print the output of AS/400 or System/3X application programs on a printer attached to the personal computer. The Workstation Emulation program’s multi-application capabilities allow the personal computer to interact with the AS/400 or System/3X as if it were four separate terminals or printers. That is, the user can easily switch between up to four different sessions as well as one DOS program. For the OS/2 user, OS/2 Communications Manager/2 has the programming necessary to allow personal computers to interact with AS/400 or System/3X computers. Support for up to five sessions is provided.


267

3270 Emulation At the high end of IBM’s product line lie the IBM mainframe computers. This size computer system can be the single main processor for a large business or part of a large computer network that may span the world. The 3270 family of products is a set of display terminals, printers, and control units specifically designed to work with mainframe computers. Display terminals consist of a display and a keyboard, and allow the user to interact with an host computer. The printers are used to produce paper copies of the information stored in the mainframe. Control units provide the essential communications links between the mainframe computer and these other devices. Through the proper combination of these devices, many useful configurations are possible. Personal computers, equipped with the proper hardware and features, can emulate 3270 display terminals, control units, and printers designed for interaction with mainframe computers. This allows the user to combine the flexibility of personal computers with the power of mainframe computers. The workstation emulation programs available for personal computers allow the user to choose among several levels of capability based on his or her particular needs.

Local Area Networks and IBM Personal Computers Just as there is a need for office personnel at any one location to talk frequently with each other, there is value to allowing the computers at a given location to communicate with each other efficiently and easily. We’ve seen some hardware and software configurations that allow various computers to communicate through terminal emulation. Local Area Networks (LANs) are another way of attaching computer systems together for the purposes of communication. LANs allow the user to electrically attach a group of local computers that might be found in a department, building, or campus. Each computer attached to the LAN is called a network node and can share information, programs, and computer equipment with other nodes in the network. We will look at four example LANs in which personal computers can participate:

268


•

Ethernet LAN

•

Token-ring network

•

FDDI network

•

ATM network

The OS/2 LAN Server family of products provides the programming necessary for OS/2-based personal computers to participate in any of these LANs. For DOS users, the Novell NetWare family of products provides the programming necessary to participate in local area networks. Before we get into how these networks differ, let’s examine the basic functions provided by LANs.

Basic LAN Functions A personal computer can be configured to participate in a LAN as either a server or a client (also called a requester). A server can offer its resources, such as fixed disk space or a printer, for use by the other computers in the network. Depending on the LAN program being used and its configuration, the server may or may not be usable as a normal standalone personal computer. The basic functions which LAN programs offered today can be broken down into four areas: •

Data sharing

•

Program sharing

•

Equipment sharing

•

Electronic messaging

Data Sharing Data sharing is often a good reason to connect personal computers to a LAN. Often, multiple office workers need access to the same body of information (e.g., accounts payable information, a telephone di-


269

rectory, inventory information, etc.). With a LAN and the proper programs, multiple users can simultaneously access a single body of information. This data sharing can easily be illustrated through an example using the LAN, as shown in Figure 7.3. Let’s say you are the user of node 1 (PC 1) and you wish to share your data with node 3 (PC 2). Let’s further say that you are currently configured as a server node. (Remember, to provide anything to other nodes, you must be configured as a server.) To allow other nodes to access your data, you would first step through some menus in which you will be requested to give a name to the shared section of your fixed disk. This is the name that the other nodes will use to access your data. You can also define a password to prevent unauthorized access and put restrictions such as read only to prevent others from altering your data. Now you can save this network setup, and the file will be shared automatically every time you power up. Any data you place in the shared section of the fixed disk can be accessed by any other node or server on the network, provided you give him or her the password. If the user of node 3 wants to use the data on your fixed disk, she steps through some menus on her computer and accesses the shared disk on your node by the name and password you just defined. She assigns your shared directory an unused drive letter such as E or F. She now saves this configuration so that she won’t have to step through those menus the next time she wants to use node 1’s fixed disk. From

PC 1 (Node 1)

PC 2 (Node 3)

PC Server (Node 2)

PC 300 GL (Node N)

PC Server (Node 4) Letter- quality printer

Figure 7.3. Example of a small local area network.

270


this point on, the shared section of your fixed disk is just as available to node 3 as it is to you. Anything the user can do on her local drives, she can do on your shared drive, unless you as the server (node 1) choose to impose limitations such as read only. Because this sharing occurs in the background, you can use your PC undisturbed while the other nodes access your information. More sophisticated data sharing can be implemented by application programs that are specially written to take advantage of a LAN’s capabilities. For example, an accounting department may use personal computers to do financial analysis of its company’s sales. Because sales are occurring every day (at least one would hope so), this information is constantly changing. The entire accounting department may need access to this information—perhaps for many different reasons. All accounting data can be stored on one of the server nodes on the network. With an accounting application program written to take advantage of a LAN’s functions, the accounting data files can be simultaneously available to all network users without interfering with or even being aware of the other users. Program Sharing In the previous example, we said that any data on the shared fixed disk of node 1 is as available to node 3 as it is to node 1. Can node 3 also execute a program on the disk of node 1? The answer is technically yes and legally maybe. Since programs are stored in files just like data, programs stored on node 1’s shared fixed disk can be executed by node 3 as if they were installed on node 3. The legal question centers on the terms of the licensing agreement provided by the software publisher. The licensing agreement is a legal contract between the purchaser and the seller of the software. Typically, these agreements state that you are not allowed to copy the software for the purpose of running the software on multiple computers. This is exactly what you are doing if you allow other nodes on the LAN to execute a program on your shared fixed disk. Until the advent of LANs, the terms of these licensing agreements were not a problem because PCs were used as “islands,” not components in a sharing environment. The growing popularity of LAN environments is causing software vendors to offer other terms such as site licensing and volume purchase contracts for their program products. These types of agreements allow the program to reside on a single network server


271

and to be shared by all on the network. This is becoming more and more common, especially with versions of software specifically written for data sharing in LAN environments. Equipment Sharing We have just seen how part of a fixed disk can be shared among several users. LANs also allow network nodes to share hardware such as printers. This can make for more efficient use of printing equipment, which is especially nice with the more expensive letter-quality or high-speed printers. Returning to our sample network in Figure 7.3, let’s say that each of the users in this network occasionally has a need to produce letter-quality documents. Because this need arises only occasionally for each node, it would be a wasteful investment to equip each individual node with its own letter-quality printer. LANs provide an alternate approach to filling the needs of these users by allowing all nodes to share one letter-quality printer attached to node 4. Each node can print letters just as if each had its own dedicated printer. The printer can be shared in the same way as a fixed disk can be shared. To allow the other nodes to access the printer, node 4’s user would step through some menus in which she would be requested to give a name to her printer. This is the name that the other nodes will use to access the printer. Here again, a password can be defined to prevent unauthorized access. Once the printer is shared, any other node can send files to the printer. The files to be printed are temporarily stored on node 4’s disk and automatically printed when the printer is available. Because the printing activity occurs in the background, all this occurs without interfering with the activities performed by the user of node 4. Besides fixed disks and printers, other computer hardware can be shared, as you will see later in the chapter. Electronic Messaging Another function provided by LANs is electronic messaging. This capability allows the user of an application program to send text messages to any other network nodes. The addressee of the message will be notified that someone has sent him or her a message—even if he or she is in the middle of some application program not associated with the network. The messages can be meeting notices, requests for

272


appointments, or anything you might normally leave as a note on someone’s desk. The electronic messaging feature can be a convenient time-saver.

Ethernet LAN The Ethernet LAN provides a means of attaching personal computers together for the purpose of communications. It allows the various computers to share information, programs, and computer equipment with the other nodes in the LAN. The Ethernet LAN is widely supported by many different computer manufacturers, which is why it is widespread. In fact, Ethernet LANs often consist of a mixture of different types and brands of computers. Figure 7.4 shows the basic architecture of an Ethernet LAN and a personal computer configured to participate. Each computer is attached as a tap off a common cable or information bus. For this reason, Ethernet is called a bus-wired network. Information is transferred over the Ethernet at a rate of 10 million bits/second (10 Mb/ sec). Although only one network node at a time may transmit a message over the network, the same coaxial cable commonly used with Ethernet LANs can be used simultaneously for other communications besides computer information (e.g., cable television, voice, etc.) without interfering with the network’s operation. An Ethernet LAN is basically a party line on which all nodes can transmit a message for all nodes to hear. Every node has equal access to the cable and can send a message at any time without warning. When one node transmits a message, it is received by all nodes. Each node then examines the address contained in the message to see if the message is intended for that node. If not, the message is discarded. To ensure that only one network node transmits at a time, each node follows a protocol, unknown to the user, when transmitting messages. This protocol is called Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD). It’s a mouthful but is really quite simple. In fact, we follow this protocol in our everyday telephone conversations. Here, too, only one person can speak at a time or neither is clearly understood. One party waits for the other to finish before he or she begins speaking. Thus the phone line carries only one party’s voice at a time, and the message is clear. This is the CSMA part of


273

PC 300 Application program (optional) Netware NFS Netware V3.11 DOS UNIX workstation

BIOS Ethernet LAN Adapter

Personal Computer

PC Server

UNIX minicomputer

Figure 7.4. Personal computer configured to participate as a server in an Ethernet LAN.

CSMA/CD. The CD part of the protocol handles the times when two nodes start transmissions simultaneously. To understand this part of the protocol, think of what you do during a telephone conversation when you begin talking at the same time as the other party. Typically, you both stop talking and begin again a few moments later, hoping that this time one of you begins sooner than

274


the other. This is exactly analogous to the situation with CSMA/CD. If two or more nodes begin transmitting at the same time, the messages “collide” on the network. The nodes monitor for such a collision, and when one is detected, all nodes stop transmitting and begin again after a pause of random length. Usually, one node will begin retransmission before the other, thus gaining control of the network.

Token-Ring Networks The token-ring network is a baseband local area network in which personal computers can participate. This network is designed to support larger computer systems as normal network nodes in addition to personal computers. This feature allows the information-and equipment-sharing environment offered by LANs to include larger computers as well. An example of a small token-ring network is shown in Figure 7.5. The nodes of the network are arranged in a ring pattern, thus giving the network its name. As you can see, the network can consist of a mixture of different types of computers, both small and large. Figure 7.6 shows a configuration that allows personal computers to become servers in a token-ring network. The personal computer is equipped with the Token-Ring Network Adapter 16/4. This adapter performs the detailed electrical communications tasks necessary to send information to other nodes in the network. The adapter is attached to the required Controller Access Unit (CAU) via the network cable. One 8230 CAU, for example, supports the attachment of up to 80 network nodes. A modular jack is used to attach each network node to the CAU, which lets nodes be quickly added to or removed from the network. The CAU can automatically bypass any failing nodes by detecting their inactivity. With the proper cable components, a single token-ring network can contain up to 260 nodes over several kilometers. Information is transmitted at either 4 or 16 MB per second, depending on how the network is configured, which helps the overall performance of the network. Multiple token-ring networks can be linked together by a bridge. The protocol used by the token-ring network is the token-ring protocol. Basically, packets of information are passed around the ring from node to node in a continuous circle. These packets are called


275

PC 1 (Node 1)

3174 Control Unit gateway PC 2 (Node 2)

(Node N) Token-Ring Network

System/390

PC 3 (Node 3) PC 5 (Node 5)

AS/400 (Node 4)

Figure 7.5. Example of a small token-ring network. This network can accommodate personal computers as well as larger computers.

message frames. A unique frame called a token frame controls access to the ring. A node receiving a frame checks to see if it is a message or a token frame. If it is a message frame, the node examines the destination address (see Figure 7.7) to see if the message is intended for that node. If the message is not intended for that node, the message frame is passed on unchanged to the next node in the ring. If the frame received by a node is a token frame, the node knows that the network is idle and that it may send a message frame if it has infor-

276


Application program (optional) SOFTWARE

Controller Access Unit

For expansion

OS/2 LAN Server-Entry

PC 300 GL

OS/2 Warp NTS/2

BIOS HARDWARE

To other nodes

Token-Ring Network 16/4

Personal computer PC Server

PC 340

Figure 7.6. Configuration allowing a personal computer to be a node in a token-ring network as a server.

mation to transfer. After it sends a message frame, the node then sends a token frame to indicate that the ring is again inactive and ready to carry information. The token-passing protocol for ring access control is based on a predefined 24-bit pattern, called a token, which continuously circulates around the ring. When a station has data to transmit, it waits until its station adapter receives a free token (token bit = 0). Upon capturing the free token, the station creates a frame by setting the token bit to 1. It then inserts source and destination addresses, certain control information, and the data to be sent to the destination station, and starts frame transmission During the time the frame is being transmitted, no token is available on the ring and no other station can initiate a transmission. Thus, collisions on the ring are avoided. The frame is passed (received, regenerated, and retransmitted) from one station to another on the ring until it is received by a station with a matching destination address.


277

Message frame

Token Frame Control info

Destination Source MESSAGE address address

Trailer symbol

Control info

Trailer symbol

Figure 7.7. The token-ring network uses a special token message to control access to the network.

The destination station copies the data to its internal buffers, sets control bits to indicate that it recognized the address and successfully copied the data, and retransmits the frame. When the frame returns to the source station following successful transmission and receipt, it is removed from the ring. The source

278


station creates a new free token and transmits it on the ring, thereby allowing other stations access. Until the source station releases a free token, the rest of the stations are unable to transmit. To reduce the amount of time a station has to wait for a free token, a function known as Early Token Release is available. With Early Token Release, a sending station releases a free token following frame transmission without waiting for the transmitted frame to return. This enhances the utilization of the ring by allowing one token and one or more frames to circulate on the network at the same time. The token-ring method has certain important architectural considerations. Token-ring frames may contain as many as 17,800 bytes of information, which is significantly more than the 1,500 bytes of user data in an Ethernet frame. A negotiation process is required by token-ring stations to determine the maximum frame size they can use, but most implementations end up using larger frames than Ethernet implementations, which is more efficient when transferring large volumes of data. A single token ring may have up to 260 devices connected to it. Timing considerations affect the maximum frame size (only 4472 bytes for a 4 Mbps ring) and the cable lengths comprising a single ring. Most bridged token ring networks implement source-route bridging. Stations that want to communicate with each other across a bridged network first send discovery frames through the network to discover the best route. The stations then save this routing information and include it in every frame they subsequently send. The token ring frame itself contains an indicator bit to denote that this source-routing information is present in the frame. Source-route bridging is especially useful in SNA networks, because it allows multiple paths between two points across the network and also allows configuration of duplicate MAC addresses, both of which increase reliability and availability of the network.

Token-Ring vs. Ethernet Networks There is no simple and objective answer as to which technology is “better;” any comparisons between token ring and Ethernet end up being subjective. However two points need to be made here: First, shared-media token ring copes much better under heavy loads than shared-media Ethernet. As traffic increases, Ethernet performance de-


279

grades significantly whereas 16 Mbps token ring has been shown to be capable of delivering an aggregate data throughput of 15.9 Mbps. The vast majority of end users, however, do not themselves require more than 10 Mbps of network bandwidth, and a switched Ethernet infrastructure delivering switched 10 Mbps dedicated bandwidth to each user can meet their needs. What this means, though, is that existing 16 Mbps shared-token-ring users may well be able to continue using their existing networks when 10 Mbps shared-Ethernet users are required to upgrade to switched Ethernet or 100 Mbps Ethernet. Second, many existing token-ring users, most especially those with S/390 mainframes, will want to remain with token ring because of its ability to support duplicate identical MAC addresses. Duplicate addresses are used on mainframe token-ring gateways to provide a measure of automatic load balancing and switchover in the case of failure, which requires the implementation of a source-route bridging network, which is not normally possible to implement with Ethernet LANs. IBM continues to chair the IEEE 802.5 committee in the development and ratification of token ring standards. In particular, the committee developed the 802.5t standard for 100 Mbps token ring, which is now an approved IEEE standard. The 802.5v standard for gigabit token ring was approved as a standard in July 2000. The purpose of these standards is to ensure interoperability between different vendors’ high-speed token-ring implementations. IBM supports 100 Mbps token ring on its 100/16/4 PCI adapter.

FDDI Networks Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) networks are the fastest type of LAN covered in this book. They can move information from one computer in the network to another at over 100 million bits per second (100 Mb/sec). Figure 7.8 shows a typical structure for one segment of a FDDI network. Our example network consists of 5 FDDI concentrators and 10 computers. Concentrators are physical devices that provide one means to attach computers to the FDDI network. Although computers with FDDI adapters can be directly connected to the FDDI cable, using concentrators minimizes disruption to the network as computers are added, removed, powered off, and so on. The concentrators are connected together by two cables that provide two independently operating paths over which information can

280


Backup path Main path Concentrator #4 Concentrator #5

Concentrator #3

Concentrator #1

Concentrator #2

Token

Dual-homing station

Figure 7.8. Basic structure of an FDDI network.

flow between the concentrators. The innermost path in our diagram is the main path, and the outermost path is the backup path. As the names imply, the main path is used to carry all network traffic under normal circumstances. The information is flowing normally in our FDDI network, as is indicated by the arrows showing the information flow around the main path. The backup path sits idle and is only used in the event of a network failure, as we will see in a minute. The cables used in FDDI networks can be either shielded twisted-pair or fiber-optic cable—both are supported in FDDI network standards and personal computer FDDI adapters.


281

The computers in our example, except the computer labeled “dual-homing station,” are all attached to the concentrator using a single-ring FDDI adapter. The single-ring attachment allows each computer to be attached to one concentrator. The computer attached as a dual-homing station is cabled to two different concentrators. Now that the stage is set, let’s see what happens to the network if a concentrator fails. Figure 7.9 shows how our FDDI network automatically reacts when concentrator 2 fails. Concentrators 1 and 3 sense the failure and automatically wrap the information received over the main path to their backup path connections. As you can see by the arrows, information now flows on a new path consisting of

Backup path Main path Concentrator #4 Concentrator #5

Concentrator #3

Concentrator #1

Concentrator #2 Failed

Token

Dual-homing station

Figure 7.9. When concentrator #2 fails, the FDDI network automatically reroutes traffic.

282


both the main path and the backup path. All of the computers on the network continue normal operation uninterrupted except those attached only to concentrator 2. Any computer attached only to concentrator 2 (there are two of them in our network) loses the ability to communicate with the others over the FDDI network until concentrator 2 is repaired and placed back on the network. What about the computer attached as a dual-homing station? Since that computer is attached to both concentrator 2 (now not working) and concentrator 1 (still working), it continues operation uninterrupted and retains the ability to communicate with the others in the FDDI network. So, attaching a workstation as a dual-homing station improves the network availability as seen by that computer system/user at the cost of the extra connection hardware. The speed (100 Mb/sec) and availability features (backup path and dual-homing configurations) of the FDDI network are among its most compelling strengths. Figure 7.10 shows how a personal computer might be configured to participate in an FDDI network. This FDDI network includes two personal computers (one personal computer running the DOS operating system and the other running OS/2), one RS/6000 system, one non-IBM computer running UNIX, and one larger IBM computer, which could be either an AS/400 or an S/390. The FDDI Base Adapter—Copper allows the personal computer to physically connect to the shielded twisted-pair cable leading to a concentrator such as the 8240 FDDI Concentrator. One FDDI segment can attach up to 500 computers together. Multiple FDDI segments can be attached together to allow thousands of computers to communicate.

Gateways We’ve seen one way that personal computers can be directly attached to a host computer. We’ve also seen how a personal computer participating in a LAN can share its resources with other personal computers in the LAN. These two concepts can be combined to form a network gateway. A network gateway is a network node that has a communications link with some other computer (typically a mainframe computer) not participating in the LAN and is able to share this communications link to other LAN nodes. That is, a single ter-


8240 FDDI Concentrator From another concentrator

To another concentrator

283

UNIX-based computer

Application(s) OS/2 Lan Server PC 300 GL

OS/2 Warp

Device Drivers FDDI Base Adapter RS/6000 (AIX) Personal Computer IBM AS/400 or IBM S/390 computer

Figure 7.10. Personal computer configured to participate in an FDDI network.

minal emulation link to a host computer can be shared by other users on the LAN. Let’s examine a sample gateway configuration. A single personal computer linked to a System/390 host through control unit emulation and sharing this link with the nodes of a LAN is called a 3270 gateway. Figure 7.11 shows a personal computer (node 3) configured to be a 3270 gateway for the Ethernet Network. The Ethernet LAN Adapter and associated LAN Support Program (device drivers for the adapter) are used to attach the personal computer to the LAN. The Multi-Protocol Communications Adapter is used to communicate with the off-network S/390 computer system through a Communications Controller. OS/2 and the Communication Manager/2 provide the necessary programming to allow this

284


PC 1 (Node 1)

PC Server (Node 4)

PC 300 GL (Node N)

PC Server (Node 2) Letter-quality printer

Application(s) SOFTWARE

CommuLAN nication Server Manager/2 Advanced

OS/2 Warp

S/390 Host

NTS/2 BIOS

Ethernet LAN Adapter HARDWARE Multi-protocol

M O D E M

Phone line

M O D E M

3XXX Controller

SDLC Personal computer

Figure 7.11. A personal computer configuration that provides an Ethernet gateway to a System/390 computer.

personal computer to share its communications link with other properly configured (i.e., able to perform 3270 emulation) client nodes in the network. If the personal computer and the System/390 were close to each other, the modem link between them could be replaced with a direct attachment to the host via the 3270 Connection Adapter or via a token-ring network segment. This personal computer allows up to 64 other network nodes to simultaneously communicate with the System/390 host computer as


285

if they each had their own direct terminal emulation link with the host. These 64 nodes can perform the function described in the “3270 Emulation” section of this chapter. The personal computer can also be configured as other types of gateways, such as a 3270 gateway for a token-ring network. Further, by adding the OS/2 LAN Server program, the gateway personal computer can also act as a server sharing a fixed disk and printers with other client nodes. However, in busy networks with many users, it is often better to divide the gateway and server functions among more than one personal computer.

Switched Ethernet and Token Ring In recent years, new offerings based on frame switching for Ethernet and token-ring networks have been offered by several vendors. These switches employ extensions of the multiport bridging concept and are implemented using standard protocols such as spanning tree or source routing. Figure 7.12 shows a typical switched Ethernet and token-ring environment. Initially, these LAN switches were very expensive and were used primarily to meet the bandwidth needs of only the most highly powered workstations and demanding graphics applications. More recently, however, they have become an affordable alternative method of relieving bandwidth congestion in large workgroup networks running legacy applications. They are simple to install in that they do

Figure 7.12. Example of a switched Ethernet and token-ring network.

286


not require new adapters or protocol stacks, and they employ existing building wiring for connection to the switches. They can also reduce network complexity by reducing the number of bridges and router connections in the network so that there are fewer entities to configure, monitor, and manage. An attractive aspect of these two similar technologies is that they provide solutions for congestion problems on existing LANs. For example, a shared-media LAN of 60 users that is suffering from client/server traffic problems can be divided into 10 six-station shared-media LANs that are attached to a port on a LAN switch. The servers are isolated on ports of their own, and their adapters are reconfigured to operate in full-duplex mode. This configuration reduces congestion significantly while preserving the investment in adapters, hubs, and building cabling. As the traffic continues to increase, each workstation can be attached to its own portion of the switch to maximize the bandwidth capability of each device. Finally, high-use resources such as servers attached to their own ports can be operated in full-duplex mode, effectively doubling the bandwidth at that port. Such a change improves server throughput and limits the number of changes needed in the network to bring performance back to an acceptable level. Moving to a microsegmented, switched LAN is a better and less expensive workgroup solution than simply dividing segments and adding more bridges and servers in an attempt to accommodate the traffic. Microsegmentation using LAN switches leaves you with a simpler, more manageable network. Sometimes, due to scaling limitations, this is not the best solution for all cases. Because switched Ethernet and token-ring networks do not provide scalable bandwidth and the underlying protocols are connectionless, these solutions are often not effective in the backbone. When a backbone of LAN switches is used, the links between the switches are shared, as are the links to single-attached servers. Both are potential new bottlenecks. Time-sensitive applications do not move smoothly across the network because there is no congestion control before establishing the end-to-end connection, and data might be lost. Finally, whether in the backbone or desktop LAN environment, these frame-based technologies do not have the isochronous capabilities required by the emerging multimedia applications.


287

The ATM Solution Although ATM can be seen as an extension to LAN switching, it differs from LAN switching in a number of ways that give ATM networks more capabilities. Traditional shared-media LANs use a connectionless protocol that has proven adequate for most data-oriented applications. Even though switched Ethernet and token-ring networks are dedicated media, switched solutions, they are still fundamentally connectionless in their operation because they are based upon the original, shared-media protocols. Currently only ATM provides the connection-oriented environment required for the emerging multimedia applications. In addition, the ATM environment offers considerable benefits for running legacy applications that are connectionless. A network is a traffic-control system that manages the delivery of goods to and from devices attached to the network. Like the traffic-control system of a city, which defines the rules for delivery of goods across its infrastructure of streets and highways, each network protocol has its own set of rules. In a connection-oriented environment, data is kept in the endstation storage media until the connection to the receiving station is made. In this manner, the network is not burdened with the management of data that is en route, which allows for efficient operation that is simpler and has predictable destination arrival times. This is why ATM has caused so much excitement in the industry. In ATM, the data is split into fixed-length cells of 53 bytes each, in which a header of 5 bytes contains the routing information. The characteristics of the connection are negotiated ahead of time, and if the network can guarantee the quality of service, the call is accepted and the path is established. Then the cells are transmitted at hardware speed without the need to reexamine the contents of the cell or perform intermediate store and forward actions between the source and the destination. In ATM, because elements of information are split into 53-byte cells, cells from different sources can be interspersed and queued according to their individual priority. This way, fixed delays can be respected and quality of service can be set according to the application’s requirements rather than those of the adapter. By its architecture, ATM is a full-duplex, switched solution. Although some Ethernet and token-ring switches and adapters do have

288


full-duplex capability, the LAN switch must accommodate diverse attachment port characteristics and will act as a store and forward gateway between ports. This reduces the real capacity and bandwidth of a network. Figure 7.13 shows an ATM environment. In ATM, bandwidth is a parameter in the definition of a switched virtual circuit and is independent of the physical attachment: There is no need for intermediate buffering. If a physical link reaches capacity, additional connections can be added to expand the bandwidth and support additional traffic. Because this capability is one of the fundamental building blocks for high-quality video conferencing, ATM networks not only provide better throughput for legacy applications, they also provide the infrastructure for emerging applications. Because ATM is a connection-oriented protocol, bottlenecks between the workgroup switches and the backbone are easily removed by installing additional uplinks between the workgroup switches and the higher-speed backbone. ATM switches are able to set virtual circuits over diverse routes according to the current network capacity usage or according to the availability of a specific path. This not only increases the possible link bandwidth but also offers the possibility of bypassing a failing element. As the number of users per floor increases in an end-to-end ATM network, the bandwidth per user need not be affected because of any limitation on uplink bandwidth. Further, installing additional uplinks is simple and should cause little or no disruption in the network. The ability to provide multiple links guarantees uninterrupted service to end users. ATM is designed to support traffic with various bandwidth, jitter, and delay requirements. This design feature allows ATM networks to support voice, video, and data multiplexed on the same links. Quality of service is established at the time of the connection. Implementing quality of service depends upon ATM being a connection-oriented protocol. The ATM Forum has defined four quality of service types that are designed to handle the different types of traffic. CBR (Constant Bit Rate) and VBR (Variable Bit Rate) are reserved bandwidth services particularly well suited for supporting applications with stringent requirements for quality of service such as multimedia transmission or high-quality videoconferencing. UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) is a nonreserved bandwidth service. The cell loss ratio is unspecified and can seriously impact the overall performance. ABR (Available Bit Rate) service can be seen as a mix of reserved and nonreserved bandwidth service. Periodically a connection

Example of an ATM network.

289

Figure 7.13.


290


polls the network and, based on the feedback it receives, adjusts its transmission rate. This feedback is called flow control and is used to help optimize the bandwidth. Multicasting capability and LAN Emulation are foundations of both video distribution and videoconferencing and are exclusive features of the ATM architecture. Unlike the recipients of a broadcast message on a shared-media LAN, only those who want the message will receive it. Because traffic is connection oriented, no network resources are wasted and there is no danger of a broadcast storm. In VLAN implementations over ATM, multicasting and LAN Emulation define precisely which stations should receive the broadcast data. In addition, the broadcast manager of LAN Emulation can be augmented by filtering capabilities to reduce the amount of overhead data generated by chatty LAN protocols such as AppleTalk. The emerging bandwidth-intensive, isochronous applications can work only in an environment where the latency of any one switch is predictable, constant, and extremely low as opposed to variable and unpredictable. In environments where variable-length data and per frame filtering are employed, latency is adversely affected. In ATM networks the transit time between any two points on the network will always be the same, so the response time in even a large network will be predictable and constant. It is generally estimated that up to 70% of the cost of network ownership is the cost of operating the network. It stands to reason that the simpler a network is, the less costly it will be to operate. In a typical shared-media LAN environment today, the LANs are often joined to backbones running a different LAN protocol by bridges or routers. Connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network) is generally through routers as well. Bridges and routers are high-maintenance items, especially in networks with many moves, adds, and changes, Configurations have to be updated, and the network has to be tuned for best performance. ATM’s quality of service and scalable bandwidth virtually eliminate the need for network tuning. Bridges and routers are replaced by simple connections between switches. The resultant network is more reliable and ready for multimedia applications in addition to operating at a lower cost. ATM can be used as a high-speed backbone connection between token-ring switches, typically using a 155 Mbps up-link from the switch and defining an emulated token-ring LAN across the ATM


291

network. IBM’s Multiprotocol Switched Services (MSS) Server can be used to define the emulated LAN, and Multiprotocol Over ATM (MPOA) provides one way of defining and using short-cut direct connections across complex ATM networks. Before we conclude this chapter, let’s take a look at another important and evolving part of computer networks called Storage Area Networks.

Storage Area Networks In February 1999 IBM announced details of its Storage Area Network (SAN) initiative and introduced a series of high-end SAN-related products. This initiative is designed to help customers manage, track, and more easily share the ever-increasing volume of data being created by e-business applications. SAN technology can lead to lower total cost of ownership by allowing storage resources to be consolidated and shared by several servers. The ability to manage resources and share information has become crucial to many businesses today. Among the reasons are the growth of data-intensive applications such as data warehousing, data mining, and enterprise resource planning. Add to this the increasing presence of the Internet in commerce and the need for companies to be open for business 24 hours a day, 7 days a week in multiple time zones, and nearly around-the-clock access to business data is obvious. In this environment, data storage is rapidly becoming a central component of corporate technology strategies in the network. SANs offer an open architecture that allows customers freedom of choice in deploying data access and data sharing capabilities across the enterprise, consolidation of servers and storage, increased data availability, centralized storage management, the ability to back up and migrate data without affecting enterprise network performance, the increased reliability offered by clustering technology, and the security and protection of data in the event of disaster or intrusions. In 1998 IBM introduced Netfinity Fibre Channel technology, thus providing basic SANs in the Intel processor–based market. Fibre Channel combines the standard SCSI command set and protocol used by storage devices with the flexibility and connectivity of networks. Its ability to attach large numbers of devices using physically longer and

292


smaller cables than traditional SCSI, combined with its ability to transmit data at up to 100 MBps, makes it an attractive alternative to SCSI in many cases. Its architectural flexibility enables it to handle different protocols simultaneously. This allows a Fibre Channel network to serve as a high-speed LAN supporting network protocols such as TCP/IP and to support attachment of storage devices simultaneously. Components of the IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel technology include •

The Fibre Channel Switch. The switch, available as an 8-or 16-port model, enables the interconnection of various storage servers and devices. It optimizes the advantages of Fibre Channel technology for distance, performance, and heterogeneous connectivity. It uses the latest technology with an advanced, nonblocking switch architecture and delivers multiple, concurrent 100 MBps connections for large-block transfers, with reliability and data integrity. It provides scalability from small-to very-large-size SAN environments, with virtually limitless bandwidth. It also has an embedded Web server for easy browser-based setup, configuration, and ongoing management. Last, it offers the option of a second power supply that supports dual-power-source installations to minimize outages, and nondisruptive maintenance if one power supply fails.

•

The Fibre Channel SAN Data Gateway Router. The router provides a simple, entry-level connection between Fibre Channel–enabled hosts and new or existing SCSI tape libraries (thereby offering investment protection for existing SCSI libraries) to support sharing of tape devices by several servers and/or remote location of tape backups for disaster protection. Two models are available to support two Ultra SCSI single-ended or differential bus connections routed to a single Fibre Channel connection. Additional SAN Data Gateway models are available to support higher numbers of SCSI and/ or Fibre Channel connections.

•

The Fibre Channel Hub. The hub has seven ports for short-or long-wave optical connections provided by optional hotpluggable short-and long-wave gigabit interface converters (GBICs). The hub supports N-way clustering, and four short-wave GBICs are included as standard.


293

•

The Fibre Channel PCI Adapter. With 100 MBps speed and Fibre Channel direct-drive short-wave optical cable to 500 m (1,640 ft) rather than the 25-m (82-ft) limitation imposed by copper cable, the adapter eliminates electrical interference and ground shift problems caused by copper cable, which is still used by some other vendors; the optional long-wave optical cable reaches 10 km (6 mi), and a 64-bit PCI bus master transfers data at up to 264 MBps. The adapter is also compatible with 32-bit PCI.

•

The Fibre Channel RAID Controller. The fail-safe RAID Controller Unit is a single hot-pluggable controller (standard), with a dual, active redundant controller as an option, thus eliminating the problems caused by a single point of failure that can exist in other companies’ products. The controller supports RAID levels 0, 1, 3 and 5, and 128 MB of RAID cache per controller (scalable to 256 MB with 128 MB mirrored), plus a battery-backed write cache. It has 6 Ultra2 SCSI (also known as Low Voltage Differential SCSI, or LVDS) drive channels supporting up to 60 HDDs (as opposed to the limit of 8– 12 in other solutions) and redundant, hot-pluggable power supplies and fans.

In conclusion, The SAN is the next generation in the evolution of enterprise storage solutions. Its development has become necessary as a result of worldwide customer requirements for data storage and processing around the clock in multiple time zones— storage and processing that are reliable, powerful, secure, and separate from the enterprise LAN. IBM’s Netfinity SAN components and solutions are among the leading products in the industry. IBM brings decades of experience and expertise in mainframe technology to the Intel processor–based environment with their Netfinity family of servers and our Options by IBM’s broad portfolio of storage products. Both Netfinity servers and Options by IBM installed on them are covered by IBM’s limited, three-year on-site warranty, which provides hardware problem determination on-site, as well as remotely, with IBM’s latest technology and tools. IBM also provides the software management tools that help you fully exploit the value of a SAN in your business and make your

294


business intelligence work for you. And the IBM ServerProven Program on Netfinity gives businesses the confidence to implement robust SAN solutions tested and optimized for Netfinity systems in industry-standard, heterogeneous environments.

Glossary

295

Appendix A:

Glossary

10BaseT This type of Ethernet uses a bus topology with unshielded twisted pair cable. 10BaseT is used for single, point-to-point connections between a computer and hub or repeater. 10Base2 This type of Ethernet uses a bus topology with thin coaxial cable. It is generally used for small networks, for departmental networks, or for wiring a number of nodes together in the same room. 10Base5 This type of Ethernet uses a bus topology with thick coaxial cable. 100BaseTX This type of Ethernet network transmits at 100 Mbps over 2-pair or category 5 UTP cable. 100BaseT4 This type of Ethernet network transmits at 100 Mbps over 4-pair or category 3 UTP cable. 100Base-VG A joint Hewlett-Packard–AT&T proposal for Fast-Ethernet running at 100 million bits per second. It would use all four pairs using Category 5 cabling in the 10BaseT twisted-pair wiring scheme to transmit or receive, rather than today’s present system of using one pair to transmit and one pair to receive. 3270 emulation The use of software that enables a client to emulate an IBM 3270 display station, printer, or control unit and to use

295

296


the functions of an IBM host system. The tn3270 protocol is used in 3270 emulation over a TCP/IP network. 5250 emulation The use of software that enables a client to emulate an IBM 5250 display station or printer and to use the functions of an IBM AS/400 system. The tn5250 protocol is used in 5250 emulation over a TCP/IP network. ABIOS Advanced Basic Input/Output system. A/B roll Video that is compiled from two sources. In video-editing software, a scene editor or video construction window often provides two tracks, sometimes labeled track A and track B, for one video. Additional special effects (F/X) and superimposition tracks allow you to combine, overlap, and move between video clips with sophisticated transitions. AC (ac) Alternating Current. ac power Power that is supplied to the computer through an electrical outlet. access point A network component that provides connectivity between a wireless LAN and a wired LAN. access time The time interval between the instant at which a call for data is initiated and the instant at which the delivery of data is completed. This term is often used when discussing disk drive performance. adapter A part that electrically or physically connects a device to a computer or to another device. adaptive buffering Allows a disk to adjust the number and size of the buffer segments when disk logic determines that the buffer hit rate can be increased. address (1) A value that identifies a register or a particular part of storage. The value is represented by one or more characters. (2) The location in the storage of a computer where data is stored. (3) To refer to a specific storage location by specifying the value that identifies the location. address bus The path used for the transmission of address information in a computer. Advanced Power Management (APM) A facility consisting of one or more layers of software that support power management in computers with power manageable hardware. The APM software interface allows applications, operating systems, device drivers, and the APM BIOS to work together to reduce power consumption, without reducing system performance.

Glossary

297

AIMS Auto Indexing Mass Storage. alphanumeric (A/N) Pertaining to a character set that contains letters, digits, and usually other characters, such as punctuation marks. ALU See Arithmetic and Logic Unit. ANSI American National Standards Institute. An organization consisting of producers, consumers, and general-interest groups that establishes the procedures by which accredited organizations create and maintain voluntary industry standards in the United States. analog (1) Pertaining to data consisting of continuously variable physical quantities. (2) Contrast with “digital.” analog data Data in the form of a physical quantity that is considered to be continuously variable and whose magnitude is made directly proportional to the data or to a suitable function of the data. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) (1) A functional unit that converts data from an analog representation to a digital representation. (2) A device that senses an analog signal and converts it to a proportional representation in digital form. APA All Points Addressable. API Application Program Interface. ATA See AT Attachment. application program A program that performs specific tasks on your computer, such as word processing or creating spreadsheets. application server A network node that provides application program services to other nodes on the network. In client/server computing, applications are divided between the application server and one or more client machines. Typically the computer-, disk-, and memory-intensive portions of the application run on the server, and the user interface and other local processing portions run on the user personal computers. asynchronous (ASYNC) (1) Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals. (2) Without regular time relationship; unexpected or unpredictable with respect to the execution of program instructions. asynchronous communication A method of communication supported by the operating system that allows an exhange of data with a remote device, using either a start-stop line or an X.25 line. Asynchronous communication includes the file transfer support and the interactive terminal facility support.

298


asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. ATM is specified in international standards such as ATM Forum UNI 3.1 AUTOEXEC.BAT file In the DOS operating system, a batch file that resides in the root directory of the boot drive and contains commands that DOS executes whenever a DOS window is created. AutoSync In modems compatible with the Hayes AutoSync modem, a communication mode in which the modem provides synchronous communication with the remote data terminal equipment (DTE) while it is connected to an asynchronous port of the local DTE. Archie A software tool for finding files stored on anonymous FTP servers. FTP sites are regularly indexed by title and keyword, and Archie searches these indexes for files based on your search criteria. ARDIS A nationwide packet-radio network providing two-way data communications. It provides host connectivity, connectivity to third-party information services, and e-mail and messaging services. Arithmetic and Logic Unit (ALU) A part of a computer that performs arithmetic, logic, and related operations. arbitration A method by which multiple devices attached to a single bus can bid to get control of that bus. architecture (1) The logical structure and functional characteristics of a computer, including the interrelationships among its hardware and software components. (2) The organizational structure of a computer system, including hardware and software. ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. The standard code, using a coded character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8-bit including parity check), used for information interchange among data processing systems, data communication systems, and associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphic characters. IBM has defined an extension to ASCII code (characters 128–255). asynchronous A mode of data transfer across the SCSI bus in which each byte of data transferred must be acknowledged as received by the target before the next byte can be sent. ATA PC Card A storage device PC Card that has AT bus interface, such as hard disks and flash memories. AT Attachment ATA defines a compatible register set and a 40-pin connector and its associated signals.

Glossary

299

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A fast, cell-switched technology based on a fixed-length 53-byte cell. All broadband transmissions are divided into a series of cells and routed across an ATM network consisting of links connected by ATM switches. Each ATM link comprises a constant stream of ATM cell slots into which transmissions are placed or left idle, if unused. audio adapter An audio board that receives input from a microphone or input line, digitizes the signal, and stores it in the computer. The adapter can play back the digitized signal to an external speaker, headphone, or line output. automatic defect reallocation Identifies and remaps defective sectors in real time. AutoSpeed The adapter automatically determines and sets the correct token-ring speed. auxiliary storage Addressable storage, other than memory, that can be accessed by means of an input/output channel—for example, direct access storage devices or magnetic tape. AVI Audio/Video Interlaced A video format that interleaves alternating video and audio data. The format is easily compressed and decompressed. backbone network A central network to which smaller networks, normally of lower speed, connect. The backbone network usually has a much higher capacity than the networks it helps interconnect or is a wide-area network (WAN) such as a public packetswitched datagram network. bandwidth (1) The difference, expressed in hertz, between the highest and the lowest frequencies of a range of frequencies.(2) In asynchronous transfer mode (ATM), the capacity of a virtual channel, expressed in terms of peak cell rate (PCR), sustainable cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). (3) A measure of the capacity of a communication transport medium (such as a TV cable) to convey data. base station The controller for a wireless cell, often serving as an access point to a fixed (wired) network and relaying traffic among the members of the cell. Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Code that controls basic hardware operations, such as interactions with diskette drives, hard disk drives, and the keyboard. batch (1) An accumulation of data to be processed. (2) A group of records or data processing jobs brought together for processing

300


or transmission. (3) Pertaining to activity involving little or no user action. Contrast with interactive. baud rate A number representing the speed at which information travels over a communication line. The higher the number, the faster communication occurs. bay An area within a personal computer that provides space and physical support for storage devices. bay number A number assigned to a server device bay when installing a fixed disk drive or other peripheral in the bay. You use bay numbers to help keep track of drives when multiple drives are present and you need to add, replace, remove, or move a drive. bps bits per second In serial transmission, the instantaneous bit speed with which a device or channel transmits a character. binary Pertaining to a system of numbers to the base 2; binary digits are 0 and 1. binary synchronous communication (BSC) (1) A form of telecommunication line control that uses a standard set of transmission control characters and control character sequences, for binary synchronous transmission of binary-coded data between stations. (2) Contrast with Synchronous Data Link Control. BIOS Basic Input/Output System. In all IBM personal computers, code that controls basic hardware operations such as interactions with diskette drives, fixed disk drives, and the keyboard. bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numeration system. bitmap A rectangular array of data that describes an image on a screen. Each array location carries information on screen attributes, for example color, intensity, pixel location, etc. Many bitmaps carry more information than is actually displayed. block A string of data elements recorded or transmitted in a unit. The elements may be characters, words, or physical records. Boolean (1) Pertaining to the processes used in the algebra formulated by George Boole. (2) A value of 0 or 1 represented internally in binary notation. boot To prepare a computer system for operation by loading an operating system. bottleneck A hardware or software component that can limit the performance of a device, a subsystem (such as an adapter), or a network. For example, if an adapter has hardware that can forward 14 000 packets per second, and software that can process

Glossary

301

4000 packets per second, the packet throughput is limited to 4000 packets per second; and the software is the bottleneck. branch prediction Pipelined machines must fetch the next instruction before they have completely executed the previous instruction. If the previous instruction was a branch, then the next-instruction fetch could have been from the wrong place. Branch prediction is a technique that attempts to infer the proper next instruction address, knowing only the current one, typically using an associative memory called a BTB. branch recovery When a branch is mispredicted, the speculative state of the machine must be flushed and fetching restarted from the correct target address. BRI The Basic Rate Interface in ISDN. A single ISDN circuit divided into two 64 Kbps digital channels for voice or data and one 16 Kbps channel for low-speed data (up to 9,600 baud) and signaling. bridge (1) A functional unit that interconnects two local area networks that use the same logical link control protocol but may use different medium access control protocols. (2) A functional unit that interconnects multiple LANs (locally or remotely) that use the same logical link control protocol but that can use different medium access control protocols. A bridge forwards a frame to another bridge based on the medium access control (MAC) address. (3) In the connection of local loops, channels, or rings, the equipment and techniques used to match circuits and to facilitate accurate data transmission. (4) Contrast with gateway and router. browser A program that interprets and displays HTML documents. BTB Branch Target Buffer A small (typically 128–512-entry) associative memory that watches the ICache index and tries to predict which ICache index should be accessed next, based on branch history. Optimizing the actual algorithm used in retaining the history of each entry is an area of ongoing research. The Pentium Pro uses a variant of Yeh’s algorithm (IEEE Micro-24 conference proceedings, 1991.) buffer (1) A routine or storage used to compensate for differences in rates of data flow or time of occurrence of events when transferring data from one device to another. (2) A portion of storage used to hold input or output data temporarily. bus (1) In a processor, a physical facility on which data is transferred to all destinations but from which only addressed destinations may

302


read in accordance with appropriate conventions. (2) One or more signal conductors used for transmitting signals or power. bus master An intelligent device that, when attached to a PCI, Micro Channel, or EISA bus can bid for and gain control of the bus to perform its specific task. bus mastering The ability of a device to take control of a computer bus while transferring information to another device on the same bus. Bus mastering eliminates the need for a third element in the system (such as a processor module) to perform the data transfer. byte A string that consists of a particular number of bits, usually 8, that is treated as a unit, and that represents a character. cable The physical medium for transmitting signals; it includes copper conductors and optical fibers. cache A high-speed storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is used to reduce access time. cache memory A special memory, smaller and faster than main memory, that is used to hold a copy of instructions and data in main memory that are likely to be needed next by the processor and that have been obtained automatically from main memory. CADAM Computer-Aided Design and Manufacturing. The use of computers in the design and manufacture of products such as cars, airplanes, ships, and computers. CAMC Common Access Method Committee. Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) A vacuum tube in which a beam of electrons can be moved to draw lines, characters, or symbols on its luminescent screen. CCS The SCSI Common Command Set. A set of SCSI commands specified in the ANSI standard that all SCSI devices must be able to use in order to be fully compatible with the ANSI standard. CD Compact Disk. CD-I Compact Disk–Interactive. CDPD Cellular Digital Packet Data. An overlay network providing packet data transmission over and analog cellular (AMPS) infrastructure. Data is transmitted between conversations or through unused voice channels. CD-ROM Compact Disk–Read Only Memory is a laser disk that you can only read data from. Data cannot be written to a CD-ROM. CD-ROM XA Compact Disk–Read Only Memory extended architecture.

Glossary

303

CE Customer Engineer. cell The geographic unit forming the basis of a cellular system. Cells vary greatly in size, from a few meters for some wireless LANs to hundreds of kilometers for some satellite systems. Use of smaller cells can increase system capacity roughly proportionately to the square of the cell routes. Central Processing Unit (CPU) (1) The section of the microprocessor where arithmetic and logical operations are performed and instructions are decoded and executed. (2) The functional unit that controls the operation of the computer. chip set An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits that provide hardware support for a related set of functions, such as the generation of video. chrominance The color dimension of a video signal. CID Configuration, Installation, and Distribution products deal with IBM’s software distribution strategy as it relates to LANs. circuit (1) A logic device. (2) One or more conductors through which an electric current can flow. click To press and release the click button once on the TrackPoint III or mouse without moving the pointer off the choice. client The personal computer associated with an individual user. In client/server computing, the client performs user-interface and local processing application tasks in conjunction with one or more servers, which perform the computation-, memory-, disk-, and I/O-intensive portions of applications. client/server computing A computing model that divides applications between clients and servers. Clients are personal computers whose role is to run the user interface and perform some local processing; servers are used to run the computation-, memory-, disk-, and I/O-intensive portions of the application. Servers also allow centralized data management and administration. clock A device that generates periodic, accurately spaced signals used for purposes such as timing, regulation of the operations of a processor, or generation of interrupts. clock cycle For a microprocessor, the amount of time that the microprocessor takes to perform at a given clock speed. Clock cycles are measured in nanoseconds (ns). clock speed For a microprocessor, the operating speed of the microprocessor. Clock speed is typically measured in megahertz (MHz).

304


cluster (1) A station that consists of a control unit (a cluster controller) and the terminals attached to it. (2) A group of APPN nodes that have the same network ID and the same topology database. A cluster is a subset of a NETID subnetwork. (3) In high-availability cluster multiprocessing (HACMP), a set of independent systems (called nodes) that are organized into a network for the purpose of sharing resources and communicating with each other. CMOS A nonvolatile, battery-backed area of system memory that holds a description of the current system configuration. Each processor module contains a CMOS chip. code A collection of instructions that are in a form that can be read and processed by a computer. code page An assignment of graphic characters and control function meanings to all code points; for example, assignment of characters and meanings to 256 code points for an 8-bit code, assignment of characters and meanings to 128 code points for a 7-bit code. color map (1) A lookup table in which each index is associated with a red, green, and blue value. (2) A set of color cells. A pixel value indexes the color map to produce RGB-intensities. A color map consists of a set of entries defining color values that, when associated with a window, is used to display the contents of the window. (3) A lookup table that translates color indexes into RGB triplets. combination key Keys that have specific functions when you hold them down at the same time. Communication Control Program (CCP) A portion of the network control program communication interrupt control program (CICP) that initiates and ends I/O line operations, handles first-level line error recovery and recording, and administers commands issues by background programs. Compact Disc (CD) (1) A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by means of a laser. (2) A disc with information stored in the form of pits along a spiral track. The information is decoded by a compact-disc player and interpreted as digital audio data, which most computers can process. compatibility The capability of a hardware or software component to conform to the interface requirements of a given computer without adversely affecting its functions. composite video A video format in which chrominance and luminance are mixed together into one signal. See S-Video.

Glossary

305

compositing A process in which a video is superimposed over another video and compiled into a single video file. Also called “superimposition” or “overlay.” computer architecture (1) The logical structure and functional characteristics of a computer, including the interrelationships among its hardware and software components. (2) The organizational structure of a computer system, including hardware and software. computer security (1) Concepts, techniques, technical measures, and administrative measures used to protect the hardware, software, and data of an information processing system from deliberate or inadvertent unauthorized acquisition, damage, destruction, disclosure, manipulation, modification, use, or loss. (2) Protection resulting from the application of computer security. Config.sys A file that contains a group of commands to load installable device drivers and reserve space in system memory for information processing. This file is referred to by DOS during system startup. configuration (1) The manner in which the hardware and software of an information processing system are organized and interconnected. (2) The physical and logical arrangement of devices and programs that make up a data processing system. (3) The devices and programs that make up a system, subsystem, or network. configure To set up a computer for operation by describing to the system the devices, optional features, and programs installed in the computer. connector An electrical part used to join two or more other electrical parts. console (system) The system console consists of keyboard, monitor, and mouse. The console is optional for daily operation, but is required for system installation and reconfiguration, and for operation with the server recovery level set at “Stop on all errors.” control The determination of the time and order in which the parts of a computer and the devices that contain those parts perform the input, processing, storage, and output functions. controller A device that coordinates and controls the operation of one or more input/output devices, such as workstations, and synchronizes the operation of such devices with the operation of the system as a whole. coprocessor A microprocessor on an expansion board that extends the address range of the main processor or adds specialized instructions to handle a particular category of operations.

306


CPU Central processor unit. CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check. CRT Cathode Ray Tube display. CSD Corrective Service Diskette. A diskette provided by IBM to registered service coordinators for resolving user-identified problems. This diskette includes program updates designed to resolve problems. CSMA/CA Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance. A network protocol in which the transmitting workstations resend the data if the receiving workstations does not confirm receipt of the data within a given period of time. CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection. A network protocol in which the transmitting workstation detects data collision and waits a random length of time before retrying the transmission. CUA Common User Access, guidelines for the dialogue between a human and a workstation or terminal. cycle (1) An interval of space or time in which one set of events or phenomena is completed. (2) A complete vibration, electric oscillation, or alternation of current. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) A numeric value derived from the bits in a message that is used to check for any bit errors in transmission. cylinder (1) The fixed disk or diskette tracks that can be read or written without moving the disk or diskette drive read and write mechanism. (2) The number of tracks for space allocation. DAS Dual-Attaching Station. FDDI configuration. Dual-attaching stations can attach to both the primary and secondary rings of FDDI. DASD Direct Access Storage Device. daisy chain A method of device interconnection for determining interrupt priority by connecting the interrupt sources serially. data (1) A reinterpretable representation of information in a formalized manner suitable for communication, interpretation, or processing. (2) Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned. data bus A bus used to communicate data internally and externally to and from a processing unit, storage, and a peripheral devices. DC Direct Current. decibel (dB) A unit that expresses the intensity of a sound.

Glossary

307

default Pertaining to an attribute, condition, value, or option that is assumed when none is explicitly specified. defunct Nonrecoverable; failed. This term is primarily used in association with the functional status of disk drives. device An input/output (I/O) unit such as a terminal, display, or printer. device driver A file that contains the code needed to attach and use a device. device label copying When two devices attached to the SCSI bus perform data transfers between each other across the SCSI bus without using the attachment feature. diagnostic Pertaining to the detection and isolation of errors in programs and faults in equipment. diagnostic program A computer program that is designed to detect, locate, and describe faults in equipment or errors in computer programs. digital (1) Pertaining to data in the form of digits. (2) Contrast with “analog.” digital data Data represented by digits, perhaps with special characters and the space character. DIMM Dual In-line Memory Module. A small circuit board with memory-integrated circuits containing signal and power pins on both sides of the board. DIP switch A two-position switch on a circuit board that is present to control certain functions; the user can change the position of a DIP switch to satisfy special requirements. Direct Memory Access (DMA) A method used to transfer data directly from a device to system memory without using the main system processor. directory A list of files that are stored on a disk or diskette. A directory also contains information about the files, such as size and date of last change. disconnect When a device has received a command and disconnects from a SCSI bus, it enables another device to use the SCSI bus while it processes its command. disk array (1) A grouping of hard disks that can be logically considered one drive. (2) A grouping of hard disks over which the data file is spread. disk duplexing See duplexing. disk mirroring See mirroring.

308


disk swapping A form of memory management whereby if additional memory is needed for the active programs, the operating system transfers the least used information from memory to the hard disk to make more memory available. When the transferred information is needed, it is exchanged with other information in memory. diskette A thin, flexible magnetic disk and a semirigid protective jacket, in which the disk is permanently enclosed. diskette drive The mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes. Display Data Channel (DDC) An industry standard for passing monitor configuration information between a monitor and the attached personal computer. Plug and Play technology is used to provide automatic performance optimization for the monitor. A DDC-enabled computer can interpret configuration information from a DDC-enabled monitor and then set the display mode that best uses the capabilities of the monitor. Display Power Management Signaling (DPMS) A monitor feature that makes it possible for the attached personal computer to safely lower and manage the power consumption level of the monitor, based on defined modes of inactivity of the keyboard and mouse. The power level can be progressively lowered each time the monitor is placed into the next mode—from On, to Standby, to Suspend, to Off. To take advantage of this feature, the monitor must be used with a computer and operating system that are hardware and software enabled for DPMS. If the monitor is attached to a video adapter, the adapter must also be DPMS enabled. DMA See Direct Memory Access. DMA slave A device on an I/O bus that uses the system-provided direct memory access (DMA) facilities instead of having a built-in controller. See also bus master. DNS Domain Name System. A scheme for translating numeric Internet addresses into strings of word segments denoting user names and locations, such as [email protected] DOS Disk Operating System. A program that controls the operation of an IBM personal computer and the execution of application programs. double-click To rapidly press and release the click button twice on the TrackPoint III, on a mouse, or in a graphical window menu. drag To point at an object, press and hold the appropriate mouse or the TrackPoint III click button, and then move the mouse or the

Glossary

309

pointing stick of the TrackPoint III to relocate the object. DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. DSP Digital Signal Processor. dual processing A process in which a personal computer uses the resources of two microprocessors, instead of one, to share the processing tasks. This architecture provides the capability of faster processing speed and faster throughput to input/output devices. Most operating systems that support dual processing use symmetric multiprocessing. duplexing The use of a duplicate drive on a separate controller to increase reliability. All information is written to both drives, so that if either driver fails, the information is still available on the other. EC (1) Engineering Change. (2) European Community. ECC (Error Checking and Correction) A memory subsystem design that automatically corrects single-bit memory errors and detects multiple-bit memory errors, providing greater system reliability. Edit Decision List (edl) A list of video-editing instructions, sometimes generated by video-editing software. It includes time-code stamps, duration, trim marks, sequencing, and transition-effects information, and it can be read by high-end, analog-based video-editing equipment. EIA Electronic Industries Association. EIA-232D An EIA interface standard that defines the physical, electronic, and functional characteristics of an interface line that connects a communication device and associated workstation. It uses a 25-pin connector and an unbalanced line voltage. EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture. Extends the ISA to 32 bits and provides busmastering. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) EPROM that can be reprogrammed while it is in the computer. EMS Expanded Memory Specification. EOI End of Interrupt. EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Programmable read only memory that is read only in normal use but can be erased by a special technique and then reprogrammed. ESD ElectroStatic Discharge. ESDI Enhanced Small Device Interface. Ethernet A 10- or 100-megabit baseband local area network that allows multiple stations to access the transmission medium at will without prior coordination, avoids contention by using carrier

310


sense and deference, and resolves contention by using collision detection and transmission. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD). EU European Union. expansion bus An I/O bus, such as PCI, Micro Channel, EISA, or ISA, that has connectors for attaching adapters to the bus. expansion slot In personal computer systems, one of several receptacles in the rear panel of the system unit into which a user can install an adapter. Fast Ethernet Emerging standards for Ethernet at 100 Mbps. fault tolerance A term used to describe computer systems that have no single points of failure and that can therefore survive any single failure without an interruption of operations. Also see high availability. FDD Floppy Disk Drive. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) A board of commissioners appointed by the President under the Communications Act of 1934, having the power to regulate all interstate and foreign communications by wire and radio originating in the United States. file A named set of records stored or processed as a unit. file server A network node that provides file services to other nodes on the network. In response to a request from another node, a file server transfers to that node the complete contents of a file. Firewall A security barrier, consisting of one or more routers capable of accepting, rejecting, or editing transmitted information, placed between an organization’s internal network and a connection to the Internet. First In/First Out (FIFO) A queuing technique in which the next item to be retrieved is the item that has been in the queue the longest time. fixed disk A flat, circular, nonremoveable plate with a surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording. flash memory A rewriteable storage that is used to contain BIOS instructions and POST routines. floppy disk Synonym for “diskette.” folder A file used to store and organize documents. format To prepare a hard disk or diskette to hold information. flush The process of sending through the networks all remaining buffered data generated by a transaction program. FMT Format.

Glossary

311

frame (1) A data structure that consists of fields, predetermined by a protocol, for the transmission of user data and control data. The composition of a frame, especially the number and types of fields, may vary according to the type of protocol. (2) In multimedia applications, a complete television picture that is composed of two scanned fields, one of the even lines and one of the odd lines. In the NTSC system, a frame has 525 lines and is scanned every 1/30 frame. frames The series of pictures that form moving images on film or video. frequency The rate of signal oscillation, expressed in Hertz (cycle per second). FRU Field Replaceable Unit. FTP File Transfer Protocol. The protocol that defines the transfer of files between a host and a remote station on an internet protocol (IP)-based network. fuel gauge An indicator on the screen that constantly shows the current power status of battery pack. Full Duplex Full-duplex-enabled adapters allow stations to transmit and receive at the same time, doubling their bandwidth potential. gateway A functional unit that interconnects two computer network architectures. A gateway connects networks or systems of different architectures. A bridge interconnects networks or systems with the same or similar architectures. GB Gigabyte. One billion bytes. Gopher A simple TCP/IP tool that allows you to organize and display information within a hierarchical menu system. granularity The extent to which a larger entity is subdivided. GUI Graphical User Interface. hard disk (1) A rigid magnetic disk such as the internal disks used in the system unit of personal computers and in external hard disk drives. Synonymous with “fixed disk” and “nonremoveable disk.” (2) A rigid disk used in a hard disk drive. hardware (1) All or part of the physical components of an information processing system, such as computers or peripheral devices. (2) The equipment, as opposed to the programming, of a computer. (3) Contrast with “software.” HDP Hard Disk Password. hertz (Hz) A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.

312


hexadecimal Pertaining to a system of numbers to the base 16; hexadecimal digits range from 0 through 9 and A through F, where A represents 10 and F represents 15. HHR Half-Horizontal Resolution (used with MPEG). hibernation One of the power-saving methods that stores data and applications running in computer’s memory on the hard disk, then automatically turns the computer off to save power. When power is turned on, the computer immediately restores the data and applications in use when hibernation started without restarting the operating system. high availability Computer-systems design philosophy that focuses on maximizing system up-time at a reasonable cost. High-Performance File System (HPFS) An installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes. The file system also supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single personal computer, with a capability of multiple and different storage devices. File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters. high-resolution mode Video resolutions that are greater than 640 by 480 pels. home page Like http://www.ibm.cpm, this is the default document World Wide Web users see when connecting to a Web server for the first time. Hot-Spare Drive (HSP) A hard disk drive that is installed in a computer and configured by the system for use in the event of a drive failure. H-Sync Horizontal Synchronization. HSP Hot-Spare Drive. HTML (HyperText Markup Language) A coding language used to create hypertext documents for use on the World Wide Web. HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol. A protocol for moving hypertext files across the Internet. Requires an HTTP client program on one end and an HTTP server program on the other. HTTP is the most important protocol used by the World Wide Web. hub A physical-layer device for the concentration of wiring media for either homogeneous or heterogeneous LAN types. hypertext Any document that contains links to other documents; selecting a link automatically displays the second document. IC DRAM card An Integrated Circuit (IC) Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) card, designed for small computers such as notebook computers.

Glossary

313

icon A graphic symbol, displayed on a screen, that a user can point to with a device such as a mouse to select a particular function or software application. IDE Integrated Disk Electronics. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. infrared Thermal radiation with wavelengths longer than that of visible light. It can be modulated to transmit data. It is used as either a point-to-point beam or as a diffused beam. infrared port On personal computers, a port used for wireless communication with other infrared-capable devices. Data is transmitted through invisible rays. initialize (1) To set counters, switches, addresses, or contents to zero or other starting values at the beginning of, or at prescribed points in, the operating of a computer routine. (2) To prepare for use; for example, to initialize a hard disk or diskette. Initial Machine Load (IML) For PS/2 computers, the action of loading POST and BIOS code from a hard disk or network server into memory. Initial Program Load (IPL) (1) The initialization procedure that causes an operating system to commence operation. (2) The process by which a configuration image is loaded into storage at the beginning of a work day or after a system malfunction. initiator A device attached to the SCSI bus that sends a command to another device on the SCSI bus. The device that receives that command is a target. input/output Pertaining to a device, process, or channel involved in data input, data output, or both. input/output device A device in a data processing system by means of which data can be entered into the system, received from the system, or both. instruction A statement that specifies an operation to be performed by a system and that identifies data involved in the operation. instruction set The set of instructions of a computer, of a programming language, or of the programming languages in a programming system. interface A shared boundary between two or more entities. An interface may be a hardware component to link two devices or a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs. interleave To arrange parts of one sequence of things or events so that they alternate with parts of one or more other sequences of

314


the same nature and so that each sequence retains its identity. interleave depth The granularity at which data from one file is stored on one drive of the array before it is stored on the next drive in the array. interleaving The simultaneous accessing of two or more bytes or streams of data from distinct storage units. International Standards Organization (ISO) An organization of national standards bodies from various countries established to promote the development of standards to facilitate international exchange of goods and services, and develop cooperation in intellectual, scientific, technological, and economic activity. Internet server A computer that offers applications and information to Internet users. Examples are FTP, Gopher, News, and Web servers. interrupt An instruction that directs the microprocessor to suspend whatever it is doing and run a specified routine. When the routine is complete, the microprocessor resumes its original work. IRQ interrupt request. in/out markers Notations that are placed on digital video and audio files to denote where they begin and end. I/O Input/Output. IP Internet Protocol; the portion of the TCP/IP standard that routes messages from one Internet node to another IP/IPX Internet Gateway A software or hardware package that translates IP packets into IPX packets and vice versa. It allows a NetWare LAN to access the Internet. IPX Internet Packet eXchange. The communications protocol for NetWare that routes messages form one node to another. IR Infrared. ISA Industry-Standard Architecture. ISA bus A 16-bit data bus over which data can be transferred at a rate of up to 8.33 MB per second. ISDN Integrated Systems Digital Network. International telecommunications standard for transmitting voice, video, and data over a single digital line. It uses 64 Kbps circuit-switched B (Bearer) channels to carry voice and data and uses a separate D (Data) channel to carry control signals via a packet-switched network. ISO International Organization for Standardization. ITSO International Technical Support Organization.

Glossary

315

jack A connecting device to which a wire or wires of a circuit can be attached and that is arranged for insertion of a plug. JEDEC Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council. JEIDA Japan Electronic Industry Development Association. jumper A connector between two pins on a circuit board that enables or disables an option, feature, or parameter. key A process whereby portions of a video are made transparent in order for an underlying video to show through. kilobit (Kb) One thousand binary digits. kilobyte (KB) 1,024 bytes for processor and data storage (memory) size; otherwise, 1,000 bytes. kHz kilohertz. L2 cache Caches exist in a “memory hierarchy.” There is a small but very fast L1 cache; if that misses, then the access is passed on to the bigger but slower L2 cache, and if that misses, the access goes to main memory (or L3 cache if the system has one). LAN Local Area Network. (1) A computer network located on a user’s premises within a limited geographical area. Communication within a local area network is not subject to external regulations; however, communication across the LAN boundary may be subject to some form of regulation. (2) A network in which a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and that can be connected to a larger network. LAN Server HPFS High-Performance File System. The 32-bit high-speed file system provided with IBM LAN Server Version 2.0 and above. LAPS LAN Adapter and Protocol Support. laser Light amplification by simulated emission of radiation. The CD-ROM drive contains a low-power laser for reading information stored on a compact disk. latency The time the disk waits for correct sector to spin under the disk head. leased line A telephone line rented for dedicated access to the Internet. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. LED Light Emitting Diode. legacy device A device that is not Plug and Play (automatic configuring) compatible. A legacy device must be manually configured by setting its switches or jumpers, and then manually assigned computer resources using the computer configuration/ setup utility program. Contrast with “Plug and Play device.”

316


link In hypertext documents, the connection from one document to another. load To bring all or part of a computer program into memory from auxiliary storage so that the computer can run the program. logical (1) Pertaining to content or meaning as opposed to location or actual implementation. (2) Pertaining to a view or description of data that does not depend on the characteristics of the computer system or the physical storage. (3) Contrast with “physical.” logical block address This term defines the addressing mode of the drive as being by the linear mapping of sectors from 2 to n. logical unit A device attached to a SCSI device. An LU is not directly attached to the SCSI bus. Logical Unit Number (LUN) A number given to a device that is attached to a SCSI bus. The device is known as a logical unit. look-ahead buffer A buffer that reads additional data ahead of the data currently requested and stores that data in fast buffer memory. low-level format A type of disk formatting that erases all readable information from a hard disk by writing zeros on all data sections of the disk to ensure that no readable information is left on the disk. Low-level formatting requires a low-level format program, which is available from a number of manufacturers. LSP LAN Support Program. LU Logical Unit. luminance The brightness of a video sign. magneto-resistive Describing heads that allow greater area density and contain a chip that is sensitive to magnetic fluctuations, which gives more precision in writing and reading data without making the head fly closer to the platter. math coprocessor In personal computer systems, a microprocessor that supplements the operation of the system microprocessor, enabling the computer to perform complex mathematical operations in parallel with other operations. MCI Media Control Interface. megabit 1,048,576 bits (1 million bits). megabyte (MB) 1,048,576 bytes (1 million bytes). megahertz (MHz) A unit of measure of frequency equal to 1 million cycles per second. memory Addressable storage space in the computer that is used for temporary storage of instructions and data while a program is running or for permanent storage of microcode. Memory is often

Glossary

317

referred to as Random Access Memory (RAM), measured in kilobytes (KB) or megabytes (MB) of information. menu A list of choices that gives users access to actions that can be applied to an object. Micro Channel Architecture A 32-bit I/O system introduced by IBM for use in its PS/2 family of personal computers. Micro Channel incorporates better performance and reliability than the AT bus standard. microchip A small piece of semiconductive material, usually silicon, that contains miniaturized electronic circuits. microcode One or more microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to hard-wired circuity to implement functions of a processor or other system component. microcomputer (1) A digital computer whose processing unit consists of one or more microprocessors and includes storage and input/output facilities. (2) A small computer that includes one or more input/output units and sufficient memory to execute instructions—for example, a personal computer. The essential components of a microcomputer are often contained within a large enclosure. microprocessor A microchip containing integrated circuits that executes instructions. MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. millimeter (mm) One thousandth of a meter. millisecond (ms) One thousandth of a second. MIPS Millions of Instructions Per Second. Unit of measure of processing performance equal to 1 million instructions per second. mirroring The use of a duplicate drive connected to the same controller to increase reliability. All information is written to both drives so that if either disk fails, the information is still available on the other. modem A device that connects your computer to a telephone line, allowing it to communicate with another computer at another location. mosaic A graphical browser for the World Wide Web that supports multimedia. Mosaic is often used, incorrectly, as a synonym for the World Wide Web. mouse A device that a user moves on a flat surface to position a pointer on the screen. It allows a user to select a choice or function to be performed, or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or drawing lines from one position to another.

318


MPC Multimedia personal computer. MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group. A high-quality video compression scheme that allows for full-screen, full-motion video capture and playback. It currently requires both hardware encoding and decoding. MTBF Mean Time Between Failures. multimedia Material presented in a combination of text, graphics, video, animation, and sound. multiplexing In data transmission, a function that permits two or more data sources to share a common transmission medium so that each data source has its own channel. multitasking A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance, or interleaved execution of two or more tasks. nanosecond (ns) One thousandth of one millionth (10-9) of a second. NCSC National Computer Security Center. NDIS Network Driver Interface Specification. Microsoft specification for hardware-independent drivers at the data link (media access control) layer. When transport protocols are written to NDIS, network adapters with NDIS compliant MAC drivers can be freely interchanged. NetBIOS Commonly used network protocol for PC local area networks, introduced with IBM’s PC Network and implemented in Microsoft’s LAN Manager. Application programs access NetBIOS to transfer files and provide client/server interaction. network (1) An arrangement of nodes and connecting branches. (2) A configuration of data processing devices and software connected for information interchange. network adapter An expansion adapter that connects the server to a network. network administrator The person responsible for the installation, management, and control of a network. The network administrator gives authorization to users for accessing shared resources and determines the type of access those users can have. NiCad Nickel-cadmium. NiMH Nickel metal hydride. NMI NonMaskable Interrupt. nonvolatile (1) Pertaining to a storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off. (2) Contrast with “volatile.”

Glossary

319

NonVolatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) Random access memory that retains its contents after electrical power is shut off via a battery. NOS Network Operating System. ns nanosecond. NTSC National Television Standards Committee and its signal specification, which is the transmission standard for North America. NTSC format The specifications for color television as defined by the NTSC, which include (a) 525 scan lines, (b) broadcast bandwidth of 4 MHz, (c) line frequency of 15.75 KHz, (d) frame frequency of 30 frames per second, and (e) color subcarrier frequency of 3.58 MHz. ODI Open Data-Link Interface. Common interface for network drivers developed by Novell. It allows multiple transport protocols to run on one network adapter. OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer. OFL Off-line. ONL On-line. Operating System (OS) Software that controls the execution of programs and that may provide services such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output control, and data management. overlap To perform an operation at the same time as another operation is being performed; for example, to perform input/output operations while instructions are being executed by the processing unit. PA Problem Analysis. Packet Radio The application of packet technology to radio links. This allows sharing channels between multiple users, which is more cost-effective for many data applications. PAL Phase Alternation Line. PAL format Phase Alternation Line format. The standard for color television in European countries except France and Russia. See NTSC format. parallel Pertaining to a process in which all events occur within the same interval of time, each handled by a separate but similar functional unit. Parallel Disk Array (PDA) A collection of fixed disk drives treated by the operating system as a single drive.

320


parallel port A port used to attach such devices as dot-matrix printers and input/output units; it transmits data 1 byte at a time. parity The state of being odd or even. Used as the basis of a method of detecting errors in binary-coded data. parity bit A binary digit appended to a group of binary digits to make the sum of all the digits, including the appended binary digit, either odd or even as previously established. parity check A redundancy check by which a recalculated parity bit is compared with the pregiven parity bit. Partial Suspend mode A kind of suspend mode in which only a part of the system components uses power. partition One of possible storage areas of variable size; one may be accessed by DOS, and each of the others may be assigned to another operation system. password A series of letters or numbers that you designate to restrict access to your computer. PC Personal computer. PC Card Credit-card-size PCMCIA cards that support PCMCIA standard. PCIC PC Card Interface Controller. PCMCIA Personal computer Memory Card International Association. PDA See Parallel Disk Array. PD/CD-ROM drive A dual-function mechanism used to read and write information on PD cartridges and read information on CD-ROMs. A PD/CD-ROM drive can be installed internally or externally. PD cartridge A rewritable, high-capacity optical disk enclosed in a protective case. A PD cartridge is suitable for storing space-consuming files, such as graphics, multimedia, or backup system files. It is used with the PD/CD-ROM drive of a personal computer. pel Picture element for a monitor. Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) The local bus developed by Intel as a high-end alternative to VL bus. peripheral device Any device that can communicate with a particular computer; for example, input/output units or auxiliary storage. physical (1) Pertaining to actual implementation or location as opposed to conceptual content or meaning. (2) Contrast with “logical.” Physical Unit Number (PUN) A term used to describe a device attached directly to the SCSI bus. Also known as a SCSI device or SCSI ID.

Glossary

321

picture element In computer graphics, the smallest element of a display surface that can be independently assigned color and intensity. pin One of the conducting contacts of an electrical connector. PING Packet InterNet Gopher; a tool that sends packets of information to a computer on a network. It can determine whether a given Internet address is on-line. PIO See Programmed Input/Output. pipelining A microarchitecture design technique that divides the execution of an instruction into sequential steps, using different microarchitectural resources at each step. Pipelined machines have multiple integer ALU instructions executing at the same time, but at different stages in the machine. pit In optical recording, a microscopic hole in the information layer of a videodisk surface made by the recording laser beam. Recorded information is contained in the pits. pixel Picture element for a monitor. planar Also known as motherboard. The largest electronic board in a computer, which connects the various subsystems together. plotter An output unit that directly produces a hardcopy record of data on a removable medium in the form of a two-dimensional graphic representation. Plug and Play Hardware and software that dynamically configure resources and eliminate user intervention during the installation process. pointing device An instrument, such as a mouse, TrackPoint III, or joystick, that is used to move a pointer on the screen. popup menu On the display screen, a menu that emerges in an upward direction from a particular point or line on a display screen. port An access point for data entry or exit. POS Programmable Option Select. POST See Power-On Self-Test. Power-On Self-Test (POST) (1) A series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically each time the computer’s power is turned on. (2) A series of diagnostic tests that the server runs at startup, testing all subsystems in turn. Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) Monitors key device parameters to determine if specifications are exceeded or changed excessively. Helps in early warning of imminent failure so that reliable performance is obtained. Utilized by hard disks while diagnostics is running the data diagnostics check.

322


Presentation Manager The graphical user interface contained in the IBM OS/2 operating system. PRI Primary Rate Interface in ISDN. In North America, it includes 23 B channels and one 64 Kbps D channel (23B+D), equivalent to T1. In Europe, it includes 30 B channels and one 64 Kbps D channel (30B+D), equivalent to European E1 service. priority (1) A rank assigned to a task that determines its precedence in receiving system resources. (2) The significance of one job relative to other jobs in competing for allocation of resources. processing The performance of logical operations and calculations on data, including temporary retention of data in microprocessor storage while the data is being handled. processor In a computer, a functional unit that interprets and executes instructions. program (1) A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and execute. (2) To design, write, modify, and test computer programs. Programmed Input/Output (PIO) A means of data transfer that requires the use of the host processor. PROM Programmable Read Only Memory, which can have the data content of each storage cell altered only once. prompt A visual or audible message sent by a program to request the user’s response. PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. A virtual circuit that provides the equivalent of a dedicated private-line service over a packetswitching network between two DTEs. pull-down menu On the display screen, a menu that emerges in a downward direction from a point or line at or near the top of the screen. RAID Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks or Redundant Array of Independent Disks. Random Access Memory (RAM) A computer’s or adapter’s volatile storage memory area, into which data may be entered or retrieved from in a nonsequential manner. RAM Mobile Data Natural two-way packet-radio network using the Mobitex architecture. RAM Mobile Data provides host connectivity, connectivity to third-party information services, and broad e-mail connectivity. RAS Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability. RCA Radio Corporation of America.

Glossary

323

read To acquire or interpret data from a storage device, from a data medium, or from another source. read only A type of access to data that allows it to be read but not copied, printed, or modified. Read Only Memory (ROM) A computer’s or adapter’s storage area whose contents cannot be modified by the user except under special circumstances. reboot To restart all operations of the computer as if the power were just turned on. RDY Ready. reconnect When a device has finished processing a command, it arbitrates for the SCSI bus in order to reconnect to it and perform its data transfer. record (1) A set of data treated as a unit. (2) A set of one or more related data items grouped for processing. Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) A computer that uses a small, simplified set of frequently used instructions for rapid execution. redundancy In a functional unit, the existence of more than one means for performing a required function. Reference Diskette A bootable DOS diskette shipped with the server base system. The diskette reconfigures system CMOS memory after any device additions, changes, or removals that affect the server. refresh (1) To recharge a memory location in volatile memory with an electrical current so that it retains a state or binary value. (2) In computer graphics, the process of repeatedly producing a monitor image on a monitor surface so that the image remains visible. register (1) An integrated circuit that contains 8, 16, or 32 storage locations, each of which can store 1 bit of binary data. See also binary. (2) An area that stores data while it is being processed by the computer. resolution In computer graphics, a measure of the sharpness of an image, expressed as the number of lines and columns on the monitor screen or the number of pels per unit of area. resource Any of the computer-system elements needed to perform required operations, including storage, input/output devices, processors, data, and programs. resume To begin computer operations again from suspend mode. RGB Red Green Blue.

324


RIPL Remote Initial Program Load. riser card A circuit card that connects to the system board and provides expansion slots for adding adapters. RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computing. router A hardware/software solution that directs messages between local area networks. routine A program, or part of a program, that may have some general or frequent use. RPL Remote Program Load. RT/CMOS Real-Time/Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor. S-HTTP (Secure HyperText Transport Protocol) A transaction protocol for the Internet that creates secure channels at the application layer. S-Video A video format that separates the chrominance and luminance values of video into two separate signals. SCB System Control Block SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) A general-purpose peripheral-interface specification, commonly used to connect disks, tapes, and optical media to computer systems. SCSI-2 An enhanced version of the original SCSI specification providing enhanced performance through a wider data path and faster data checking. SCSI Attachment Feature The feature that attaches to the main system unit and the SCSI bus. It is the controlling feature of the SCSI subsystem. SCSI device An intelligent device that is directly attached to the SCSI bus. It conforms to the ANSI Standard X3.131-1986 for attached SCSI devices. SCSI ID The identification number that you assign to a fixed disk by setting jumpers on the disk or on the drive backplane of Array Servers and the 3516. sector A predetermined angular part of a track or band on a magnetic disk that can be addressed. seek time The time required for the access arm of a direct access storage device to be positioned on the appropriate track. segmented look-ahead buffer Divides the total amount of buffer memory into smaller buffers so that data from more than one read can be stored at one time.

Glossary

325

sequential access The capability to enter data into a storage device or data medium in the same sequence as the data is ordered, or to obtain data in the same order as it has been entered. serial Pertaining to the sequential or consecutive occurrence of two or more related activities in a single device or channel. serial port A port used to attach devices such as display devices, letter-quality printers, modems, plotters, and such pointing devices as light pens and mice; it transmits data 1 bit at a time. server A generic term for a network node that performs some set of tasks or functions for other nodes on the network. See also file server and application server. servo See servomechanism. servomechanism (1) An automatic device that uses feedback to govern the physical position of an element. (2) A feedback system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion. SIMM Single In-line Memory Module. slave A device or subsystem that is involved in a data transfer as either the source or destination but does not control the transfer. SLIP/PPP Serial Line Internet Protocol/Point-to-Point Protocol. A pair of protocols, each of which allows a machine to connect to the Internet via a standard phone line and a high-speed modem. Most Internet packages support both, but PPP is the more advanced standard. slot (1) A position in a device used for removable storage media. (2) One of several receptacles in the rear panel of the system unit into which a user can install an adapter. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. The protocol governing network management and monitoring of network devices and their functions. SNMP came out of the TCP/IP environment. software (1) All or part of the programs, procedures, rules, and associated documentation of a computer. Software is an intellectual creation that is independent of the medium on which it is recorded. (2) Contrast with “hardware.” speculative execution A generalized mechanism that permits instructions to be started “early,” i.e., ahead of their normal execution sequence. Results of this speculation are stored temporarily (in the ROB) because they may be discarded due to a change in program flow.

326


spread spectrum frequency hopping A technique for signaling whereby the available spectrum is divided into a large number of bands and users, or groups of users, “hop” from band to band in rapid sequence. This synchronized hopping crates logical communications channels. Interference between groups is minimized through the use of orthogonal codes, which are hopping patterns that minimize the number of times two groups will be in the same band at the same time. SPX Sequential Packet eXchange. A communications protocol that operates on top of IPX and ensures that an entire message arrives intact. SQL Structured Query Language An industry-standard language for requesting information from a relational database and interpreting the results. SQL is often pronounced like “sequel.” SRAM Static Random Access Memory. startup sequence In personal computer systems, the order that the computer uses to search the direct access storage devices for an operating system. STI Set Interrupt Enable. STN Super Twisted Neumatic. storage A functional unit into which data can be placed, in which it can be retained, and from which it can be retrieved. STP Shielded Twisted-Pair. Telephone wire wrapped in a metal sheath to eliminate external interference. stripe The collection of sectors, in logical order from the first to the last drive of the disk array, over which data is stored. striping The process of storing data across all the drives grouped in an array. subsystem A secondary or subordinate system, or programming support, usually capable of operating independently or asynchronously with a controlling system. superscalar The ability to process more than one instruction per clock. The Pentium processor has two execution pipes (U and V), so it is superscalar level 2. The Pentium Pro can dispatch and retire 3 instructions per clock, so it is superscalar level 3. suspend To stop all operations of the computer to reduce power drain and restrict access to the files. SVC Switched Virtual Circuit. A connection across a network. It is established on an as-needed basis and can provide connection to any other user in the network.

Glossary

327

SVGA Super Video Graphics Adapter, a video mode that produces up to 1024 × 768 (or more) resolution. Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP) In personal computers, a multiprocessing design that enables two or more microprocessors to run concurrently and work independently, with each microprocessor capable of performing any task. synchronize (1) To make occur with a regular or predictable time relationship. (2) In a disk array, to compute and store the parity of all the data in the array. synchronous A mode of data transfer across the SCSI bus in which each byte of data transferred does not have to be acknowledged as received by the target device before the next byte can be sent. system board In a system unit, the main circuit board that supports a variety of basic systems devices, such as a keyboard or a mouse, and provides other basic system functions. System Management Mode (SMM) A state controlled by the microprocessor that reduces the power consumed by components of the computer. system partition In some personal computer systems, a 3 MB section of the hard disk that contains the POST and BIOS code and the system programs. system programs In personal computer systems, startup routines, such as POST and BIOS code, and the utility programs that are used to configure, test, and update the computer. system unit In personal computer systems, the part of the computer that contains the processor circuitry, Read Only Memory (ROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), and the I/O channel. TA Trouble Analysis. Tagged Command Queuing (TCQ) Allows multiple commands to be sent to a SCSI-2 device concurrently (as opposed to having to complete the first command before receiving the next command). tape drive A device for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement. Synonymous with “tape transport.” target A device attached to the SCSI bus that receives and processes commands sent from another device on the SCSI bus. The device that sends the command is known as the initiator. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A collection of communication protocols that allow dissimilar PCs to speak to one another over a common network (the Internet).

328


TDMA Time Division Multiple Access. An access architecture in which a channel is subdivided into multiple time slots. Pure TDMA systems create multiple logical channels by assigning the logical channels to regularly occurring time slots. TDMA is one of the technologies being used by second-generation, digital cellular telephone services in the United States. telnet A terminal emulation protocol that allows an Internet user to log in to other stations remotely; also, a program based on this protocol. terminator A piece of hardware that must be attached to both ends of the 50-conductor SCSI attachment cable (commonly known as the SCSI bus). TFT Thin Film Transistor. throughput A measure of the amount of work performed by a computer system over a period of time; for example, number of jobs per day. time codes Time stamps that appear like page numbers on frames of a video clip. Each frame is stamped with a time code, which facilitates locating frames and measuring the duration of a clip. The professional-level video time code used by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers is referred to as “SMPTE time code.” token In a local access network, the symbol of authority passed successively from one data station to another to indicate the station temporarily in control of the transmission medium. Each data station has an opportunity to acquire and use the token to control the medium. A token is a particular message or bit pattern that signifies permission to transmit. token-ring Describes a network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching device to another; for example, the IBM Token-Ring Network. TSR Terminate and Stay Resident. Memory-resident programs that are loaded into memory and stay there so you can conveniently access them whenever you need. UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter. An electrical circuit that converts analog data to digital data and digital data to analog data; it is used in communications devices. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) A fault-tolerant facility that consists of software and hardware. A UPS prevents sudden power surges or power outage from stopping or damaging the server.

Glossary

329

All IBM servers and most network operating systems support UPS facilities. Universal Serial Bus (USB) A serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia connections to personal computers. universal serial bus port On personal computers, a port that uses a single connector for devices that previously used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and game ports. The USB port connector uses Plug and Play technology to determine what device is connected to the port. A hub device can be used to convert a single USB connector into multiple attachment points. Data is transmitted in asynchronous or isochronous mode. UPS See Uninterruptible Power Supply. URL Uniform Resource Locator. A uniform method of specifying where different documents, network resources, and media reside on the Internet. utility program (1) A computer program in general support of computer processes; for example, a diagnostic program, a trace program, or a sort program. (2) A program designed to perform an everyday task such as copying data from one storage device to another. UTP Unshielded Twisted-Pair. A cable medium with one or more pairs of twisted insulated copper conductors bound in a single plastic sheath. V-SYNC Vertical synchronization. vertical expansion A video display technique in Character Display mode to fit video images on the whole LCD screen by adjusting the number of character dots vertically. Very Large-Scale Integration (VLSI) The process of integrating very large numbers of circuits on a single chip of semiconductor material. VESA Video Electronics Standard Association. VESA Local Bus (VL-Bus) The Video Electronics Standards Association Local Bus. A standard for defining a high-speed video bus for personal computers. VGA Video Graphics Array. A video mode that produces up to 640 × 480 resolution. virtual Pertaining to a functional unit that appears to be real, but whose functions are accomplished by other means. volatile Pertaining to a storage device whose contents are lost when power is cut off. Contrast with “nonvolatile.”

330


VPD Vital Product Data. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. WAIS Wide Area Information Service. A document-database server that allows the indexing of huge quantities of information and then making those indexed searchable across networks such as the Internet. wait state A period during which a microprocessor suspends processing while waiting for a response to a request for an unavailable source. WAN Wide Area Network. A network that provides communication services to a geographic area larger than that served by a local area network or a metropolitan area network, and that may use or provide public communication facilities. .WAV (waveform file) The standard audio file format for PCs. winsock Windows Sockets; an API that serves as a common interface between a Windows client application an the TCP/IP protocol. workstation (1) functional unit at which a user works. A workstation often has some processing capability. (2) A terminal or microcomputer, usually one that is connected to a mainframe. World Wide Web (WWW) A segment of the Internet, developed by CERN, that lets users access multimedia documents connected via hypertext links. All documents are authored using HTML. write To make a permanent or transient recording of data in a storage device or on a data medium. Write Back (WB) To use a disk buffer for writes (as well as reads) to increase throughput. The disk signals completion of the write when it is received in buffer and before it is written to the disk. The system then does other work while the disk writes the data. Compare with “write through.” write policy The mode set by the system controller that determines when the completion status is sent to the system; it can be either when the data is written to the hard disk (write through mode) or when the data is entered into memory (write back mode). Write Through (WT) The write policy mode that sends a completion status to the system when the data is written to the device. Compare with “write back.” write caching See Write Back. XMS eXtended Memory Specification.

Hz

1

)

64/256

64/512

128/ 128

6344-22U Celeron/ 533

6344-31U Celeron/ 128/ 566 128 6344-52U Celeron/ 128/ 633 128 PC 300 (with Pentium III 6344-70U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II

10GB, --, - Intel 810e 10GB, --, - Intel 810e 10GB, --, - Intel 810e Dynamic/ Dynamic Dynamic/ Dynamic Dynamic/ Dynamic 40Xmax17Xmin 40Xmax17Xmin

Optional

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

Optional

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

--

--

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC ADI 1881C AC97 ADI 1881C AC97 ADI 1881C AC97

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC ADI 1881C AC97 ADI 1881C AC97

Ethernet Opt.

Ethernet Opt.

Ethernet Opt.

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet Opt.

Ethernet Opt.

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

3, 2

4

3

2

3, 0

3, 0

3, 1

3, 1

3, 1

3, 0

3, 1

3, 0

3, 1

3, 1

3, 1

WNT4.0

W98

WNT4.0

W98

W98

W98

W98

W98

W98

W98

W98

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

$955

$879

$750

$960

$789

$775

$674

$710

$791

$696

$597

5

6

l il. il. em de va st va Mo † l/a al/a Sy e ta g r s r ic e in to : tot ho at P s: r s k t y e o or List Sl Ba W Op

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance S.M.A.R.T = Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology. When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments. Variable read rate. Actual playback speed will vary and is often less than the maximum possible. 5 W98 = Windows 98, WNT = Windows NT Workstation, W2000 = Windows 2000 6 A workhorse model designates a platform that remains consistent over time to enable extended deployments. Products offered under the Workhorse program will be available on a worldwide basis for a minimum of nine months after announce. These models will not have any hardware changes that will affect the IBM software preload images. † IBM Li P i R ll i

1

Key to Footnotes

64/512

64/512

64/512

128/ 128 256/ 256 256/ 256

6344-33U Celeron/ 566 6344-81U Pentium III/ 733 6344-82U Pentium III/ 733

16/16

8/8

10GB, --, - Intel 810e -

128/256 SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, - Intel 810e S.M.A.R.T. III -

Dynamic/ Dynamic Dynamic/ Dynamic

8/8

8/8

8/8

4/4

10GB, --, - Intel 810e 10GB, --, - Intel 810e -

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 10GB, --, - Intel 810e S.M.A.R.T. III -


6344-7EU Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

64/512

Intel 810e


SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II processors) 64/256 SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

64/256

128/ 128

6344-4EU Celeron/ 600

64/256

128/ 128

6344-2EU Celeron/ 533

PC 300 (with Celeron processors) 6344-20U Celeron/ 128/ 32/256 SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 5GB, 533 128 S.M.A.R.T. III 5400, 9.5

(M

. 4 vg ) ,A ) te ) ra PM MB B) KB 3, R .( ad (M .( x e e . x r e a 2 p a z y ce e ax /m S i s) Ty or /m e/S bl pe d. /m r fa p m d. yp r ri a st d. Ty ive (m te hi st Me be st rT In M Dr e (va e: d ive m sC k y: so RA rd Tim M ic ar ch Dr m or or a Nu es O d h o a o e i d k w c t H p n e m C d r t d -R r e o a a d Me Ha Mo Pr Ne Pa L2 Vi Au St Se Gr CD

ed pe


331

Appendix B:

IBM PC Family

331

332 1

z)

128/ 128

128/ 128

128/ 128

128/ 128 128/ 128 128/ 128

6288-73U Celeron/ 533

Celeron/ 533

6288-74U

6288-70U Celeron/ 533

6338-73U Celeron/ 533 6338-74U Celeron/ 533 6268-70U Celeron/ 533

64/512

64/128

64/128

64/512

64/512

64/512

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. II Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 13.5GB, 7200, 9 13.5GB, 7200, 9 10GB, 5400, --

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III 15GB, 7200, 9 15GB, 7200, 9 15GB, 5400, 11

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 5400, 11



PC 300GL (with Celeron processors) 6288-48U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 466 128 6288-51U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 466 128 6288-53U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 466 128 6288-49U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 500 128 6288-46U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 500 128 6288-47U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 500 128 6288-71U Celeron/ 128/ 64/512 SDRAM 533 128

H (M

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

Intel 810

Intel 810

4/4

4/4

Intel 810

4/4

4/4

Intel 810

Intel 810

4/4

Intel 810

4/4

Intel 810 Intel 810

40Xmax17Xmin 40Xmax17Xmin --

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin



--

4, 4

4, 4

Opt.

Opt.

4, 4

Opt. AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

4, 4

SoundMAX Optional Opt.

4, 4

4, 4

Opt.

Opt.

4, 4

Opt.

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC SoundMAX Optional

4, 4

4, 4

4, 4

4, 4

4, 4

4, 4

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

W98

W98

W98

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

W98

W98

WNT

W98

W98

WNT4.0

W98

W98

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

$761

$1079

$1009

$939

$889

$813

$729

$862

$786

$702

$829

$749

$699

5

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

110

6

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † / a v l /a v Sy e al ta i n g rs rice t ot o t o t t : a P s: kh en ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O







g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ra B) (M RP KB d ( 3 , M x. ea e .( x. r e a 2 p x a z y ce e a /m S i s) Ty or e/S bl . /m pe d. /m r fa p m ia r yp td st d. Ty ive (m te hi ar Me be st rT :s In D r me (v ive m AM sC k y: so d rd he r i r c u R r r M s i a c D m T o N o e O h o d o Ha ek Ca m de tw rd di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Ha Mo St Se Gr CD

ed pe


Appendix C

IBM PC 300 GL Series

1

z)

Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667

256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 128/ 1024 128/ 1024 128/ 1024

128/ 1024

6563-93U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

65639CU 65639DU 6563-9EU

128/ 1024

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, -S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, -S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, -S.M.A.R.T. III

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 13.5GB, 7200, 9 S.M.A.R.T. III

10.1GB, 7200, -SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 13.5GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9

64/1024 SDRAM

256/ 256 256/ 256

Pentium III/ 6563667 9GU 6563-94U Pentium III/ 667

PC 300GL (with Pentium III processors) 6563-95U Pentium III/ 256/ 64/1024 SDRAM 667 256 6563-96U Pentium III/ 256/ 64/1024 SDRAM 667 256

H (M

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

Optional Opt. Optional Opt.

ESS PCI ESS PCI ESS PCI

-48Xmax20Xmin 48Xmax20Xmin

8/8 32/32 32/32

nVidia

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

Ethernet

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

ESS

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

S3 Diamond nVidia

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin 48Xmax20Xmin

--

8/8

8/8

--

8/8

16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme 16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme

--

S3 Diamond S3 Diamond

g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ra B) (M RP KB d ( 3 . , M a . .( re ax 2 pe ax ze y ce e /S ax /m S i s) Ty or /m bl fa pe d. pe e p m . /m d. ia r er st Ty Ty hi td st ri v e ( m ar nt Me be s e r C : I M v D ( v : o e i m k y s rd cs RA r d Ti m ch m Dr or Nu or es OM hi o da o Ha ek m Ca de tw rd di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Mo Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Ha St Se Gr CD ed pe

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

$1230 $1307

N N Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Also included is a Recovery CD for Windows NT 4.0

W98

$1275

N Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Also included is a Recovery CD for Windows NT 4.0 W2000 N

$1173

$1199

N

W98

$1040


$1066

$964

N

W98

5

112

112

112

112

112

112

112

112

6

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † / a v l /a v Sy e al ta i n g r s r i c e ti ot o t o t t : a P s: kh en ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O

Appendix C: IBM PC 300 GL Series

333

Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256


256/ 256 256/ 256

256/ 256 256/ 256

Pentium III/ 800 Pentium III/ 800


6563A1U

6563A2U

6563B1U 6563B2U

6563C1U 6563C2U

256/ 256 256/ 256


6563A5U 6563A6U

128/ 1024 128/ 1024

128/ 1024 128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

20.4GB, 7200, -20.4GB, 7200, --

nVidia

nVidia

32/32

32/32

32/32

32/32



ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

ESS

Optional

Optional

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

ESS

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI


nVidia 20.4GB, 7200, 9 20.4GB, --, nVidia 9

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 20.4GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9


32/32

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI


32/32

64/1024 SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, -- nVidia S.M.A.R.T. III 64/1024 SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, --, -- nVidia S.M.A.R.T. III

z)

1

g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ) ra B P B (M d d K ( 3, R . M a e . ( . re ax pe 2 pe ax ze y ce e ax /m S i s) Ty or e/S bl fa . /m pe d. /m e m ia ip r yp er td st d. Ty ri v e ( m ar nt Me be e st Ch :s rT I M v D ( v e : o d i A s m k y s r c R r d Ti m ch Dr m or or Nu es hi o OM o da Ha ek m Ca de rd tw di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Mo Ha Ne St Gr Se CD H (M

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

W2000

N



$1286


$1807

$1730

$1602

$1526

$1412

$1336

$1210

N

W98

5

112

112

112

112

112

112

112

112

6

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † / a v l /a v Sy e al a e g t s t r in to : to ric nti ho at s: rk ist P sse ys per ot L Sl E Ba Wo O


128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024 128/ 1024

128/ 1024

6574-92U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256


6574-A1U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

256/ 256 256/ 256

6574-91U

6574-A3U Pentium III/ 733 6574-A2U Pentium III/ 733

6574-A4U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

1

z)

20.4GB, 7200, 9 20.4GB, 7200, 9


SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III




H (M

nVidia

32/32

16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme

16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme nVidia 32/32


48Xmax20Xmin


ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

Optional Opt.

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ra B) (M RP d KB ( 3 . , a M . .( re ax 2 pe ax ze y e ce /S ax /m S i s) Ty or /m bl fa pe d. pe e p m d. . /m ia r er st Ty hi Ty st td ri v e ( m ar nt Me be s e C r : I v M D ( v : o e i m k y s rd cs RA r d Ti m ch Dr m or Nu or es hi OM o da o Ha ek Ca m de tw rd di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Ha Mo St Se Gr CD ed pe

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

112

112

$1373 $1412

$1449

N Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Also included is a Recovery CD for Windows NT 4.0 N Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Also included is a Recovery CD for Windows NT 4.0

112

112

112

112

N

W98

$1275


$1336

$1199

N

W98

5

6

l il. il. em de va st va Mo † l /a a l /a Sy e ta g rs rice t in to : tot o t : a P s kh en ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O


335

128/ 1024 128/ 1024 128/ 1024 128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024



6564SNU

6564SMU SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

Nonparity

Nonparity

64/512

128/512

SDRAM

128/512

256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256

Nonparity

64/512

6564R3U 6564R2U 6564-SYU

SDRAM

64/512

128/ 128

SDRAM

6278-SEU Celeron/ 533

SDRAM

128/512

128/ 128 128/ 128

Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667 6564-SLU Pentium III/ 667

1

)

Series 64/512

6278-S6U Celeron/ 500 6278-SDU Celeron/ 533

PC 300GL Small Business 6278-SAU Celeron/ 128/ 466 128 6278-SBU Celeron/ 128/ 500 128 6278-S3U Celeron/ 128/ 500 128 6278-S4U Celeron/ 128/ 500 128

Hz (M

13.5GB, 7200, 9.5 15GB, 5400, 11

10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 13.5GB, 7200, 9.5 15GB, 5400, 11

20.4GB, 7200, -20.4GB, 7200, -20.4GB, 7200, -27.2GB, 7200, 9

Ultra ATA/66 with 27.2GB, 7200, 9 S.M.A.R.T. III

Ultra ATA/66 with 27.2GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

Ultra ATA/66 with 15GB, 5400, 11 S.M.A.R.T

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T 4/4

32/32

8/8

8/8

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme 16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme 16/16 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme

S3 Diamond S3 Diamond nVidia

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

Intel 810

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC ESS PCI

--

Ethernet

2X/4X/24X- ESS PCI 10X Rewritable


Ethernet

--

Ethernet

--

Ethernet

--

-AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC SoundMAX Ethernet

SoundMAX --

SoundMAX Ethernet

SoundMAX --

48Xmax20Xmin 48XmaxESS PCI 20Xmin ESS PCI 48Xmax20Xmin 2X/4X/24X- ESS PCI 10X Rewritable

40Xmax17Xmin


40Xmax17Xmin 40Xmax17Xmin 40Xmax17Xmin 40Xmax17Xmin

Opt.

IBM PC Card

IBM PC Card Opt.

IBM PC Card Opt.

Conexant PCI 56K modem Opt.

IBM 56K PCI v.90 Conexant PCI 56K modem Opt.

IBM 56K PCI v.90 Opt.

. 4 vg ) ,A ) te ) ) ra PM MB B ( d R KB ( 3 . a M , . .( re ax p 2 pe ax ze y e ce /S ax /m S i s) Ty or /m bl pe d. pe r fa p . /m d. r st ri a em Ty ive (m te Ty hi st td r a M be e s C : r e v In M D m ( : e o iv d A m s k y s d r r h i r u c R r r M c D m T o o N es O o hi da o Ha e k m Ca de rd tw di -R rt oc ap an de Me Pr Ne Mo Ha Pa L2 Vi Au St Se Gr CD d ee

4, 3 4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

W98

4, 1

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

W98

4, 1

4, 1

W2000

WNT4.0

W98

WNT4.0

W98

WNT

W98

W98

WNT

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 3

4, 3

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

$1473

$1460

$1368

$1382

$1346

$1228

$1061

$880

$1033

$852

$852

$903

$939

5

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

116

6

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † / a v l /a v Sy al se ic e ta ing r ot o i t o r h :t nt at s: rk ist P sse ys per ot Sl L E Ba Wo O


128/ 1024


6

5

4

3

2

1

1

)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

z)

30GB, 7200, -30GB, 7200, --

Ultra ATA/66 with 30GB, 7200, -S.M.A.R.T. III

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

Ultra ATA/66 with 30GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, --


nVidia

nVidia

nVidia

nVidia

nVidia

32/32

32/32

32/32

32/32

32/32



2X/4X/24X- ESS PCI 10X Rewritable 2X/4X/24X- ESS PCI 10X Rewritable 4X/4X/32X ESS PCI

--

--

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

4, 1

4, 1

Windows98

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

Asymmet- 4, 2 ric digital subscriber line (ADSL) Asymmet- 4, 2 ric digital subscriber line (ADSL)

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

A workhorse model designates a platform that remains consistent over time to enable extended deployments. Products offered under the Workhorse program will be available on a worldwide basis for a minimum of nine months after announce. These models will not have any hardware changes that will affect the IBM software preload images.

W98 = Windows 98, WNT = Windows NT Workstation, W2000 = Windows 2000

Variable read rate. Actual playback speed will vary and is often less than the maximum possible.

N

N

N

N

N

$1676

$1592

$1558

$1532

$1514

5

116

116

116

116

116

6

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † /av l/av Sy al se ic e ta ing r ot o t o t : at Pr s: kh e ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O

When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.

S.M.A.R.T = Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology.


Key to Footnotes

PC 300PL ( ith P

III

128/ 1024 128/ 1024

256/ 256 256/ 256

6564-P1U Pentium III/ 733 6564-P3U Pentium III/ 733

ti

128/ 1024

6564-P2U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

6564SXU

128/ 1024

6564-STU Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

H (M

. 4 vg ) ,A ) te ) ) ra PM MB B ( R KB d ( 3 . , M a . .( re ax 2 pe ax ze y ce e /S ax /m S i s) Ty or /m bl pe d. pe r fa e p . /m d. ia r st em Ty te Ty hi td st riv e (m ar M be e s r C : In v M D ( : o e d iv m A s m k y s d r r h i r u c R r r M c m D T o N o es O da o hi o Ha e k m Ca de rd tw di -R rt oc ap an de Me Pr Mo Ha Pa L2 Vi Au Ne St Se Gr CD ed pe


337

338 Ultra ATA/66 with 10GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9

64/1024 SDRAM

64/1024 SDRAM

6565-94U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

6565-93U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256 Ultra ATA/66 with 10GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9

Ultra ATA/66 with 10GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9

1

z)

PC 300PL (with Pentium III processors) 6565-92U Pentium III/ 256/ 64/1024 SDRAM 667 256

H (M

8/8 SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4 8/8 SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4 8/8 SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4

5

6

Opt.

Opt.

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

Optional

Opt.

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

N

N

N Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Also included is a Recovery CD for Windows NT 4.0

W98

W98

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † /av l/av Sy e al ta ing r s ri c e t ot o t o t t : a P s: kh en ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O

Optional

g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ra B) (M RP KB d ( 3 , M x. ea e .( x. r e a 2 p x a z y ce e a /m S i s) Ty or e /S bl . /m pe d. /m r fa p m ia r yp td st d. Ty ive (m te hi ar Me be st rT :s In D r me (v ive m AM sC k y: so d r rd he i r u c R r r M s i a c m D T o o N e O d o h o Ha e k m Ca de rd tw di -R rt oc ap an de Me Pr Mo Ha Ne Pa L2 Vi Au St Se Gr CD

ed pe


Appendix D

IBM PC 300 PL Series

1

64/1024 SDRAM

6565W5U 6565W6U 65659DU 128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

64/1024 SDRAM

6565-96U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

6565-97U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

6565-E5U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

64/1024 SDRAM

256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256

Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667 Pentium III/ 667

64/1024 SDRAM

)

6565-95U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

Hz (M

10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 10.1GB, 5400, 9.5 15GB, 7200, 9




Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T. III


--

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

8/8

16/16

16/16

48Xmax20Xmin

--

--

48Xmax20Xmin

8/8

8/8

8/8 SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4

S3 Diamond S3 Diamond SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme


ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

ESS

ESS

ESS PCI

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

. 4 vg ) ,A te ) B) ) ra PM B (M R d KB ( 3 , . (M x. ea e x . r e a 2 p a z y e ce / ax /m Si s ) Ty or /m bl fa pe d. /m pe e p m d. ia r er st d. Ty hi Ty st riv e (m ar nt Me be st e C : r v M I D ( v : e o i m k y s rd cs RA rd Tim ch Dr m or or Nu es hi o OM o da Ha e k m Ca de rd tw di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Mo Ha St Se Gr CD d ee Sp 5

6

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 3

4, 3

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

W98

N

$1321

$1524


$1371

$1227

$1448

N

N

$1151

$1290

N

W98

W2000

WNT


118

118

118

118

118

118

118

l il. il. em de va st va Mo † l / a a l /a Sy e g ta rs rice t in to : tot o t : h n a s rk ist P sse ys per ot L Sl E Ba Wo O

Appendix D: IBM PC 300 PL Series

339

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

128/ 1024

6565-F2U Pentium III/ 256/ 800 256

6565-E1U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

6565-E2U Pentium III/ 256/ 733 256

6565-F1U Pentium III/ 256/ 800 256

6565-F2U Pentium III/ 256/ 800 256

1

)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

Hz (M






Ethernet

Ethernet

ESS PCI

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

Ethernet

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin


Ethernet

ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin

Ethernet


ESS PCI

48Xmax20Xmin


Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

g. 4 ) Av te ) M, B) ra B) (M RP KB d ( 3 . , M a . .( re ax p 2 pe ax ze y ce e ax /m S i s) Ty or e /S bl . /m pe d. /m r fa m r ip yp td st ri a d. Ty ive (m te Me be e st rT :s Ch In M va D r me ( v : o e d i m A s k y s r c R rd Ti ch m Dr or or Nu es OM da o hi o Ha e k m Ca de tw rd di rt -R oc ap an de Me Mo Ne Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ha St Se Gr CD d ee 5

6

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 1

$1758

$1834


$1599

$1523

$1397

N

W98



118

118

118

118

118

l il. il. em de va ava st Mo † / l /a Sy e e ta otal ng s r o c i i t o t :t at Pr s: kh en ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O


PC 700 Ultra ATA/66 with 20.4GB, S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9 NP RDRAM


128/512

128/512

128/512

128/512

6584-94U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

6584-95U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256



6584A1U

6584A2U




128/512

6584-99U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256


SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 30GB, S.M.A.R.T. II 7200, --

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66 with 30GB, S.M.A.R.T. II 7200, --

( x.

128/512

128/ 1024


6565G2U

1

z)

6584-98U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256

128/ 1024


6565G1U

H (M

SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4 SR9 AGP 2x Adapter with S3 Savage4 SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

--

--

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

16/16

16/16

8/8

8/8

16/16

16/16

16/16

16/16

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC


AC 97 w/A D 1881 CODEC




ESS

ESS

5

6

5, 3

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

5, 3

5, 3

5, 3

5, 3

5, 3

4, 3

4, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 1

WNT4.0

W98

WNT4.0

W98

WNT4.0

W98

W2000

W98

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

$1576

$1500

$1576

$1500

$1402

$1326

$2038

$1962

118

118

118

118

118

118

118

118

l l. l. em de ai ai st Mo † / a v l /a v Sy al se ice ta i n g r ot o i t o t r h : nt at s: rk ist P sse ys per ot L Sl E Ba Wo O

Ethernet

Ethernet

. 4 vg ) ,A ) te ) ) ra PM MB KB 3, R .( ad MB ( x e . r a 2 pe a ze y ce e /S ax /m S i s) Ty or /m bl pe d. pe r fa . /m m d. ip r st r ia Ty ive (m te Ty st td Me be Ch In D r me (va e: :s or ive d AM s m k y s d r h r i r c u R r r M c D T m o o N es hi o O o da Ha ek m Ca de rd tw di rt -R oc ap de an Me Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Mo Ha St Gr Se CD ed pe

Appendix D: IBM PC 300 PL Series

341

1

128/512

128/512

6594-92U Pentium III/ 256/ 667 256



6594B1U

6594A3U

6

5

4

3

2

1




SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme SR9 AGP 4x Adapter with S3 Savage4 Xtreme

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

16/16

16/16

16/16

16/16

16/16

16/16






AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

7, 5

7, 5

7, 5

5, 3

5, 3

5, 3

6, 3

6, 3

6, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

WNT4.0

W2000

W98




5

6

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

$1699

$1598

$1598

$1893

$1677

$1601

118

118

118

118

118

118

l il. il. em de va st va Mo † l / a a l /a Sy e g ta se in to : tot or Pric nt t : h a s k e ys per ot or List Ess Sl Ba W O

When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.



Key to Footnotes

128/512


6584A3U

128/512


128/512


6584A5U


PC 700 Ultra ATA/66 with 20.4GB, NP S.M.A.R.T. III 7200, 9 RDRAM

128/512


)

6584A4U

Hz (M

. 4 vg ) ,A te B) ) ra B) PM B (M R d K 3, (M .( x. ea e . x r e a 2 p a z y e ce ax / /m Si s ) Ty or /m bl pe d. r fa pe p m ./m d. ia r st Ty ive (m te hi Ty td st ar Me be In M Dr e (v :s or e: d ive sC rk um RA ry rd Tim M ss ic ar ch Dr m o a o N e O d h a o o H ek m C de rd tw di -R rt oc ap an de Me Ha Pr Pa L2 Vi Au Ne Mo St Se Gr CD d ee Sp


.

m

r

Pr

o

s ce

r so

pe

L2

Ty

c Ca

/S

: he

d st

1

)

m

. ax

Me

/m

Hz

d.

(M

or

B)

st y:

(K

a

a

a nd

/m

St

d. rd

(M x. m

Ha

Me

B)

rd

or D

y

Ha

e riv

2

pe

D

Ty

rd

e riv

Si

,

Vi

3

ze d

5

4

3

2

1

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

32/256

64/256

64/256

32/288

--, --, --

--

--, --, --

--, --, --

--

--, --, --

4/4

8/8

-4/4

S3 Trio3D 4/4

S3 Trio3D 4/4

--

h

et

0, 0

ot

ra

Sl

ad

2, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

16 Token- 2, 2 Ring

10 / 100 Ethernet

10 / 100 Ethernet

2, 1 24Xma 10 / 100 Ethernetx10Xmin Integrated

10 / 100 Ethernet

Et

le

n er

iab

3/3

-

ar

16 TokenRing

CD

(v

/m

M RO

d.

4/4

R

st

re

10 / 100 Ethernet

eo

AM

. ax

4/4

d

g.

Vi

v ,A

4

)

Ba

a ot

0, 0

0, 0

3, 0

0, 0

t s:

te

y

av

Thin Client

Thin Client

Thin Client

Thin Client

All-inone (2x3)

Thin Client

Thin Client

l,

ai

l.

--

--

Integrated

--

--

--

av

--

CA4235

CA4235

--

National LM4546 AC97 CODEC AC 97 Crystal CS 4299

CA4235

CA4235

m de or Mo ct ax Fa F / o ta di rm Fo Da Au

l.

a ot

ai

Thin Client

t s:

l,


MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance. S.M.A.R.T = Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology. When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes.Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments. Variable read rate. Actual playback speed will vary and is often less than the maximum possible.

Key to Footnotes

NetVista 2800e 8364-CUS Pentium 512KB/512KB MMX/266 NetVista N2800 with Ethernet 8364-EUS Pentium 512KB/512KB MMX/266 NetVista N2800 with Token Ring 8364-TUS Pentium 512KB/512KB MMX/266 Thin Client Express 8363-CUS --/233 /

eo

M RP

NetVista N2200 with Ethernet 0KB/0KB 32/288 SDRAM ---, --, -8363-EUS National Geode GXLV-233 (R)/233 NetVista N2200 with Token Ring 0KB/0KB 32/288 SDRAM ---, --, -8363-TUS National Geode GXLV-233 (R)/233 IBM NetVista N2200w Thin Client for Windows-based Terminal Standard 1.5 0KB/0KB 32/288 SDRAM ---, --, --8363-WUS National Geode GXLV-233 (R)/233 2179-700 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM Ultra Celeron/ 10.1GB, --, Inte533 128KB ATA/66 -grated Video

Pa

Nu rt

be

e pe

--

--

--

W98

--

--

--

Op

e

ra

--

S3 Trio3D

S3 Trio3D

--

i ph

5

em

a

st

Gr

Sy

Integrated Video

--

g t in c

Ch

ip

Se

t

Appendix E: IBM NetVista Family

343

Appendix E

IBM NetVista Family

343

1

)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

6269-K1U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM III/650 256KB

6269K2U

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6269-M1U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM III/667 256KB

6269-M2U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/667

6269-50U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/667 256KB

Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/650

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

NetVista A20 6269-70U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/650

Hz (M

4

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, --

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, -Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 4, 2

4, 1

3, 3

3, 2

10 / 100 Optional

Optional

10 / 100 CDROM:48X Ethernet max17Xmin

8/8

8/8

3, 3

Optional

8/8

Optional

3, 2


8/8

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

3, 3

10 / 100 Optional

Optional

4, 2

8/8

3, 3

Optional

8/8 Optional

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

) g. te Av ra ) B) M, (K ad . MB P . e ( x r . a 2 3, R ax y e l. il. ax /m m bl or ai e/ . /m pe d. ze va /m ia m de av r yp td st Si Ty d. ,a ar l, or Me be :s Mo rT st M al (v ve ve ta o e t : ct t d A i i m o r s y r h r o e M u R ax t t r s a c Fa n D D F : O : N o / e r d o a o o s i s d d R C m r r ta d y rt rm oc an he de de ot CD Fo Vi Vi Da Ba Au Sl Pr Pa L2 Ha Et St Me Ha d ee Sp

78

78

78

78

78

Integrated $980 Intel 810E Direct AGP




W98

Optional

W98

W98

e† ic se Es


Pr

W98

t Lis

t Se

78

ph

ip Ch


a Gr

ic

Optional

a er Op

g ti n

5

em st Sy


1

)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6269-L1U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM III/700 256KB

6269-L2U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM III/700 256KB

SDRAM

6269-60U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/733 256KB

6269-N1U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM III/733 256KB

6270-M2U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733


6269-80U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/700

. ax

Hz (M

4

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, --

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, -Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

Optional

Up to Optional 10/Up to 10


8/8

8/8

3, 2

10 / 100 Optional

Optional

8/8

3, 3

3, 3

3, 2


8/8

Optional

3, 3

10 / 100 Optional

Optional

3, 3

8/8

Optional

Optional

8/8

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

Desktop

Microtower

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

) g. te Av ra B) B) M, ad (K . P e (M x r . a 2 3, R y e l. l. ax /m m bl or ai e/ ai . /m pe d. ze /m m ia de av yp r av td st Si Ty d. ar l, l, or Me be Mo rT :s st (v ta ta ct t ive ive AM m x o rd so y: he r r o a e M u a t R t r a s c F D D O : N o /F d rn e o o o s: Ca -R m rd rd ta di ys rt rm oc an he de de ot Da Fo Au CD Ba Vi Vi St Sl Pa L2 Ha Et Ha Me Pr d ee Sp

W98

W98

7

7

Integrated $911 Intel Direct AGP Video


7


7

Integrated $760 Intel 810E Direct AGP Optional

W98

7


W98

7


E

ic

W98

Pr

t Se st Li

ip Ch

7

Gr

c hi ap


a er

5

em st Sy

Optional

Op

g ti n


345

1

)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

SDRAM

6270-TDU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

6270-T2U


Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

SDRAM

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

6270-T3U

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6269-N4U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6270-M4U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

. ax

Hz (M

4

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP


4, 1

4, 1

4, 2

Optional 3, 2 Up to CD10/Up ROM:48X to 10 max20Xmin



3, 2

4, 1

3, 2

10 / 100 Up to CD10/Up ROM:48X Ethernet to 10 max20Xmin

10 / 100 Ethernet

4, 2

3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

Optional

4, 2

8/8

3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet


Microtower

Microtower

Microtower

Microtower

Desktop

Microtower

Integrated

Integrated

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

) g. te Av ra ) B) M, ad (K . MB P e ( x r . a p 2 3, R y e l. l. ax /m m bl or ai /m e /S ai pe d. ze m ia d. ./m de av r yp av st Si Ty ar st td l, l, or Me be Mo rT (v ta e: ta :s ct d t ive ive AM m x o r so h r y r o a e M u t R t r s a F D D : O : N o /Fa rn e d o ac o o s i s d d R a t c n e m e e t C m r r t d y r r o h a d d o Da Vi CD Au Ba Fo Vi Pa L2 Ha Et Sl Pr Me St Ha d ee

a

W98

W2000/NT

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W2000/NT

er Op

g tin

78


78

78



78


E

ic

78

Pr

t Se st Li

ip Ch


ap

c hi

78

Gr

5

m te


s Sy


1

z)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

SDRAM

6269-P4U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/800 256KB 512

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/800 256KB 512

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/800 256KB 512

6270-T5U

6270-TEU

6270-T4U SDRAM Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6270-N4U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

SDRAM

Ultra ATA/66

6270-N3U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

H (M

4

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

3, 2

3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet




Optional

8/8 4, 2

4, 2

3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet


4, 1

3, 2


Microtower

Microtower

Microtower

Desktop

Microtower

Microtower

Integrated

Integrated

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

) g. te Av ra ) B) M, ad (K . MB P . e ( x r . a 2 3,R ax y e l. l. ax /m m bl or ai e/S /m ai pe d. ze m ia d. . /m de av yp r av st Si Ty ar st td l, l, or Me be Mo rT (v ta e: ta :s ct d t ive ive m AM x o r so r h y r o a e M u t R t r s a F D D : O N : o /Fa e rn d o ac o o s i s d d R a t c n e m e e t C m r r d t y r r o h a d d o CD Au Fo Da Vi Vi Pr Ba Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

W2000/NT


Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W2000/NT

W98

er Op

i at

ng

p

e†

78

78



78

78



78

s Es

ic


Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch

78

a

ic ph


Gr

5

em st Sy


347

1

z)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6269-C1U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 533

6269-C2U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 533 128KB

SDRAM

6269-30U Celeron/ 128KB/ 0/512 128KB 566

6269-D1U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 566 128KB

6270-D2U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 566

6269-D2U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 566 128KB

6269-20U Celeron/ 128KB/ 0/512 128KB 533

H (M

4

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, --

10GB, --, --

10GB, --, --

--, --, -Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 10 / 100 3, 3 Optional

Optional 3, 3

Optional

Optional

8/8

8/8


8/8


8/8


3, 2

Optional 3, 3

3, 2

Optional 3, 3

Optional

8/8

Optional 3, 3

Optional

8/8

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

Desktop

Microtower

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

) . te vg ) ra ,A d B) KB PM .( ea (M x. r x . R a 2 3, a y e il. il. ax /m m bl or e/S . /m pe va d. ze va /m m de yp r ri a td st Si Ty r d. ,a ,a Me va be e e Mo rT :s st to al M al ( v t v o e t : d t i i m A r r h y r o ac e M u ax to R t r ss a c F D n D F : O N : o / e r d o o o s Ca -R m rd rd di ta ys rt rm oc he an de de ot CD Fo Au Vi Vi Da Pr Ba Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

p

W98

W98

7

7 Integrated $667 Intel Direct AGP Video


7 Integrated $667 Intel 810E Direct AGP

7 Integrated $549 Intel 810E Direct AGP Optional

W98


W98


ic

W98

Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch

7

a

ic ph


Gr

5

em st Sy

Optional

e Op

ra

g tin


1

)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6269-40U Celeron/ 128KB/ 0/512 128KB 600

6269-E1U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 600

6269-E2U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 600 128KB


6269-F1U Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 633

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6270-S2U Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 566 128KB 512

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6270-SDU Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 128KB 512 566

Hz (M

4

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video --, --, -Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 810E Direct AGP 3, 3

3, 3

3, 2

10 / 100 Optional

Optional

Optional


8/8

8/8

8/8

Optional

8/8

Optional

Optional


3, 3

3, 3

3, 2

Optional Up to CD10/Up ROM:48X to 10 max20Xmin

Optional

3, 2

Optional


4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

Desktop

Microtower

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Microtower

Microtower

Integrated

Integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

) g. te ) Av ra ) KB M, ad . MB .( re .( RP ax 2 3 y ax x , e l. l. l r m / a / m b o ai /m ai pe d. ze pe m ia d. . /m de av r av st Ty Si Ty ar st td l, l, or Me be Mo M (v ta ve ve or e: ta :s ct d t i i A m x o r s r y h r o a e M u t R a F D n D Fa : O :t N or / d r es o ac o o s i s d d R a t n c e m e e t C m r r t d y r r o a h d d o Da Au Fo Ba CD St Vi Ha Vi Sl Me Pa L2 Ha Et Pr d ee Sp

7

7

7

7

7






W98

W98

W98

W98


E

ic

Optional

Pr

7

st Li


h ap

t Se

W2000/NT

Gr

ip Ch

7

er

ic


Op

g in at

5

em st Sy


349

1

z)

SDRAM

6270-S4U Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 128KB 512 633

.

SDRAM

SDRAM

6270-SEU Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 633 128KB 512

.

NetVista A20p 6579-R1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/933

SDRAM

6269-F3U Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 128KB 512 633

.

.

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6270-E4U Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 128KB 512 633

.

Open bay

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66


.

H (M

4

--, --, --

Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video


10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 3, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

10 / 100 Ethernet


8/8

4, 3

4, 1


Optional 4, 4

4, 1



4, 2

4, 2

4, 1

3, 2

Optional

3, 2


Desktop

Microtower

Microtower

Desktop

Microtower

Microtower

Integrated

Integrated

Analog Devices 1885 Audio

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

ADI 1881C AC97

Intel integrated

Intel integrated

) . te vg ) ra ,A d B) KB PM .( ea (M x. r x . R a 2 3, a y e il. il. ax /m m bl or e/S . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Si Ty r d. ,a ,a ar Me be e e Mo rT :s st to al al (v AM x ot rd so r iv he y: ri v ot ac et um M a t R t r s a c F D n D F : O N : o / e r d o o o s Ca -R m rd rd di ta ys rt rm oc he an de de ot Au Fo CD Da Pr Ba Vi Vi Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

Optional

W2000/NT

Microsoft Windows 2000 (may convert to Microsoft Windows NT 4.0) Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

W98

e Op

ti ra

ng

p

78

78



78

78


Integrated $1486 Intel 815e Direct AGP

78

E

ic


Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch

78

a

ic ph


Gr

5

em st Sy


1

z)

SDRAM

6579-RBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

.

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

6578-LCU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

6648-LAU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

6578-LDU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

6648-LBU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

NetVista A40 6578-L1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/733 256KB

SDRAM

6579-RAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

.

H (M

4

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP

Intel 815e Integrated Video 10GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video

--, --, --

30GB, --, -- nVidia 4X


4, 1

4, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

3, 1

4, 2

3, 1

10 / 100 4, 4 Optional

2, 2

10 / 100 4, 4 Optional

2, 2

10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet

Up to Optional 10/Up to 10 Up to Optional 10/Up to 10




4, 2

Optional 4, 4 4, 3

4, 1

4, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet


32/32 CDROM:48X max20Xmin 32/32 CDROM:48X max20Xmin

Small Form Factor (2x3)

Desktop


Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop



Analog Devices 1885 Audio Analog Devices 1885 Audio Analog Devices 1885 Audio

Analog Devices 1885 Audio Analog Devices 1885 Audio

) g. te Av ra ) B) M, ad (K . MB re x. .( RP ax 2 3 a y x , e l. S l r m / il. a / m b o ai /m pe d. ze pe va m ia d. . /m de av r st Si Ty Ty ,a ar st td l, or Me be Mo M al (v ve ta ve or e: t :s ct d t i i m A x o r s r h y r o e u M R t r a c Fa D n D Fa :t O N : o / r es d o a o o s i s d d R t a c n e m e e C m r r d t y r r o h a d d ot CD Vi Fo Vi Pr Pa L2 Ha Et Ba Au Da Sl St Me Ha ed pe g

Gr

a

ic ph

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT

80

$1063 80


Intel 815e Integrated Video

80

Integrated $1037 Intel 815e Direct AGP W98

78

$2155

80

78

$987 Intel 815e Integrated Video

e E

ic

$2079

Pr

t Se

80

W98

p

st Li

i Ch

$924


Optional

nVidia 4X Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition nVidia 4X Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT

er Op

in at

5

em st Sy


351

1

z)

SDRAM

SDRAM

6578-LBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

6840-C1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/800 256KB

6830-CAU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

6648-NAU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

.

.

.

.

6578-NAU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

6648NBU

SDRAM

6578-LAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

H (M

4

Ultra ATA/66

20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video

--, --, --

20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video

Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- InteUltraATA/100 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 10GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/66 grated Intel 815e Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/66 grated Intel 815e Direct AGP Open bay

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

4, 2

3, 0

3, 0

Optional 4, 4

10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetIntegrated

10 / 100 4, 4 Optional


Up to 24Xmax10/Up 10Xmin to 10



4, 2

7, 6

Optional 6, 6

4, 1

4, 3


4, 1

10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet

Up to CD10/Up ROM:40X to 10 max17Xmin Up to CD10/Up ROM:40X to 10 max17Xmin

4, 3

Desktop



Microtower

--

Mini-tower --

Desktop

Desktop

8

8


$1160

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W98 Analog Devices 1885 Audio


8 Integrated $1138 Intel 815e Direct AGP Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Analog Devices 1885 Audio


8 Integrated $1088 Intel Direct AGP Video Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

8 Integrated $970 Intel Direct AGP Video

8 $1338 Intel 815e Integrated Video

ic

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Optional

Pr

t Se st Li

p

8

a

i Ch

$1262

Gr

ic ph


g

W98

er Op

in at

5

em st Sy




) . te vg ) ra ) ,A KB ad . MB PM .( re .( ax 2 3,R ax y x e l. S l. l r m / a / m b o ai /m ai pe d. ze pe m ia d. . /m de av r av st Si Ty Ty ar st td l, l, or Me be Mo (v ta or e: ta :s ct d t ive ive m AM x o r s r h y r o a e M u t R t r F D D : O N : o /Fa es rn da o ac o o s i s d d R a t c n e m e e t C m r r d t y r r o h a d d o Au Fo CD Da Vi Ba Pr Vi Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe


.

.

.

1

z)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

6578-NCU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

6840-CAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

6578-NDU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

6840-E1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/866

6830CBU

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

6578-NBU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

H (M

4


Open bay

--, --, -Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video

20GB, --, -- InteUltraATA/100 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Ultra ATA/66 Integrated Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltraATA/100 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Ultra ATA/66 Integrated Video

Ultra ATA/66

Mini-tower --

7, 4

4, 1

4, 3 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet

Optional 6, 6

Up to CD10/Up ROM:40X to 10 max17Xmin


7, 6

Desktop

4, 1

10 / 100 4, 3 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet Optional 6, 6

Mini-tower --

Desktop

--

Up to CD10/Up ROM:40X to 10 max17Xmin Up to 48Xmax10/Up 20Xmin to 10

Microtower

4, 2

Optional 4, 4

Desktop


4, 2

10 / 100 4, 4 Optional







) . te vg ) ra ,A d B) KB PM .( ea (M x. r x . R a 2 3, a y e il. il. ax /m m bl or e/S . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Si Ty r d. ,a ,a ar Me be e e Mo rT :s st to al al (v AM x ot rd so r iv he y: ri v ot ac et um M a t R t r s a c F D n D F : O N : o / e r d o o o s Ca -R m rd rd di ta ys rt rm oc he an de de ot Au Fo CD Da Vi Pr Ba Vi Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Optional

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W98

e Op

ra

g tin

a

ic ph

p

8

8

$1439



8

$1363 8

8



ic

$1236 8

Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch



Gr

5

em st Sy


353

1

)

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

w 6830-EAU Pentium

w 6648-PAU Pentium

.

III/866

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

w 6648-PBU Pentium

.

III/866

III/866

III/866

6578-PAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

w 6831-EAU

.

.

.

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB

w 6578-PDU Pentium

III/866

256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB

.

w 6578-PCU Pentium

Hz (M

4

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/66 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltraATA/100 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/66 grated Intel 815e Direct AGP 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Ultra ATA/66 Integrated Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/100 grated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- InteUltra ATA/66 grated Intel 815e Direct AGP Ultra ATA/66

4, 1

4, 1

3, 1

4, 3

4, 3

10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet Optional

10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetIntegrated Up to Optional 10/Up to 10

3, 1

4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

Up to CD10/Up ROM:40X to 10 max17Xmin Up to 8X 10/Up to 10

4, 4

4, 4

4, 4

10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetIntegrated

Optional

Optional

Optional






Microtower

Desktop


Microtower

Desktop

Desktop

IBM 56K PCI v.90

--







) g. te Av ra ) B) M, ad (K . MB re x. .( RP ax 2 3 y a x , e il. il. a /m m bl or e/ . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Ty Si d. ,a ,a ar or Me be e e Mo rT :s st al M al (v t v v o e t : ct d t i i A m o r s M u ax t R to ry a s ch Fa ne Dr Dr F : O : N o / d r e o a o o s i C -R m rd rd ta d ys rt rm oc an he de de ot Da Au CD Fo Vi Ba Vi St Sl Ha Pa L2 Ha Et Me Pr d ee Sp

Pr

t Se st Li

ip Ch

E

e ic

80

80

80

$1566

Integrated $1576 Intel Direct AGP Video Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

Integrated $1590 Microsoft Intel 815e Windows Direct AGP 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT

80



80

W98



80


c

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

hi ap

Integrated $1363 80 Intel Direct AGP Video

Gr

5

em st Sy


O

ra pe

g ti n


1

z)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

6578-PBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

6840-EAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

6830-EBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

6840-G1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/933

6578-R1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/933

6578-RCU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/933 256KB 512

.

.

.

.

.

H (M

4


Ultra ATA/66

Open bay

Open bay Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video --, --, -Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video

--, --, --

20GB, --, -- nVidia UltraATA/100 M64


Ultra ATA/66

Optional 6, 6

Optional 4, 4

Optional 4, 4




Optional 6, 5

4, 3

Optional 4, 3

48Xmax20Xmin


48Xmax20Xmin

16/16

16/16


4, 2

4, 3

7, 6

4, 1

7, 4

4, 1

Desktop

Desktop

Mini-tower --

Microtower

Mini-tower --

Desktop







) g. te ) Av ra B) KB M, ad . P .( e (M x r x . R a 2 3, a y e il. il. ax /m m bl or e/S . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Si Ty r d. ,a ,a ar Me be e e Mo rT :s st to al al (v AM x ot rd so r iv he y: ri v ot ac et M um a t R t r s a c F D n D F : O N : o / e r d o o o s Ca -R m rd rd di ta ys rt rm oc he an de de ot CD Au Fo Da Vi Vi Pr Ba Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

80

80

80




Optional



80

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Optional

nVidia M64 $1693

ic

80

Pr

t Se

nVidia M64 $1693

p

80

i Ch

$1642

a

ic ph

E

Gr

5

em st Sy

st Li

e Op

ti ra

ng


355

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

w 6578-REU Pentium

.

GBU

w 6830-

.

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

III/933

III/933

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

.

w 6648-RBU Pentium

6578-RBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

III/933

w 6648-RAU Pentium

.

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

6578-RAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

III/933

w 6578-RDU Pentium

.

1

)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

. ax

Hz (M

4

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 20GB, --, -- nVidia 4X

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 20GB, --, -- Intel 815e Integrated Video


Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

3, 0



32/32 CDROM:48X max20Xmin 16/16 48Xmax20Xmin

10 / 100 4, 2 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 4, 2 EthernetIntegrated

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

Microtower

Desktop


Desktop


3, 0

4, 3


Desktop

Desktop

4, 1


4, 2


4, 4

10 / 100 4, 3 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetIntegrated

Optional








) . te vg ra B) ,A d B) (K PM ea (M x. r . R a 2 3, y e il. il. ax /m m bl or e/ . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Si Ty r d. ,a ,a ar Me be e e Mo :s rT st to al al (v AM x ot rd so he ri v y: riv ot ac et M um a t R t r a s c F n D D F : O : N o / r d e o o o s Ca -R m rd rd ta di ys rt rm oc he an de de ot Da Fo Ba Au Vi Vi CD Sl St Pa L2 Ha Et Me Pr Ha d ee Sp

hi ap

c

E

e ic

80

80


80


80

80

80 Intel 815e Integrated Video

$1897


$1821

80

Pr

t Se st Li

ip Ch


Gr

5

em st Sy

nVidia 4X $1959 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition nVidia M64 $1998 Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT

Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W2000/NT


Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W98

O

ra pe

g ti n


256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

.

1

z)

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

6579-NCU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

nVidia M64

nVidia 4X

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP

10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 10GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP

30GB, Ultra ATA/100 7200RPM, -30GB, UltraATA/100 7200RPM, --

6579-LBU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

SDRAM

SDRAM

nVidia 4X


30GB, Ultra ATA/100 7200RPM, --

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

III/933

SDRAM

SDRAM

NetVista A40p 6579-LAU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/733

GAU

w 6840-

.

III/933

w 6831-GBU Pentium

.

256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/933

w 6831-GAU Pentium

.

w 6578-RFU

H (M

4

8X

8X

Optional

Optional

Optional

--/--

--/--

--/--

32/32 48Xmax20Xmin

16/16

16/16

32/32 CDROM:48X max20Xmin




4, 2

4, 2

4, 2

4, 4

4, 4

7, 4

4, 1

4, 4


10 / 100 Ethernet

4, 2

4, 1

4, 2

10 / 100 Ethernet

4, 1


Desktop

Desktop

Desktop

Mini-tower

Microtower

Microtower

Desktop






) g. te Av ra ) B) M, ad (K . MB re x. .( RP ax 2 3 a y x , e l. S il. a /m m bl or ai e/ . /m pe d. ze va /m m ia de av yp r td st Si Ty d. ,a ar l, or Me be rT Mo :s st M al (v ve ta ve o e t : ct d t i i m A o r s r h y r o e u M t ax R t r s a c Fa D n D F : O N : o / r e d o a o o s i s d d R C m r r d ta y rt rm oc he an de de ot CD Vi Fo Vi Pr Pa L2 Ha Et Ba Au Da Sl St Me Ha ed pe g

Gr

a

ic ph

p

ic

8

$1936 8

$1832

$2035 8

Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch

8

8

8




W98


nVidia M64 $2097 8 Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT

nVidia 4X Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT nVidia 4X Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition W2000 nVidia 4X

er Op

in at

5

em st Sy


357

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

6579-NAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

6579-NBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/800 256KB 512

6579-P1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 256KB III/866

SDRAM

SDRAM

6649-NBU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/866 256KB

Ultra ATA/66

SDRAM

6649-NAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/800

Open bay

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

w 6841-E1U

.

1

z)

6579-NDU Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

H (M

4

--, --, --

--, --, -Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video

30GB, --, -- nVidia

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 30GB, --, -- nVidia

20GB, --, -- Integrated Intel 815e Direct AGP 3, 0

3, 0

4, 1

4, 1

2, 2

2, 2

4, 2

4, 2

10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet

Up to CD10/Up ROM:24X to 10 max10Xmin Up to CD10/Up ROM:24X to 10 max10Xmin

Optional 4, 4

Optional 6, 6

Optional

--/--


16/16

CDROM:48X max20Xmin CDROM:48X max20Xmin

16/16

7, 6

4, 3

4, 2

4, 4


--/-Optional

Mini-tower --

Desktop

Desktop

Desktop



Desktop







) g. te ) Av ra B) KB M, ad . P .( e (M x r x . a 2 3,R a y e l. l. ax /m m bl or ai e/S ai . /m pe d. ze /m m ia de av yp r av td st Si Ty d. ar l, l, or Me be Mo rT :s st (v ta ta ct t ive ive m AM x o rd so r he y: r o a e M u a t R t r s a c F D D O N : o /F e rn d o o o s: Ca -R m rd rd di ta ys rt rm oc he an de de ot Au Fo CD Da Vi Pr Ba Vi Pa L2 Ha Et Sl St Me Ha ed pe

a

ic ph

p

Pr

t Se st Li

i Ch

E

ic

Optional


80

80

80

nVidia $1661 Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Optional Integrated $1232 Intel 815e Direct AGP

nVidia

W98

80

80

Integrated $1498 Intel 815e Direct AGP W2000/NT

$1585

80

Integrated $1345 80 Intel 815e Direct AGP

Gr

5

em st Sy



er Op

i at

ng


1

z)

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

6579-PDU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/866 256KB 512

6841-G1U Pentium 256KB/ 0/512 III/933 256KB

6646-Q1U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/866 256KB 512

SDRAM

SDRAM

6579-PCU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/866 256KB 512

NetVista S40 legacy-free 6645-N3U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/667

SDRAM

6841-EAU Pentium 256KB/ 128/ III/866 256KB 512

H (M

4

Integrated Intel Direct AGP Video 20GB, --, -- Intel 810e

--, --, --

30GB, --, -- nVidia

30GB, --, -- nVidia

10GB, --, -- Intel 810e Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R. T. III

Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R. T. III

Open bay

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66


11/11

40Xmax17Xmin

10 / 100 Ethernet

2, 1

2, 1

10 / 100 Ethernet

40Xmax17Xmin

11/11

2, 0

2, 0

7, 6

4, 1

4, 2

6, 6

4, 1

4, 2

Optional

16/16

16/16


7, 4


10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet 10 / 100 Intel 10/ 100 Ethernet

48Xmax20Xmin

CDROM:48X max20Xmin CDROM:48X max20Xmin

16/16

Desktop (2x2)

Desktop (2x2)

Opt.

Opt.

Mini-tower --

Desktop

Desktop

Mini-tower --

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio




) . te vg ) ra ,A d B) KB PM .( ea (M x. r x . R a 2 3 y a x , e l. il. a /m m bl or e/S ai . /m pe d. va ze /m m de av yp r r ia td st Ty Si r d. ,a l, Me va be e e :s rT Mo st to M al a ( v t v o e t : t d i A i m r ac M u R ax to to ry ss ar ch F Dr ne D F : O : N o / e d r o a o o s C -R m rd rd ys ta di rt rm oc an he de de ot CD Ba Da Pr Fo Au Ha Vi Vi St Pa L2 Ha Et Sl Me ed pe tin

g

Gr

a

ic ph

ip

W2000

W2000

Intel 810e

Intel 810e

$1099

86

$1695 80

nVidia $1864 80 Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT Optional Integrated $1486 80 Intel Direct AGP Video

80

n se

e† Es

ic

80

Pr

t Se st Li

Ch

nVidia M64 $1802 Microsoft Windows 2000 with Choose and Recover Windows NT W98 nVidia $1788

O

ra pe

5

em st Sy


359

1

z)

) KB

SDRAM

SDRAM

Celeron/ 128KB/ 128/ 128KB 512 566

6643-12U

NetVista X40i 2179-750 Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/600

Ultra ATA/66

Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 566

6643-11U

SDRAM Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

Ultra ATA/66

6643-21U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/800

SDRAM

Ultra ATA/66

Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/667

Ultra ATA/66

15GB, --, -- Integrated Video

20.4GB, --, Inte-grated Video Graphics 20.4GB, --, Inte-grated Video Graphics Inte20GB, 5400RPM, grated Video -Graphics 10.1GB, --, Inte-grated Video Graphics 10.1GB, --, Inte-grated Video Graphics



SDRAM

6643-14U

NetVista X40 all-in-one 6643-13U Pentium 256KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 256KB III/667

NetVista S40p legacy-free 6646-Q1U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/866

6645-P1U Pentium 256KB/ 128/ 256KB 512 III/733

.( ax

H (M

4

24Xmax10Xmin

24Xmax10Xmin

24Xmax10Xmin

8/8

8/8

16/16

10 / 100 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 EthernetIntegrated 10 / 100 EthernetIntegrated

10 / 100 Ethernet

3, 0

3, 0

3, 0

3, 0

2, 1

2, 2

2, 1

2, 1

3, 0

3, 0

2, 0

2, 0

2, 1

2, 1


DVD:6Xm 10 / 100 2, 1 EthernetaxInte3.5Xmin grated

24Xmax10Xmin

16/16

16/16

24Xmax10Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

40Xmax17Xmin

8/8

11/11

11/11

All-in-one (2x3)

All-in-one (2x3)

All-in-one (2x3)

All-in-one (2x3)

All-in-one (2x3)

All-in-one (2x3)

Desktop (2x2)

Desktop (2x2)

Integrated

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

AC 97 Crystal CS 4299



AC-97 Audio



AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

) g. te Av ra ) M, ad . MB re .( RP ax 2 3 y x , e il. il. a /m m or bl e/ . /m pe va d. ze va /m m ia de yp r td st Ty Si d. ,a ,a ar or Me be Mo rT :s st al M al (v ve t ve o e t : ct d t i i A m o r s r y h r o M u ax t R t r a s c Fa D ne D F : O : N o / d r e o a o o s i s d d C -R m r r ta d y rt rm oc an he de de ot Da Au Fo St Ba CD Vi Me Vi Ha Sl Pa L2 Ha Et Pr d ee Sp er

hi ap

E

ic

86

Pr

W98

W2000

Integrated Video

Integrated Video Graphics


$2099 92

$2265 90

$2099 90

90

‡

Integrated Video Graphics Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition W98

$2499 90 Integrated Video Graphics

$2330 90

$1695 88

$1225

st Li

t Se

W2000

c

ip


Intel 810e

Intel 810e

Gr

Ch

W98

W2000

W2000

Op

g in at

5

em st Sy


.

rt

N

oc

e

ss

L2

Ty or Me

o

d.

m

t :s

pe

e ch

/S

Ca

pe

1

)

: ry

.

St

an

)

rd

or e rd

Ty iv Dr

2

pe e

Si de

o

P ,R

Vi

3

ze -R

OM

ble

re

, al

AC-97 Audio


Integrated


All-in-one (2x3)

5

3, 0

When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes.Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.


l. il . m ai va de av r ,a Mo to al t t t o o ac t ax t F ne F : : / r o s di ta ys rm he ot Au Ba Sl Fo Et Da

ia

4

)

4

24Xmax10Xmin

CD

.

r va

ax

(

/m

te


o

d.

ra

3

de

M RA

st

ad

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance.

8/8

Vi

g.

2

20GB, --, -- Integrated Video

Ha

iv Dr

y

Av M,

1

Ultra ATA/66

Ha

m

) MB

Me

.(

d ar

ax

d

. /m

B (K

d st

ax

Hz

/m

(M

Celeron/ 128KB/ 64/512 SDRAM 128KB 633

Pr

Key to Footnotes

2179-71U

Pa

um

r be

ed

er

a


Op

t in

g

st

Gr

5

em

ap

hi

Integrated Video

Sy

c

Ch

ip

Se

t


361

362

.

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 192

.

1161-260

32/ 160 64/ 192 64/ 192 32/ 160

128/ 128 128/ 128 128/ 128 128/ 128

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/550

64/ 192 64/ 192 64/ 192 64/ 192 64/ 192

128/ 128 128/ 128 128/ 128 256/ 256 256/ 256

w 1161-41U

.

2609-51U

Mobile Celeron/400 Mobile Celeron/450 2609-52U Mobile Celeron/450 2609-61U Mobile Pentium III/500 2609-62U Mobile Pentium III/500 i Series 1200 Mobile Celew 1161-210 ron/500 1161-230 Mobile Celeron/500 1161-250 Mobile Celeron/500 Mobile Celew 1161-11U ron/550

240 2609-41U

1

z)

1 /1 DIMM

1 /1 DIMM

1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM

1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM

H (M

6GB, 12

5GB, 12

--

2/2 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 5 NiMH 2.8, 5

4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

800x600

13.3'' NiMH 2.6, 5

12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 5

2/2 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 5

800x600

12.1'' NiMH 2.6, 5

4/4 TFT

800x600

4/4 HPA 13''

800x600

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

--

--

--

--

--

10.4'' Li-Ion 4.2, 3.5 10.4'' Li-Ion 4.2, 3.5

--

24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin

---

10.4'' Li-Ion 2.1, 3.5

10.4'' Li-Ion 2.1, 3.5

10.4'' Li-Ion 1.8, 3.5 --

800x600

2/2 TFT 2/2 TFT

800x600

12GB, 800x600

6GB, 12 6GB, 12 6GB, 12 5GB, 12

2/2 TFT

800x600

2/2 TFT 2/2 TFT

800x600 800x600

12GB, 12 6GB, 14 6GB, 14 12GB, SB compat

m

2.98

3.28

3.28

3.28

3.28

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.05x10.2x8

1.05x10.2x8

1.05x10.2x8

1.05x10.2x8

SB compat

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

AC-97 Audio 1.44x12.3x9.9 6.2

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition W98

W98

W98

W98

W2000

W98

W2000

W98

W98

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

--

N

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

--

--

--

Up to 4Mbps Up to 4Mbps Up to 4Mbps Up to 4Mbps Up to 4Mbps

18

18

$1649 18

$1449 18

$1149

$1499 18

$1349 18

$1149

$2399 14

$2299 14

$2099 14

$1999 14

$1899 14

7 8 ed l pe em de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e b g P s l e† in d or ic t t( at re Pr kh n gh er f ra or ei st sse W W Op In Li E

.) (in ns

1.05x10.2x8

Di

sio en

AC-97 Audio 1.44x12.3x9.9 6.2

SB compat

SB compat

SB compat

SB compat

SB compat

SB compat

SB compat

5

2 ) s) te 4 ) l. ra (m ) ) ai ), n) MB ad ed KB (MB rs r o .( 3 /a v re .( . al i ze pe ou we ax ogy t x e S h S l o ax m ( a n , / t b ol e (po ge d. e ia ze ./m d./m s: r tio st chn Ima ype y Lif me ar Si yp td lu ot t be (v M Sl r Ti T m so :s Te :s rT e ive ive RA ay ry ry bl he r y atte ge so Re Nu o Dr OM Dr di ac emo emo es D rt B h ar x. -R d eo ispl wa atte r c a C V a d e D i i a o Au P D B M C D M M C V V H L2 Pr

d ee Sp


Appendix F

IBM ThinkPad Family

1

64/ 192 64/ 192

1171-61U

1171-91U

.

.

i Series 1171-340

128/ 64/ 128 192

128/ 64/ 128 192 1 /1 DIMM

1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/550

1171-2AU

.

i Series 1171-310

1 /1 DIMM 1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/550

1171-71U

.

128/ 128 256/ 256

1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/550

1171-21U

.

Mobile Celeron/600 Mobile Pentium III/650 1310 Mobile Celeron/500 1340 Mobile Celeron/500

1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 192

1171-370

1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 /1 DIMM

1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/600

1161-71U

.

i Series 1300 1171-320 Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 192

1 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 192 ron/600

1161-51U

)

.

Hz (M

2

5

4/4 TFT

6GB, 12

6GB, 12 800x600

800x600

12.1'' NiMH 2.6, 5

AC-97 Audio

-DVD: 8Xmax2Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

4/4 TFT

12.1'' NiMH 2.6, 5

2/2 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 5

13.3'' NiMH 2.9, 5

12.1'' NiMH 2.3, 5

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin 24Xmax --10Xmin

m

e

--

--

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

.)

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6.2

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.39x12.3x9.9 6

13.9x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

1.39x12.3x9.9 6

1.44x12.3x9.9 6

W98

W98

W2000

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition W2000

W2000

W98

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition

$1699 18

$1699 18

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

--

--

N

N

18

$1599 18

$1249

$2249 18

$1899 18

$1399 18

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps Up to N 4Mbps

$1799 18 N

--

$1549 18

$1799 18

Up to N 4Mbps

N

$1699 18

Up to N 4Mbps

7 8 ed l pe em de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e g P s lb e† r ( n i d r ic n ho ht at re ig rk er e tP f ra We Wo Op In Lis Ess

(in

1.44x12.3x9.9 6.2

Di

ns io ns

SBP 16 com- 1.44x12.3x9.9 6 9 pat

AC-97 Audio

-DVD: 8Xmax2Xmin

4/4 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 2.5 24Xmax --10Xmin

13.3'' NiMH 2.6, 5

4/4 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.6, 5

4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

800x600

13.3'' NiMH 2.8, 5

12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 5

2/2 HPA 12.1'' NiMH 2.8, 2.5 24Xmax --10Xmin

10GB, 800x600 4/4 TFT 12 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

5GB, 12

5GB, 12

800x600

800x600

6GB, 12 5GB, 12

800x600

6GB, 12

10GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

10GB, 800x600 12

) s) te 4 ) l. ra (m ) ) ai ), n) MB d ad rs r o KB (MB .( 3 /av ee re ze .( al ou we ax o g y e x. Si h Sp l ot ( ax m o a l n , / t b o e (p ge d. e ia ze . / m d . /m s: r tio st chn Ima ype y Lif me ar Si yp td lu ot t be (v M Sl r Ti T m :s so Te rT :s e ive ive R A ay ry ry bl he so r y atte ge Re Nu o Dr OM Dr di ac e m o e m o es D B har rt x. -R d wa atte eo ispl r c a a C e d V D i i o Au P D B M C D M C M V V Ha L2 Pr d ee Sp

Appendix F: IBM ThinkPad Family

363

Mobile Pentium III/500 Mobile Celeron/500

Mobile Pentium III/500

2621-492

i Series 1500 2621-560 Mobile Celeron/466 2651-542 Mobile Celeron/500 2651-562 Mobile Pentium III/500 2651-592 Mobile Pentium III/500 390X 2626-L0U Mobile Pentium III/450 2626-L2U Mobile Pentium III/450 2626-LNU Mobile Pentium III/450 2626-M0U Mobile Pentium III/500 2626Mobile PenMNU tium III/500 600E 2645-4BU Mobile Pentium II/400 2645-8BU Mobile Pentium II/400 2645-5BU Mobile Pentium II/400

2621-482

2621-483

i Series 1400 2621-422 Mobile Celeron/500 2621-442 Mobile Celeron/500 64/ 256 64/ 256

32/ 256 64/ 256

64/ 256 64/ 256 64/ 256 64/ 256 64/ 512 64/ 512 64/ 512 64/ 512 64/ 512 64/ 288 64/ 288 64/ 288

128/ 128 128/ 128 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256

256/ 64/ 256 256

256/ 256 128/ 128

128/ 128 128/ 128

1

z)

2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM 2 /1 DIMM

H (M

5

Li-Ion 3.0, 5

1024x768 4/4 TFT

1024x768 2.5/ 2.5 1024x768 2.5/ 2.5 1024x768 2.5/ 2.5 1024x768 2.5/ 2.5 1024x768 2.5/ 2.5 15'' 15''

TFT TFT

Li-Ion 3.7, 6

Li-Ion 3.3, 6

Li-Ion 3.3, 6

Li-Ion 3.7, 6

13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3

14.1'' 14.1''

TFT TFT

14.1''

TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

Li-Ion 3.7, 6

14.1'' 12.1'' NiMH 2.0/3.0, 2.5 14.1'' Li-Ion 2.0/3.0, 4 15'' Li-Ion 2.0/3.0, 4

4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

15''

800x600

10GB, 1024x768 2.5/ TFT 12 2.5 10GB, 1024x768 2.5/ TFT 12 2.5 10GB, 1024x768 2.5/ TFT 12 2.5

12GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12

6.4GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12

12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

14.1''

14.1''

m

.)

1.69x12.9x10. 7.8 6 1.69x12.9x10. 7.8 6

-CS4236

ESS1946S ESS1946S

---

ESS1946S ESS1946S

--

ESS1946S

ES1946 Solo1E ES1946 Solo1E ES1946 Solo1E

--

--

--

--

--

7.5

7.9

7.9

7.9

W98 WNT4.0 W98

5.6 5.6 5.7

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

WNT4.0

W98

WNT4.0

W2000

W98

W2000

W2000

W2000

W98

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.8x12.9x10.6 7.9

1.8x12.9x10.6 7.9

1.8x12.4x10.2 7.7

1.8x12.4x10.2 7.7

1.8x12.4x10.2 7.7

1.69x12.9x10. 6 1.59x12.9x10. 6 1.59x12.9x10. 6 1.59x12.9x10. 6

W98

W98

N

N

N

Y

N

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Up to N 4Mbps Up to N 4Mbps Up to N 4Mbps


--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

W98

--

W98 W98

20

$3199 28

$3099 28

$2999 28

$2499 24

$2399 24

$2349 24

$2349 24

$2249 24

$2499 22

$2399 22

$1999 22

$1999 22

$2499 20

$2199 20

$2099 20

$1799

$1299 20

7 8 d l ee em de 6 Sp st Mo rt Sy s.) g Po se lb e† r ( n c i d o t r i nt at re kh gh er e tP f ra ei or W W Op In Lis Ess

(in ns

1.69x12.9x10. 7.8 6 1.69x12.9x10. 7.8 6

Di

sio en

Std. ES1946 Solo- 1.69x12.9x10. 7.8 1E 6

-ES1946 Solo1E Std. ES1946 Solo1E

-ES1946 Solo1E Std. ES1946 Solo1E

24Xmax -CS4239 -10Xmin 24Xmax -CS4239 -10Xmin DVD:2X Std. CS4239 max

24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin

24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin

24Xmax -10Xmin DVD:6X max1Xmin Li-Ion 2.0/3.0, 24Xmax 4 -10Xmin NiMH 2.0/3.0, DVD:6X 2.5 max1Xmin Li-Ion 2.0/3.0, DVD:6X max4 1Xmin

NiMH 2.0/3.0, 2.5 12.1'' NiMH 2.0/3.0, 2.5

4/4 HPA 13'' 4/4 TFT

800x600 800x600

12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12 12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

6GB, 12 6GB, 12

2 ) s) te 4 ) il. ra ) (m , d MB B) MB) va d s) o n . ( y3 e ea (K ( l /a ee ur er x r z . . a i p o a g t e ax (h ow ax n ,S /m olo ge S to S bl d. fe (p e ia ze ./m d./m s: r tio st chn Ima ype y Li me ar Si yp td lu ot t be (v M e r Ti Sl T m :s so Te rT :s e ive M ri v R A l ay ry ry bl er y atte ge he so Re Nu o Dr O D o o a c s . o t r R t di e D B ha r x m m rd Ca d e D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Me C Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr

ed pe


.

1

2

1024x768 4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

1024x768 4/4 TFT

800x600

6GB, 14

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

2628-1XU

800x600

1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM

6GB, 14

256/ 64/ 256 512


800x600

1 So-/1 6GB, 14 SoDIMM

128/ 64/ 128 512

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

2 /2 DIMM

12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12 12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12 12GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 12

6GB, 12 6GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12 12GB, 12

256/ 64/ 256 576

2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM 2 /2 DIMM

64/ 576 64/ 576 64/ 576 64/ 576 64/ 576

)

64/ 576 64/ 576 64/ 576

256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256

256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256 256/ 256

2628-21U

2645-9EU Mobile Pentium III/500 2646-4EU Mobile Pentium III/500 2645-9FU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 2645-5FU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 A20m 2628-11U Mobile Celeron/500

600X 2645-3EU Mobile Pentium III/450 2645-7EU Mobile Pentium III/450 2645-8PU Mobile Pentium III/500 2645-4EU Mobile Pentium III/500 2645-5EU Mobile Pentium III/500

Hz (M

5

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0hrs, 3

CS4239

CS4239

CS4239

CS4239

CS4239

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

m

4.99

4.99

-1

4.99

4.99

4.99

4.99

4.99

4.99

.)

W98

W98

Crystal Semi- 1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a

W98

W98

W2000

W98

WNT4.0

W98

W98

W2000

WNT4.0

W98

N

N

N

N

N

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps Up to N 4Mbps Up to N 4Mbps


$1799

$1749

30

30

$1699 30

$3199 28

$3099 28

$3757 28

$3099 28

$2999 28

$2699 28

$2599 28

$2699 28

$2599 28

7 8 ed l em pe de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e b g P s l e† r ( in d r ic n ho at ht re ig rk er e tP fra We Wo Op In Lis Ess

in s(

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

-1x-1x-1

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

1.4x11.8x9.4

Di

n sio en

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a CS4239 CS4610

Std. CS4239

CS4239

---

Std. CS4239

Std. CS4239

--

--

--

--

24Xmax --10Xmin

--

24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin 24Xmax -10Xmin DVD:6X max2.3Xmin 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, -3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 24Xmax 3 -10Xmin 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0hrs, 24Xmax 3 -10Xmin

13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3 13.3'' Li-Ion 3.0 hrs, 3

) s) te 4 ) l. ra (m ai ), n) MB B) MB) ad rs r o ed . ( y3 /a v e (K e l ( u e x z r e . a i . o w p a g e ot (h ax ax n ,S /m olo ge S Sp bl :t e (po /m io d. /m ia ze r pe ts d. st chn Ima ype y Lif me ut d. ar Si be lo Ty st ol st (v T ter Ti ive AM y Te ble ive e: es um y: yS or M r y r R r r e h t s r R N o D O D o o a c la o te di es D Baharg rt -R x. m m rd Ca de D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Me C Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee


365

256/ 64/ 256 512

2628-2XU Mobile Pentium III/500

1

2

800x600

6GB, 14

4/4 TFT

800x600

800x600

800x600

6GB, 14 6GB, 14

1 So-/1 6GB, 14 SoDIMM

2628-3SU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12

15''

15''

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12

2628-32U Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512 1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM

15''

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

2628-3XU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

15''

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

800x600

6GB, 14

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT So12 DIMM

256/ 64/ 256 512

800x600

1 So-/1 6GB, 14 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM 1 So-/1 SoDIMM

800x600

1 So-/1 6GB, So14 DIMM

z)

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

2628-31U

2628-2TU Mobile Pentium III/500

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

256/ 64/ 256 512

2628-24U Mobile Pentium III/500

2628-1TU

256/ 64/ 256 512

Celeron/500 128/ 64/ 128 512

2628-12U


Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 512

2628-14U

H (M

5

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

CS4239 CS4610

Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a CS4239 CS4610

CS4239 CS4610

CS4239 CS4610

Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a CS4239 CS4610

) s) te 4 l. ra B) ) (m ) ) , ai (M 3 s) o n ad ed KB (MB /av ur er x. gy re .( . iz e al pe o a t x x e w S h S l o a ( a o n /m o l , to b ge d. fe (p e ia ze s: r ./m d./m ti o st chn Ima ype y Li me ar Si yp lu td ot t be (v e M Sl r Ti T so :s m Te rT :s e ive riv RA lay ry ry bl er y atte ge he so Re Nu o Dr OM D o o a c s . o t r R t di e D x B ha r m m rd Ca de D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD C Me Me Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee Sp

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

W98

W2000

W98

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

W2000

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

W98

W2000

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

W98

W98

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

W2000

W2000

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

W98

en

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

$2299 30

$2299 30

$2299 30

$2199 30

$1949 30

$1899 30

$1849 30

$1849 30

$1849 30

$1799 30

$1799 30

7 8 d l ee m de te 6 Sp ys Mo .) rt S s o e g P s lb e† in d or ic t( at re Pr kh n gh er f ra or ei st sse i W In W Op L E

.) ( in

1.73x12.7x10. 6.4 7

m Di

ns sio


1

2

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2 /1 DIMM

2628-1CU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

2628-1VU

2628-3AU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 512 ron/550

2628-3UU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

2628-3CU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

2628-3VU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

2628-4AU Mobile Pen- 256/ 64/ tium III with 256 512 SpeedStep Technology/ 600

800x600

800x600

800x600

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

4/4 TFT

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

6GB, 14

6GB, 14

6GB, 14

4/4 TFT

2628-1UU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

800x600

2 /1 DIMM

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/550 128 512

2628-1AU 6GB, 14

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

z)

2628-3TU Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ 128 512 ron/500

H (M

5

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

14.1''

15''

15''

15''

15''

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.5, 3

15''

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semiconductor CS4624/ CS4297a

) s) te 4 l. ra B) (m ) ) ai ), n) (M 3 ad ed KB (MB rs r o /a v x. gy re .( al i ze . pe ou we a t x x e S h S l o o a ( a n , /m ol S b :t e (po ge /m io d. /m ia ze r pe ts d. st chn Ima ype y Lif me ut d. ar Si be lo Ty st ol st (v M r Ti Te ive ive le e: es um yS y: or te yT RA lay o Dr OM Dr or ab ter Bat rge ch mor ss .R o tN R di a e p D r x d w e m t a a C V e a D e h ie id Dis ar oc Au Pa D B M C 2 r M M C V V H L P ed pe

W2000

W98

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

W2000

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

W98

W98

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

1.47x12.7x10. 2.75 7

W2000

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

W2000

W98

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

W98

1.47x12.7x10. 6.1 7

si en

W2000

m

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

Di

N

N

N

N

--

N

Up to N 4Mbps

--

Up to N 4Mbps

--

Up to N 4Mbps

--

Up to N 4Mbps

--

Up to N 4Mbps

7

$2399 30

$2499 30

$2399 30

$2399 30

$2299 30

$1999 30

$1899 30

$1899 30

$1799 30

$2399 30

8 d l ee em de 6 Sp st Mo rt Sy s.) o e b g P e† rs (l in d ri c n t ho at ht re ig rk er e tP f ra We Wo Op In Lis Ess

.) in s( on


367

2628-4UU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 600 2628-4CU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 600 2628-4VU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 600 2628-41U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2628-4XU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2628-42U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2628-4SU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2628Mobile Pen4WU tium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700

1

2

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

2 /1 DIMM

2 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

2 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT So12 DIMM

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

2 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

256/ 64/ 256 512

256/ 64/ 256 512

256/ 64/ 256 512

256/ 64/ 256 512

256/ 64/ 256 512

14.1''

256/ 64/ 256 512

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

2 /1 DIMM

14.1''

256/ 64/ 256 512

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 14

2 /1 DIMM

)

256/ 64/ 256 512

Hz (M

5

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

CS4239 CS4610

CS4239 CS4610

-CDROM:24 Xmax10Xmin

1.73x12.7x10. 6.1 7

1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7

Crystal Semi- 1.73x12.3x10. 6.4 7 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a 24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

W2000

W98

W2000

W98

1.73x12.7x10. 6.1 7

-CDROM:24 Xmax10Xmin

CS4239 CS4610

W98


24Xmax --10Xmin

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

W2000

a


er Op

W2000

ht

6

.)


g ei W

s (lb

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

en

.)

W98

m

(in


Di

ns sio

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

) s) te 4 ) l. ra (m ) ) ai ), n) MB d ad rs r o KB (MB .( 3 /av ee ze re .( al ou we ax o g y x. e Si h Sp l ot ax ( m a o l n / , t b o : ge io /m d. fe (p /m ia ze r ts pe d. ut st chn Ima ype y Li me d. ar Si be lo st Ty ol st (v M r Ti Te ive ive le es e: um yS y: or y T te R A l ay o Dr OM Dr or ab ter Bat rge c h mo r ss .R o tN R di a e p D x d r e w m t a r C a V e e a D h id D is ie a oc Au Pa D B M C 2 r C M M V V H L P d ee Sp

N

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

--

$2649 30

$2549 30

$2549 30

$2549 30

$2449 30

$2599 30

$2499 30

$2499 30

7 8 d l ee em de Sp st Mo rt Sy e Po s e† d or ic t re Pr kh n f ra or st sse W In Li E

Up to N 4Mbps

g tin


2628-4TU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2628-4LU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 A20p 2629-61U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2629-6SU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2629-62U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2629-6TU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 2629-6AU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750

1

2

14.1''

15''

15''

15''

15''

15''

256/ 128/ 2 S0-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 128/ 1 So-/1 18GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 0 16 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 128/ 1 So-/1 18GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 256 512 So0 16 DIMM

256/ 128/ 1 So-/1 18GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 16 0 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 128/ 1 So-/1 18GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 256 512 So16 0 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 16 0 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 64/ 256 512

14.1''

)

1 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 12 SoDIMM

Hz (M

5

Li-Ion 5, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3

Li-Ion 3.7, 3


W98

W2000

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.79x13.2x10. 7.6 7 maxconductor 2Xmin CS4624/ CS4297a --

W2000

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.79x13.2x10. 7.6 7 conductor maxCS4624/ 2Xmin CS4297a

6X-2X

W98

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.79x13.2x10. 7.6 7 maxconductor 2Xmin CS4624/ CS4297a

W98



6

.) bs

W2000

m

.)

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

$2749

Up to N 4Mbps

$3599 30

$3649 30

$3549 30

$3549 30

$3449 30

30

$2649 30

Up to N 4Mbps

7 8 d l ee em de Sp st Mo rt Sy e g Po e† rs (l c in d o i t t r h a h re ig rk er en tP fra We Wo Op In Lis Ess

(in


Di

ns sio en

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.79x13.2x10. 7.6 7 conductor maxCS4624/ 2Xmin CS4297a

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

) s) te 4 l. ra B) ) (m ) ) , ai d (M 3 s) on ad KB (MB /a v ur er ee x. gy re .( al iz e . o p a t x x e w S h S p o ( a a n , /m olo ge S bl :t e (po /m d. /m ia ze r tio pe ts d. st chn Ima ype y Lif me d. ar Si lu be lo Ty st st (v M r Ti T so Te e ive ive e: um y: yS or R A l ay bl er y atte ge Re o Dr OM Dr or a ch mor ss . o tN r R t di a e p D B r x m a rd C de D is ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Me Ch Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee


369

2629-6UU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750 2629-6CU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750 2629-6VU Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750 T Series 2647-21U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 2647-24U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 2647-61U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 2647-64U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 650 2647-41U Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700

1

13.3'' Li-Ion 4.0, 3

6GB, 14

6GB, 14

6GB, 14

6GB, 14

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

1024x768 8/8 TFT

1024x768 8/8 TFT

1024x768 8/8 TFT

1024x768 8/8 TFT

15''

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 256 512 So0 16 DIMM

14.1''

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

13.3'' Li-Ion 4.0, 3

13.3'' Li-Ion 4.0, 3

13.3'' Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 5, 3

Li-Ion 5, 3

15''

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 0 16 256 512 SoDIMM

Li-Ion 5, 3

15''

z)

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1400x105 16/ TFT 256 512 So0 16 DIMM

H (M

5

W98

4.6

4.6

4.6

4.6

5.2

Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor maxCS4624/ 2Xmin CS4297a

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

24Xmax --10Xmin

--

W98

W2000

W2000

W98

W2000


6X-2X

--

W2000

6X-2X


m

Up to Y 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

7

34

34

$3349 34

$2849 34

$2749

$2749

$2649 34

$3799 30

$3699 30

$3699 30

8 ed l pe em de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e g P s lb e† r ( n i d o ic t t at re Pr kh n gh er f ra or ei st sse W W Op In Li E

.) (in ns

W98

--

Di

sio en


6X-2X

2 ) s) te 4 ) il. ra (m ), n) d MB B) MB) va d rs r o . ( y3 e (K ea ( l /a ee u x z r e . . i a p o a g t e ax (h ow ax n /m olo ge S ,S to S bl /m io d. fe (p ia ze r s: . /m pe d. st chn Ima ype y Li me ut ar Si ot td be st Ty ol e i (v M e Sl Te :s le r y T tter e T e: es um or ri v M r iv RA lay ry ry b h s R N o D O D o o a g c s a e . o t di e D B ar x -R rt m m rd Ca de D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Me Ch Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr

ed pe


2647-52U

2647-55U

2647-52U

2647-84U

2647-86U

2647-44U

2647-81U

2647-46U

Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 700 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750 Mobile Pentium III with SpeedStep Technology/ 750

1

2

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

14.1''

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 /1 256 512 DIMM

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

z)

256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 12GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT 256 512 SoDIMM

H (M

5

Li-Ion 3.75, 3

Li-Ion 3.75, 3

Li-Ion 3.75, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

Li-Ion 4.0, 3

5.2

5.2

5.2

5.2

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor maxCS4624/ 2.3Xmin CS4297a DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor maxCS4624/ 2Xmin CS4297a Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a

DVD:6X Std. Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor maxCS4624/ 2.3Xmin CS4297a

Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a

5.2

5.2

Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a DVD:6X -max2Xmin

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

5.2

Crystal Semi- 1.3x12x9.8 conductor CS4624/ CS4297a DVD:6X -max2Xmin

6X-2.3X --

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

W2000

W98

W98

W2000

W2000

W98

W2000

W98

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to Y 4Mbps

Up to Y 4Mbps

Up to Y 4Mbps

Up to Y 4Mbps

$3799 34

$3799 34

$3699 34

$3549 34

$3549 34

$3449 34

$3449 34

$3449 34

7 8 ed l em pe de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e g P s lb e† r ( n i d ri c n ho ht at re ig rk er e tP f ra We Wo Op In Lis Ess

.) ( in

5.2

m Di

ns sio en


) s) te 4 ) il. ra (m ), n) MB d B) MB) va d rs r o . ( y3 e ea (K l /a ( u ee x r z e . i a . o p a g t e w (h ax ax n /m o l o g e S ,S to bl e (po io /m d. ia ze r s: . /m pe d. st chn Ima ype y Lif me ut ar Si ot td be Ty st ol e i (v e r Sl :s AM y Te ble e: es um or ri v M y T tte e T riv R ry ry h s r R N o D a O D o o g a c a s l e o t di e D B har rt -R x. m m rd Ca de D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD C Me Me Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee Sp


371

1

2

Li-Ion 4.75, 3

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8,

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8,

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8,

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8,

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8,

256/ 128/ 1 So-/0 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM 256/ 128/ 1 So-/0 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM 256/ 128/ 1 So-/0 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM 256/ 128/ 1 So-/0 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM 256/ 128/ 1 So-/1 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM





2662-37U

2662-31U


Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 320

12.1'' Li-Ion 2.1,

2662-12U

4/4 TFT

12.1'' Li-Ion 2.1,

14.1''

Li-Ion 3.75, 3

1 So-/1 10GB, 800x600 SoDIMM

20GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT

14.1''

4/4 TFT

Mobile Cele- 128/ 64/ ron/500 128 320

Mobile Pen- 256/ 128/ 2 /1 tium III with 256 512 DIMM SpeedStep Technology/ 750

Mobile Pen- 256/ 128/ 2 So-/1 20GB, 1024x768 8/8 TFT tium III with 256 512 SoDIMM SpeedStep Technology/ 750

z)

1 So-/1 10GB, 800x600 SoDIMM

X20 2662-11U

T20 2647-L1U

2647-95U

H (M

5

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

24Xmax --10Xmin

DVD:6X -max2Xmin

m Di

ns sio en

Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A Crystal Semiconductor CS4281/ CS4297A

3.52

3.52

3.52

3.52

3.52

3.52

3.52

1.2x11x8.9

1.2x11x8.9

1.2x11x8.9

1.2x11x8.9

1.2x11x8.9

1.2x11x8.9

5.2

5.2

W2000

W98

W2000

W98

W98

W2000

W98


W2000

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

Up to N 4Mbps

$3099 38

$2999 38

$2999 38

$2999 38

$2899 38

$2299 38

$2199 38

$3599 34

$3899 34

7 8 ed l pe em de 6 st tS Mo Sy s.) or e b g P s l e† in d or ic t t( at re Pr kh n gh er f ra or ei st sse W Op In W Li E

.) ( in

1.2x11x8.9



) s) te 4 ) il. ra (m ), n) MB B) MB) va ad ed rs r o . ( y3 e e (K l /a ( e u x r z e . a . i p o a g e ot ax (h ow ax n /m o l o g e S ,S bl :t io /m d. fe (p /m ia ze r ts pe d. st chn Ima ype y Li me ut d. ar Si be lo st ol Ty e st (v T ter Ti AM y Te ble ive es e: um yS y: or ri v M y r R r r e t h r s R N o D O a D o o a c l o te di es D Ba a r g x. -R rt m m rd Ca de D isp ew Bat oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Ch Me Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee Sp


.

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

256/ 128/ 1 So-/0 20GB, 1024x768 4/4 TFT 256 320 SoDIMM

)

5

12.1'' Li-Ion 3.8, --

m

en

Crystal Semi- 1.2x11x8.9 conductor CS4281/ CS4297A

Di

ns sio

3.52

.)

W2000

Up to N 4Mbps

$3099 38

7 8 d l ee m de te 6 Sp ys Mo .) rt S s o e g P e† rs (lb in d r ic ho at ht re ig rk er t P se n f ra e o p s i n s W W O I L E

(in


Actual weight may vary due to vendor components, manufacturing process and options. W98 = Windows 98, WNT = Windows NT Workstation, W2000 = Windows 2000


Unless otherwise noted, results obtained using BAPCo’s (Business Applications Performance Corporation) SYSmark benchmark test. Battery life will vary based on many factors including screen brightness, applications, features, power management, battery conditioning, and other customer preferences. Recharge time will also vary.

TFT = Thin Film Transistor

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance. For Mobile Intel Pentium III processors featuring Intel SpeedStep technology, this denotes maximum performance mode; battery optimization mode is approximately 80% of maximum performance mode. When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments. For mobile Intel Pentium III processors featuring Intel SpeedStep technology, this denotes maximum performance mode; battery optimization mode is approximately 80% of maximum performance mode.

Key to Footnotes


Hz (M

) s) te 4 l. ra B) ) (m ) ) , ai (M 3 s) r on ad av ed r KB (MB . / e e ( l e u x r . iz . p o we a gy ta e ax (h ax n ,S /m olo ge S to bl e (po d. e ia ze . / m d . /m s: r tio st chn Ima ype y Lif me ar Si td yp lu ot t be e (v e M Sl T ter Ti m :s so ve T rT :s v e i A i l e e u y y o r M y R l ay s R N o D O Dr or ab ter Bat rge c h mo r o di es D rt x. -R m a rd Ca ew Bat de D isp oc Au Pa DV Ma CD Me Me Ch Vi Vi Ha L2 Pr d ee Sp


373

u tN

m

r be

n sio en 1

ht ig We

6 oz. (with batteries installed)

.)

8602-50U 4.5 x 3.1 x 0.45 4.2 oz. (with batteries installed

WorkPad c3 8602-40U 4.5 x 3.1 x 0.45 4.2 oz. (with batteries installed)

ge

Ca l Pa

m

OS d re ry te

pe Ty

2 Li-Ion (included)

2 Li-Ion (included)

1.115 Mbps Infrared

1.115 Palm OS 3.5 (with Mbps improved applications: Infrared Agenda view, Address duplication, Snooze-on alarms and Mask private appointments)

8MB (approximately 10,000 addresses, 5 years of appointments, 3,000 to-do items, 3,000 memos, 400 e-mails)

2 AAA alkaline (included)

t Ba

Palm OS v.3.1

1.115 Mbps Infrared

f ra In

2MB = approx. 6000 addresses, 3000 appointments, 1500 to do items, 1500 memos, 200 e-mails

Palm OS v.3.1 4MB = approx. 12,000 addresses, 6000 appointments, 3000 to do items, 3000 memos, 400 e-mails

a or St

2

ty ci pa

weight may vary due to vendor components, manufacturing process, and options. MB = one million bytes, accessible capaicity may be less. 750 memos or e-mail of approximately 128 characters in length.

Key to Footnotes 1 Actual

2

m Di

WorkPad 8602-30X 4.7 x 3.2 x 0.7

r Pa

in s(

iz e

(in

m Co

.)

pa

le tib

i Ma

m te ys lS

s

Lotus Notes 4.52; Windows Mes160 x 160 pixels, backlit on demand/ saging 4.0; Lotus cc: Mail v. 7.0, 6.0 and 2.5; MS Outlook 97; MS Out2 3/8 x 2 3/8 look Express; MS Exchange 4.0 or Eudora Pro and Light 3.0.1 Lotus cc: Mail v 7.0, 6.0 and 2.5, MS 160 x 160 pixels, backlit on demand/ Outlook, MS Outlook, Express, MS Exchange 4.0 or higher, Windows 2 3/8 x 2 3/8 Messaging 4.0, Eudora Pro and Light 3.0.1 or higher, Lotus Notes 4.5 4 , MS Mail 3.5

160 x 160 pixels, Lotus Notes 4.52; Windows Mesbacklit on demand/ saging 4.0; Lotus cc: Mail v. 7.0, 6.0 2 3/8 x 2 3/8 and 2.5; MS Outlook 97; MS Outlook Express; MS Exchange 4.0 or Eudora Pro and Light 3.0.1

e /S yp yT la p s Di


1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

6867-30U Pentium III/667

Pentium III/733



Pentium III/800

6867-41U

6867-52U



6867-72U

Pentium III/933

1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512

Pentium III/667

6867-37U

IntelliStation E Pro 2D 6867-32U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ 1 256 512 III/667 PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM PC 700 ECC RDRAM Matrox Millennium G400

Matrox Millennium G400


48Xmax20Xmin

16/16 Ultra ATA/66 15GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T

16/16 Ultra ATA/66 15GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T 48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

16/16 Ultra2 SCSI 9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmaxwith S.M.A.R.T. 20Xmin


16/16 Ultra2 SCSI 9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmaxwith S.M.A.R.T. 20Xmin

Matrox Millennium G400 Matrox Millennium G400

16/16 Ultra ATA/66 13.5GB, 9 48Xmaxwith S.M.A.R.T 20Xmin

16/16 Ultra ATA/66 13.5GB, 9 48Xmaxwith S.M.A.R.T 20Xmin

9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmax16/16 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with 20Xmin S.M.A.R.T. 9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmax16/16 Wide Ultra2 20Xmin SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 16/16 Ultra ATA/66 13.5GB, 9 48Xmaxwith S.M.A.R.T 20Xmin




Appian Gemini


5, 3

5, 2

5, 2

5, 2

5, 2

5, 3

5, 3

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

5, 2

5, 3

4, 1

5, 2

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

. 4 1 ax ) ) ./m te Hz td ) ra B) (M : s (KB B) (M s d ad PM (M or x. x. re ee R s . 2 t a 3 p y , e l. il. es ./ma ax /S /m Se bl or ai pe va ze p d. m ia oc /m pe av r Si Ty hi ,a st ar Pr std std. Ty l, Me be al (v ta k of he: sC ive ive : or m AM ot rd r r o c y r M s t u t i or a R r D D c e O : h d N o b Ca es s: o tw -R rd rd ys m ap rt m an ot oc de Ne CD Ha Sl Ba Ha Gr St Pa Me Vi Pr Nu L2

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

o di Au

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

W200

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

e Op

g ti n ra

s Sy

5

m te

Appendix G: IBM IntelliStation Family

375

Appendix G

IBM Intellistation Family

375

.

IntelliStation M Pro 2D 6868-21U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 600 III/667 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-20U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 600 III/667 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-23U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 600 III/667 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-22U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/667 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-30U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 600 III/733 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-32U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/733 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM

Rational 6867-78U

6867-65U

6867-55U

6867-45U

6867-34U

1

z)

9.1GB, 7.5 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 9.1GB, 7.5 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 9.1GB, 7.5 Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

9.1GB, 7.5 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 13.5GB, 9 Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T

5, 2

5, 2

5, 2

5, 3

5, 2

6, 4

9.1GB, 7.5 16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Ultra ATA/66 13.5GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T



9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

6, 4

6, 5

6, 5


48Xmax20Xmin

6, 5


13.5GB, 9 48Xmax16/16 Ultra ATA/66 with S.M.A.R.T 20Xmin

6, 4

Appian Gemini

48Xmax20Xmin

5, 3 CDROM:48X max20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 7.5 16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Ultra ATA/66 13.5GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T


64/ 64

64/ 64

32/ 32

32/ 32

32/ 32

Appian Gemini

PC 700 IBM Fire GL1 ECC RDRAM Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 700 IBM Fire GL1 III/667 1 256 512 ECC RDRAM 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 700 IBM Fire GL1 Pentium ECC III/733 1 256 512 RDRAM 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 700 ELSA GLoria II Pentium ECC III/800 1 256 512 RDRAM 1/ 256/ 128/ PC 700 ELSA GLoria II Pentium III/866 1 256 512 ECC RDRAM Suite Enterprise on IBM IntelliStation 1/ / Pentium 256/ PC 700 Matrox Millennium G400 III/933 1 512 ECC RDRAM

IntelliStation E Pro 3D 6867-35U Pentium 1/ 256/ 128/ III/667 1 256 512

H (M

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

4, 1

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

Ethernet adapter

. 4 ax ) /m te d. ) ra B) st d B) (M s: (KB M a r . M P e r so x . .( 2 t ax 3, R y e l. l. es ./ma ax /S Se /m bl or ai ai pe ze p d. m ia oc /m pe av av r Si Ty hi st ar Pr std std. l, l, Ty Me be (v M ta ta k of he: d sC ive ive : or m A o r r o r c y M r t s t u i or R D D O : h da N or s: be Ca c es o tw -R rd rd ys m ap rt an m ot oc de Ne CD Ha Sl Ba St Gr Ha Pa Me Vi Nu L2 Pr ed pe

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio


AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

o di Au

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

er Op

in at

g

5

em st Sy


1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-52U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/866 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-50U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/866 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-62U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/933 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-60U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/933 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-42U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/800EB 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-40U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/800EB 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM IntelliStation M Pro 3D 6868-35U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/733 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-36U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/733 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-37U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/733 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 6868-56U Pentium III/866 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-57U Pentium 1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 III/866 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM


z)

1

32/ 32 64/ 64 128/ 128 64/ 64 128/ 128

ELSA GLoria II

Intense3D Wildcat 4110 ELSA GLoria II

Intense3D Wildcat 4110

Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T

16/16 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 16/16 EIDE with S.M.A.R.T.

9.1GB, 6

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

9.1GB, 6

48Xmax20Xmin

15GB, 9

6, 3

6, 4

6, 3

6, 4

6, 4

6, 4

6, 4

9.1GB, 7.5 48Xmax20Xmin

6, 4

6, 5

6, 4

6, 4

6, 5

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 7.5 16/16 Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 16/16 Ultra ATA/66 15GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T

16/16 Wide Ultra2 9.1GB, 7.5 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. 16/16 Wide Ultra 9.1GB, 7.5 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Ultra ATA/66 15GB, 9 with S.M.A.R.T

IBM Fire GL1








7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

. 4 ax ) /m te d. ) ra st B) : MB B) M ad rs . (K .( M ed P e ( o x r e . 2 t a 3, R p y e ss ax il. il. ax /m Se or bl c e /m e/S pe va ze va d. m /m ip r ia ro td. r yp Si Ty ,a st d. ,a Me Ch e e be al fP :s al st (va rT k m AM ot rd ri v riv ot cs y: M r o che t so t u i or a R r D D e s : O : h d N o e s b Ca o tw -R rd rd ys m ap an rt m ot oc de Ne Ha Sl Ba St CD Ha Gr Pa Me Vi Pr Nu L2 H (M

io

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

AC-97 Audio

d Au

a er

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

W200

Op

ti

ng

5

em st Sy


377

1

)

128/ 128 64/ 64 128/ 128

--



Optional

IntelliStation Z Pro 2D 1/ 256/ 6866-21U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 733 1/ 256/ 6866-30 Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 800 1/ 256/ 6866-40U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 866 256/ PC 600 1024 ECC RDRAM 256/ PC 600 1024 ECC RDRAM 256/ PC 600 1024 ECC RDRAM Matrox Millennium G400



128/ PC 600 Matrox Millennium G400 2048 NP RDRAM


1/ / 2

1/ 256/ 128/ PC 600 Matrox Millennium G400 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM


Open bay

Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 48Xmax20Xmin 48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

9.1GB, 6

15GB, 9

16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T 16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

16/16 Ultra2 SCSI

6, 6

6, 3

6, 4

6, 4

6, 4

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 5

9.1GB, 7

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 5

7, 6

7, 6

7, 6

6, 3 9.1GB, 7.5 CDROM:48X max20Xmin

6, 4 CDROM:48X max20Xmin 48Xmax- 6, 3 20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

--

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 6

16/16 Ultra2 SCSI 18.2GB, with S.M.A.R.T. 7.5

16/16 Ultra ATA/66

64/ 64

ELSA GLoria II

Avid Xpress DV on IBM IntelliStation 6868-93U Pentium 1/ / 128/ PC 600 Matrox Millennium G400 III/733 2 2048 ECC RDRAM

1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-67U Pentium 1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 III/933 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-46U Pentium 1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 III/800EB 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM 6868-47U Pentium 1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 III/800EB 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM IntelliStation M Pro Open 6868-59U Pentium 1/ 256/ 0/ -III/866 2 256 1024


Hz (M

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

7, 3 , includes Canopus DV Rapter Adapter 7, 3

7, 3

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

7, 4

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio160



Ethernet

Ethernet



AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC AC 97 w/ AD 1881 CODEC

o di Au

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

. 4 ax ) /m te d. ) ra B) st d B) (M s: (KB M a r . M P . o re .( 2 t ax 3,R p y e l. ss ax il. ax /m Se or bl ai ce /m e/S pe ze va d. m /m ia ip av ro td. r Ty Si yp st d. ,a ar l, Me Ch be f P e: s st al (v rT M ve ve ta t d k s o i i : o m A o r r r o c h y r M s t or R D D O :t hi da Nu or o es s: be Cac tw -R rd rd ys m ap an m rt ot de oc Ne Gr St Ha CD Ha Sl Ba Me Pa Vi Pr Nu L2 d ee

WNT4.0

WNT4.

WNT4.

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

Optiona l

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

e Op

g tin ra

s Sy

5

m te


128/ SDRAM Matrox Millen2048 ECC nium G400

256/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 256/ PC 600 1024 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 512/ PC 600 2048 ECC RDRAM 64/ 64 32/ 32 128/ 128 128/ 128 128/ 128 64/ 64 128/ 128 64/ 64 64/ 64

IBM Fire GL1

Intense3D Wildcat 4110 Intense3D Wildcat 4110 Intense3D Wildcat 4110 ELSA GLoria II


ELSA GLoria II

Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

16/16 Wide Ultra SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 5

7, 5

18.2GB, 7 48Xmax20Xmin

7, 5

7, 5

7, 5

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 3

48Xmax20Xmin

7, 6


9.1GB, 5

7, 6


7, 6

7, 6

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 5

7, 6

7, 5

7,


48Xmax20Xmin

48Xmax20Xmin

9.1GB, 5

9.1GB, 5

16/16 Ultra2 SCSI 9.1GB, 7.5 40Xmax17Xmin with S.M.A.R.T.

ELSA GLoria II

1/ 256/ 256/ PC 600 Matrox Millennium G400 2 256 1024 ECC RDRAM

1/ 512/ 2 512

IntelliStation Z Pro 3D 1/ 256/ 6866-24U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 733 1/ 256/ 6866-25U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 733 1/ 256/ 6866-26U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 733 6866-27U Pentium 2/ 256/ III Xeon/ 2 256 733 1/ 256/ 6866-31U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 800 1/ 256/ 6866-34U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 800 1/ 256/ 6866-41U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 866 1/ 256/ 6866-44U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 866 1/ 256/ 6866-54U Pentium III Xeon/ 2 256 933

6865-41U Pentium III Xeon/ 550 6866-50U Pentium III Xeon/ 933

)

1

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

9, 6

7,

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet

. 4 ax ) /m te d. ) ra st B ) ) : MB M ad r s . (K .( MB ed P e ( o x r e . 2 t a 3,R p e ss ax ry il. il. ax /m Se bl ce /m e /S pe va ze va d. mo ia /m ip ro td. r Ty yp Si st ,a d. ,a ar Me Ch e e al be fP :s st al (v rT k AM m ot rd ri v ri v ot cs y: M r o che t so t i u or R a r D D e s : O : h d N o b Ca s e o tw -R rd rd ys m ap an m rt ot de oc Ne Ha Gr St Ha Sl Ba CD Pa Me Vi Nu L2 Pr Hz (M

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

CS423

dio Au

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

WNT4.

WNT 4.0

WNT4.

WNT4.

WNT4.

WNT4.

WNT4.

WNT 4.0

WNT4.

e Op

g ti n ra

s Sy

5

m te


379

1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 2 256 2048 ECC RDRAM 1/ 256/ 512/ PC 600 2 256 2048 ECC RDRAM 7, 5

18.2GB, 5 48Xmax20Xmin 9, 6

9, 6

Ethernet

Ethernet

4

3

2


7, 5


5

128/ 128


Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Wide Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance. S.M.A.R.T = Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology. erating When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on openvironments. Variable read rate. Actual playback speed will vary and is often less than the maximum possible.

128/ 128


1

Key to Footnotes

6866-56U Pentium III Xeon/ 933 6866-58U Pentium III Xeon/ 933

x. 4 1 ) ma z) te d ./ ) ra B) st MH d B) (M s: . (KB d( M a r . M e P e x r x .( so t 2 3, R pe ry il. il. ma e s . /m a ax Se ble e /S pe va ze va d./ mo /m oc r ia r Ty yp Si h ip st Pr std std. l, a l, a Me be (va rT M ve ve ta ta k d sC of he: i i : o m A r o r r o c y r M s t or r D D O :t hi da Nu oR es s: be Cac tw -R rd rd ys mo ap an rt m ot de oc Ne Ha Gr St CD Ha Sl Ba Me Pa Vi Pr Nu L2

io

AC-97 Audio

AC-97 Audio

d Au

a er

WNT 4.0

WNT 4.0

Op

g tin

5

em st Sy


Pentium III/700 1/1 256

8477-61Y






8476-61U

8476-80U

8476-81U

8476-90U

8476-91U

Netfinity 3000 8476-60U Pentium III/550 1/1 512


8477-51Y

Netfinity 1000 8477-42Y Pentium III/600 1/1 512

(M

Hz

1

)

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

64/768, 100MHz 128/768, 100MHz

64/768, 100MHz 128/768, 100MHz

64/768, 100MHz 64/768, 100MHz

SDRAM 64/768, 100MHz ECC

SDRAM 64/768, ECC 100MHz


rd Ha

Dr

C ive

tr on

9.1GB, 7.5 72.8 Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

Ultra2 SCSI (PCI adapter)

9.1GB, 7.5 72.8 Ultra2 SCSI (PCI adapter) Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Open bay -72.8 Ultra2 SCSI (PCI adapter)

Open bay -72.8 Wide Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter) Wide Ultra 9.1GB, 8.5 72.8 Wide Ultra SCSI (PCI SCSI with adapter) S.M.A.R.T. Open bay -72.8 Ultra2 SCSI (PCI adapter)

Ultra ATA/ 10.1GB, 9 30.3 IDE (on planar) 66 with S.M.A.R.T. II Ultra ATA/ 10.1GB, 9 30.3 EIDE (on planar) and Wide Ultra SCSI adapter 66 with S.M.A.R.T. III Ultra ATA/ 10.1GB, 9 30.3 IDE (on planar) 66 with S.M.A.R.T. III

, . B) , ax . (M ize ./m ax .s std KB) x. /m : /S . std ( s e e d r ma e: 2 st yp yp r so std. ./ v : T i T e s d ive r s) y t b e : r Dr or ive so oc he dD m y:s um Dr rd emed ar ed ( Pr Cac mor es a c d tN H M P r r H o e e Pr L2 Pa Me Ha SM Sp Sp

ed pe

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

6, 3

PCI/ISA Ethernet- 6, 6 Integrated

PCI/ISA Ethernet- 6, 5 Integrated PCI/ISA Ethernet- 6, 5 Integrated


6, 3

6, 4

6, 3

6, 4

6, 4

6, 4

6, 3



6, 3


r po

0

0

0

0

0

0

0/0

0/0

0

. d td te :s ys ce il. il. e p Ba va ur va r fa Su ct le te ,a ,a l ls l b e n t a I e a t t v ga hi k Le rc : to s: to or lug ts ID y tw sA t-p Ba Slo RA Ne Bu Ho

er oll

. ail av

Appendix H: IBM Netfinity Family

381

Appendix H

IBM Netfinity Family

381

Hz

1

)




8652-44Y

8652-42Y


8652-41Y

8652-43Y



8652-64Y

8652-31Y



8652-63Y


8652-62Y


8652-51Y

8652-61Y

9.1GB, 7.5 145. Wide 6 Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Open bay -145. 6 Wide 9.1GB, 7.5 145. Ultra2 6 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T.

128/2048, 133MHz

128/2048, 133MHz

Wide Ultra SCSI

Wide Ultra SCSI Wide Ultra SCSI Wide Ultra SCSI Wide Ultra SCSI Wide Ultra SCSI Ultra SCSI

Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter)


9.1GB, 7.5 18.2


18.2GB, 36.4 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter) 7.5 9.1GB, 7.5 18.2 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter)

9.1GB, 7.5 18.2

18.2GB, 36.4 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter) 7.5 9.1GB, 7.5 9.1 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter)

9.1GB, 7.5 18.2

Wide Ultra 9.1GB, 7.5 9.1 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter) SCSI Wide Ultra 9.1GB, 7.5 18.2 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter) SCSI Ultra SCSI 9.1GB, 7.5 18.2 Ultra SCSI (PCI adapter)

Ultra160 SCSI (64-bit integrated single channel)




128/2048, 133MHz

128/2048, 133MHz


9.1GB, 7.5 145. Wide 6 Ultra2 SCSI with S.M.A.R.T. Open bay -145. 6

128/2048, 133MHz

o


C ive

145. 6

Dr

Open bay --

rd Ha

128/2048, 133MHz

SDRAM 256/2048, ECC 100MHz SDRAM 512/2048, 100MHz ECC SDRAM 1024/2048, ECC 100MHz SDRAM 2048/2048, 100MHz ECC SDRAM 2048/2048, 100MHz ECC SDRAM 256/2048, ECC 100MHz SDRAM 512/2048, 100MHz ECC SDRAM 512/2048, 100MHz ECC SDRAM 1024/2048, ECC 100MHz SDRAM 2048/2048, 100MHz ECC

SDRAM ECC RDIMM Pentium III/800 1/2 256 SDRAM ECC RDIMM




Netfinity 4000R (Rack Mounted)

8657-42Y

8657-41Y

8657-32Y

8657-31Y

8657-22Y


Netfinity 3500 M20 8657-21Y Pentium III/667 1/2 256

(M

, . B) , ax . (M ize ./m ) ax td .s x. td : s (KB / ./m s e e d r :s ma . t s yp yp r so std ./ ve )2 T : i ve T e s d i r y t e : r D ms :s Dr or ive mb so oc che d y r ( u r d m r r s D r N e Ha eed Me eed P P 2 Ca emo rd rt Ha oc L Pr Pa Ha M SM Sp Sp d ee Sp

--

--

--

--

--

--

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

2,

Ethernet- 5, Integrated






o pp

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

3,

7,

7,

7,

7,

7,

7,

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

0/

d td. r te :s ys ce il. il. re Ba va va r fa Su tu le te l, a al, a ls ec b n t a e I a i t t v g h k o to Le rc or :t lug s: ID ys tw sA ot t-p Ba Sl RA Ne Bu Ho

r lle ro nt

. ail av





8656-3RY

8656-4RY

8656-5RY




8658-21Y

8658-31Y

8658-41Y

8658-2RY


Netfinity 5100 (Rack Mounted) 8658-1RY Pentium III/667 1/2 256


8658-11Y



8656-1RY

Netfinity 4500R 8656-2RY Pentium III/667 1/2 256

(M

Hz

1

)

Open bay --

Open bay --

128/4096, 133MHz 128/4096, 133MHz







Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

128/4096, 133MHz

128/4096, 133MHz

Open bay --

128/4096, 133MHz


SDRAM ECC RDIMM SDRAM ECC RDIMM SDRAM ECC RDIMM SDRAM ECC RDIMM SDRAM ECC

D rd Ha

eC riv

tr on

--

--

218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI -(Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI -(Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar)


PCI


PCI



PCI

PCI


PCI

5,


Etherne






PCI

PC

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

r po

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

7,

7,

7,

7,

7,

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

3/

3/

3/

3/

3/

. d te std s: . . ce e p ay ail ail fa ur Su av av eB er ct l , t s , l l l b e n a a ve ga hit kI ot tot Le rc or :t lug ts: ID ys tw sA t-p Ba RA Slo Ne Bu Ho

er oll

218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI -(Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI -(Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar)

218.4 Integrated dual-channel Ultra160 SCSI





, . B) , ax (M ize ./m x. .s . std KB) S ma td / : ax / . ( s : 2s pe td pe or td. e s y / y r em s . v : T i T s s d y be riv e D r s) ce e: or :st mor riv um ro ach dD r d d (m ry ss D r e P N a e o d a H ee M ee C P m rd rt H oc L2 Pr Pa Me Ha SM Sp Sp ed pe

. ail av


383



8658-4RY

8658-5RY




8664-41Y

8664-51Y




8664-3RY

8664-4RY

8664-5RY

Hz

1

)

256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 128/4096, 133MHz

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC 512/16384, 100MHz

256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 256/4096, 133MHz 128/4096, 133MHz

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC




1/2 256 Pentium III/ 600EB Netfinity 6000R (Rack Mounted) 8682-1RY Pentium III 1/4 1024 ECC Xeon/700 Chipkill

8664-2RY


8664-7RY

1/2 256 Pentium III/ 600EB Netfinity 5600 (Rack Mounted) 8664-6RY Pentium III/866 1/2 256

8664-21Y


8664-71Y

8664-31Y



8658-3RY

(M

--

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

Open bay --

r Ha

r dD

C ive

tr on

218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (PCI on planar)

218.4 Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD 218.4 Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD

218.4 Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD 218.4 Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD 109. Integrated Dual Channel 2 Ultra2 SCSI LVD

218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar) 218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (Adaptec AIC-7899)(PCI on planar)

, . B) , ax . (M ize ./m ax td B) .s s x. S m td / : e e/ d. rs d. (K / : 2s ma p t p o e y s y s t T er d. ive riv s) y: rT es :s :st mor Dr ive mb so oc che d D (m r y u r d r r s D r N e Ha eed Me eed P P 2 Ca emo rd rt Ha oc Pr L Pa Ha M SM Sp Sp ed pe

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Active/ HotPlug PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PC

PCI

PCI

5,


10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

10,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

5,

10,

10,

5,

EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated

EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated

Etherne



6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

6/

. d td te :s or ys ce il. il. pp re Ba va va r fa Su tu a a e e l c , t s , l l e b n al ta ve ga hit kI ot to Le rc or :t lug s: ID ys tw sA ot t-p RA Sl Ba Ne Bu Ho

er oll

. ail av


Pentium III Xeon/700

1/4 204 8

Netfinity 7100 8666-11Y 1/4 512 Pentium III Xeon/550 8666-1RY Pentium III 1/4 512 Xeon/550 8666-21Y Pentium III 1/4 1 Xeon/550 8666-2RY Pentium III 1/4 1 Xeon/550 8666-31Y Pentium III 1/4 1024 Xeon/700 8666-3RY Pentium III 1/4 1024 Xeon/700 8666-41Y Pentium III 1/4 204 Xeon/700 8 8666-4RY Pentium III 1/4 204 Xeon/700 8 Netfinity 7600 (Rack Mounted) 8665-1RY Pentium III 1/4 1024 Xeon/550 1/4 204 8665-2RY Pentium III Xeon/550 8 8665-3RY Pentium III 1/4 204 Xeon/700 8 Netfinity 8500R 8681-4RY Pentium III 1/8 512 Xeon/550 8681-5RY Pentium III 1/8 1024 Xeon/550 8681-6RY Pentium III 1/8 204 Xeon/550 8 Netfinity 8500R (Rack Mounted) 8681-7RY Pentium III 1/8 1024 Xeon/700 8681-8RY Pentium III 1/8 204 Xeon/700 8

8682-2RY

(M

Hz

1

)

72.8

256/16384, Open bay -100MHz 512/16384, Open bay -100MHz 512/16384, Open bay -100MHz 512/32768, 100MHz 512/32768, 100MHz

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

364

364 364

Open bay -Open bay --

72.8 72.8


72.8

72.8

364

364 364


Open bay --

364 364


364

Open bay --

Open bay --

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

364 364

Open bay --

512/16384, 100MHz 512/16384, 100MHz 512/16384, 100MHz

SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC SDRAM ECC

SDRAM

SDRAM

SDRAM

D rd Ha

eC riv

tr on

Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI

Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI

Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD Integrated Dual Channel Ultra2 SCSI LVD

Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI Integrated Dual Channel Wide Ultra2 SCSI

218.4 Dual Channel Ultra 160 SCSI (PCI on planar)

ECC Chipkill ECC Chipkill ECC Chipkill

Open bay --

--

256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz 256/16384, 100MHz

512/16384, 100MHz

SDRAM

ECC Chipkill

, . B) , ax . (M ize ./m ax .s . std KB) S m td / : ax / . ( s : 2s pe td pe or td. e s / y y em r s . v : i T s be riv :s eT ry D r s) std ce or riv um dD ro ache or y: r d d (m mod ss D r P N e a e H ee M ee C P m rd rt Ha oc L2 Pr Pa Ha Me SM Sp Sp ed pe

--

--

--

Opt.

Opt.

Opt.

PCI

PCI

Opt. Opt.

PCI

PCI

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

6, 6

12, 12 12, 12

12, 12 12, 12 12, 12

Ethernet- 6, 5 Integrated Ethernet- 6, 5 Integrated Ethernet- 6, 5 Integrated

EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated EthernetIntegrated

Ethernet- 6, 6 Integrated

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

PCI

Active/ HotPlug PCI

r po

10/10

4, 2 4, 2

2

2

2

2 4, 2

2

4, 2

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

4, 2

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

14, 12

5, 3

. d td te :s . . ys ce p ail re ail Ba r fa Su tu av av e e c l , t s , l l l b e n a a ve ga hit kI ot tot Le rc or :t lug ts: ID ys tw sA t-p Ba RA Slo Ne Bu Ho

er oll

. ail av


385

Nu

m

un Mo

g tin

Si

ze Sp

ck Ra

Sp lB ta To

e ac s ay p wa t-S Ho

e ac

IBM Netfinity EXP15 Storage Expansion Unit 35202RU 3U 10 10, 10 IBM Netfinity EXP200 Storage Expansion Unit 35301RU 3U 10 10, 10

l de Mo

r be

Enterprise Rack 19in. 42U Enterprise Expansion Cabinet 19in. 42U Rack 19in. 42U NetBAY22 19in. 22U NetBAY3 19in. 3U NetBAY3E 19in. 3U Rack Extension Kit 19in. 42U

m

r be

IBM Netfinity 930842P IBM Netfinity 930842X IBM Netfinity 9306900 IBM Netfinity 9306200 IBM Netfinity 10L6912 IBM Netfinity 36L9701 IBM Netfinity 36L9703

M

Nu el od

5.07 x 17.6 x 22.5 5.07 x 17.6 x 22.5 364GB

M

um im ax

n

14in.

19.5in.

sio en

28in.

19in.

m Di

24in.

19in.

in s(

34.5in.

23.5in.

l. ai av

34.5in.

23.5in.

, al ot :t

43.5in.

24.5in.

)

b Ca

43.5in.

e ag or St

h

364GB

ys Ba

id t

25.5in.

bi Ca

tW ne

t ep tD e in

h

Su

ly: pp

350 Watts std+ 350 Watts opts

350 Watts

r we Po

80.75in.

7in.

7in.

46.25in.

81.5in.

79.5in.

79.5in.

d. st

ht ig He t ne bi Ca


n

1 n Fu

io ct

n

2 n tio nc Fu

3

2

1

10 Kilometers

10 Kilometers

10 Kilometers

10 Kilometers

100 MB/s

100 MB/s

200 MB/s

NA

100 MB/s

100 MB/s

NA

ce an

100 MB/s

st Di

up to 500 meters

d ee

100 MB/s

Sp

MHz/GHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed; many factors affect application performance. When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB means one billion bytes. Total user accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.

Key to Footnotes

Netfinity Fibre Channel PCI Adapter 01K7297 64-bit PCI support 32-bit slot compatible Flash-based firmware BIOS IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel FailSafe RAID Controller 01K7296 (not a stand Redundant controller supportSupports up to 60HDD 128MB battery-backed cache alone product) ing RAID levels 0, 1, 3, & 5, 10 IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel Storage Subsystem 35261RU/RX 1 of 2 active controller supportSupports up to 60 HDD 128MB battery-backed cache ing RAID levels 0, 1, 3, & 5, 10 IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel Hub [shipped with 4 Shor twave GBICs (03K9308)] 35231RU/RX Supports multi-Terrabyte storEnables remote RAID storage systems Supports n-way clustered conage expansion figurations IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel Switch - 8 port [shipped with 4 Shor twave GBICs (03K9308)] 2109S08 Cascadable to 32 switches Provides H/W and S/W zoning to allow Management via IP over Fibre Channel or built-in 10/100 logical separation of devices to preEthernet port vent disruptions IBM Netfinity Fibre Channel Switch - 16 Port [shipped with 4 Shor twave GBICs (03K9308)] 2109S16 Cascadable to 32 switches Provides H/W and S/W zoning to allow Management via IP over Fibre logical separation of devices to preChannel or built-in 10/100 vent disruptions Ethernet port IBM SAN Data Gateway 2108R3S Provides compatibility from High bandwidth conversion of 1 Fibre Management via IP over Fibre Fibre to SCSI Channel port to 2 SCSI ports Channel or built-in 10/100 Ethernet port

tio nc Fu


387

388


Index

1.44 MB diskettes, 66 3.5-inch diskettes, 64–66 4.0 MB diskettes, 66 5.25-inch diskettes, 64, 65 16-bit operations, 245, 251 16-bit Video Graphics Array (VGA), 78–79 32-bit processing, 245, 246 64-bit processing, 48 240X systems, ThinkPad, 42–43 386 Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 570E systems, ThinkPad, 41–42 640 KB memory limit of DOS, 223, 236, 240, 241, 243, 244 720 KB diskettes, 65–66 3270 emulation, 267, 285 5250 workstation emulation, 265–266 8086-8088 Intel Microprocessor, 53–54 A ABR (Available Bit Rate) traffic, 288 Accelerated Graphics Port, 73–74 accessories of Windows 95, 246 Access ThinkPad portal, 30 ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), 247 active diagnostics, enterprise storage solutions, 112 Active Directory of Windows 2000, 248 active-matrix panels, 82 actuator of fixed disks, 68 administrator password, 196, 197 advanced BIOS, 202 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI), 247 Advanced edition of Windows 2000, 249 Advanced Graphics Port (AGP) bus, 72–74 Advanced Interactive Executive (AIX), 222, 224, 256, 257 Advanced Interconnect Cable Kit, 97–98 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC), 58 Advanced System Management Adapter, 60–61

388

Advanced System Management (ASM), 96, 97–98, 100 AGP (Advanced Graphics Port) bus, 72–74 AIX (Advanced Interactive Executive), 222, 224, 256, 257 Alert on LAN feature of PC family, 16–17 all-in-one applications, 219–220 All-Points-Addressable (APA) images, 76–77 alphanumeric images, 76 ALUs (Arithmetic Logic Units), 50 American Power Conversion (APC), 184 antireflective screen treatments, 146, 149 antivirus utility of DOS, 241 APA (All-Points-Addressable) images, 76–77 APC (American Power Conversion), 184 API (Application Program Interface) Disk Operating System (DOS) and, 237 microprocessors and, 59–60 operating systems and, 222, 223, 225–226 software compatibility, consistency for, 208–211 APIC (Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), 58 Appian Gemini graphics adapter, 85 Application Program Interface. See API application programs, 212–224. See also operating systems; software compatibility; software use all-in-one products, 219–220 Application Program Interface (API), 222, 223 Big Five functions, 213–221 business graphics and multimedia, 217–218 communications, 218–219 custom application programs, 213, 221–222 database management, 215–217 data transfer between, 214, 219 fields of database, 216

Index

files, 216, 246 groupware, 220 integrated applications, 214, 219–220 Lotus Notes, 220 Lotus SmartSuite, 220 modifications to, 222 multimedia, 217–218 operating system dependencies, 222–224 prewritten application programs, 213–224 records of database, 216 series approach, 219 sharing from Local Area Networks (LANs), 270–271 sharing from operating systems, 230–232 software compatibility, 207–208 software layer, 198, 199–200 spreadsheets, 215 user interface consistency, 213–214, 219 vertical market applications, 221 word processing, 214–215 Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), 85 Aptiva family, 6–12. See also PCs (personal computers) AptivaWare, 7 compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM) drives, 9, 10–11 Constant Angular Velocity (CAV) technology, 10–11 Constant Linear Velocity (CLV) technology, 11 Digital Video Disc (DVD), 9, 10, 11 E Series, 7–11 history of, xx overview, 2 Rapid Resume feature, 7 Scheduler feature, 6–7 software preloaded on, 7, 9, 12 S Series, 2, 11–12 Standby mode, 7 Suspend/Resume mode, 7 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM), 9, 10, 11 Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory (SGRAM), 9, 10 Wake Up on Ring feature, 6–7 AptivaWare, 7 Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs), 50 AS/400 computers and terminal emulation, 265–266

389

A Series (alternative to desktop computer), ThinkPad, 29, 33–35 ASICs (Application-Specific Integrated Circuits), 85 ASM (Advanced System Management), 60–61, 96, 97–98, 100 ASM Token-Ring Option, 98 Asset ID technology, 16, 22 asymmetric (loosely coupled) processing, 50 asynchronous adapters (serial ports), 86, 166–167 communications, 166–167, 168 terminal emulation, 261–265 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) networks, 287–291 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) networks, 287–291 automatic server restart, 96 AutoScroll feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 178 availability enterprise storage solutions, 111–112 X-architecture and, 102 Available Bit Rate (ABR) traffic, 288 average latency of drive, 68, 69 seek time, 68, 69 B backbones, 286, 290–291 background processing, 227–230 backup with SANs, enterprise storage solutions, 110 bandwidth-intensive applications, 288, 290 Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) layer, 198, 201–202, 208, 209 Big Five functions, 213–221 Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC), 168 BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) layer, 198, 201–202, 208, 209 bits, 61 black and white graphics, 78 bottlenecks in LANs, 288 brands. See specific PCs (personal computers) brightness of graphics, 82 BSC (Binary Synchronous Communications), 168 bus, local, 72–75 business graphics and multimedia, 217–218

390


bus-wired networks (LANs), 272–274, 278–279, 285–286 bytes, 61 C C> (command prompt) of DOS, 235, 236, 237 cable types, 170 cache, 50 Capacity Manager, 100 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), 272–274 Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) technology, 82–83, 145 CAU (Controller Access Unit), 274 CAV (Constant Angular Velocity) technology, 10–11 CBR (Constant Bit Rate) traffic, 288 CDM (Common Diagnostic Model), 112 CD-ROM (compact disk read only memory) drives, 9, 10–11, 164–165 CDSA (Common Data Security Architecture), 107 Celeron Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54–55 Central Processing Unit (CPU), 49–50 chair comfort, 206 channel architecture, 105 character sets and graphics, 76 Chipkill memory protection, 104 chip sets (Intel), 57–58 CISC (Complex Instruction Set Computing), 51–53 Client Systems. See PC (Personal Computer) family clock rate, 50 clustering and microprocessors, 58–60 cluster registration, enterprise storage solutions, 113 Cluster Systems Management, 100 CLV (Constant Linear Velocity) technology, 11 CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) memory, 63–64 coaxial cable, 170 colors of graphics, 78 comfort features of ThinkPad, 31–32 command prompt (C>) of DOS, 235, 236, 237 Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA), 107 Common Diagnostic Model (CDM), 112

communications, 258–294. See also communications options; LANs (Local Area Networks); terminal emulation application programs, 218–219 enterprise storage solutions, 293 equipment-sharing from, 259 Fibre Channel Hub, 292 Fibre Channel PCI Adapter, 293 Fibre Channel RAID Controller, 293 Fibre Channel SAN Data Gateway Router, 292 Fibre Channel Switch, 292 gateways, 282–285 importance of, 258–259 information flow improvement from, 258–259 Netfinity Fibre Channel technology, 291–293 Storage Area Networks (SANs), 109–110, 291–294 communications bay, ThinkPad, 31 communications options, 165–173 async adapters (serial ports), 86, 166–167 asynchronous communications, 166–167, 168 Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC), 168 cable types, 170 coaxial cable, 170 emulation adapters, 173, 174 Ethernet adapters, 170, 171 High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), 168 host computer communication, 167–168 leased lines, 169–170 Local Area Networks (LANs), 170–173 modems, 168–170 multipoint capability, 170 multiprotocol adapters, 167–168 parity bit, 166–167 point-to-point capability, 170 start bit, 166, 167 stop bit, 167 Switched Network Backup Utility (SNBU), 170 switched telephone lines, 169, 170 synchronous adapters, 167–168 Synchronous Data link Control (SDLC), 168

Index

thick cable, 170 thin cable, 170 token-ring network adapters, 170–173 Wake On LAN (WOL), 17, 170 compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM) drives, 9, 10–11, 164–165 Compaq, 107 compatibility. See also software compatibility BIOS, 202 Disk Operating System (DOS) versions, 240 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) memory, 63–64 Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC), 51–53 computer elements diagram, 187 concentrators in LANs, 279–282, 283 Configuration/Setup Utility, 191–198 administrator password, 196, 197 Date and Time Menu Option, 196 defined, 191–192 Devices and I/O Ports Menu Option, 196 disk/diskette drive disabling, 196–197 Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), 194 Esc key to return to Main Menu, 195 F1 key for, 191, 194, 195, 198 help messages (F1 key), 195, 198 Main Menu, 193, 195–198 passwords and, 194–195, 196–197 POST/BIOS Update security feature, 197 Power Management Menu Option, 197–198 power-on password, 197 Product Data Menu option, 196 Reference Diskette, 65, 195 Scheduler feature, 198 Setup Utility, 196–197 Standby feature, 197–198 starting, 194–195 Start Options Menu Option, 197 System Clock, 196 System Security Menu Option, 196–197 System Summary Menu Option, 195 Video Setup, 196 Wake Up on Ring feature, 198 Constant Angular Velocity (CAV) technology, 10–11 Constant Bit Rate (CBR) traffic, 288

391

Constant Linear Velocity (CLV) technology, 11 Consumer Products Division, xx Controller Access Unit (CAU), 274 Conventional Memory of DOS, 238, 239 core logic of X-architecture, 102, 103–106 CoSession of POST, 194 costs to operate LANs, 290 cover of ThinkPad, easy opening, 32 CPU (Central Processing Unit), 49–50 CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) technology, 82–83, 145 cryptographic co-processors, 107 CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/ Collision Detect), 272–274 custom application programs, 213, 221–222 CyberJump feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 D Database 2 OS/2, 242 database management applications, 215–217 Datacenter edition of Windows 2000, 249 data sharing from Local Area Networks (LANs), 268–270 from operating systems, 230–232 data transfer between applications, 214, 219 rate of fixed disks, 69 DataZoom feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 Date and Time Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196 DDC (Display Data Channel), 147, 149 DES Encryptions, 107 Desktop Management Interface (DMI), 17 Developer Kit for Linux, 255–256 Devices and I/O Ports Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196 DIB (Dual Independence Bus), 73 digital certificates, 107 Digital Video Disc (DVD), 9, 10, 11 DIR command of DOS, 235, 236 Direct Memory Access (DMA) techniques, 86 directories in Windows, 246 Directory Tree section of DOS Shell, 236, 237 disaster management, enterprise storage solutions, 109–110

392


disk cache program, 71–72 compression utility of DOS, 241 drive disabling, Configuration/Setup Utility, 196–197 swapping of DOS, 236 diskettes. See removable disk storage Disk Operating System. See DOS disk storage. See fixed disks; optical disk drives; removable disk storage (diskettes) Display Data Channel (DDC), 147, 149 displays and display adapters, 144–152. See also graphics antireflective screen treatments, 146, 149 Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) technology, 82–83, 145 Display Data Channel (DDC), 147, 149 Energy Star program, 146–147, 149, 151 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guidelines, 146–147 “Ergonomic Requirements for Office Workstations with Video Display Terminals” (ISO 9241), 80–81, 149, 150 E Series (entry-level) color monitors, 145–147 flat panel color monitors, 81–83, 150–152, 182 Flatter, Squarer Tube (FST) technology, 147, 148 flicker, 81, 147, 149 G Series (general-purpose) monitors, 147–149 International Organization for Standardization (ISO) requirements, 80–81, 147, 149, 150 phosphor pitch, 145, 148 Plug and Play, 147 power management features, 146–147 P Series (professional) monitors, 149–150 resolution, 77–80, 145–146, 148 Swedish Board for Technical Accreditation (SWEDAC) MRP-II guidelines, 147 Swedish Confederation of Professional Employees Environmental Label standards (TCO-99), 149–150 Swedish National Board for Industrial

and Technical Development (NUTEK) requirements, 147, 149, 150, 151 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology, 32, 82–83, 150 ThinkPad, 32 touch-enabled monitors, 148–149 DMA (Direct Memory Access) techniques, 86 DMI (Desktop Management Interface), 17 docking (common) solutions of ThinkPad, 31 Docking Stations of DOS, 241 DOS (Disk Operating System), 234–241 640 KB memory limit of, 223, 236, 240, 241, 243, 244 antivirus utility, 241 Application Program Interface (API), 237 command prompt (C>), 235, 236, 237 compatibility with earlier versions, 240 Conventional Memory, 238, 239 DIR command, 235, 236 Directory Tree section of DOS Shell, 236, 237 disk compression utility, 241 disk swapping, 236 Docking Stations, 241 DOS extended with Windows, 241, 243–245 DOS Shell, 235–237 enhancements of DOS 7.0, 240–241 Expanded Memory Specification (EMS), 238, 240 Extended Memory (High Memory Area), 238, 239 eXtended Memory Specification (XMS), 238, 240 Local Area Networks (LANs) and, 268 memory addresses, 238, 239 memory management, 237–240 menu bar of DOS Shell, 235–236, 237 overview, 222–223, 234 Program-List Area of DOS Shell, 236, 237 program scheduler, 241 Protected mode capabilities, 238 RAMBoost utility, 240–241 RAMDrive program, 240 Real mode, 235, 240 Reserved Area of memory, 238, 239, 240

Index

Stacker Compression, 241 starting tasks, 235–237 Systems Application Architecture (SAA) and, 235 task initiation, 235–237 terminal emulation, 263, 266 Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs, 239–240 Upper Memory Blocks, 238, 240 Virtual DOS Machine (VDM), 251–252 Windows and, 244–245, 246, 251–252 double words, 61 Dual Independence Bus (DIB), 73 dual-processor systems, 58 DVD (Digital Video Disc), 9, 10, 11 E Early Token Release function, 278 e-business emphasis of personal computers (PCs), xx ECC (Error Checking and Correcting) memory, 62–63, 161 systems management strategy, 96 ECC-On-SIMM (EOS), 63 ECC-P (Error Checking and CorrectingParity), 62–63 “Edge of the Network” (EON) products. See NetVista family EDO (Extended Data Out) memory, 61 EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), 194 EIDE (Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics) interface, 159–160 EISA (Extended Industry Standard Architecture), 72, 74 Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), 194 electronic mail/messaging from Local Area Networks (LANs), 271–272 from terminal emulation, 264 “electronic property pass” applications, 22 Electronic Solution Assurance Review (eSAR), 113 electrophotographic (EP) process, 154 ELSA GLoria II graphics adapter, 84 EMS (Expanded Memory Specification), 238, 240 emulation. See also terminal emulation adapters, 173, 174

393

of Local Area Networks (LANs), 290 Energy Star program, 146–147, 149, 151 Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics (EIDE) interface, 159–160 Enhanced Keyboard of ThinkPad, 177 Enhanced mode of Windows, 244–245 enhancements of DOS 7.0, 240–241 enterprise storage solutions, 106–113. See also X-architecture; xSeries and Netfinity active diagnostics, 112 availability, 111–112 backup with Storage Area Networks (SANs), 110 cluster registration, 113 Common Data Security Architecture (CDSA), 107 Common Diagnostic Model (CDM), 112 communications, 293 cryptographic co-processors, 107 defined, 102, 106 DES Encryptions, 107 digital certificates, 107 disaster management, 109–110 Electronic Solution Assurance Review (eSAR), 113 Fibre Array Storage Technology (FAStT) devices, 109 FlashCopy, 108 HelpCenter, 113 interoperability, 107 manageability, 107–108 Netfinity Director, 107–108 Netfinity Web Server Accelerator (NWSA), 111 protection, 108 RAID 1-Enhanced (1E), 108–109 RAID 5-Enhanced (5E), 109 reliability, 111–112 Remote Access Control Facilities (RACF), 107 Remote Connect...”Call Home,” 113 scalability, 106–107 security, 107 Software Rejuvenation, 101, 111–112 Start Up Support, 112–113 Storage Area Networks (SANs) and, 109–110, 291–294 technical support, 112–113 Entry Systems Division (ESD), xix, xvii

394


Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guidelines, 146–147 EON (“Edge of the Network”) products. See NetVista family EOS (ECC-On-SIMM), 63 EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) guidelines, 146–147 EP (electrophotographic) process, 154 EPROM (flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), 63 E Pro systems, IntelliStation family, 48 equipment sharing from communications, 259 from Local Area Networks (LANs), 271 “Ergonomic Requirements for Office Workstations with Video Display Terminals” (ISO 9241), 80–81, 149, 150 Error Checking and Correcting. See ECC Error Checking and Correcting-Parity (ECC-P), 62–63 error resolution of POST, 189–194 eSAR (Electronic Solution Assurance Review), 113 Esc key to return to Main Menu of Configuration/Setup Utility, 195 ESD (Entry Systems Division), xix, xvii E Series, Aptiva, 7–11 E Series (entry-level) color monitors, 145–147 eserver computers, xx, 3, 381. See also xSeries and Netfinity Estridge, Philip (Don), xvii Ethernet adapters, 170, 171 Local Area Networks (LANs), 272–274, 278–279, 285–286 example of computer session, 203–206 execution units, 50 Expanded Memory Specification (EMS), 238, 240 expansion slots, 72–75 Accelerated Graphics Port, 73–74 Advanced Graphics Port (AGP) bus, 72–74 bus, local, 72–75 Dual Independence Bus (DIB), 73 Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA), 72, 74 Industry-Standard Architecture (ISA), 72, 74

local bus, 72–75 Micro Channel, 72, 74 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI), 72, 73–74 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA), 72, 74–75 Video Equipment Standards Association (VESA) bus, 72 Extended Data Out (EDO) memory, 61 eXtended Graphics Array (XGA), 79, 80, 81 Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA), 72, 74 Extended Memory (High Memory Area) of DOS, 238, 239 eXtended Memory Specification (XMS), 238, 240 extensibility of Windows NT, 253 F F1 key for Configuration/Setup Utility, 191, 194, 195, 198 fail-over clustering, 59 Fast Page Mode (FPM) memory, 61 FAStT (Fibre Array Storage Technology) devices, 109 FAT (File Allocation Table), 247, 253 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) networks, 279–282, 283 Fibre Array Storage Technology (FAStT) devices, 109 Fibre Channel Hub, 292 PCI Adapter, 293 RAID Controller, 293 SAN Data Gateway Router, 292 Switch, 292 fields of database, 216 File Allocation Table (FAT), 247, 253 filename length support, 246 files, 216, 246 Fire GL1 graphics accelerator card, 84 fixed disks, 68–72 actuator, 68 average latency of drive, 68, 69 average seek time, 68, 69 data transfer rate, 69 disk cache program, 71–72 Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) drives, 69

Index

I/O controller, 71 options, 159–160, 162 performance of computer and, 68–69 read/write head, 68 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), 69–71 tracks, 68 FlashCopy, 108 flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), 63 flash memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), 63, 202 flat panel monitor technology, 81–83, 150–152, 182 Flatter, Squarer Tube (FST) technology, 147, 148 flicker of displays, 81, 147, 149 flow control of LANs, 290 folders in Windows, 246 formatting diskettes, 65, 66 Fortune magazine, 54 FPM (Fast Page Mode) memory, 61 frame-based technologies for LANs, 285–286 frame buffer (video memory), 76, 77, 83–85 FST (Flatter, Squarer Tube) technology, 147, 148 full-color printer, 157 G gateways, 282–285 GBICs (gigabit interface converters), 292 Gemini graphics adapter (Appian), 85 Giant MagnetoResistive (GMR) head technology, 67 gigabit interface converters (GBICs), 292 glare reduction, 206–207 GLoria II graphics adapter (ELSA), 84 GMR (Giant MagnetoResistive) head technology, 67 GPU (Graphics Processing Unit, Quadro), 84 Graphical User Interface (GUI), 243, 245 graphics, 75–85. See also displays and display adapters 16-bit Video Graphics Array (VGA), 78–79 active-matrix panels, 82 All-Points-Addressable (APA) images, 76–77 alphanumeric images, 76 Appian Gemini graphics adapter, 85

395

Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), 85 black and white, 78 brightness, 82 Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) technology, 82–83, 145 character sets, 76 colors, 78 display and, 75–76 ELSA GLoria II graphics adapter, 84 emerging graphics/video memory, 83–85 “Ergonomic Requirements for Office Workstations with Video Display Terminals” (ISO 9241), 80–81, 149, 150 eXtended Graphics Array (XGA), 79, 80, 81 Fire GL1 graphics accelerator card, 84 flat panel monitor technology, 81–83, 150–152, 182 flicker of image, 81, 147, 149 Intense3D Wildcat 4110/4210 graphics solutions, 84–85 interlacing, 81 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) technology, 32, 82 Matrox Millennium G400 video adapter, 83–84 phosphor persistence, 81 picture elements (pels or pixels), 76, 77 Quadro Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), 84 refresh rate, 81 resolution of images, 77–80, 145–146, 148 shades of gray, 78 Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA), 78, 79–80 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology, 32, 82–83, 150 trilinear MIP mapping, 85 true-color images, 80 Video Graphics Array (VGA), 78–80 video memory (frame buffer), 76, 77, 83–85 Graphics Processing Unit (GPU) (Quadro), 84 groupware, 220 G Series (general-purpose) monitors, 147–149 GUI (Graphical User Interface), 243, 245

396


H HAL (Hardware Abstraction Layer), 253 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) upgrade options, 160, 162, 181 hardware interfaces and software compatibility, 209–211 systems management strategy and, 96–98 Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL), 253 HDD (Hard Disk Drive) upgrade options, 160, 162, 181 HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control), 168 help guides (wizards) of Windows, 247 messages (F1 key) for Configuration/ Setup Utility, 195, 198 HelpCenter, 113 Hewlett-Packard, 107 High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), 168 High Memory Area (Extended Memory) of DOS, 238, 239 High-Performance Addressing (HPA), 32 High Performance File System (HPFS), 253 history of personal computers (PCs), xvii–xx home business computers. See Aptiva family host computer communication communications options, 167–168 terminal emulation for, 260–261 HPA (High-Performance Addressing), 32 HPFS (High Performance File System), 253 human-centric designs, 97 HyperJump feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 I IBM Aptiva family. See Aptiva family IBM AS/400 computers and terminal emulation, 265–266 IBM IntelliStation family. See IntelliStation family IBM NetVista family. See NetVista family IBM Network Stations, 5–6 IBM PC 300GL series. See PC 300GL series IBM PC 300PL series. See PC 300PL series IBM PC 300 series. See PC 300 series IBM Personal computer (PC) Family. See PC (Personal Computer) family IBM System/3X computers and terminal emulation, 265, 266 IBM Thin Client family, 5–6

IBM ThinkPad family. See ThinkPad family IDE CD-ROM drives, 164–165 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drives, 69 incompatibility testing of software, 211 Independent Business Unit, xvii industrial computer line, 6 Industry-Standard Architecture (ISA), 72, 74 InfiniBand, 105 InfoPrint 21, 153, 155–156 InfoPrint 32, 153, 156 InfoPrint 40, 153, 156–157 InfoPrint Color 8 Printer, 157–158 information flow improvement from communications, 258–259 services from terminal emulation, 263–264 installation and systems management strategy, 98–102 integrated applications, 214, 219–220 Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) drives, 69 integration and systems management strategy, 95–96 Intel chip sets, 57–58 microprocessors, 53–56 processor-based servers and X-architecture, 102 Trusted Computing Platform Alliance (TCPA), 107 IntelliStation family, 45–48, 375. See also PCs (personal computers) 64-bit processing, 48 E Pro systems, 48 M Pro systems, 47–48 overview, 5 Z Pro systems, 45–47 Intense3D Wildcat 4110/4210 graphics solutions, 84–85 interlacing of graphics, 81 International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 80–81, 147, 149, 150 Internet access from terminal emulation, 264–265 Communication tools of Windows 98, 247–248 impact on personal computers (PCs), xix, xx interoperability, enterprise storage solutions, 107

Index

I/O capacity of X-architecture, 104–105 controller of fixed disks, 71 ISA (Industry-Standard Architecture), 72, 74 i Series (individual optimized ThinkPad notebooks), 29, 38–41 ISO (International Organization for Standardization), 80–81, 147, 149, 150 Itanium (Merced) Intel Microprocessor, 53, 55–56 J Java applications and OS/2 Warp, 249 JavaOS for Business, 254–255 Just-In-Time (JIT) compiling technology, 256 K keyboards comfort, 206 Enhanced Keyboard, 88, 89 Host Connected Keyboard, 88, 89 Space Saver Keyboard, 88, 89, 178 ThinkPad, 31, 176–178 TrackPoint Keyboard, 88, 89 L LANClient Control Manager (LCCM), 96, 98, 99 LAN Server, 242 LANs (Local Area Networks), 267–291. See also communications applications sharing, 270–271 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) networks, 287–291 Available Bit Rate (ABR) traffic, 288 backbones, 286, 290–291 bandwidth-intensive applications, 288, 290 bottlenecks, 288 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), 272–274 communications options, 170–173 concentrators, 279–282, 283 Constant Bit Rate (CBR) traffic, 288 Controller Access Unit (CAU), 274 costs to operate, 290 data sharing from, 268–270 defined, 267 Disk Operating System (DOS) and, 268

397

Early Token Release function, 278 electronic messaging from, 271–272 emulation, 290 equipment sharing from, 271 Ethernet LANs (bus-wired networks), 272–274, 278–279, 285–286 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) networks, 279–282, 283 flow control of, 290 frame-based technologies, 285–286 gateways, 282–285 licensing agreements of software publishers, 270–271 message frames (packets), 274–278 microsegmented, 286 multicasting, 290 multiuser systems versus, 232 source-route bridging, 278 switched Ethernet and token-ring networks, 285–286 token-ring networks, 170–173, 274–279, 285–286 tuning networks, 290 Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) traffic, 288 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic, 288 large workgroups printer, 156 LCCM (LANClient Control Manager), 96, 98, 99 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) technology, 32, 82 leased lines, 169–170 legacy free S Series, NetVista, 26–28 licensing agreements of software publishers, 270–271 lighting comfort, 206–207 Light-Path Diagnostics, 96, 97 Linux, 255–256, 257 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) technology, 32, 82 Local Area Networks. See LANs local bus, 72–75 lock management, 60 loosely coupled (asymmetric) processing, 50 Lotus Notes, 220 Lotus SmartSuite, 17, 220 M Main Menu of Configuration/Setup Utility, 193, 195–198 manageability, enterprise storage solutions, 107–108

398


Matrox Millennium G400 video adapter, 83–84 Maximum Press Web site, xvi, 6 media sense of diskettes, 66 medium-sized workgroups printer, 155, 157 “Members Only” Web site, xvi, 6 memory, 61–64. See also expansion slots; microprocessors 640 KB memory limit of DOS, 223, 236, 240, 241, 243, 244 addresses of DOS, 238, 239 bits, 61 bytes, 61 Chipkill memory protection, 104 compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM), 9, 10–11, 164–165 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS), 63–64 count of POST, 186–188 Direct Memory Access (DMA) techniques, 86 Disk Operating System (DOS), 237–240 double words, 61 ECC-On-SIMM (EOS), 63 Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), 194 Error Checking and Correcting (ECC), 62–63, 161 Expanded Memory Specification (EMS), 238, 240 expansion options, 159, 160–161 Extended Data Out (EDO), 61 eXtended Memory Specification (XMS), 238, 240 Fast Page Mode (FPM), 61 flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), 63 Rambus DRAM (RDRAM), 57–58, 61, 161 Read Only Memory (ROM), 63, 202 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM), 9, 10, 11, 61–62, 160–161 Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory (SGRAM), 9, 10 video memory (frame buffer), 76, 77, 83–85 words, 61 menu bar of DOS Shell, 235–236, 237 Merced Intel Microprocessor, 53, 55–56

message frames (packets) of LANs, 274–278 Micro Channel, 72, 74 Microdrive, 66–68 microprocessors, 49–61. See also memory 386 Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 8086-8088 Intel Microprocessor, 53–54 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC), 58 Advanced System Management Adapter, 60–61 Application Program Interface (API), 59–60 Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs), 50 asymmetric (loosely coupled) processing, 50 cache, 50 Celeron Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54–55 Central Processing Unit (CPU), 49–50 chip sets (Intel), 57–58 clock rate, 50 clustering, 58–60 Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC), 51–53 defined, 49–50 dual-processor systems, 58 execution units, 50 fail-over clustering, 59 Intel chip sets, 57–58 Intel microprocessors, 53–56 Itanium (Merced) Intel Microprocessor, 53, 55–56 lock management, 60 Mobile Pentium Intel processors, 56 multiprocessing, 50–51 MultiProcessing Specification 1.x (MPS 1.x), 58–59 Netfinity system management processor, 60–61 options, 176 parallel processing, 59 Pentium III/Xeon Intel Microprocessor, 53, 55, 57 Pentium II/Xeon Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 Pentium Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 Pentium Pro Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 Rambus DRAM (RDRAM) memory, 57–58 Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC), 51–53 registers, 50

Index

“single resource,” 59 Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP), 50–51, 58–60 symmetric (tightly coupled) processing, 50–51 system management tools, 60 “whole computer,” 59 microsegmented LANs, 286 Microsoft, 107. See also Windows Microsoft Cluster Service (MSCS), 100 MicroTouch Systems, Inc., 148 mission-critical servers, 92–93 Mobile Pentium Intel processors, 56 model of software, 198–206 modems, 168–170 modifications to applications, 222 monitor comfort, 206–207. See also displays and display adapters; graphics M Pro systems, IntelliStation family, 47–48 MPS 1.x (MultiProcessing Specification 1.x), 58–59 MSCS (Microsoft Cluster Service), 100 multi-application (multitasking) systems, 223, 224, 226–230, 243 multicasting LANs, 290 multimedia applications, 217–218 multimedia options, 173–176 microprocessor upgrade options, 176 PCI Audio Adapter, 175 PCMCIA 16-bit Audio Adapter, 176 UltraPort Camera, 174–175 multipoint communications, 170 multiprocessing, 50–51 MultiProcessing Specification 1.x (MPS 1.x), 58–59 multiprotocol adapters, 167–168 multitasking (multi-application) systems, 223, 224, 226–230, 243 multiuser systems, 226, 230–232 N naming scheme of personal computers (PCs), xx Netfinity. See also xSeries and Netfinity 3000, 94, 134–136 3500, 132–134 3500 M10, 94 4000R, 94, 130–132 4500R, 93, 129–130 5000, 93, 127–128

399

5100, 93, 125–126 5600, 93, 118–119 6000R, 93, 123–124 7100, 93, 119–123 7600, 92, 115–118 8500R, 92, 95, 114–115 APC Smart-UPS 5000, 184 Availability Extensions, 100 Director, 96, 99–102, 107–108 Enterprise Expansion Cabinet, 182–184 Enterprise Rack Cabinet, 182–184 Fibre Channel RAID Manager, 101 Fibre Channel technology, 291–293 Flat Panel Monitor Rack Mount Kit, 182 history of, xix, xx Manager, 96 NetBAY22 rack cabinet, 183 options, 182–184 Rack Keyboard Tray, 182 SP Switch Administration, 101 system management processor, 60–61 Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS), 184 Web Server Accelerator (NWSA), 111 NetVista family, 23–29, 343. See also PCs (personal computers) history of, xx overview, 2–3, 4, 13 Portable Drive Bay 2000, 23–24 security features, 24 S Series (legacy-free), 26–28 Thin Client Series (zero footprint), 28–29 X Series (all-in-one), 24–26 networked personal computers. See NetVista family; PC (Personal Computer) family Network Printer 12, 153, 154–155 networks. See communications Network Stations, 5–6 nodes of X-architecture, 103–104 Non-Programmable Terminals (NPTs), 5–6 notebook computers. See ThinkPad family NPTs (Non-Programmable Terminals), 5–6 NTFS (NT File System), 254 NUTEK (Swedish National Board for Industrial and Technical Development) requirements, 147, 149, 150, 151 O OAPlus/DOS and OAPlus/WIN, 193–194 “open architecture policy,” xvii

400


Operating System/2 Warp. See OS/2 Warp operating systems, 225–257. See also DOS (Disk Operating System); OS/2 (Operating System/2) Warp; Windows 16-bit operations, 245, 251 32-bit processing, 245, 246 accessories of Windows 95, 246 Active Directory of Windows 2000, 248 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI), 247 Advanced edition of Windows 2000, 249 Advanced Interactive Executive (AIX), 222, 224, 256, 257 advanced operating systems, 241–256 application program dependencies, 222–224 Application Program Interface (API) and, 222, 223, 225–226 application sharing, 230–232 background processing, 227–230 Database 2 OS/2, 242 Datacenter edition of Windows 2000, 249 data sharing from, 230–232 dependencies and applications, 222–224 Developer Kit for Linux, 255–256 directories in Windows, 246 extensibility of Windows NT, 253 File Allocation Table (FAT) support, 247, 253 filename length supported, 246 folders in Windows, 246 Graphical User Interface (GUI), 243, 245 Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL), 253 help guides (wizards) of Windows, 247 High Performance File System (HPFS) support, 253 Internet Communication tools of Windows 98, 247–248 Java applications and OS/2 Warp, 249 JavaOS for Business, 254–255 Just-In-Time (JIT) compiling technology, 256 LAN Server, 242 Linux, 255–256, 257 Local Area Networks (LANs) versus multiuser systems, 232 multi-application (multitasking) systems, 223, 224, 226–230, 243 multiuser systems, 226, 230–232 NT File System (NTFS), 254

“PC compatibility,” 233–234 Plug and Play, 247 portability of Windows NT, 253 POSIX-compliant applications, 252 program switching, 227–230 Protected mode, 233, 241, 242 Real mode, 232–233 selection tips, 256–257 sharing data and programs, 230–231 single application, 226 software layer, 198, 200–201, 208, 209 Standard edition of Windows 2000, 248–249 starting Windows, 245–246, 247, 248 switching between windows, 246 Symmetric MultiProcessing (SMP) support, 249, 250, 254 Systems Application Architecture (SAA) and, 235, 242 taskbar of Windows 95, 246 time slicing, 230 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), 242 Virtual 8086 mode, 233–234, 241, 242, 245 Virtual DOS Machine (VDM), 251–252 VoiceType technology and OS/2 Warp, 249 optical disk drives, 163–165 compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM) drives, 9, 10–11, 164–165 IDE CD-ROM drives, 164–165 options and peripherals, 143–184. See also communications options; displays and display adapters; multimedia options; optical disk drives; printers; ThinkPad options Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics (EIDE) interface, 159–160 Error Checking and Correcting (ECC) memory expansion, 161 fixed disk drives options, 159–160, 162 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) upgrade options, 160, 162, 181 memory expansion options, 159, 160–161 Netfinity options, 182–184 Rambus DRAM (RDRAM) memory expansion, 161 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) adapters, 160

Index

Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM) expansion, 160–161 tape drives, 160, 163 OS/2 (Operating System/2) Warp Local Area Networks (LANs) and, 268 operating system dependencies, 222, 224 overview, 241–242, 249–250 selection tips, 256 terminal emulation, 263, 266 Windows and, 252–253 P P1394 FixedWire, 86, 87 packets (message frames) of LANs, 274–278 parallel ports, 86 processing, 59 parity bit, 166–167 passwords Configuration/Setup Utility, 194–195, 196–197 Power-On Self-Test (POST), 188, 189 PC 300GL series, 13, 14, 19–20, 21, 332 PC 300PL series, 13, 15, 20–23, 24, 338 PC 300 series, 13, 14, 18–19, 331 “PC compatibility,” 207–208, 233–234 PCI Audio Adapter, 175 PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) expansion slots, 72, 73–74 X-architecture and, 104 PCI-X, 104–105 PCMCIA 16-bit Audio Adapter, 176 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association), 72, 74–75 PC (Personal Computer) family, 12–23. See also PCs (personal computers) Alert on LAN feature, 16–17 Asset ID technology, 16, 22 Desktop Management Interface (DMI), 17 “electronic property pass” applications, 22 history of, xvii, xx Lotus SmartSuite, 17 overview, 3, 13 PC 300GL series, 13, 14, 19–20, 21, 332 PC 300PL series, 13, 15, 20–23, 24, 338 PC 300 series, 13, 14, 18–19, 331 radio-frequency ID (RFID) tag, 22

401

Rapid Resume feature, 15 security features, 16–17 Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.), 17, 160 software preloaded on, 17–18 Standby mode, 15 Suspend/Resume mode, 15 Vital Product Data (VPD), 16 Wake On LAN (WOL), 17, 170 PCs (personal computers), xvii–6. See also application programs; Aptiva family; communications; expansion slots; fixed disks; graphics; IntelliStation family; keyboards; memory; microprocessors; NetVista family; Network Stations; operating systems; optical disk drives; options and peripherals; PC (Personal Computer) family; ports; removable disk storage (diskettes); software compatibility; software use; ThinkPad family; xSeries and Netfinity Consumer Products Division, xx e-business emphasis, xx Entry Systems Division (ESD), xix, xvii eserver computers, xx history of, xvii–xx Independent Business Unit, xvii Internet impact on, xix, xx naming scheme, xx Network Stations, 5–6 “open architecture policy,” xvii overview, 1–6 Personal Computer AT, xix, xvii, xviii Personal Computer XT, xix, xvii, xviii Personal System/1&2 (PS/1&2) computers, xix, xx Personal Systems Group, xx ValuePoint family, xix xSeries servers, xx pels (picture elements), 76, 77 Pentium III/Xeon Intel Microprocessor, 53, 55, 57 II/Xeon Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 Pro Intel Microprocessor, 53, 54 performance of computer and fixed disks, 68–69

402


Peripheral Component Interconnect. See PCI Personal Computer AT, xix, xvii, xviii Personal Computer family. See PC (Personal Computer) family Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA), 72, 74–75 personal computers. See PCs PFA (Predictive Failure Analysis), 96, 111 phosphor persistence, 81 pitch, 145, 148 picture elements (pels or pixels), 76, 77 Plug and Play, 147, 247 point-to-point communications, 170 portability of Windows NT, 253 Portable Drive Bay 2000, 23–24, 180–182 ports, 85–87 defined, 85–86 Direct Memory Access (DMA) techniques, 86 P1394 FixedWire, 86, 87 parallel ports, 86 serial ports, 86, 166–167 Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) ports, 86 Universal Serial Bus (USB), 86–87 POSIX-compliant applications, 252 POST/BIOS Update security feature of Configuration/Setup Utility, 197 POST (Power-On Self-Test), 186–194 CoSession, 194 defined, 186 error resolution, 189–194 memory count, 186–188 OAPlus/DOS and OAPlus/WIN, 193–194 password feature, 188, 189 program, passing control to, 188–189, 190 stuck key error simulation, 189–192 system configuration, 188 power management features of displays, 146–147 Power Management Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 197–198 power-on password of Configuration/Setup Utility, 197 Power-On Self-Test. See POST Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA), 96, 111 prewritten application programs, 213–224

all-in-one products, 219–220 Big Five functions, 213–221 business graphics and multimedia, 217–218 communications, 218–219 database management, 215–217 data transfer between, 214, 219 fields of database, 216 files, 216 groupware, 220 integrated applications, 214, 219–220 Lotus Notes, 220 Lotus SmartSuite, 220 multimedia, 217–218 records of database, 216 series approach, 219 spreadsheets, 215 user interface consistency, 213–214, 219 vertical market applications, 221 word processing, 214–215 price/performance servers, 93 printers, 152–158 electrophotographic (EP) process, 154 full-color printer, 157 InfoPrint 21, 153, 155–156 InfoPrint 32, 153, 156 InfoPrint 40, 153, 156–157 InfoPrint Color 8 Printer, 157–158 large workgroups printer, 156 Network Printer 12, 153, 154–155 small to medium-sized workgroups printer, 155, 157 tabletop letter-quality printer, 154 proactive environmental monitoring, 96, 102 PROCOMM, 263 Product Data Menu option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196 Professional Workstation (PWS). See IntelliStation family Program-List Area of DOS Shell, 236, 237 programs. See application programs; software compatibility; software use program scheduler of DOS, 241 program switching, 227–230 Protected mode of DOS, 238 of operating systems, 233, 241, 242 protection, enterprise storage solutions, 108

Index

P Series (professional) monitors, 149–150 PWS (Professional Workstation). See IntelliStation family Q Quadro Graphics Processing Unit (GPU), 84 R RACF (Remote Access Control Facilities), 107 rack-optimized servers, 94–95 radio-frequency ID (RFID) tag, 22 RAID 1-Enhanced (1E), 108–109 5-Enhanced (5E), 109 Manager, 101 RAMBoost utility of DOS, 240–241 Rambus DRAM (RDRAM) memory, 57–58, 61, 161 RAMDrive program of DOS, 240 Random Access Memory (RAM). See memory Rapid Access keyboard, 176–177, 178 Rapid Resume, 7, 15 RDRAM (Rambus DRAM) memory, 57–58, 61, 161 Read Only Memory (ROM), 63, 202 read/write head, fixed disks, 68 Real mode of Disk Operating System (DOS), 235, 240 of operating systems, 232–233 of Windows, 244 records of database, 216 Red Hat Linux, 256 Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC), 51–53 Reference Diskette, 65, 195 refresh rate of graphics, 81 registers, 50 reliability enterprise storage solutions, 111–112 X-architecture and, 102 Remote Access Control Facilities (RACF), 107 Remote Connect...”Call Home,” 113 remote I/O of X-architecture, 105–106 removable disk storage (diskettes), 64–68 1.44 MB diskettes, 66 3.5-inch diskettes, 64–66

403

4.0 MB diskettes, 66 5.25-inch diskettes, 64, 65 720 KB diskettes, 65–66 formatting diskettes, 65, 66 Giant MagnetoResistive (GMR) head technology, 67 media sense, 66 Microdrive, 66–68 Reference Diskette, 65, 195 super drives, 66 write protect switch, 64–65 Zip drives, 66 Reserved Area of DOS memory, 238, 239, 240 resolution of displays, 77–80, 145–146, 148 Retainagroup Ltd., 16 RFID (radio-frequency ID) tag, 22 RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing), 51–53 ROM (Read Only Memory), 63, 202 S SAA (Systems Application Architecture) and operating systems, 235, 242 SANs (Storage Area Networks), 109–110, 291–294 scalability enterprise storage solutions, 106–107 X-architecture and, 103–106 xSeries and Netfinity, 92 Scheduler feature of Aptiva, 6–7 of Configuration/Setup Utility, 198 ScrollPoint Mouse, 178–179 SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) adapters, 160 fixed disks, 69–71 ports, 86 SDLC (Synchronous Data link Control), 168 SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), 9, 10, 11, 61–62, 160–161 security enterprise storage solutions, 107 NetVista family, 24 Personal Computer (PC) family, 16–17 Select-A-Keyboard, 88 Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.), 17, 160 serial ports (async adapters), 86, 166–167

404


series approach to applications, 219 ServerGuide, 96, 98–99 server systems. See xSeries and Netfinity service processors (Advanced System Management, ASM), 60–61, 96, 97–98, 100 Setup Utility of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196–197 SGRAM (Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory), 9, 10 shades of gray, 78 sharing applications from Local Area Networks (LANs), 270–271 applications from operating systems, 230–232 data from Local Area Networks (LANs), 268–270 data from operating systems, 230–232 equipment from communications, 259 equipment sharing from Local Area Networks (LANs), 271 single application operating systems, 226 “single resource,” 59 small business computers. See Aptiva family Small Computer System Interface. See SCSI small-sized workgroups printer, 155, 157 S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology), 17, 160 SMP (Symmetric MultiProcessing) microprocessors, 50–51, 58–60 operating systems support, 249, 250, 254 SNBU (Switched Network Backup Utility), 170 software compatibility, 207–211. See also application programs; operating systems; software use Application Program Interface (API) consistency for, 208–211 application program layer and, 207–208 Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) layer and, 202, 208, 209 defined, 207–208 hardware interfaces and, 209–211 incompatibility testing, 211 operating system layer and, 208, 209 “PC compatibility,” 207–208 testing, 211 Software Rejuvenation, 101, 111–112 software use, 185–207. See also application

programs; Configuration/Setup Utility; POST (Power-On SelfTest); software compatibility advanced BIOS, 202 application program layer, 198, 199–200 Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) layer, 198, 201–202, 208, 209 chair comfort, 206 compatibility BIOS, 202 computer elements diagram, 187 example of computer session, 203–206 glare reduction, 206–207 keyboard comfort, 206 lighting comfort, 206–207 model, 198–206 monitor comfort, 206–207 operating system layer, 198, 200–201 Read Only Memory (ROM), 63, 202 systems management strategy, 98–102 workspace setup, 206–207 source-route bridging, 278 spreadsheets, 215 S Series Aptiva, 2, 11–12 NetVista, legacy free, 26–28 Stacker Compression of DOS, 241 Standard edition of Windows 2000, 248–249 keyboard, 177, 178 mode of Windows, 244 Standby mode of Configuration/Setup Utility, 197–198 of Personal Computers (PC) family, 7, 15 start bit, 166, 167 starting Configuration/Setup Utility, 194–195 tasks in DOS, 235–237 Windows, 245–246, 247, 248 Start Options Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 197 Start Up Support, 112–113 stop bit, 167 Storage Area Networks (SANs), 109–110, 291–294 stuck key error simulation, POST, 189–192 Summit technology, 102, 103–106 Sun Microsystems, 254, 255 super drives, 66 Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA), 78, 79–80 Suspend/Resume mode, 7, 15

Index

SVGA (Super Video Graphics Array), 78, 79–80 Swedish Board for Technical Accreditation (SWEDAC) MRP-II guidelines, 147 Swedish Confederation of Professional Employees Environmental Label standards (TCO-99), 149–150 Swedish National Board for Industrial and Technical Development (NUTEK) requirements, 147, 149, 150, 151 switched Ethernet and token-ring networks, 285–286 Switched Network Backup Utility (SNBU), 170 switched telephone lines, 169, 170 switching between windows, 246 Symmetric MultiProcessing. See SMP symmetric (tightly coupled) processing, 50–51 synchronous adapters, 167–168 Synchronous Data link Control (SDLC), 168 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM), 9, 10, 11, 61–62, 160–161 Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory (SGRAM), 9, 10 System/3X computers and terminal emulation, 265, 266 System Clock, 196 system configuration with POST, 188 system management tools, microprocessors, 60 Systems Application Architecture (SAA) and operating systems, 235, 242 System Security Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196–197 systems management strategy, 95–102. See also X-architecture; xSeries and Netfinity Advanced Interconnect Cable Kit, 97–98 Advanced System Management, 60–61, 96, 97–98, 100 ASM Token-Ring Option, 98 automatic server restart, 96 Capacity Manager, 100 Cluster Systems Management, 100 defined, 95–96 Error Checking and Correcting (ECC), 96 hardware, 96–98

405

human-centric designs, 97 installation, 98–102 integration, 95–96 LANClient Control Manager (LCCM), 96, 98, 99 Light-Path Diagnostics, 96, 97 Netfinity Availability Extensions, 100 Netfinity Director, 96, 99–102 Netfinity Fibre Channel RAID Manager, 101 Netfinity Manager, 96 Netfinity SP Switch Administration, 101 Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA), 96, 111 proactive environmental monitoring, 96, 102 RAID Manager, 101 ServerGuide, 96, 98–99 software, 98–102 Software Rejuvenation, 101, 111–112 TechConnect, 98–99 UM Services, 101–102 Universal Manageability (UM) initiative, 95, 99 System Summary Menu Option of Configuration/Setup Utility, 195 SystemXtra, 32 T T54/56 TFT Color Monitor, 152 T54H TFT Color Monitor, 152 T74 TFT Color Monitor, 151–152 T86 TFT Color Monitor, 150–151 tabletop letter-quality printer, 154 tape drives, 160, 163 taskbar of Windows 95, 246 task initiation in DOS, 235–237 TCO-99 (Swedish Confederation of Professional Employees Environmental Label standards), 149–150 TCPA (Trusted Computing Platform Alliance), 107 TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol), 242 TechConnect, 98–99 technical support, enterprise storage solutions, 112–113 technology-enabled service and support, X-architecture, 103 terminal emulation, 259–267. See also communications

406


3270 emulation, 267, 285 5250 workstation emulation, 265–266 asynchronous terminal emulation, 261–265 benefits of, 260–261 defined, 259–260 Disk Operating System (DOS) and, 263, 266 electronic mail services from, 264 emulation adapters, 173, 174 host computer communication from, 260–261 IBM AS/400 computers and, 265–266 IBM System/3X computers and, 265, 266 information retrieval services from, 263–264 Internet access from, 264–265 Operating System/2 (OS/2) Warp and, 263, 266 PROCOMM, 263 Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs in DOS, 239–240 testing software compatibility, 211 TFT (Thin-Film Transistor) technology, 32, 82–83, 150 thick cable, 170 thin cable, 170 Thin Client family, 5–6 Thin Client Series (zero footprint), NetVista, 28–29 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology, 32, 82–83, 150 ThinkLight, 31 ThinkPad family, 29–45, 362. See also PCs (personal computers); ThinkPad options 240X systems, 42–43 570E systems, 41–42 Access ThinkPad portal, 30 comfort features, 31–32 communications bay, 31 cover, easy opening, 32 displays, 32 docking (common) solutions, 31 High-Performance Addressing (HPA), 32 history of, xix, xx i Series (individual optimized notebooks), 29, 38–41 keyboards, 31, 176–178 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) technology, 32, 82

overview, 5 A Series (alternative to desktop computer), 29, 33–35 SystemXtra, 32 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) technology, 32, 82–83 ThinkLight, 31 ThinkPad button, 30 titanium composite covers, 30 TrackPoint, 31–32 T Series (thin-and-light notebooks), 29, 35–37 Ultrabay 2000, 30–31 UltraPort connector, 31 volume control, 31 wireless communications, 31 WorkPad, 5, 43–45 ThinkPad options, 173–182 AutoScroll feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 178 CyberJump feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 DataZoom feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 Enhanced Keyboard, 177 HyperJump feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 keyboards, 176–178 PCI Audio Adapter, 175 PCMCIA 16-bit Audio Adapter, 176 Portable Drive Bay 2000, 180–182 Rapid Access keyboard, 176–177, 178 ScrollPoint Mouse, 178–179 Standard keyboard, 177, 178 TrackPoint II keyboard, 177, 178 UltraPort Camera, 174–175 USB Mobile Mouse, 179 Zip 250 MB Ultrabay 2000 Drive, 181–182 Zoom feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 tightly coupled (symmetric) processing, 50–51 time slicing, 230 titanium composite covers of ThinkPad, 30 token-ring networks, 170–173, 274–279, 285–286 touch-enabled monitors, 148–149 TrackPoint, 31–32 TrackPoint II keyboard, 177, 178 tracks of fixed disks, 68

Index

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), 242 trilinear MIP mapping, 85 true-color images, 80 Trusted Computing Platform Alliance (TCPA), 107 T Series (thin-and-light ThinkPad notebooks), 29, 35–37 TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs in DOS, 239–240 tuning networks, 290 U UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) traffic, 288 Ultrabay 2000, 30–31 UltraPort Camera, 174–175 UltraPort connector, 31 UM Services, 101–102 UM (Universal Manageability) initiative, 95, 99 Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS), 184 Universal Manageability (UM) initiative, 95, 99 Universal Serial Bus (USB), 86–87 Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) traffic, 288 Upper Memory Blocks of DOS, 238, 240 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Source), 184 USB Mobile Mouse, 179 USB (Universal Serial Bus), 86–87 user interface consistency of applications, 213–214, 219 using personal computers. See software use V ValuePoint family, xix value servers, 93–94 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic, 288 VBR (Variable Bit Rate) traffic, 288 VDM (Virtual DOS Machine), 251–252 vertical market applications, 221 VESA (Video Equipment Standards Association) bus, 72 VGA (Video Graphics Array), 78–80 Video Equipment Standards Association (VESA) bus, 72 Video Graphics Array (VGA), 78–80 video memory (frame buffer), 76, 77, 83–85 Video Setup of Configuration/Setup Utility, 196 Virtual 8086 mode, 233–234, 241, 242, 245

407

Virtual DOS Machine (VDM), 251–252 Vital Product Data (VPD), 16 VoiceType technology and OS/2 Warp, 249 volume control of ThinkPad, 31 VPD (Vital Product Data), 16 W Wake On LAN (WOL), 17, 170 Wake Up on Ring, 6–7, 198 Wearable PC, 3 Web site for eserver xSeries and Personal Computers (PCs), xvi, 6 “whole computer,” 59 Wildcat 4110/4210 graphics solutions (Intense3D), 84–85 Windows 95, 241, 245–247, 256, 257 98, 247–248, 256, 257 2000, 248–249, 256 applications, 222 Disk Operating System (DOS) and, 244–245, 246, 251–252 Enhanced mode, Disk Operating System (DOS), 244–245 NT Server, 254 NT Workstation, 241, 242, 250–254, 256–257 Real mode, Disk Operating System (DOS), 244 Standard mode, Disk Operating System (DOS), 244 Windows on Win32 (WOW), 252 wireless communications of ThinkPad, 31 wizards (help guides) of Windows, 247 WOL (Wake On LAN), 17, 170 word processing, 214–215 words, 61 WorkPad, 5, 43–45 workspace setup, 206–207 WOW (Windows on Win32), 252 write protect switch of diskettes, 64–65 X X-architecture, 102–113. See also enterprise storage solutions; systems management strategy; xSeries and Netfinity availability, 102 channel architecture, 105 Chipkill memory protection, 104 core logic, 102, 103–106

408


InfiniBand, 105 Intel processor-based servers and, 102 I/O capacity, 104–105 nodes, 103–104 PCI-X, 104–105 Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI), 104 reliability, 102 remote I/O, 105–106 scalability, 103–106 Summit technology, 102, 103–106 technology-enabled service and support, 103 XGA (eXtended Graphics Array), 79, 80, 81 XMS (eXtended Memory Specification), 238, 240 xSeries 100, 94, 140–142 200, 94, 138–140 300, 94, 136–138 X Series (all-in-one), NetVista, 24–26 xSeries and Netfinity, 90–142. See also enterprise storage solutions; systems management strategy; X-architecture history of, xx mission-critical servers, 92–93 Netfinity 3000, 94, 134–136

Netfinity 3500, 132–134 Netfinity 3500 M10, 94 Netfinity 4000R, 94, 130–132 Netfinity 4500R, 93, 129–130 Netfinity 5000, 93, 127–128 Netfinity 5100, 93, 125–126 Netfinity 5600, 93, 118–119 Netfinity 6000R, 93, 123–124 Netfinity 7100, 93, 119–123 Netfinity 7600, 92, 115–118 Netfinity 8500R, 92, 95, 114–115 overview, 3, 4, 90–92 price/performance servers, 93 rack-optimized servers, 94–95 scalability, 92 value servers, 93–94 xSeries 100, 94, 140–142 xSeries 200, 94, 138–140 xSeries 300, 94, 136–138 Z zero footprint (Thin Client Series), NetVista, 28–29 Zip 250 MB Ultrabay 2000 Drive, 181–182 Zip drives, 66 Zoom feature of ScrollPoint Mouse, 179 Z Pro systems, IntelliStation family, 45–47

Reader Feedback Sheet

Your comments and suggestions are very important in shaping future publications. Please email us at [email protected] or photocopy this page, jot down your thoughts, and fax it to (850) 934-9981 or mail it to: Maximum Press Attn: Jim Hoskins 605 Silverthorn Road Gulf Breeze, FL 32561

101 Ways to Promote Your Web Site Second Edition by Susan Sweeney, C.A. 552 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-45-X

Marketing With E-Mail Second Edition by Shannon Kinnard 352 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-51-4

Business-to-Business Internet Marketing, Third Edition by Barry Silverstein 528 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-50-6

Marketing on the Internet, Fifth Edition by Jan Zimmerman 512 pages $34.95 ISBN: 1-885068-49-2

Internet Marketing for Information Technology Companies by Barry Silverstein 464 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-46-8

Internet Marketing for Your Tourism Business by Susan Sweeney, C.A. 592 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-47-6

Building Intranets with Lotus Notes & Domino, 5.0, Third Edition by Steve Krantz 320 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-41-7

Internet Marketing for Less Than $500/Year by Marcia Yudkin 334 pages $29.95 ISBN: 1-885068-52-2

To purchase a Maximum Press book, visit your local bookstore or call 1-800-989-6733 (US) or 1-850-934-4583 (International) online ordering available at www.maxpress.com

Exploring IBM RS/6000 Computers, Tenth Edition by Jim Hoskins and Doug Davies 440 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-42-5

Exploring IBM ~ iSeries and AS/400 Computers, Tenth Edition by Jim Hoskins and Roger Dimmick 560 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-43-3

Exploring IBM S/390 Computers, Sixth Edition by Jim Hoskins and George Coleman 472 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-30-1

Exploring IBM Network Stations by Eddie Ho, Dana Lloyd, and Stephanos Heracleous 223 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-32-8

Exploring IBM ~ xSeries and PCs, Eleventh Edition by Jim Hoskins and Bill Wilson 384 pages $39.95 ISBN: 1-885068-39-5

Exploring IBM Technology, Products & Services, Fourth Edition edited by Jim Hoskins 256 pages $54.95 ISBN: 1-885068-62-X

To purchase a Maximum Press book, visit your local bookstore or call 1-800-989-6733 (US/Canada) or 1-850-934-4583 (International) online ordering available at www.maxpress.com

Exploring IBM Eserver Xseries and PCs

Exploring IBM eServer iSeries

Exploring IBM eserver iSeries

Exploring IBM Server & Storage Technology: A Laymen's Guide to the IBM eServer and TotalStorage Families (Exploring IBM series)

Exploring IBM eServer pSeries: The Instant Insider's Guide to IBM's Family of UNIX Servers, 12th Edition (Exploring IBM series)

Exploring IBM SOA Technology & Practice

Linux System Administration and Backup Tools for IBM Elogo Server Xseries and Netfinity

Upgrading and Repairing PCs

Upgrading and repairing PCs

Upgrading and repairing PCs

PCs Aufrüsten

PCs aufrusten

Building on Your Aix Investment: Moving Foreword With IBM Eserver pSeries in an on Demand World

PCs For Dummies

Upgrading PCs Illustrated

PCs For Dummies

Tablet PCs for Dummies

PCs: the missing manual

Tablet PCs for Dummies

PCs: The Missing Manual

PCs For Dummies

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (6th edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (19th Edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (19th Edition)

PCs For Dummies, 10th Edition (Pcs for Dummies)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs, 15th Anniversary Edition

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (15th Edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs, w. CD-ROM

IBM Cognos TM1 Cookbook

Начинающему пользователю IBM PC

Exploring IBM Eserver Xseries and PCs

Exploring IBM eServer iSeries

Exploring IBM eserver iSeries

Exploring IBM Server & Storage Technology: A Laymen's Guide to the IBM eServer and TotalStorage Families (Exploring IBM series)

Exploring IBM eServer pSeries: The Instant Insider's Guide to IBM's Family of UNIX Servers, 12th Edition (Exploring IBM series)

Exploring IBM SOA Technology & Practice

Linux System Administration and Backup Tools for IBM Elogo Server Xseries and Netfinity

Upgrading and Repairing PCs

Upgrading and repairing PCs

Upgrading and repairing PCs

PCs Aufrüsten

PCs aufrusten

Building on Your Aix Investment: Moving Foreword With IBM Eserver pSeries in an on Demand World

PCs For Dummies

Upgrading PCs Illustrated

PCs For Dummies

Tablet PCs for Dummies

PCs: the missing manual

Tablet PCs for Dummies

PCs: The Missing Manual

PCs For Dummies

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (6th edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (19th Edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (19th Edition)

PCs For Dummies, 10th Edition (Pcs for Dummies)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs, 15th Anniversary Edition

Upgrading and Repairing PCs (15th Edition)

Upgrading and Repairing PCs, w. CD-ROM

IBM Cognos TM1 Cookbook

Начинающему пользователю IBM PC

Recommend Documents